Home

ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual

1. Eng LEC 1 Eng LEC 2 Eng LEC 3 Eng LEC 4 Eng LEC 5 Eng LEC 6 Eng LEC 7 Eng LEC 8 Eng LEC 9 Figure 3 10 LE ARP Query Answered by One DLE Peer Server and Re distributed by Another 3 14 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring an Emulated LAN When the third DLE peer server receives the LE ARP response it passes it directly to LEC 9 which sent the original query The third DLE peer server also caches the registration infor mation for LEC 1 so that other local LECs do not have to go through the entire process again However this cache ages out over time LEC 9 can now open a connection to LEC 1 and send its IP ARP response as shown in Figure 3 11 tK Eng Eng LES BUS 1 LES BUS 2 y Eng LEC 1 Eng LEC 2 Eng LEC 3 Eng LEC 4 Eng LEC 5 Eng LEC 6 Eng LEC 7 Eng LEC8 Eng LEC 9 Figure 3 11 LE ARP Response Delivered and LEC 9 Contacts LEC 1 3 4 2 2 Advantages of DLE As mentioned earlier using DLE provides solutions to the problems of using a single server 3 4 2 2 1 Load Sharing DLE peer servers distribute the circuit and processing load The number of LANE LECs is no longer limited by the number of circuits one LES BUS platform can maintain since many platforms can support a single ELAN Also more VCs are available for use
2. Parameter Description iport The incoming port number ivpi The incoming virtual path number ivci The incoming virtual channel number oport The outgoing port number ovpi The outgoing virtual path number ovci The outgoing virtual channel number upc index The integer index that refers to a specific UPC traffic contract If no index is specified then no traffic policing will take place on this VCI It is assigned a UPC index of 0 and all traffic on this VCI is treated as UBR traffic This is the default name The name you want to assign to this channel to identify it uniquely It is useful for billing purposes so you can identify which channels are being used by which customers Can be up to 32 ASCII characters long inctype The channel connection type for the incoming channel For billing purposes it denotes on which switch this channel is arriving Orig originating means that the ingress endpoint of the channel is connected to the source node which is outside the network tran tran sit means that the ingress endpoint of the channel is connected to a node within the net work and term terminating means that the ingress endpoint of the channel is connected to the destination node which is outside the network outctype The channel connection type for the outgoing channel For billing purposes it denotes on which switch this channel is leaving Orig originating means that the egress endpoint of
3. Figure 1 14 PVPs Looped through Port 1A2 and Output on Port 1A1 to WAN As shown in the example in Figure 1 14 the traffic that is going out originating path 0 on port 1A2 gets looped so that it is output to the WAN on through path 2 on shaping port 1A1 Simi larly the traffic that is going out originating path 1 on port 1A2 gets looped so that it is output to the WAN on through path 3 on shaping port 1A1 1 24 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring PVCs Switch B Switch A Pd I M Late E aero A shaping port WAN PVP Mesh a vp2 a qA e y x 5 F a S lt S vPO c ee n CHRON o VP l 3 J a Switch C et VP 1 f Aw PA UP EIL looping port orig and term paths VP 0 and VP 1 Figure 1 15 PVPs Coming in Port 1A1 from WAN and Looped through Port 1A2 Then as shown in the example in Figure 1 15 the traffic that is coming in through path 2 on port 1A1 from the WAN gets looped back to terminating path 0 on on port 1A2 Similarly the traffic that is coming in through path 3 on port 1A1 from the WAN gets looped back to termi nating path 1 on port 1A2 In your own network you will repeat this process on these same two ports for as many paths as you want to shape Before you configure the paths you should Eu configure the network module that will contain the looping port to maximize the numb
4. suse 1 11 virtual channel identifier VCI 1 1 virtual path i err ERE 1 3 displaying advanced information 1 8 virtual path identifier VPI 1 1 virtual path terminator displaying advanced information 1 10 virtual path terminators VPTs 1 6 VP scope UNI 2 6 eee eee eee eee 7 7 Index 6 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual
5. B 3 CAS connections ss B 2 configuration examples B 4 displaying information B 14 idle pattern configuration example naen pete eea agai B 6 integration period configuration example ee e Ee B 7 mask patterns configuration example ssss B 6 idle detection using mask patterns B 3 idle detection using pattern Matching eee ea reU RES B 3 Idle detection using signalling bits B 2 idle timeslot 00 004 B 2 ILMI Interim Local Management Interface 2 eee eee eee eee 2 4 InARP reply tack RR es 2 8 InARPrequest eeeeeeeeeee 2 8 ingress rate enforcement configuring esses D 10 initialization process LEC 4 4 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual integration period 0 B 2 Interim Local Management Interface EMI i oett e te 2 4 inverse ARP InARP 2 8 IP filtermg rere 8 11 authorized IP address table 8 11 creating an authorized address eee hohe ues 8 11 deleting an authorized address 0 000000 8 11 displaying authorized addresses 8 11 information about the last packet dropped 0 8 12 statistisen bem sordanins 8 12 IP filtering flags 0000 8 11 L LAN Emulation Client LEC 3 3 LAN emulation client LEC connection process 4 5 initialization process 4 4
6. Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI 7 At this point S3 no longer has any links attached to its FI PNNI node so it does not need to be a gateway switch anymore Modify the default protocol of S3 to pnni using the following AMI command conf atmroute domain modify domain ID pnni Reboot switch S3 8 Since S1 is the last switch in the network to have its default protocol modified it can be changed directly to a PNNI switch rather than to a gateway switch first and then to a PNNI switch So modify the default protocol of 1 to pnni using the fol lowing AMI command conf atmroute domain modify domain ID gt pnni Reboot switch S1 Now all of the links have been switched over to PNNI 9 Convert both 2 and S4 to PNNI by modifying the default protocol of both S2 and S4 to pnni using the following AMI command conf atmroute domain modify domain ID pnni ule wlio Reboot switches S2 and S4 The final state of the network upon completion of the 3 2 conversion is shown in Figure C 8 z S Sa vF Z PNNI node Z3 PNNI link S2 S3 Fore Area A5 S1 Fore Level L5 S4 S5 Figure C 8 A Completely Converted PNNI Network ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual C 9 Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI C 3 Migration of a Hierarchical FT PNNI Network This section discusses the migration of a hierarchical FI PNNI network to a FORE hierarchical PNNI network It is assumed
7. 0 0 00 cece eee 3 10 3 4 1 2 Limitations of a Single Server 2020005 3 11 3 4 2 Distributed LAN Emulation Model 002000 cee eee 3 12 3424 Usno DLE lur LEE Nea el ERES 3 13 3 4 2 2 Advantages of DLE liliis 3 15 3 4 2 2 1 Load Sharing 0 00 c eee eee eee 3 15 3 4 2 2 2 Improved Performance for Remote LECs 3 15 3 4 2 2 3 Fault Tolerance 2020055 3 15 3 4 2 2 3 1 Single Server ELAN 3 16 3 4 2 2 3 2 DLE ELEAN y nir E 3 18 3 5 ELAN Access Control 0 0 0 aaae 3 21 3 6 Configuring an ELAN 0 0 cena 3 22 3 6 1 Configuring an LECS Configuration Database File 3 23 3 6 1 1 Before You Begin 0 ce ee 3 23 3 6 1 2 LECS Configuration File Syntax 0000 3 24 3 6 1 8 Defining an ELAN 0 cee eee 3 30 3 6 1 4 Defining a Client liliis 3 31 3 6 1 5 LECS Control Parameters 000 cece eee 3 32 3 6 1 6 LECS MPOA Parameters 000 cee eee eee 3 33 3 6 2 Sample LECS Configuration File 02000000 eeeaee 3 35 3 6 3 Starting the LAN Emulation Services 000000 00 3 38 3 6 1 Starting the LECS liliis 3 38 3 6 3 2 Starting the DLE LES BUS Peer Servers 3 40 3 6 4 Starting the LEC s and Joining an ELAN 055 3 43 3 7 Upgrading an ELAN to Use DLE lsssesseeleeel 3 45 3 7
8. destvpi lt vpi gt The virtual path number on the destination switch fabric for this PNNI SPVC When using this option both the destvpi and destvci must be specified If this option is not used the destination switch uses any available value destvci vci The virtual channel number on the destination switch fabric for this PNNI SPVC When using this option both the destvpi and destvci must be specified If this option is not used the destination switch uses any available value reroute enable disable enable indicates that this SPVC will be examined periodically to see if it is using a sub optimal route If it is it will be rerouted according to the parameters in conf spvx spvcc pnni parameters reroute disable indicates that this SPVC will not be examined periodically to see if it is using a sub optimal route The default state for PNNI SPVCs is disabled fupc index The forward going from the local switch fabric to the remote switch fabric UPC contract index assigned to this SPVC To find the index you want use the conf upc show com mand If no index is specified the default index of 0 UBR best effort is used bupc index The backward going from the remote switch fabric to the local switch fabric UPC con tract index assigned to this SPVC To find the index you want use the conf upc show command If no index is specified the default index of 0 UBR best effort is used
9. 14 336 7 168 y High Priority Buffer CLPOPPD fixed 87 5 14 336 CLP1EPD 50 7 168 16 384 cells i CLPOPPD fixed 87 596 CLP1EPD 5096 Y Low Priority Buffer Figure D 3 Calculated CLP1EPD ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring FramePlus Modules D 2 2 3 Configuring the CLPOEPD Threshold Now calculate the CLPOEPD threshold for each buffer You have four choices 50 62 75 or 87 percent For example you could set the threshold to 50 percent of the remaining buffer size of each buffer which is 7 168 as shown by the arrow in Figure D 4 Then add the base of 7 168 back in 7 168 cells 0 5 3 584 cells 7 168 cells 10 752 cells 16 384 cells 16 384 cells 14 336 CLPOPPD fixed 87 5 14 336 CLPOPPD fixed 87 596 10 752 CLPOEPD 50 10 752 CLPOEPD 50 7 168 CLP1EPD 50 7 168 CLP1EPD 50 High Priority Buffer Low Priority Buffer ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Figure D 4 Calculated CLPOEPD T D 3 n 77 I 2 2 Oo fe Q 3 Q Configuring FramePlus Modules D 2 2 4 Configuring the CLP1PPD Threshold Finally calculate the CLP1PPD threshold for each buffer You have four choices 50 62 75 or 87 percent For example you could set it to 50 percent of the remaining buffer size which is 3 584 as shown by the ar
10. e P TE zz Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 1 Introduction This chapter describes how to design configure and maintain an Emulated LAN ELAN over an ATM network An ELAN provides communication of user data frames among all members of the ELAN similar to a physical LAN One or more ELANs may run simulta neously and independently on the same ATM network Each ELAN is composed of a set of LAN Emulation Clients LECs a LAN Emulation Config uration Server LECS and at least one LAN Emulation Server LES and Broadcast and Unknown Server BUS pair also referred to as colocated BUS or an intelligent BUS In the current software release the LECS may reside either in a ForeRunner ASX 200WG ASX 200BX ASX 1000 ASX 4000 LE 25 LE 155 TNX 210 or TNX 1100 switch or in a UNIX workstation running Solaris 2 5 2 5 1 or 2 6 The LES BUS pair may reside either in a PowerHub 7000 PowerHub 8000 an ASN 9000 an ASX 200WG ASX 200BX ASX 1000 ASX 4000 LE 25 LE 155 TNX 210 or TNX 1100 switch or in a UNIX workstation running Solaris 2 5 2 5 1 or 2 6 An additional software feature is Distributed LAN Emulation DLE which provides load sharing and fault tolerance to the ELAN The current software release supports the emulation of both Ethernet IEEE 802 3 and Token Ring ELANs 3 1 1 Ethernet ELANs The current software release supports emulation of Ethernet IEEE 802 3 ELANs In the cur rent release each LEC resides on an ATM host s
11. 3 52 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 7 10 Update the LECS CFG File After you add the last DLE peer go back and delete the old remaining failover ELAN informa tion from the LECS CFG file Transfer the file to a workstation for editing myswitch operation gt flash put lecs cfg 169 144 85 195 tftpboot lecs cfg Transferred 2323 bytes of fs lecs cfg On that workstation use a text editor to delete all lines referring to any of the n failover ELANS in this case Mktg 0 and Mktg 1 If the LES address portion of your LECS CFG file looked like this before editing Match Ordering Mktg Mktg 0 Mktg 1 Mktg Address c5000580ffel000000f21c126b0020481c126b66 Mktg Accept XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Mktg 0 Address c5000580ffel000000f21c126b0020481c126b66 Mktg 0 Accept XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Mktg 1 Address 47000580 f6e1000000 21a3906e0020481a390e00 Mktg 1 Accept XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX It will look like this after editing Match Ordering Mktg Mktg Address c5000580 61000000 21c12650020481c126066 Mktg Accept XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX moO 3S cz gt DG os reo Bo z5 3 7 11 Transfer the Final LECS CFG File Transfer the final LECS CFG file back to the switch that is running the LECS myswitch operation flash gt get 169 144 85 195 tftpboot lecs cfg lecs cfg ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual
12. To create a new Classical IP PVC ARP entry log in to AMI All data is sent LLC SNAP encap sulated Enter the following parameters configuration atmarp newclassicalip host vpi vci lt interface gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description host The host IP address of the remote IP endstation vpi The virtual path number of the Classical IP PVC vci The virtual channel number of the Classical IP PVC interface The Classical IP interface to be used for this connection qaa0 qaal qaa2 or qaa3 The default is qaa0 Once the parameters are entered the Classical IP PVC ARP entry is created instantly by the SCP At the same time a command is entered automatically into the current CDB which cre ates this ATM ARP entry each time that the SCP is restarted 1 28 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring PVCs 1 5 2 4 Listing ATM ARP Entries To verify that the ARP entries exist correctly for the outgoing PVC connection from the SCP to the host display the ATM ARP cache by logging in to AMI and entering the following param eters configuration atmarp show Paddress If VPI VCI AAL Type Direction 198 29 22 9 asx0 0 63 aal5 foreIpSVC pending 198 29 22 15 asx0 0 231 aal5 forelpSVC pending 198 29 22 37 asx0 0 65 aal34 foreIpSVC pending Q Paddress LE NSAP Address i 1988 29 117 3 qaa0 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f 21b 0138 002048102754 00 2 198 29 17 10 qaa0
13. a function performed by a protocol module in which empty cells known as unassigned cells are added to the output stream This is because there always must be a fixed number of cells in the output direction when there are not enough cells to transmit unassigned cells are added to the output data stream Cell Relay Service CRS a carrier service which supports the receipt and transmission of ATM cells between end users in compliance with ATM standards and implementation specifications Cell Transfer Delay the transit delay of an ATM cell successfully passed between two desig nated boundaries See CTD Cell Transfer Delay CTD This is defined as the elapsed time between a cell exit event at the measurement point 1 e g at the source UNI and the corresponding cell entry event at the measurement point 2 e g the destination UNI for a particular connection The cell transfer delay between two measurement points is the sum of the total inter ATM node transmission delay and the total ATM node processing delay Channel A path or circuit along which information flows ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary 7 Glossary Channel Associated Signaling CAS a form of circuit state signaling in which the circuit state is indicated by one or more bits of signaling status sent repetitively and associated with that specific circuit Channel Bank A device that multiplexes many slow speed voice or data conversations onto h
14. be bits cir kbps ar kbps frsize lt bytes gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description index The integer index that refers to this specific traffic contract Valid index numbers are from 0 to 32 767 UPC One of the types of traffic contracts shown above The parameters in these contracts are defined as follows ubr Indicates UBR traffic cbr Indicates CBR traffic cbr0 Indicates CBRO traffic vbr Indicates VBR traffic vbr0 Indicates VBRO traffic pcr Indicates the peak cell rate for cells with CLP 0 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 1 43 Configuring PVCs Parameter Description per01 Indicates the peak cell rate for all cells scrO Indicates the sustainable cell rate for cells with CLP 0 scr01 Indicates the sustainable cell rate for all cells mbs0 Indicates the maximum burst size for cells with CLP 0 mbs01 Indicates the maximum burst size for all cells tag tag means that non conforming CLP 0 cells are tagged Otherwise they are dropped The default is that they are dropped This option only applies to the PCRO parameter of the CBRO contract and to the SCRO and MBSO parameters of the VBRO contract abr Indicates ABR traffic Currently ABR UPC contracts are supported only on Series D network modules Indicates the minimum cell rate for all cells ABR connections
15. C3 7 12 gt D1 8 2 C3 D1 uU D1 8 2 gt C3 7 12 Figure 1 10 Virtual Channels are Unidirectional Before a virtual channel can be created the corresponding terminating and originating paths must exist For example before the channels shown on the switch fabric in Figure 1 11 can be created the terminating path C313 must exist 1 12 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring PVCs Switch or FORE Host B ATM Switch Switch or Term Orig Host C C3 3 45 gt A3 9 10 Zum Switch or C3 3 5O gt C2 3 98 Switch or most A C3 3 80 gt A1 7 88 Host D 313 123 gt A1 8 123 BELOW Switch or Host E Figure 1 11 Virtual Channels Created on Terminating Path C313 Oo fe 53 Z z E Q v lt o o Similarly before the virtual channels shown in Figure 1 12 can be created the originating path C212 must exist Switch or Host A FORE ATM Switch Switch or Host B Term Orig 2 7 120 gt C2 2 1202 a r Switch or C2 3 67 gt C2 2 37 pe Sehor Host C 3 11 50 gt C2 2 102 B1 2 99 gt C2 2 99 Switch or Host D Figure 1 12 Virtual Channels Created on Originating Path C212 Furthermore in these examples the terminating path C313 and originating path C212 must have enough bandwidth allocated to support the t
16. ELAN Eng ELAN Eng LES BUS 1 LES BUS 2 J Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 P d w ier x l Eng LEC 1 EngLEC 2 Eng LEC 3 Eng LEC 4 Eng LEC 5 Eng LEC 6 Eng LEC 7 Eng LEC 8 Eng LEC 9 Figure 3 15 Registrations on an ELAN with Multiple Servers LECs 1 4 and 7 are directed by their switches to the LECS The result is shown in Figure 3 16 The connection between the two servers carries E broadcasts and LE ARP traffic as described earlier 3 18 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring an Emulated LAN ELAN Eng LES BUS 1 gt TX LAZLX Eng LEC 1 EngLEC2 EngLEC 3 EngLEC4 Eng LEC 5 Eng LEC 6 Eng LEC 7 Eng LEC 8 Eng LEC 9 ELAN Eng LES BUS 2 Switch 2 Switch 3 Figure 3 16 ELAN with Multiple Servers in Operation This ELAN may experience significant performance improvements for the reasons described earlier Even if the actual performance is similar to using a single server in a particular net work a great advantage is gained through its fault tolerance if one of the servers fails as depicted in Figure 3 17 ELAN Eng LES BUS 2 COR ELLEN 7g e e X y os N
17. SVC management is performed via the ATM Forum UNI 3 0 Specifica tion which specifies Q 2931 Q 2931 is a broadband signalling protocol designed to establish connections dynamically at the User Network Interface UNI Q 2931 uses Service Specific Connection Oriented Protocol SSCOP as a reliable transport protocol and all signalling occurs over VPI 0 VCI 5 Q 2931 connections are bidirectional with the same VPI VCI pair used to transmit and receive Once a Classical IP connection has been established IP datagrams are encapsulated using IEEE 802 2 LLC SNAP and are segmented into ATM cells using ATM Adaptation Layer type 5 AAL5 Additionally the default Maximum Transmission Unit MTU is 9 180 bytes the SNAP header adds 8 more bytes with a maximum packet size of 65 535 bytes There is cur rently no support for IP broadcast datagrams or IP multicast datagrams in a Classical IP envi ronment ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 2 1 e E E Q c EJ Q Q 5 7 EJ t EJ Configuring Classical IP 2 1 1 Logical IP Subnets An important concept in Classical IP networks is that of a Logical IP Subnet LIS An LIS is a group of hosts configured as members of the same IP subnet that is they have the same IP network and subnetwork numbers In this sense one LIS can be equated to one legacy LAN It is possible to maintain several overlaid LISs on the same physical ATM network Therefore in a Classical IP ATM
18. llle C 9 Hierarchical FT PNNI Network with 3 Peer Groups and a Contiguous Backbone 0000 c cece eee C 10 C 1 and A 1 as Gateway Switches 0005 C 12 Peer Group Severed from the Rest of the FT PNNI Area C 13 Peer Group C before the Conversion to PNNI C 14 C 1 and C 2 Not Part of Peer Group C 04 C 16 A Completely Converted PNNI Network C 18 C 6 as a Galeway ent aiia ais ciue Reeders Pes rds C 20 Peer Group C Fully Migrated to PNNI 005 C 22 Peer Group B Disconnected from Peer GroupA C 24 A Migrated Backbone suasanana anaana C 26 Hierarchical FT PNNI Network with 3 Peer Groups and a Non contiguous Backbone 000 eee eee eee C 27 Hierarchical PNNI Network after Migration C 28 Configuring FramePlus Modules Buffer Sizes Configured Using the setmem Command D 4 CLPOPPD Automatically Calculated illus D 5 Calculated CLP1EPD 0 0 ccc ees D 6 Calculated CLPOEPD 0 00 c eee D 7 Calculated CLP1PPD 0 0 0 ccc een eee D 8 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual LOF 3 List of Figures LOF 4 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual List of Tables CHAPTER 1 Table 1 1 CHAPTER 3 Table 3 1 CHAPTER 7 Table 7 1 Table 7 2 Table 7 3 Table 7 4 Table 7 5 Table 7 6 Table 7 7 CHAPTER 8 Table 8 1 APPENDIX A Table A 1 Tab
19. 10 Out of timers 11 Out of timers 12 Length error 13 Duplicate connection ID A 32 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Table A 16 Error Codes for Trap 2003 Continued Configuring SNMP Error Code Error Code Meaning 14 Invalid parameter 15 Duplicate DLCI 16 Memory allocation failure 17 Service not created 18 Connection does not exist 19 Invalid Service 1A Connection ID unavailable 1B Invalid Connection ID 1C Unexpected message 1D Object already configured 21 Operation failed 22 Physical channel configuration failed 23 Physical connection configuration failed 24 Physical channel teardown failed 25 Physical connection teardown failed 26 Port configuration failed 27 EPD PPD configuration failed 28 Unknown SDPM message received 29 Netmod not configured 2A SDPM message size error 2B Port not configured 2C Allocation of buffer failed ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Oo o 53 E amp i Ss Co o zZ v Configuring SNMP A 4 1 Adding SNMP Trap Destinations To create one or more SNMP trap destinations on a FORE switch log in to AMI and open a session on the switch Enter the following parameters configuration snmp trap destinations new lt ipaddress gt The lt ipaddress gt variable indicates the IP address of the SNMP trap destination that is to be created Repeat this for as many SNMP trap destinations as nee
20. Configurations of both the DS1 and the E1 version of the CES network module are detailed in this chapter This chapter assumes the proper configuration of general switch parameters and of CES specific parameters such as timing distribution recovery additional CES alarms CES ports etc ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual B 1 m 3 2 E e e s s L 2 unay Buunfiyuo 5 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services B 1 Idle Channel Suppression Idle channel suppression is a method used to detect active and inactive timeslots data paths of size DSO in a TDM trunk in an ATM network based on CES An idle timeslot is a timeslot in a connection through which no useful data is transmitted e g the end users may be silent ina voice connection An active connection is one in which at least one timeslot is not idle and an inactive connection is one in which all of the timeslots are idle Because the CES services are CBR services when a CES connection is created the switch allo cates a fixed amount of bandwidth depending on the number of timeslots used When idle channel suppression is enabled on a CES connection the CES network module transmits only the cells of active connections to the switch fabric Thus only a fraction of the bandwidth allo cated for the connection is used The egress network module detects that there is less than the contracted cell rate arriving on the CES connections and re allocates the e
21. D 3 2S oS Bac 4 Peer Group C Tl C2 g 3 U Z Peer Group A We cm Peer Group B Figure 6 3 Peer Groups Connected by Border Links 6 3 2 1 2 Area IDs Each area has an area ID which is unique only within a domain The area ID is only useful at the border of the area Since area IDs are included in some of the routing packets distributed throughout a domain all switches belonging to the same area must be configured with the same area ID It is especially important for the nodes in split switches and gateway switches to be configured with the correct area ID ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 6 7 ATM Forum PNNI 6 3 2 1 3 Levels Each areas has a level associated with it Levels are used to control the flow of reachability information in a multi level routing hierarchy which is discussed in the next section An N level hierarchy has N discrete values of levels associated with it namely L4 Ly Ly Each of the areas in the hierarchy has one of these N values as its level Numerical values are assigned to levels in order from the lowest to the highest i e L4 lt Ly lt L3 lt Ly so Ly is the highest level An area of level L can adjoin any number of areas at level L but can only adjoin at most one area at level L or higher This means that on a given switch there can never be a
22. DCC DCE DCS DES DFA DLCI Acronyms 2 Building Integrated Timing Supply Bayonet Neill Concelman Bridge Protocol Data Unit Bits per Second Bipolar Violation Broadband Terminal Equipment Broadcast and Unknown Server Connection Admission Control Channel Associated Signaling Connectionless Broadband Data Service Constant Bit Rate International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative Committee Common Channel Signaling Cell Delay Variation Connection Endpoint Connection Endpoint Identifier Circuit Emulation Service Carrier Group Alarm Carrier Identification Parameter Committed Information Rate Classical IP Cell Loss Priority Cell Loss Ratio 1 15 Connectionless service Common Management Interface Protocol Cell Misinsertion Rate Customer Premise Equipment Cell Rate Adaptation Cyclic Redundancy Check Cell Relay Service Controlled Slip or Convergence Sublayer Channel Service Unit Cell Transfer Delay Clear To Send Digital Access and Cross Connect System Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency Data Country Code Data Communications Equipment Digital Cross connect System Destination End Station DXI Frame Address Data Link Connection Identifier ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual DNS DSn DSR DTE DTR EEPROM EFCI EGP EIA EISA ELAN EMI EPROM EQL ER ES ESF ESI EXZ FC FCC FCS FDDI FDM FEBE FEC FECN FERF FIFO FRS FTP FT PNNI FUNI GCAC GCRA GFC HDB3 HDLC HEC HIPP
23. Eng LEC 1 EngLEC2 Eng LEC 3 Eng LEC 4 Eng LEC 5 Eng LEC 6 Eng LEC 7 Eng LEC 8 Eng LEC 9 Figure 3 13 ELAN with Single Server and Remote Connection to Server Figure 3 14 shows the ELAN in operation after three LECs have gone through the registration process ELAN Eng LES BUS 1 os Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 PA Eng LEC 1 Eng LEC 2 Eng LEC 3 Eng LEC 4 Eng LEC 5 Eng LEC 6 Eng LEC 7 Eng LEC 8 Eng LEC 9 mo 39 a 2 Q os re m z5 Figure 3 14 ELAN with Single Server in Operation If the single server in Figure 3 14 goes down then the entire ELAN goes down At this point the administrator must intervene and reconfigure the ELAN ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 3 17 Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 4 2 2 3 2 DLE ELAN As noted previously having a single server supporting an ELAN has a potential problem because the server can be a single point of failure However DLE can address this problem By attaching the ELAN LECs to multiple DLE peer servers which communicate with each other as described earlier the number of LECs affected by a server failure is reduced and a backup server is provided for affected LECs to use Figure 3 15 shows the configuration of such an ELAN as three stations register
24. IGMP TCP lt port gt lt port gt or UDP lt port gt lt port gt If no protocol is specified then this flow applies to all pro tocols lt port gt Specifies the source and destination port number respectively to be used with the lt proto gt parameter 0 indicates a match for any port number The range is 0 through 65535 lt thresholds gt Specifies a traffic threshold that must be reached before a shortcut VCC is established for a flow Also specifies a threshold below which a shortcut VCC is no longer con sidered valid is torn down and the default forwarding path is used Both thresholds are expressed in frames per second The format is lt threshold gt lt threshold gt lt threshold gt with the set up threshold first the tear down threshold second and the set up threshold for the default forwarding path third lt threshold gt Specifies the format for entering the threshold data as described for thresholds The format is rame count gt lt frame time gt For set up a zero count with a non zero time means a shortcut VCC should be estab lished upon the first frame and a non zero count with a zero time means a shortcut VCC is never established For tear down a zero count with a non zero time means a shortcut VCC is never torn down frame count Specifies the format for the number of frames for the set up and tear down thresholds The range is 0 through 65535 AT
25. LAN Emulation Configuration Server LECS 1d eda 3 3 LAN Emulation Server LES 3 3 LAN Emulation services 3 2 Starting cbe pee ERI 3 38 leaky bucket algorithm 1 40 LEG La t rete a at whose oe 3 3 Start esce ire een 3 43 LEGS Loud Ed s cU 3 3 well known address 3 43 LECS configuration file configuring DLE 3 30 configuring MPOA 3 33 ELAN access control 3 30 sample ote tes 3 35 Starting seese tana ini aa eee 3 38 Syntax cn hs ae ees EARE 3 24 Index 3 Index LECS control parameters 3 32 EBS Lot eS RUNS 3 3 starting cs sans es as IS 3 40 levels in PNNI eeeesesss 6 8 Link Management Interface LMI D 11 link scope UNI 2 6 cece eee eee 7 7 LIS Logical IP Subnet 2 2 LMI Link Management Interface D 11 local authentication 8 3 Logical IP Subnet LIS 2 2 logical link loglink 00 5 2 login authentication 8 3 local 4 DRE PERDERE 8 3 Sec rlb 2 2 god nace p ebeREE S 8 3 loglink logical link lusus 5 2 M Maximum Burst Size MBS 1 39 MBS osei aeaa a i aii e 1 39 MGR iat e e e tA LEE 1 40 Minimum Cell Rate MCR 1 40 multicast packets sssuss 4 5 N network configuration examples 2 11 Mode TET 6 3 node secret file 0
26. QoS Acronyms Most Significant Bit Maximum Transmission Unit Network Management Entity Network Management Layer Network Management Station Network to Network Interface or Network Node Interface Network Parameter Control Non Return to Zero Non Return to Zero Inverted Network Service Access Point National TV Standards Committee Operation and Maintenance Cell Optical Carrier level n Object Identifier Out of Frame Open Systems Interconnection Open Shortest Path First Protocol Organizationally Unique Identifier Packet Assembler Disassembler Phase Alternate Line Private Branch Exchange Peripheral Component Interconnect Pulse Code Modulation Peak Cell Rate Public Data Network Protocol Data Unit Physical Layer Packet Internet Groper Physical Layer Convergence Protocol Packet Level Protocol Physical Medium Physical Medium Dependent Private Network Node Interface or Private Network to Network Interface Point to Point Protocol Programmable Read Only Memory Primary Reference Source Packet Switched Network Payload Type Permanent Virtual Circuit or Channel Permanent Virtual Channel Connection Permanent Virtual Path Connection Queuing Delay Quality of Service gt 7 53 lt 3 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Acronyms 5 Acronyms RD RFCs RFI RIP RISC RTS SA SA SAP SAR SCR SCSI SDLC SDU SEAL SECAM SEL SES SF SGMP SIR SLIP SMDS SMF SMTP SNA SNAP
27. Using NHRP routers are still required to interconnect these subnets but NHRP permits intermediate routers to be bypassed on the data path NHRP allows entities called Next Hop Clients NHCs to send queries between different subnets These queries are propagated using Next Hop Serv ers NHSs via paths found using standard routing protocols Consequently NHRP enables the establishment of VCC data paths across subnet boundaries without requiring physical routers in the data path 4 3 2 Why MPOA The ATM Forum developed the Multi Protocol over ATM MPOA specification to address the limitations of LAN Emulation MPOA extends ATM support of legacy networks into the net work layer The main objective of MPOA is the efficient transfer of unicast data between sub net s MPOA introduces LANE MPOA Clients LEC MPCs and MPOA Servers MPSs and defines the protocols that are required for LEC MPCs and MPSs to communicate LEC MPCs issue queries for ATM addresses and receive replies from the MPS using these protocols MPOA also maintains interoperability with the existing infrastructure of routers MPOA Serv ers reside in routers that run standard Internetwork Layer routing protocols such as OSPF thus providing integration with existing networks ForeThought software implements MPOA shortcuts for IP traffic It does this by adding capabil ities to LANE not by replacing LANE LANE MPOA client drivers are extended LANE driv ers When handling tra
28. VPI VPL VPN VPT VS VD VT WAN ZBTSI Acronyms Shielded Twisted Pair Spanning Tree Protocol Synchronous Transport Signal Switched Virtual Circuit or Channel Switched Virtual Channel Connection Switched Virtual Path Connection Transparent Asynchronous Transmitter Receiver Interface Transmission Convergence Transmission Control Protocol Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol Tagged Cell Rate Transmission Convergence Sublayer Time Division Multiplexing Terminal Equipment Trivial File Transfer Protocol Traffic Management Unavailable Seconds Unspecified Bit Rate User Datagram Protocol User to Network Interface Usage Parameter Control Universal Test amp Operations Interface for ATM Unshielded Twisted Pair Variable Bit Rate Virtual Channel or Circuit Virtual Channel Connection Virtual Channel Identifier Virtual Channel Link Virtual Network Software Virtual Local Area Network Virtual Path Virtual Path Connection Virtual Private Data Network Virtual Path Identifier Virtual Path Link Virtual Private Network Virtual Path Terminator Virtual Source Virtual Destination Virtual Tributary Wide Area Network Zero Byte Time Slot Interchange gt 9 e 3 lt 3 D ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Acronyms 7 Acronyms Acronyms 8 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary 11 110 3 10Base T a 10 Mbps baseband Ethernet specification utilizing twisted pa
29. conf atmroute pnni node modify 2 pgid d forelevel 2 forearea 3 conf atmroute domain modify lt domain ID gt pnni Reboot switch C 1 This is the first node in the backbone area 3 Modify the interface on C 1 corresponding to the link to A 1 and attach it to the newly created node 2 on C 1 using the following AMI command conf atmroute pnni interface modify lt port gt lt vpi gt nodeix 2 4 Change the default protocol of the default domain in A 1 to pnni using the follow ing AMI command conf atmroute domain modify lt domain ID gt pnni Reboot switch A 1 The FI PNNI link between A 1 and B 1 is lost at this stage and connectivity between peer group A and the rest of the network is severed ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual C 23 Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI 5 Create a second PNNI node in A 1 with a node index of 2 the peer group ID set to D area 3 and level 2 using the following AMI commands conf atmroute pnni node modify 2 pgid d forelevel 2 forearea 3 conf atmroute domain modify domain ID pnni Reboot switch A 1 6 Modify the interface on A 1 corresponding to the link to C 1 and attach it to the newly created node 2 on A 1 using the following AMI command conf atmroute pnni interface modify port lt vpi gt nodeix 2 At this point the connectivity between peer groups A and C should be restored but peer groups A and B still remain disconnected The current state of the network is shown
30. e the VCI range of the path containing the signalling channel e the range specified for the signalling channel For example if you create a signalling channel with ILMI down on a VP that has no VCIs reserved and you specify a VCI range conf signalling new 1A3 65 ilmi down minvci 70 maxvci 200 the actual range is computed as an intersection based on the range you enter 70 200 and the range available in that VP 1 511 To display what the actual VCI range is enter the following command conf signalling show atmranges Admin Admin Oper Oper Admin Oper Oper Port VPI MinVCI MaxVCI MinVCI MaxVCI MaxVPI MaxSvccVPI MaxSvpcVPI SvpCapable 1A1 0 32 S2 32 511 1022 N A N A N A 1A2 0 32 SIL 32 SEL 1022 N A N A N A 1A3 0 32 511 32 511 1022 N A N A N A 1A3 65 70 200 70 200 1022 N A N A N A 1A4 0 32 SIT 32 SLi 1022 N A N A N A 1CTL 0 32 1023 32 1023 0 N A N A N A In this display the range that you have requested is shown in the Admin MinVCI and Admin MaxVCI fields The range that is computed and allowed is displayed in the Oper MinVCI and Oper MaxVCI fields In this example no VCIs are reserved on VP 65 so the requested range of 70 200 is allowed 7 2 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Signalling In another example if there are VCIs already reserved on VP 65 as shown below in the MinVCI and MaxVCI fields configuration vpt show Input Output Port VPI Port VPI ResBW CurBW MinVCI MaxVC VCs Protocol 1A1 0
31. elec tronics amp computer engineering provides educational programs for members and promotes standardization IEEE 802 Standards for the interconnection of LAN computer equipment Deals with the Data Link Layers of the ISO Reference Model for OSI IEEE 802 1 Defines the high level network interfaces such as architecture internetworking and network management IEEE 802 2 Defines the Logical Link Control interface between the Data Link and Network Layers IEEE 802 3 Defines CSMA CD Ethernet IEEE 802 4 Defines the token passing bus IEEE 802 5 Defines the Token Ring access methodology This standard incorporates IBM s Token Ring specifications IEEE 802 6 Defines Metropolitan Area Networks IEEE 802 7 The broadband technical advisory group IEEE 802 8 The fiber optics technical advisory group IEEE 802 9 Defines integrated data and voice networks Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN an emerging technology that is beginning to be offered by the telephone carriers of the world ISDN combines voice and digital network ser vices into a single medium or wire Interexchange Carriers IXC Long distance communications companies that provide service between Local Access Transport Areas LATAs Interface Data the unit of information transferred to from the upper layer in a single interac tion across a SAP Each Interface Data Unit IDU controls interface information and may also contain the whole or
32. myswitch configuration funi pvc new 4A1 02 0 42 oport 4cl ovpi 0 ovci 42 name pvc c myswitch configuration funi pvc show FUNI FUNI Input Output SvclId VPI VCI Port VPI VCI Port VPI VCI Admin Eppd Name 4A1 02 0 42 4A1 32 42 4C1l 0 42 up 0 pvc c 4A1 02 0 42 4C1l 0 42 4A1 32 42 up 0 pvc c 4A1 00 0 40 4A1 0 40 4C1 0 40 up 0 pvc a 4A1 00 0 40 4C1l 0 40 4A1 0 40 up 0 pvc a 4A1 01 0 41 4A1 16 41 4C1l 0 41 up 0 pvc b 4A1 01 0 41 4C1l 0 41 4A1 16 41 up 0 pvc b D 20 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring FramePlus Modules D 6 5 Configuring FUNI SPVCs You can also configure SPVCs Smart Permanent Virtual Circuits on a FramePlus network module An SPVC is a connection that spans multiple switch fabrics and looks like a PVC at the local and remote endpoints with an SVC in the middle If a link carrying an SPVC goes down and there is an alternate route then the end switch fabrics of the SPVC automatically reroute the SPVC around the failed link However the procedure for creating both SPANS SPVCs and PNNI SPVCs on a FramePlus net work module is slightly different than it is for other network modules Section D 6 5 1 describes how to create a FUNI SPANS SPVC Section D 6 5 2 describes how to create a FUNI PNNISPVC D 6 5 1 Creating a FUNI SPANS SPVC To create a FUNI SPANS SPVC perform the following steps 1 Configure the ingress FUNI PVC without specifying the oport ovpi and ovci parameters Fo
33. remember to use the interface associated with the given LIS On a switch the ATM address of the ARP server can be configured by using the instructions found in Section 2 3 2 of this manual On a host the ARP server address is configured into the host at installation time using the configure_atm script Since only one ARP server can be functioning at a time in a given LIS and since the ARP server s address is configured into each host it is not possible to use multiple redundant ARP servers to improve robustness If an ARP server becomes nonfunctional a new ARP server must be configured and then each host within the LIS must be configured to use the new ARP server To configure a new ARP server address on a switch use the the instructions found in Section 2 3 2 of this manual To configure a new ARP server address on a host you must delete the interface and recreate it 2 6 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring Classical IP 2 3 2 Configuring a FORE Switch to be an ARP Server FORE s ATM switches also have the capability of being an ARP server FORE s ATM adapters can not be configured as an ARP server To configure a FORE ATM switch as an ARP server perform the following steps on only one of the SCPs 1 Onone of the SCPs determine the ATM address of that SCP for the relevant inter face qaa0 gt qaa3 using the following AMI command configuration atmarp getnsap interface For example configuratio
34. removed 2 8 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring Classical IP 2 3 4 Operational Issues Certain hosts in an LIS may not support Classical IP It is still possible to communicate with these hosts and for these hosts to communicate with one another by using static ARP entries If a host does not support Classical IP its IP to ATM address mapping should be placed in its ARP server s cache as a static entry This allows other hosts that do support Classical IP to contact their ARP server as usual and obtain the correct address mapping If a host that does not support Classical IP wants to initiate connections the IP to ATM address mappings of the destination hosts should be put in its ARP cache again as static entries By using static ARP entries in the above fashion the ability for all hosts to communicate is maintained There are some restrictions on the number of hosts that can be maintained dynamically They are as follows e Inthe default configuration a host can only have approximately 250 virtual con nections open simultaneously This means that an ARP server can only serve 250 clients since each client must maintain a connection with its ARP server This may be a limitation if the ARP server is servicing multiple LISs e It is possible to increase the number of connections using AMI e Some hosts may be limited to supporting a maximum of 1 024 connections per adapter e E E Q c f El Q Q P
35. sent when an interface changes from an error condition to a nor mal state Load Sharing Two or more computers in a system that share the load during peak hours During periods of non peak hours one computer can manage the entire load with the other acting as a backup Local Access and Transport Area LATA Geographic boundaries of the local telephone net work specified by the FCC in which a single LEC may perform its operations Communica tions outside or between LATAs are provided by IXCs Local Area Network LAN a data network intended to serve an area of only a few square kilo meters or less Because the network is known to cover only a small area optimizations can be made in the network signal protocols that permit higher data rates Glossary 20 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary Logical Link Control LLC protocol developed by the IEEE 802 committee for data link layer transmission control the upper sublayer of the IEEE Layer 2 OSI protocol that complements the MAC protocol IEEE standard 802 2 includes end system addressing and error checking Loopback a troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the signal can be analyzed for errors Typically a loopback is set at various points in a line until the section of the line that is causing the problem is discovered DS LIT 3 looptest program that tests an interface for basic cell reception and transmiss
36. switch and vice versa Some additional configuration is necessary for communication to be established between the host and the switch fabric The switch needs an entry in its ATM ARP cache in order to send cells destined for the host with the correct VPI and VCI and to pass received cells with a spe cific VPI and VCI to IP This configuration can be done using AMI as shown in the following subsections See the atmarp 8c man page for more information ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 1 27 Configuring PVCs 1 5 2 3 Creating ATM ARP Entries To create a FORE IP PVC ARP entry log in to AMI Data on this PVC is encapsulated using null encapsulation also known as VC based multiplexing as specified in RFC 1483 Enter the following parameters configuration atmarp newforeip host lt vpi gt vci 4 5 lt interface gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description host The IP address of the remote host vpi The virtual path number of the FORE IP PVC Must be 0 vci The virtual channel number of the FORE IP PVC 415 The connection s ATM Adaptation Layer AAL type The default is 4 interface The FORE IP interface to be used for this connection The default is asx0 Once the parameters are entered the entry is created instantly by the SCP At the same time a command is entered automatically into the current CDB which creates this ATM ARP entry each time the SCP is restarted
37. to determine the length of the mask to use on the prefix to form the peer group ID A signalling interface port VPI can be associated with a particular domain while the routing interface port VPI for that signalling interface can be associ ated with a particular routing node within that domain For more information about changing these parameters see Part 1 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 6 9 ATM Forum PNNI 6 3 2 3 Propagation of Reachability Information The leaking of reachability information between two areas is constrained by two things policy and scope 6 3 2 3 1 Policies ForeThought software lets you configure a policy as a flexible means of enforcing security across the network topology When a node discovers an address that is leaked by another node it checks the policy to determine if the address is to be advertised within its own area There are three types of policies summary Addresses matching a summary policy cause just the summarized prefix of the address to be announced to the node s peer group suppress Addresses matching a suppress policy are not announced to the node s peer group at all e advertise Addresses matching an advertise policy cause the entire address to be announced to the node s peer group In each node s policy table the switch chooses the best address match meaning the longest prefix match to determine which poli
38. unless overridden for a par ticular ELAN or client ELAN default is configured to accept any client that wishes to join The ATM address of the default LES is listed in the default Address statement If DLE is being configured for ELAN default then this address must be the anycast address that allows the clients to reach any of the DLE peer servers for ELAN default Be sure to choose a distinct anycast address for E each ELAN in the network It must be unique within the first 19 bytes moO 33 cz gt De os Ta m z5 ELAN engineering has overridden the default Maximum_Frame_Size with a new size of 4544 bytes Consequently this frame size applies only to traffic on the engineering ELAN The default and marketing ELANS continue to use the default frame size of 1516 bytes Two LECs whose MAC addresses are 002048080011 and 0020481020ef are identified as acceptable clients for the engineering and marketing ELANs ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 3 35 Configuring an Emulated LAN The search ordering of elan names Match Ordering default engineering marketing the default configuration parameters Control_TimeOut 120 Maximum Unknown Frame Count 1 Maximum Unknown Frame Time 1 VCC TimeOut Period 1200 Maximum Retry Count 1 Aging Time 300 Forward Delay Time 15 Expected LE ARP Response Time 1 Flush TimeOut 4 Path Switching Delay 6 Multicast Send VCC Type Best Effort Conn
39. x J Figure C 11 Peer Group Severed from the Rest of the FI PNNI Area ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual C 13 n v z o U z wo BurioAuo2 Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI 6 C2is the final backbone switch to be converted to a gateway switch Change the peer group ID of its PNNI node currently down to D modify the level of its PNNI node to 2 and modify the default protocol of the default domain in C 2 to gateway using the following AMI commands conf atmroute pnni node modify index pgid d forelevel 2 conf atmroute domain modify domain ID gateway Reboot switch C 2 Upon the reboot all of the backbone links of the network are converted to PNNI 7 Atthis point the FI PNNI peer group B is an area by itself So the area ID of the FI PNNI node on B 1 needs to be changed to 3 using the following AMI command conf atmroute ftpnni forearea 3 Reboot switch B 1 The FI PNNI peer group C is also an area by itself but it can be allowed to retain its original area ID of 4 Upon the reboot of switch B 1 the migra tion of the backbone is complete C 3 1 1 1 3 Convert the Individual Peer Groups Now each individual peer group needs to be converted to PNNI In this case peer group C is being used as an example The other peer groups would be converted using the same steps outlined here Figure C 12 shows an example configuration of the FIT PNNI nodes within peer group C that need to be con
40. 0 0 0 8 5 NSAP addresses 00000 2 4 NSAP Prefix cuc eet Eger e pinta 2 4 O originating path 00 1 6 originating paths 0 1 6 creating cae eb eoe os 1 21 displaying 0000 1 9 displaying advanced information 1 10 Index 4 P POR ux CE T icd 1 39 1 40 Peak Cell Rate PCR 1 39 1 40 peer group leader PGL 6 3 permanent virtual channel displaying advanced information 1 16 permanent virtual circuits PVCs 1 1 PGL peer group leader 6 3 PININIE ve ui cte ettet teste re Ren 5 1 6 1 gateway switch 6 5 split switch esie eei e eiert 6 5 PNNI policies sensie sess 6 10 PNNI signalling protocol 6 4 PNNISPVC creating c eter Te eter s 1 35 PNNI SPVCs disabling rerouting 1 36 enabling rerouting 1 36 PNNI Topology State Elements 6 2 PNNI Topology State Packets 6 2 policy adeo bI TEN tente 6 10 advertise 0 cece eee eee 6 10 SUMMALY icrswas bae a eee t4 6 10 suppress 6 eee eee 6 10 PISES eV 6 2 PTSPS3 nete Nae 6 2 PVC revalidation Lun 2 10 R rate enforcement 0 04 D 10 configuring egress D 10 configuring ingress D 10 reachability information 6 1 related manuals 02 00 005 ii REGCEIS7
41. 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 21b 0137 002048100be6 00 5 198 29 17 15 qaa0 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f 21b 0137 00204810048d 00 pz 198 29 117 52 qaa0 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 21b 0138 0020481b0138 00 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description IPaddress The IP address for this connection If The name of the IP interface for this connection VPI The virtual path number VCI The virtual channel number AAL The AAL type of the given connection Type Shows what kind of connection this is Can be foreIpPVC foreIpSVC classicallp PVC or classicalIpSVc Direction Outgoing means this is an outgoing connection Incoming means this is an incoming connection Pending means that a connection has not yet been established Incom plete means that the IP to ATM address mapping is not yet known for the given IP address NSAP Address The NSAP address for this connection ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 1 29 Configuring PVCs 1 5 3 Creating a Virtual Channel To create a new virtual channel log in to AMI and enter the following parameters configuration vcc new lt iport gt lt ivpi gt lt ivci gt lt oport gt lt ovpi gt lt ovci gt upe lt index gt name lt name gt The advanced options for call records are as follows inctype orig tran term outctype orig tran term pmp mpp mpmp These parameters are defined as follows
42. 1 3 timeslots 2 4 and 6 would be entered as 2 46 and combinations such as 1 4 9 11 12 are allowed The parameters for new are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port on which the CES connection is to be created timeslots Indicates which timeslots 1 24 for DS1 1 31 for E1 are being configured for a particular PVC a11 indicates unstructured service The time slot assignments may be either contig uous or non contiguous DS0s oport The output port of the CES connection which can be a CES port or an ATM port ovpi The output Virtual Path Identifier VPI of the CES connection when the output port is not a CES port ovci The output Virtual Channel Identifier VCI of the CES connection when the output port is not a CES port ots The output timeslots of the CES connection when the output port is a CES port srts Indicates whether Synchronous Residual Time Stamp SRTS clock recovery is to be enabled on this connection on indicates that SRTS is enabled off indicates that SRTS is disabled The default is of fupc index The UPC contract type to be used in the ingress direction of the connection See Part 2 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual for more information about UPC con tracts bupc index The UPC contract type to be used in the egress direction of the connection See Part 2 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual for more information about UPC
43. 3 0 0 3 C4 19 0 2 3 A5 4 0 0 4 C5 20 0 2 4 A6 5 0 0 5 C6 21 0 2 5 B1 8 0 1 0 D1 24 0 3 0 B2 9 0 1 1 D2 25 0 3 1 B3 10 0 1 2 D3 26 0 3 2 B4 11 0 1 3 D4 27 0 3 3 B5 12 0 1 4 D5 28 0 3 4 B6 13 0 1 5 D6 29 0 3 5 CTL 56 0 7 0 A 2 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring SNMP A 2 ASX 1000 TNX 1100 Port Numbering Table A 2 shows the numbering conventions that are referred to in the MIBs for ports on board 1 on an ASX 1000 TNX 1100 Boards 2 3 and 4 use the same numbering scheme as board 1 This fact is important when interpreting debug messages o o 3 E amp E 3 Co o zZ v Table A 2 ASX 1000 TNX 1100 Board 1 Port Numbering Port Name Software Port Port Name Software Port Number Number Board 1 CTL 56 lal 0 1c1 16 1a2 1 1c2 17 1a3 2 163 18 1a4 3 1c4 19 1a5 4 1c5 20 1a6 5 1c6 21 1a7 6 1c7 22 1a8 7 1c8 23 1b1 8 1d1 24 1b2 9 1d2 25 1b3 10 1d3 26 1b4 11 1d4 27 1b5 12 1d5 28 1b6 13 1d6 29 1b7 14 1d7 30 1b8 15 1d8 31 lel N A 1e3 24 1e2 33 1e4 35 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual A 3 Configuring SNMP Table A 3 shows the numbering conventions that are referred to in the MIBs for ports on board 2 on an ASX 1000 TNX 1100 Table A 3 ASX 1000 TNX 1100 Board 2 Port Numbering Port Name Software Port Port Name Software Por
44. 4c3 189 4a4 174 4c4 190 4a5 175 Ac5 191 4a6 176 4c6 192 4a7 177 4c7 193 ii 178 4c8 194 4b1 179 4d1 195 4b2 180 4d2 196 4b3 181 4d3 197 4b4 182 4d4 198 4b5 183 4d5 199 4b6 184 4d6 200 4b7 185 4d7 201 4b8 186 4d8 202 4el 203 4e3 205 4e2 204 4e4 N A ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring SNMP A 3 ASX 4000 Port Numbering Table A 6 shows the numbering conventions that are referred to in the MIBs for ports on port card 1 on an ASX 4000 The backplane ports are not addressable and there is only one switch control processor port These facts are important when interpreting debug messages In the interest of space ports 1a16 through 1a63 and 1b16 through 1b63 are not shown here o o 3 E amp z 3 Co o zZ v Table A 6 ASX 4000 Port Card 1 Port Numbering Port Name Software Port EANA Software Port Number Number Port Card 1 Switch Control Port 5CTL 1024 lal 0 1b1 64 1a2 1 1b2 65 1a3 2 1b3 66 1a4 3 1b4 67 1a5 4 1b5 68 1a6 5 1b6 69 1a7 6 1b7 70 1a8 7 1b8 71 1a9 8 1b9 72 1a10 9 1b10 73 tall 10 1b11 74 1a12 11 1b12 75 1a13 12 1b13 76 1a14 13 1b14 77 1a15 14 1b15 78 1a64 63 1b64 127 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual A 7 Configuring SNMP Table A 7 shows the numbering conventions that are referred to in the MIBs for ports on port card 2 on an ASX 4000 In the interest of space ports 1c16 through 1c
45. 6 11 ATM Forum PNNI 6 12 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual eu did EA Signalling This chapter contains information that pertains to the signalling portion of ForeThought soft ware This signalling information is described in the following sections e Section 7 1 VCI Allocation Range e Section 7 2 Signalling Scope e Section 7 3 Signalling Channel Auto Configuration Procedures e Section 7 4 Allowable Combination of Traffic Parameters 7 1 VCI Allocation Range The VCI allocation range is the range of VCI values in a path within which a signalling chan nel will allocate VCs This range defaults to the VCI range of the virtual path containing the signalling channel also referred to as the containing path If the signalling channel is a link scope signalling E channel then this range applies to the containing path and all other paths within which the signalling channel has allocated connections A VCI allocation range can be specified when a signalling channel is created using the ATM Management Interface AMI command con signalling new The range is computed dif ferently depending on whether or not you have ILMI running ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 7 1 Signalling 7 1 1 Determining the VCI Allocation Range with ILMI Down If ILMI is not operational and if the VCI allocation range of the signalling channel is specified then the range is determined as an intersection of the following
46. 6 Example of FT PNNI Hierarchy Showing Lowest Level P er Groups ciere ERRORS a S Ed a ad hag en 5 7 View of the Network from Switches in Peer GroupA 5 10 ATM Forum PNNI Internetworking of FI PNNI and PNNI 6 5 Split Switches and Gateway Switches Connecting Areas 6 6 Peer Groups Connected by Border Links 6 7 Static Route Connecting Two Domains 6 8 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual APPENDIX C Figure C 1 Figure C 2 Figure C 3 Figure C 4 Figure C 5 Figure C 6 Figure C 7 Figure C 8 Figure C 9 Figure C 10 Figure C 1 1 Figure C 12 Figure C 13 Figure C 14 Figure C 15 Figure C 16 Figure C 17 Figure C 18 Figure C 19 Figure C 20 APPENDIX D Figure D 1 Figure D 2 Figure D 3 Figure D 4 Figure D 5 List of Figures Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI Invalid Configuration of ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 Split between Two FT PNNI Peer GroupS 0 005 C 2 Invalid Configuration of ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 Split between Two PNNI Peer Groups 00 00e ee eeee C 3 Multiple Fabrics of an ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 Incorrectly Configured as Gateways lisse C 4 A Non Hierarchical FI PNNI Network 2 0 C 6 S5 Changed to a Gateway Switch 00000 C 7 S3 Changed to a Gateway Switch lilius C 7 S4 Changed to a Gateway Switch and S5 to PNNI C 8 A Completely Converted PNNI Network
47. AMI syntax is listed here for reference myswitch configuration signalling new port lt vpi gt protocol options sig_alloc vp link auto sig_mode nonAssoc vpAssoc auto The scope and mode either both have to be auto or both have to be given a parameter other than auto Specifying the scope as auto and hard configuring the mode or vice versa is not allowed If a scope is not entered then the scope parameter defaults to auto Similarly the mode parameter defaults to auto if a mode is not entered Table 7 5 shows the valid combinations Table 7 5 Valid Scope and Mode Combinations Scope Mode autoScope autoMode vpScope vpAssoc vpScope nonAssoc linkScope nonAssoc 1 This combination is valid as long as the type is not con figured as auto or privateNNI If the type is auto the link could become a PNNI link which would conflict with a mode of nonAssoc and a scope of vpScope ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 7 15 Signalling 7 3 2 2 1 Examples of Valid Configurations The following are examples of valid configurations to enter into AMI conf sig new lal 0 conf sig new lal 0 sig alloc auto sig mode auto conf sig new lal 0 sig alloc vp sig mode vpAssoc conf sig new lal 0 sig alloc link sig mode nonAssoc The first example is the default that is most often used when configuring a signalling interface This is the most preferred mode since the auto conf
48. By recalculating the CRC at the remote end and com paring it to the value originally transmitted the receiving node can detect errors D3 D4 Refers to compliance with AT amp T TR Technical Reference 62411 definitions for coding supervision and alarm support D3 D4 compatibility ensures support of digital PBXes M24 services Megacom services and Mode 3 D3 D4 channel banks at DS 1 level D4 Channelization refers to compliance with AT amp T Technical Reference 62411 regarding DS1 frame layout the sequential assignment of channels and time slot numbers within the DS1 D4 Framed Framing Format in T1 a 193 bit frame format in which the 193rd bit is used for framing and signaling information the frame framing bit To be considered in support of D4 Framing a device must be able to synchronize and frame up on the 193rd bit Data Communications Equipment DCE a definition in the RS232C standard that describes the functions of the signals and the physical characteristics of an interface for a communication device such as a modem Data Country Code DCC This specifies the country in which an address is registered The codes are given in ISO 3166 The length of this field is two octets The digits of the data country code are encoded in Binary Coded Decimal BCD syntax The codes will be left justified and padded on the right with the hexadecimal value F to fill the two octets Data Link Communications connection used to transmi
49. CRC error detection and maintenance data link functions Exterior Gateway Protocol EGP used by gateways in an internet connecting autonomous networks Fairness related to Generic Flow Control fairness is defined as meeting all of the agreed quality of service requirements by controlling the order of service for all active connections ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary 13 Glossary Far End Block Error FEBE an error detected by extracting the 4 bit FEBE field from the path status byte G1 The legal range for the 4 bit field is between 0000 and 1000 representing zero to eight errors Any other value is interpreted as zero errors Far End Receive Failure FERF a line error asserted when a 110 binary pattern is detected in bits 6 7 8 of the K2 byte for five consecutive frames A line FERF is removed when any pat tern other than 110 is detected in these bits for five consecutive frames Far End in a relationship between two devices in a circuit the far end device is the one that is remote Face Contact FC Designation for fiber optic connector designed by Nippon Telegraph and Telephone which features a movable anti rotation key allowing good repeatable performance despite numerous mating Normally referred to as Fiber Connector FC actually stands for Face Contact and sometimes linked with PC Point Contact designated as FC or FC PC FCC Part 68 The FCC rules regulating the direct connection of non
50. Leaf is sending information without additional higher layer information See the following note for Phase 1 3 The Leaf Nodes cannot communicate directly to each other with this connection type Note Phase 1 signalling does not support traffic sent from a Leaf to the Root Point to Point Connection a connection with only two endpoints Point to Point Protocol PPP Provides a method for transmitting packets over serial point to point links Policing the function that ensures that a network device does not accept traffic that exceeds the configured bandwidth of a connection Port Identifier The identifier assigned by a logical node to represent the point of attachment of a link to that node Presentation Layer Sixth layer of the OSI model providing services to the application layer Primary Reference Source PRS Equipment that provides a timing signal whose long term accuracy is maintained at 1 x 10 11 or better with verification to universal coordinated time UTC and whose timing signal is used as the basis of reference for the control of other clocks within a network Primitive an abstract implementation independent interaction between a layer service user and a layer service provider Priority the parameter of ATM connections that determines the order in which they are reduced from the peak cell rate to the sustained cell rate in times of congestion Connections with lower priority 4 is low 1 is high are
51. Lowest Level Peer Groups ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 5 7 ForeThought PNNI 5 2 1 Peer Groups The FI PNNI hierarchy begins with a network of switches organized into peer groups A peer group is a collection of interconnected switches that are organized into a group Peer group organization can be determined by a network administrator but switches that are located close to one another are usually made into a peer group The network shown in Figure 5 3 is organized into four lowest level peer groups A B C and D The switches within a certain peer group are numbered according to that particular group For example the switches in peer group A are identified as A 1 A 2 and A 3 Peer groups have a peer group identifier ID assigned at configuration time and exchanged in hello indication messages Neighboring switches can determine if they belong to the same peer group by comparing these peer group IDs Switches in a peer group are aware of the topology of their own peer group and the existence of all other peer groups They recognize the links between their peer group and others but they are not aware of internal topology information of other peer groups Instead the topolo gies of other peer groups are summarized as a single reachable location known as a peer group summary node PGSN 5 2 2 Peer Group Topology To maintain an accurate and updated view of its relative location and status a switch periodi cally send
52. Network Configuration Manual Q fe E amp E 3 Co o zZ v Configuring SNMP Table A 14 SNMP Traps Supported on the FORE Switches Continued Trap Number Trap Name Description 6 asxPsInputDown This trap alerts that one ATM switch power supply failed due to failure in the input voltage The power supply that failed is identified by the power supply index Note that an input voltage may be out of specifi cation and may not cause a power supply failure if high loads are not applied asxPsInputUp This trap alerts that one ATM switch power supply that had an AC input failure is up The power supply that is back up is identified by the power supply index asxPsOutputDown This trap alerts that one ATM switch power supply output or the power supply was physically removed The power supply that failed is identified by the power supply index 10 asxPsOutputUp This trap alerts that one ATM switch power supply that had an output failure or was removed is now up The power supply that is back up is identified by the power supply index 22 asxFanBankDown This trap alerts that one ATM switch fan bank failed The fan bank that failed is identified by the fan bank index 23 asxFanBankUp This trap alerts that one ATM switch fan bank is up The fan bank that is back up is identified by the fan bank index 28 asxLinkDown This trap alerts that the link that
53. PHMer iere tetera Spee Paes elements XNURUA NUR S agin eels 4 2 4 2 1 LANE Components 00 00 cece eee es 4 2 4 2 2 An Example LANE Configuration llli 4 3 4 2 2 1 The Initialization Process 2200e ee eeaee 4 4 4 2 2 2 The Connection Process liliis 4 5 4 2 2 8 Multicast and Broadcast Packets 4 4 5 4 2 2 4 Accessing Fast Ethernet and FDDI Networks 4 5 4 2 2 5 Multiple ELANS lisse BR 4 6 4 2 2 6 Distributed LAN Emulation 200005 4 6 4 2 2 7 Automatic ELAN Selection 0 0 0 0 eee eee 4 6 4 2 2 8 Intelligent BUS 0 0 0 cece 4 6 4 3 An Introduction to Multi Protocol Over ATM 0 00 cece eee eee eas 4 7 4 3 1 LANE WithoutMPOA sos aes ep ede bed ae OE RR alert wes 4 7 4 3 2 Why MPOA 0 s 4 8 4 3 3 MPOA Components 000 0c e eee seh 4 10 4 3 4 MPOR Example 5 xe ete eC tie tee Sha die iR 4 11 4 3 4 1 MPSOConfiguration lllliesils eee 4 12 4 3 4 2 Initialization 2s 4 12 4 3 4 3 Flow Analysis oo ete n IEEE 4 13 4 3 4 4 Making a Shortcut 2 0 0 0 c eee eee 4 13 4 3 4 5 Shortcut Teardown 0 nee 4 14 CHAPTER 5 ForeThought PNNI 5 1 E EPNNIBo tng x cxt Aa tee win kee R ROC D pe dUpR RE XA ER 5 2 5 1 1 Hello Protocol 0 000 cece eh 5 2 5 1 2 Topology Database Exchange 0000e cece eee eee 5 2 5 1 3 Flooding 2 ee Lex cere P
54. SPVC information is available 1 34 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring PVCs 1 5 6 Creating a PNNI SPVC To create a PNNI SPVC log in to AMI and enter the following parameters You do not need to open a session to the E destination switch to create a PNNI SPVC because all PNNI SPVCs are bidirectional configuration spvx spvcc pnni new port vpi vci lt destnsap gt priority lt priority gt e spveid lt index gt Q domainid lt id gt a name lt name gt destvpi lt vpi gt destvci lt vci gt S reroute enable disable a fupe lt index gt bupe lt index gt E 7 advanced options ftpnniDtlIndexl lt indexl gt ftpnniDtlWeightl lt weight1 gt ftpnniDtlIndex2 lt index2 gt ftpnniDtlWeight2 lt weight2 gt ftpnniDtlIndex3 lt index3 gt ftpnniDtlWeight3 lt weight3 gt ftpnniDtlIndex4 lt index4 gt ftpnniDtlWeight4 lt weight4 gt backoff enable disable bearerClass X A C clip lt nolyes gt QoSExpIndex lt index gt fqos classO classi class2 class3 class4 bqos classO class1 class2 class3 class4 T od ud ca 1 1 1 1 These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description SPVC ID or lt spvcid gt or The index number assigned to this SPVC to identify it uniquely For PNNI SPVCs the spvcid index index number may be assigned either by AMI or
55. Status Sel Mode MACaddress IfName ELAN 1 up up 0x11 wellknown 0a20481a2c78 e117 Mktg LECS 0x47 0079 00 000000 0000 0000 0000 00a03e000001 00 LES c5000580 f 6e1000000 21c12600020481c126066 BUS 47000580ffe1000000f21c126b0020481c126b66 LEC ID 13057 Discovered ELAN name Mktg Configure Direct VCC 0 323 Maximum Frame Size 1516 Control Direct VCC 0 667 Control Distribute VCC 0 203 Multicast Send VCC 0 674 Multicast Forward VCC 0 205 Last Error Repeat all of the steps in this section for each LEC Refer to the corresponding User s Manual for the appropriate steps for re creating LECs that are running on hosts PowerHubs or ES 3810s At this time you may also add any new clients to the ELAN 3 7 8 Create the Last DLE Peer After all of the LECs have been changed over and any new LECs have been added go back and change the remaining failover LES to a DLE peer Create the DLE peer as follows myswitch configuration lane les new 0x02 Mktg anycast c5 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21c 126b 0020481c126b 66 peers 47 0005 80 e100 0000 21a 24 9 0020321a26e5 02 47 0005 80 e100 0000 21a 24 9 0020481a24 9 00 47 0005 80 e100 0000 21c 10bb 0020481c10bb 90 3 7 9 Add the Last DLE Peer to Each Peer List Now add the new peer to the list of each of the existing peers using the following command on each of those peers myswitch configuration lane les new peeradd 1 47 0005 80 e100 0000 21a 24 9 0020321a26e5 02
56. Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring PVCs Parameter Description shapeivpi lt vpi gt The incoming VPI for this through path When the traffic shaping port is not the port con nected to the WAN a through path must be created from the WAN port to the traffic shap ing port Cells arrive from the network at the traffic shaping port with this value equal to the VPI of the terminating path at the traffic shaping port This parameter only applies to the Series C network modules i By indicating pmp mpp or mpmp you are only assigning a label for record keeping purposes The switch does not neces sarily create the type of path you have specified If you assign a connection type but do not assign a pmp mpp or mpmp label the switch assigns a label of pp point to point 2 If you want to shape traffic on more than two ports on a given Series C network module it is recommended that you set the traffic memory model to model number 5 for that network module using conf module traffic c setmodel Terminating and originating paths cannot be E created across the intra fabric ports on an ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 only through paths can be created across the intra fabric ports as shown in the third example ie e E Q E Q U lt i9 0 The following is an example of how to create a virtual path which specifies a name myswitch configuration vpc gt new 3b1 75 3b5 75 name customer
57. Table of Contents 1 5 5 Displaying SPANS SPVC Information 00 0005 1 34 1 5 6 CreatingaPNNISPVC 0 00 cece sees 1 35 1 6 Traffic Ty DOS s c oe fences netics Sowa ee aR e p kb eoe eub aera Ee ete 1 39 1 7 Traffic Policing Usage Parameter Control 000 00a eee eee 1 40 1 7 1 Leaky Bucket Algorithm 0 0 00 eee ee eee 1 40 1 7 2 Non conforming Cells Tagging vs Dropping 1 41 1 7 3 UPC Traffic Contract Parameters 00 000 eee eee eee 1 41 1 7 4 AMI UPC Commands 0 0 02 1 43 CHAPTER 2 Configuring Classical IP 2 1 Introduction eee eee mee em ae hn etn en ov ds 2 1 2 1 1 EogicalIPSubtietsS amp ios te ec E RERBA RBekrhrkdas 2 2 2 1 2 Classical IP Interfaces liliis 2 2 2 1 3 SPANS nt tface a 25 xt sue bee ees eae lv ales A ORI 2 3 2 2 Address Registration and ILMI llle 2 4 2 2 1 NSAP Addresses c ee b er Er X a aa Calek GES ahaa alas 2 4 2 2 2 Operating with ILMI Support 00000 cee eee eee 2 5 2 2 3 Operating without ILMI Support 00000 e eee eee ee 2 5 2 2 4 Configuration 0 6 ete eee 2 5 2 3 ARP and ARP Servers 0 000 cece eee eens 2 6 2 3 1 PRG OLY oae DEVE REID ERFIEAN RIS I RLEAT URSI DEREN Rc 2 6 2 3 2 Configuring a FORE Switch to be an ARP Server 2 7 2 3 3 Classical IP Operation llis 2 8 2 3 4 Operational IssueS 1 2 0 2 00 ccc res 2 9 2 4 Classical IP
58. The default is 40 seconds ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring an Emulated LAN Table 3 1 LECS Configuration File Parameters Continued Parameter Definition Resolution Hold Down Time 160 Specifies the minimum amount of time to wait before re initiating an MPOA Resolution Request after a failed resolution attempt This value is usually greater than the Resolution Maximum Retry Time The minimum is 30 seconds The maximum is 1 200 seconds The default is 160 seconds MPOA KeepAlive Time 10 Specifies how often an MPS must send MPOA Keep Alive messages to all LEC MPCs for which it has cre ated and is maintaining Egress Cache Entries The mini mum is 1 second The maximum is 300 seconds The default is 10 seconds MPOA KeepAlive Lifetime 35 Specifies the length of time that a Keep Alive message is considered valid It is recommended that this value be at least twice the value of the MPOA KeepAlive Time The minimum is 3 seconds The maximum is 1 000 seconds The default is 35 seconds Resolution GiveUp Time 40 Specifies the minimum amount of time to wait before an MPS should give up on a pending resolution request The minimum is 5 seconds The maximum is 300 sec onds The default is 40 seconds Resolution Default Holding Time 1200 Specifies the default holding time for use in NHRP Reso lution Replies The minimum is 60 seconds The maxi mum is 7 200 s
59. Userid not listed SecurID server accessible and SecurID server rejects userid Reject Userid not listed SecurID server accessible and SecurID server accepts userid Accept Userid listed and port not OK Reject Userid listed port OK local authentication and supplied password does not Reject match Userid listed port OK local authentication and supplied password matches Accept Userid listed port OK SecurID authentication SecurID server accessible and Reject SecurID server rejects userid Userid listed port OK SecurID authentication SecurID server accessible and Accept SecurID server accepts userid Userid listed port OK SecurID authentication SecurID server not accessible Reject and no local password Userid listed port OK SecurID authentication SecurID server not accessible Reject local password and supplied password does not match Userid listed port OK SecurID authentication SecurID server not accessible Accept local password and supplied password matches 8 2 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Security 8 1 1 Login Authentication Method The network administrator can configure two different forms of login authentication local authentication and SecurID authentication The administrator may employ either method for all users or he or she may choose to employ the local method for some users and the SecurID method for other users Each method is descri
60. VCs including the assignment removal and checking of VCs Metasignalling VCs the standardized VCs that convey metasignalling information across a User to Network Interface UNI Metropolitan Area Network MAN network designed to carry data over an area larger than a campus such as an entire city and its outlying area MicroChannel a proprietary 16 or 32 bit bus developed by IBM for its PS 2 computers inter nal expansion cards also offered by others Minimum Cell Rate MCR parameter defined by the ATM Forum for ATM traffic manage ment defined only for ABR transmissions and specifying the minimum value for the ACR Most Significant Bit MSB highest order bit in the binary representation of a numerical value Motion Picture Experts Group MPEG ISO group dealing with video and audio compression techniques and mechanisms for multiplexing and synchronizing various media streams MPOA Client A device which implements the client side of one or more of the MPOA proto cols i e is a SCP client and or an RDP client An MPOA Client is either an Edge Device Functional Group EDFG or a Host Behavior Functional Group HBFC MPOA Server An MPOA Server is any one of an ICFG or RSFG MPOA Service Area The collection of server functions and their clients A collection of physi cal devices consisting of an MPOA server plus the set of clients served by that server MPOA Target A set of protocol address path attribu
61. a5 m Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 rdc E d gt Py 0 O 5 ni Eng LEC 1 Eng LEC 2 EngLEC 3 EngLEC 4 Eng LEC 5 Eng LEC 6 EngLEC 7 Eng LEC 8 EngLEC 9 Figure 3 17 Failure of One ELAN Server and the Recovery Process ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 3 19 Configuring an Emulated LAN The failure and recovery process occurs as follows 1 Eng LES BUS 1 has lost power All circuits connected to it are torn down Low level signalling traffic e g SSCOP messages stop and Switch 1 removes the address of Eng LES BUS 1 from its link tables 2 LECs 1 and 4 had been connected to Switch 1 They detect that their connections to Eng LES BUS 1 have been torn down user intervention is not necessary 3 LECs 1 and 4 follow LANE 1 0 protocols to locate an LECS again to find the address of their ELAN s LES In this example they again connect to the LECS 4 The LECS reports to LECs 1 and 4 that their ELAN server is at ATM address N1 This address is used by every peer LES supporting the ELAN both Eng LES 1 and Eng LES 2 in this example 5 LEC 1 sends a request to Switch 1 to establish a connection to address N1 Switch 1 no longer believes it has a direct connection to N1 and instead uses PNNI to establish a circuit through Switches 2 and 3 to Eng LES 2 6 LEC 4 sends a request to Switch 2 to establish a connection to N1 Switch 2 may h
62. adaptation layer cell and error counts This can also be used to query other hosts via SNMP Attachment User Interface AUI IEEE 802 3 interface between a media attachment unit MAU and a network interface card NIC The term AUI can also refer to the rear panel port to which an AUI cable might attach Auto logout a feature that automatically logs out a user if there has been no user interface activity for a specified length of time Automatic Protection Switching APS Equipment installed in communications systems to detect circuit failures and automatically switch to redundant standby equipment Available Bit Rate ABR a type of traffic for which the ATM network attempts to meet that traffic s bandwidth requirements It does not guarantee a specific amount of bandwidth and the end station must retransmit any information that did not reach the far end Backbone the main connectivity device of a distributed system All systems that have con nectivity to the backbone connect to each other but systems can set up private arrangements with each other to bypass the backbone to improve cost performance or security Backplane High speed communications line to which individual components are connected Backward Explicit Congestion Notification BECN A Resource Management cell type gener ated by the network or the destination indicating congestion or approaching congestion for traffic flowing in the direction opposite that of
63. address and have been configured with the ATM address of the ARP server A host can not resolve the ATM addresses of other hosts in its LIS unless it can communicate with its ARP server Since there is no mechanism for ARP servers to exchange mapping information with each other it is imperative that each LIS be configured with only one ARP server When a host wants to communicate with another host in its LIS it first sends an ARP request to the ARP server containing the IP address to be resolved When an ARP reply is received from the ARP server the host creates an entry in its ARP cache for the given IP address and stores the IP to ATM address mapping This ARP cache entry is marked as complete To ensure that all of the IP to ATM address mappings known by a certain host are up to date hosts are required to age their ARP entries A host must validate its ARP entries every 15 min utes 20 minutes on an ARP server Any ARP entries not associated with open connections are immediately removed A host validates its SVCs by sending an ARP request to the ARP server A host validates its PVCs and an ARP server validates its SVCs by sending an InARP request on the VC If a reply is not received the ARP entry is marked invalid Once an ARP entry is marked invalid an attempt is made to revalidate it before transmitting Transmission proceeds only when val idation is successful If a VC associated with an invalid ARP entry is closed the entry is
64. address of LEC 3 by broadcasting an IP ARP request with LEC 3 s IP address As Figure 3 4 shows this ARP request is sent in two steps O as a point to point message from LEC 1 to the LANE BUS then as a point to multipoint message from the BUS to all of the LECs registered in the ELAN Eng LEC 1 Eng LEC 2 Eng LEC 3 Figure 3 4 Broadcast IP ARP Request When LEC 3 receives the IP ARP request it recognizes that it is the intended destination and therefore attempts to send an IP ARP response to LEC 1 whose MAC address was supplied in the ARP request packet As shown in Figure 3 5 the delivery of the ARP response is a three step process LEC 3 sends an LE ARP query to the LES asking for the ATM address that corresponds to LEC 1 s MAC address the LES sends an LE ARP response to LEC 3 and LEC 3 establishes a cir cuit to LEC 1 s ATM address Eng LEC 1 Eng LEC 2 Eng LEC 3 Figure 3 5 IP ARP Response Handling 3 10 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 4 1 2 Limitations of a Single Server Because the there is only one LES BUS supporting the ELAN the following limitations exist e The number of LECs in a single ELAN is limited by the number of virtual circuits that the single LES BUS can establish through their platform s ATM port This usually limits the ELAN to about 500 LECs e Clusters of LECs that
65. an Emulated LAN Chapter 4 MPOA Contains an overview of LAN Emulation LANE and Multi Protocol Over ATM MPOA Chapter 5 ForeThought PNNI Provides an overview of ForeThought PNNI and shows how this scalable routing and signalling protocol can be used to simplify large network topologies Chapter 6 ATM Forum PNNI Provides an overview of ATM Forum PNNI and shows how this scalable routing and signalling protocol can be used to simplify large network topologies Chapter 7 Signalling Describes signalling protocol information Chapter 8 Security Describes the various forms of security that can be used on the switch Chapter 9 Configuring Timing Describes how to set up timing on a switch Appendix A Configuring SNMP Describes the remote SNMP configuration of a switch Appendix B Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Contains information for configur ing Circuit Emulation Services CES network modules Appendix C Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI Discusses the conversion of both non hierarchical and hierarchical FI PNNI networks to ATM Forum PNNI networks ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual PETER Preface Appendix D Configuring FramePlus Modules Contains information for configuring FramePlus network modules Acronyms Contains a list of common networking acronyms Glossary Contains definitions for networking terms both general and ATM specific Related Manuals References are m
66. an index of 5 a pcr01 of 500 cells sec or kbps an scr0 of 200 cells sec or kbps an mbs0 of 250 cells or kilobits a CDVT of 1 000 microseconds and partial packet policing enabled PVCs that use UPC contracts containing any of the noGCRA aal5 noPktDisc PPPol and ubrTagging options are valid only when the conf port gcrapolicing conf port aal5packetdiscard conf port pppolicing and conf port ubrtagging commands are set to svcOn or svcOff Use conf port show tm to check these settings For more information regarding traffic contracts E please refer to Table 5 7 in the ATM Forum UNI 3 0 Specification 1 46 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual e 1E zi IPMA Configuring Classical IP 2 1 Introduction This chapter describes how to design configure and maintain a Classical IP ATM network The term classical indicates that the ATM network has the same properties as existing legacy LANs That is even though ATM technology allows for large globally connected networks for example it is only used in the LAN environment as a direct replacement of existing LAN technology The classical model of LANs connected through IP routers is maintained in ATM networks RFC 1577 provides the standard for Classical IP over ATM Classical IP over ATM is different than IP in legacy LANs in that ATM provides a virtual con nection environment through the use of Permanent Virtual Circuits PVCs and or Switched Virtual Circuits SVCs
67. ao EJ O EJ ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 2 9 Configuring Classical IP 2 4 Classical IP PVCs 2 4 4 Theory and Configuration Normally ATM connections in a Classical IP environment are established dynamically using UNI 3 0 or UNI 3 1 ARP ILMI and UNI 3 0 or UNI 3 1 all work together as described previ ously to set up an SVC If a host from another vendor does not support Classical ARP or ILMI it is still possible to set up an SVC using work arounds If a host or a switch in an LIS does not support UNI3 0 or UNI3 1 however it is not possible to establish an SVC In this case a Clas sical IP PVC can be used for communication On each of the hosts cliparp add pvc is used to establish the PVC An unused VPI VCI pair must be chosen for each host PVCs using the chosen VPI VCI pairs must also be set up from each of the hosts to their connecting switch and then on all of the switches between the two connecting switches Both the incoming and outgoing connections are E set up simultaneously on the host but they must be set up individually on the switches The same VPI VCI pair is used by a host to send on the PVC as well as receive on the PVC The IP datagrams are sent over the PVC using AAL5 with LLC SNAP encapsulation 2 4 2 Revalidation and Removal Normally the device driver periodically checks that its PVCs are still established and func tioning A host revalidates a PVC by sending InARP requests over the
68. as shown in Figure C 5 C 6 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI PNNI peer group boundary Eun PNNI node S3 FFPNNI peer group boundary O FFPNNI node FT PNNI link 1 r N oj S5 E Fora ea ag EN 7 l 15 Figure C 5 S5 Changed to a Gateway Switch 3 Convert S3 to a gateway switch by modifying the default protocol of the default domain in 3 to gateway using the following AMI command conf atmroute domain modify domain ID gateway Reboot switch 3 Upon the reboot 53 will come up with two nodes one FI PNNI node in area 4 and one PNNI node in area 5 The link between the two gateway switches S5 and S3 will come up as a PNNI link as shown in Figure C 6 This is the first PNNI link in the network All of the other links are still FI PNNI links T Uv z i U z wodj HuljsaAUuOD PNNI peer group boundary a EN ENN node Fore Area A4 NA PNN link Fore Level L4 l FT PNNI peer group boundary l S3 O FT PNNI node dimers FTPNNI link I R S5 l l A JN E Figure C 6 53 Changed to a Gateway Switch ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual C 7 Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI 4 Convert S4 to a gateway switch by modifying the default protocol of the defau
69. be a directly connected ATM host It can be on any attached network Table A 14 describes the supported traps Table A 14 SNMP Traps Supported on the FORE Switches Trap Number Trap Name Description 0 asxSwLinkDown An asxSwLinkDown trap signifies that the sending protocol entity recognizes a failure in one of the ATM Switch links that is connected to another switch asxSwLinkUp An asxSwLinkUp trap signifies that the sending proto col entity recognizes that one of the ATM Switch links that is connected to another switch has come up asxHostLinkDown An asxHostLinkDown trap signifies that the sending protocol entity recognizes a failure in one of ATM Switch links that is connected to a host asxHostLinkUp An asxHostLinkUp trap signifies that the sending pro tocol entity recognizes that one of the ATM Switch links that is connected to a host has come up asxNetModuleDown An asxNetModuleDown trap signifies that the sending protocol entity recognizes a failure in one of the ATM Switch network modules that is identified by the board and the module numbers This is probably caused by a hot swap of a network module asxNetModuleUp An asxNetModuleUp trap signifies that the sending protocol entity recognizes a new operational ATM Switch network module that is identified by the board and the module numbers This is probably caused by a hot swap of a network module ATM Switch
70. be widely used by telephone companies in their data networks Switched Virtual Channel Connection SVCC A Switched VCC is one which is established and taken down dynamically through control signaling A Virtual Channel Connection VCC is an ATM connection where switching is performed on the VPI VCI fields of each cell Switched Virtual Circuit or Channel SVC a channel established on demand by network sig nalling used for information transport between two locations and lasting only for the dura tion of the transfer the datacom equivalent of a dialed telephone call Switched Virtual Path Connection SVPC a connection which is established and taken down dynamically through control signaling A Virtual Path Connection VPC is an ATM connec tion where switching is performed on the VPI field only of each cell Switching System A set of one or more systems that act together and appear as a single switch for the purposes of PNNI routing Symmetric Connection a connection with the same bandwidth specified for both directions Synchronous signals that are sourced from the same timing reference and hence are identical in frequency Synchronous Data Link Control SDLC IBM s data link protocol used in SNA networks Synchronous Optical Network SONET a body of standards that defines all aspects of trans porting and managing digital traffic over optical facilities in the public network Glossary 32 ATM Switch Network Con
71. by the user Valid values are integers between 1 and 65535 port The port number where the permanent portion of the SPVC resides on the source local switch fabric vpi The virtual path number for the permanent portion of the SPVC on the source local switch fabric vci The virtual channel number for the permanent portion of the SPVC on the source local switch fabric destnsap The ATM NSAP address of the destination remote switch for this SPVC Use the con spvx spvcc pnni destnsap command on the destination switch to obtain this address ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 1 35 Configuring PVCs Parameter Description priority lt priority gt The order in which and the frequency with which you want this SPVC to be tried for a connection Higher priority SPVCs are tried more often Valid values are from 1 to lowestpriority with 1 being the highest priority the first tried and with lowestpriority being the value configured under conf spvx spvcc pnni parameters priority lowestpriority The default value is half of the value of lowestpriority rounded off to the lowest integer The value for lowestpriority is defaulted to 10 domainid lt id gt The PNNI domain ID number on the source local switch fabric The default is 1 which is the ID of the default routing domain name lt name gt An optional name for the user to assign to this PNNI SPVC to help uniquely identify it
72. bytes of fs lecs cfg The information about the LES addresses in your old LECS CFG file may look something like this before editing Match Ordering Mktg 0 Address Mktg 0 Accept Mktg 1 Address Mktg 1 Accept Mktg 0 Mktg 1 47000580 f6e1000000 21a24 90020481a24 900 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 47000580ffe1000000f21a390C0020481a390e00 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX On the workstation that has the LECS CFG file use a text editor to make the following changes 1 Adda new ELAN to the beginning of the Match Ordering list that is named like the old failover ELANs but without the n In this example there are currently two failover ELANS named Mktg 0 and Mktg 1 Therefore add an ELAN named Mktg ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring an Emulated LAN 2 Give the anycast address of the DLE peer servers to the new ELAN Also replace the LES address of the old ELANs with this anycast address except for the last of the n failover ELANs in this case Mktg 1 Leave Mktg 1 with old LES address for now so the LECs can use it until they are all changed over It will be changed at the end of the process 3 If there were any non colocated BUSs none shown in this example delete any lines that refer to them since each BUS will co located with a LES after you upgrade to ForeThought 5 3 x After following the steps above the information about the LES addresses in your L
73. con tracts cas Indicates whether Channel Associated Signalling CAS is to be used on the connection basic indicates that CAS will not be used cas indicates that CAS will be used The default is basic partialfill Indicates how many of the available 47 payload bytes in each cell are used before they are deemed full and ready for transmission across the ATM network i e how much of the ATM cell contains data and how much is filler The range for this parameter is 12 to 47 The default value is 47 for 47 bytes of data partialfill is used to minimize network trans mission latency and is useful especially with time sensitive robbed bit signalling sources ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual B 9 m 3 2 E wn e 2 s s L 2 unan Buunfiyuo5 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Parameter Description reassCDVT lt cdvt gt The Cell Delay Variation Tolerance for cells being received by the segmentation and reas sembly SAR engine The range for this parameter is 100 to 24000 in us and the default is 2000 i e 2 us bufSize The amount of reassembly buffer space allocated for the connection The default is 256 bytes per timeslot integ The amount of time allocated to re establish the connection before while or after the call is established or in the case of interruption The default is 2500 ps idlesupp enable disable enable means idle chann
74. defect This trap gives the support to manage defects that might occur in either the Frame Relay net work or the ATM network even if the PVC Opera tional Status is already down 2001 ifLinkDown This trap indicates that the SNMP agent has detected that the ifOperStatus of this interface is about to transi tion into the down state 2002 ifLinkUp This trap indicates that the SNMP agent has detected that the ifOperStatus of this interface has transitioned out of the down state 2003 framNakMsg This trap is sent when a message from the SCP to the FramePlus network module does not succeed The request that has failed is encoded within the trap as the messageType and the reason for failure is encoded within the errorCode See Table A 15 for the message types and the message requests See Table A 16 for the error codes and their meanings ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring SNMP Table A 15 defines the message types and the message requests for Trap 2003 9 i Table A 15 Message Type Encodings for Trap 2003 2 MessageType Message Request F 0 Configure network module 1 Configure port 2 Send egress Fdl 4 Network module reset 5 Port reset 6 Configure a channel service 7 Request channel service configuration 8 Request port configuration 9 Request connection configuration 10 Channel service reset 17
75. enabled Stats enabled enabled enabled enabled disabled Name service a service b service c T g 3o 2o U5 3 5a zS os 2a oO 7 D 19 Configuring FramePlus Modules D 6 4 Creating FUNI PVCs Now that the profiles and services have been created you can create your FUNI PVCs and apply the EPD PPD profiles to the PVCs For example myswitch configuration funi pvc gt new lt serviceid gt lt fvpi gt lt fvci gt oport lt oport gt ovpi lt ovpi gt ovei lt ovci gt faupe lt index gt afupe lt index gt epdppd lt index gt admin up down name lt name gt note if oport ovpi ovci aren t specified a dangling FRATM PVC will be created The default minimum VCI is 32 and the default maximum VCI is 63 If you are trying to create a PVC on a FUNI service that uses the default FUNI service profile you are limited to this VCI range when specifying the lt fvci gt parameter Currently the FramePlus network module does not permit the establishment of Frame to Frame connections across a single fabric This restriction prevents connections between FramePlus ports located on the same network module or FramePlus ports located across separate modules but attached to the same switch fabric myswitch configuration funi pvc new 4A1 00 0 40 oport 4c1 ovpi 0 ovci 40 name pvc a myswitch configuration funi pvc new 4A1 01 0 41 oport 4c1 ovpi 0 ovci 41 name pvc b
76. flow example are defined as follows 0 0 0 0 0 202 19 88 0 24 TCP 0 23 20 1 1 600 0 1 0x0 UBR 10000 The source address prefix length The destination address prefix length The protocol to which this flow applies and the source and destination ports respectively The set up threshold the tear down threshold and the set up threshold for the default forwarding path respectively The QoS flag currently unused and should be set to 0 the QoS class and the PCR for the specified QoS class respectively ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 6 2 Sample LECS Configuration File CAUTION Do not attempt to edit an existing functional LECS configuration file without first making a backup copy of the file Incorrect modification of the configuration file could result in loss of communication between one or more members of a defined ELAN For a detailed discussion of how to configure an LECS configuration file similar to the one given in this section please refer to Section 3 6 1 The sample LECS configuration file shown at the end of this section in Figure 3 19 and Figure 3 20 defines three ELANs e default e engineering e marketing The Match Ordering statement specifies the ELAN names in the order that prospective cli ents will attempt to match The default configuration parameters are shown with their default values These values apply to all ELANS in this configuration file
77. for cells that are CLP 0 1 in cells per second and the SCR for cells that are CLP 0 in cells per second lt burst gt Specifies the Maximum Burst Size MBS in cells for the QoS class specified VBR and NRT VBR only This is the MBS for cells that are CLP 0 1 in cells and the MBS for cells that are CLP 0 in cells moO 3S cS DG os reo Bo z5 Lines beginning with may be inserted if you wish to include comments or to improve the clarity of the presentation when the file is viewed or printed These lines are ignored when the file is read Lines may be continued by escaping the end of line with a backslash do not enter the quote marks ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 3 29 Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 6 1 3 Defining an ELAN Each ELAN is defined by an address statement whose value denotes the ATM address of the ELAN s LES For example engineering Address C5 0005 80 ffe100 0000 21a 01b9 0020480605b2 00 To configure DLE for an ELAN use the anycast E address in this statement Be sure to use a distinct anycast address for each ELAN in the network It must be unique within the first 19 bytes In addition you may instruct a given ELAN to override any of the default values For exam ple the engineering ELAN could override a Maximum Frame Size setting of 1516 thus engineering Maximum Frame Size 4544 If you want to control which clients may or may not join a given ELAN two addi
78. for ports on port card 4 on an ASX 4000 In the interest of space ports 2c16 through 2c63 and 2d16 through 2d63 are not shown here Table A 9 ASX 4000 Port Card 4 Port Numbering Port Name Software Port Port Name Software Port Number Number Port Card 4 Switch Control Port 5CTL 1024 2c1 384 2d1 448 2c2 385 2d2 449 2c3 386 2d3 450 2c4 387 2d4 451 2c5 388 2d5 452 2c6 389 2d6 453 2c7 390 2d7 454 2c8 391 2d8 455 2c9 392 2d9 456 2c10 393 2d10 457 2c11 394 2d11 458 2c12 395 2d12 459 2c13 396 2d13 460 2c14 397 2d14 461 2c15 398 2d15 462 2c64 447 2d64 511 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring SNMP Table A 10 shows the numbering conventions that are referred to in the MIBs for ports on port card 5 on an ASX 4000 In the interest of space ports 3a16 through 3a63 and 3b16 through 3b63 Oo are not shown here S E Table A 10 ASX 4000 Port Card 5 Port Numbering Port Name E oc Port Name Erde ae S Port Card 5 Switch Control Port 5CTL 1024 3al 512 3b1 576 3a2 513 3b2 577 3a3 514 3b3 578 3a4 515 3b4 579 3a5 516 3b5 580 3a6 517 3b6 581 3a7 518 3b7 582 3a8 519 3b8 583 3a9 520 3b9 584 3al0 521 3b10 585 3a11 522 3b11 586 3a12 523 3b12 587 3a13 524 3b13 588 3a14 525 3b14 589 3a15 526 3b15 590 3a64 575 3b64 639 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual A 11 Co
79. for the current CES connections enter the following myswitch configuration ces gt show lt id gt advanced idlesupp myswitch configuration ces gt show idlesupp CES Idlesupp Idle Idle NoOf Idle IdleInt Service State Type Mask Patt Patterns Period us 20024 disabled 20031 enabled pattern FF 1 TE 500 20032 enabled cas 01b 1 10b 100 20033 disabled 20034 disabled 20035 enabled pattern FF 1 TE 500 20036 enabled cas 11 1 00 100 20037 disabled The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description CES Service The identification number assigned by the switch of this CES connection Idlesupp State enabled means idle channel suppression is going to be used on this connection disabled means idle channel suppression is not going to be used on this connection Idle Type The idle detection mechanism used on this connection pattern means idle detection is based on idle patterns cas means idle detection is based on CAS signalling This field is read only Idle Mask The mask pattern for idle detection on this connection This method of idle detection can only be used on basic and unstructured connections NoOf Patt The number of idle patterns configured for detection This field is read only Idle Patterns The patterns for idle detection on this connection For detection based on both idle and mask patterns it contains the idle octet patterns F
80. for this parameter not to be present EPD PPD is enabled ubrTagging ubrTagging means that all UBR traffic is tagged set to CLP 1 on this connection If ubrTagging is not entered then UBR traffic is not tagged on this connection This com mand only applies to UBR traffic By default UBR traffic is not tagged PPPoP This optional parameter can only be used if the connection is AALS i e the aa15 param eter is present This parameter indicates that Partial Packet Policing is going to be per formed on this connection The default is for this parameter not to be present which leaves Partial Packet Policing disabled AltCLP This optional parameter only applies to connections on Series D network modules It indi cates that the alternate CLP threshold configured using conf module traffic d altclpthresh should be used for all connections created with this UPC contract The default is for this parameter not to be present which means the connections will not use the alternate CLP threshold 1 44 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring PVCs Parameter Description estbw lt kcps gt Applies only to UBR SPVCs Lets you assign an estimated bandwidth value in kilocells per second for individual UBR SPVCs The value must be an integer from 0 to 65534 This value is used by the load balanced UBR routing feature See Part 1 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual for more inf
81. in a Point to Multi point connection to all of the N 1 remaining endpoints DS LIT 3 2 Each of the endpoints can send information directly to any other endpoint but the receiv ing endpoint cannot distinguish which of the endpoints is sending information without additional e g higher layer information Multipoint to Point Connection a Point to Multipoint Connection may have zero bandwidth from the Root Node to the Leaf Nodes and non zero return bandwidth from the Leaf Nodes to the Root Node Such a connection is also known as a Multipoint to Point Connection Multiprotocol over ATM MPOA An effort taking place in the ATM Forum to standardize pro tocols for the purpose of running multiple network layer protocols over ATM Narrowband Channel sub voicegrade channel with a speed range of 100 to 200 bps National TV Standards Committee NTSC Started in the US in 1953 from a specification laid down by the National Television Standards Committee It takes the B Y and R Y color differ ence signals attenuates them to I and Q then modulates them using double sideband sup pressed subcarrier at 3 58MHz The carrier reference is sent to the receiver as a burst during the back porch An industry group that defines how television signals are encoded and trans mitted in the US See also PAL SECAM for non U S countries Near End in a relationship between two devices in a circuit the near end device is the one that is loc
82. incoming port on which the CES connection exists Timeslots Indicates which timeslots 1 24 for DS1 1 31 for E1 are configured for the input port a11 indicates unstructured service Input VPI The incoming VPI value of the connection Input VCI The incoming VCI value of the connection Type The type of ATM connection i e PVC or SPVC that is associated with the CES connection Output Port The outgoing port on which the CES connection exists Timeslots Indicates which timeslots 1 24 for DS1 1 31 for E1 are configured for the output port all indicates unstructured service Output VPI The outgoing VPI value of the connection Output VCI The outgoing VCI value of the connection B 12 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring Circuit Emulation Services To display the advanced settings of the current CES connections enter the following myswitch configuration ces gt show advanced Service Clock Partial Max Integ Service MapVPI MapVCI Type Mode Cas Fill BufSize CDVT Period 2024 0 129 structured synch basic O0 256 900 2500 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description CES Service The identification number assigned by the switch of this CES connection MapVPI The incoming VPI value of the connection MapVCI The incoming VCI value of the connection Service Type Shows if this connection uses structured or unstructured service Clock Mode Synch means that
83. interconnected with routers Internet Addresses the numbers used to identify hosts on an internet network Internet host numbers are divided into two parts the first is the network number and the second or local part is a host number on that particular network There are also three classes of networks in the Internet based on the number of hosts on a given network Large networks are classified as Class A having addresses in the range 1 126 and having a maximum of 16 387 064 hosts Medium networks are classified as Class B with addresses in the range 128 191 and with a maximum of 64 516 hosts Small networks are classified as Class C having addresses in the range 192 254 with a maximum of 254 hosts Addresses are given as dotted decimal numbers in the following format nnn nnn nnn nnn In a Class A network the first of the numbers is the network number the last three numbers are the local host address In a Class B network the first two numbers are the network the last two are the local host address In a Class C network the first three numbers are the network address the last number is the local host address The following table summarizes the classes and sizes Class First 4 Max Hosts A 1 126 16 387 064 B 129 191 64 516 C 192 223 254 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary 17 Glossary Network mask values are used to identify the network portion and the host portion of the address Default network mask
84. it is repaired 4 If the telephone company finds that this equipment is exceeding tolerable parameters the telephone company can temporarily disconnect service although they will attempt to give you advance notice if possible 5 Under the FCC Rules no customer is authorized to repair this equipment This restriction applies regardless of whether the equipment is in or out of warranty 6 If the telephone company alters their equipment in a manner that will affect use of this device they must give you advance warning so as to give you the opportunity for uninter rupted service You will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC CANADIAN IC CS 03 COMPLIANCE STATEMENT NOTICE The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets cer tain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements The Industry Canada label does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local tele communications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified con nector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the
85. last bit of the same PDU crosses a sec ond designated boundary Transmission Control Protocol TCP a specification for software that bundles and unbundles sent and received data into packets manages the transmission of packets on a network and checks for errors Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP set of communications protocols that has evolved since the late 1970s when it was first developed by the Department of Defense Because programs supporting these protocols are available on so many different computer systems they have become an excellent way to connect different types of computers over networks Transmission Convergence TC generates and receives transmission frames and is responsi ble for all overhead associated with the transmission frame The TC sublayer packages cells into the transmission frame Transmission Convergence Sublayer TCS This is part of the ATM physical layer that defines how cells will be transmitted by the actual physical layer Transparent Asynchronous Transmitter Receiver Interface TAXI Encoding scheme used for FDDI LANs as well as for ATM supports speed typical of 100 Mbps over multimode fiber Glossary 34 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary Transport Layer Layer Four of the OSI reference model that is responsible for maintaining reliable end to end communications across the network trap a program interrupt mechanism that automatically upda
86. name service a The newly created service id is 4A1 00 H he newly created service id is 4A1 01 H he newly created service id is 4A1 02 myswitch configuration funi show Searching for FUNI services SvcId TimeSlot Admin Funi Serv Signal 4A1 00 1 up 1 0 nonexist 4A1 01 2 up 0 1 nonexist 4A1 02 3 up 0 0 nonexist Traps enabled enabled enabled myswitch configuration funi new 4al 3 name service c Stats disabled disabled disabled myswitch configuration funi new 4al 2 service 1 name service b Name service a service b service c As you can see in the Stats field the collection of statistics is disabled by default at the ser vice level It is enabled by default at the module level If you want to collect statistics you must enable that functionality here at the service level as well myswitch configuration funi stats lt servic myswitch configuration funi stats 4A1 00 myswitch configuration funi stats 4A1 01 myswitch configuration funi stats 4A1 02 myswitch configuration module fram stats myswitch configuration module fram stats myswitch configuration funi show Searching for FUNI services SvcId TimeSlot Admin Funi Serv Signal 4A1 00 1 up de 0 nonexist 4A1 01 2 up 0 1 nonexist 4A1 02 3 up 0 0 nonexist ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual eid enable disable enable enable enable module 4a enabled Traps enabled enabled
87. negotiated peak cell rate 11 110 3 Cell Delineation the protocol for recognizing the beginning and end of ATM cells within the raw serial bit stream Cell Header ATM Layer protocol control information Cell Loss Priority CLP the last bit of byte four in an ATM cell header indicates the eligibility of the cell for discard by the network under congested conditions If the bit is set to 1 the cell may be discarded by the network depending on traffic conditions Cell Loss Ratio In a network cell loss ratio is 1 x y where y is the number of cells that arrive in an interval at an ingress of the network and x is the number of these y cells that leave at the egress of the network element Cell Loss Ratio CLR CLR is a negotiated QoS parameter and acceptable values are network specific The objective is to minimize CLR provided the end system adapts the traffic to the changing ATM layer transfer characteristics The Cell Loss Ratio is defined for a connection as Lost Cells Total Transmitted Cells The CLR parameter is the value of CLR that the network agrees to offer as an objective over the lifetime of the connection It is expressed as an order of magnitude having a range of 10 1 to 10 15 and unspecified Cell Misinsertion Rate CMR the ratio of cells received at an endpoint that were not originally transmitted by the source end in relation to the total number of cells properly transmitted Cell Rate Adaptation CRA
88. over a period of time Data direct connections are also cleared if they remain inactive for a period of time 3 8 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 4 Distributed LAN Emulation Distributed LAN Emulation DLE allows the LES and BUS functions that are provided to each ELAN to be distributed among multiple interconnected server platforms In this way DLE provides these ELANS with resiliency and scalability To understand DLE operation it is useful to compare DLE to the current LANE service model which uses a single LES and BUS for each ELAN This section first describes a simple example of the single server model and then gives a detailed overview of the DLE model 3 4 4 Single Server LANE Services Model Figure 3 3 shows the topology of a single server supporting an ELAN In this example the LECs are hosts that are using IP and the LES and BUS are running on the same switch Three LANE LECs are all registered in the same ELAN called Eng and each is therefore connected to a LES and to a BUS for that ELAN Eng LES BUS 1 Eng LEC 1 Eng LEC 2 Eng LEC 3 Figure 3 3 Single Server LANE Services Model mo 39S cS DG 9 amp 5 reo m z5 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 3 9 Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 4 1 1 Using a Single Server When LEC 1 wants to contact LEC 3 several messages are exchanged First LEC 1 attempts to learn the MAC
89. part of the SDU Interface Data Unit IDU The unit of information transferred to from the upper layer in a sin gle interaction across the SAP Each IDU contains interface control information and may also contain the whole or part of the SDU Glossary 16 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary Interim Local Management Interface ILMI the standard that specifies the use of the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP and an ATM management information base MIB to provide network status and configuration information Intermediate System IS a system that provides forwarding functions or relaying functions or both for a specific ATM connection OAM cells may be generated and received 11 110 3 International Standards Organization ISO a voluntary non treaty organization founded in 1946 that is responsible for creating international standards in many areas including comput ers and communications International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative Committee CCITT the international stan dards body for telecommunications Internet note the capital I the largest internet in the world including large national back bone nets and many regional and local networks worldwide The Internet uses the TCP IP suite Networks with only e mail connectivity are not considered on the Internet internet while an internet is a network the term internet is usually used to refer to a collec tion of networks
90. policy prefix is a policy advertise or summary the policy prefix is advertised or summarized If there are multiple leaked addresses with dif ferent scopes for which the policy prefix is longest matching then the one with the widest scope is used to determine the scope with which to advertise or summarize the policy prefix The following rule is used to determine the scope with which to advertise an address or a pol icy prefix e If the address used to determine the scope chosen above was leaked from a strictly lower level numerically larger area then the scope of the address is used otherwise the level of the area to which the advertising node belongs is used Metrics can optionally be configured with a policy prefix In this case the configured metrics are included in the advertisement of the policy prefix 6 3 2 4 VP Trunk QoS Extension This feature allows QoS parameters CTD CDV and CLR to be configured for VP trunks For a PNNI interface that is configured on a VP trunk the associated QoS parameters are computed as the combination of the parameters configured on the VP trunk and those that are part of the switch and network modules This feature also allows a particular service category to be con figured as not supported in which case the associated PNNI link does not advertise the ser vice category thus preventing connections with the given service category from using the link ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual
91. reduced first Private Branch Exchange PBX a private phone system switch that connects to the public telephone network and offers in house connectivity To reach an outside line the user must dial a digit like 8 or 9 Private Network Node Interface or Private Network to Network Interface PNNI a protocol that defines the interaction of private ATM switches or groups of private ATM switches Programmable Read Only Memory PROM a chip based information storage area that can be recorded by an operator but erased only through a physical process Protocol a set of rules and formats semantic and syntactic that determines the communica tion behavior of layer entities in the performance of the layer functions ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary 27 Glossary Protocol Control Information the information exchanged between corresponding entities using a lower layer connection to coordinate their joint operation Protocol Data Unit PDU a unit of data specified in a layer protocol and consisting of protocol control information and layer user data Proxy the process in which one system acts for another system to answer protocol requests Proxy Agent an agent that queries on behalf of the manager used to monitor objects that are not directly manageable Public Data Network PDN a network designed primarily for data transmission and intended for sharing by many users from many organizations Pulse Code Modul
92. second line At the same time a command is entered automatically into the current configuration data base which means that this virtual path is created every time the SCP is restarted 1 20 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring PVCs 1 5 2 Creating an Originating or Terminating Path To create an originating or terminating path virtual path terminator log in to AMI and enter the following parameters configuration vpt new lt port gt lt vpi gt term orig reserved lt Kbs gt minvei lt vci gt maxvci lt vci gt The reserved minvci and maxvci parameters are optional for creating originating or terminating paths The advanced traffic management options for creating originating paths are as follows shapeovpi lt vpi gt loopvpi lt vpi gt vbrob lt percent gt vbrbuffob lt percent gt The advanced QoS options for creating originating or terminating paths are as follows o e 3 zh Z z v lt ie o cbr none default lt qosindex gt rtvbr none default lt qosindex gt nrtvbr none default lt qosindex gt ubr none default lt qosindex gt abr none default lt qosindex gt The lt gosindex gt must exist conf qosext E new before it can be applied to the originating terminating path These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number for th
93. sensor is identified by the temperature sensor index 36 asxSonetLOSon This trap indicates that the specified SONET port is experiencing Loss Of Signal Bellcore Document TA NWT 000253 Section 6 3 1 1 1 states that A SONET NE shall declare a LOS failure when the LOS defect persists for 2 5 5 seconds or when a LOS defect is present and the criteria for LOF failure decla ration have been met 37 asxSonetLOSoff This trap indicates that the LOS condition identified by trap asxSonetLOSon has been cleared 38 asxSonetPathLabelOn This trap indicates that the specified SONET port is receiving and errored C2 Path Label byte Reference Bellcore Document TA NWT 000253 Section 3 3 2 3 and 6 3 1 1 8 the Path Label C2 byte should have the value 0x13 39 asxSonetPathLabelOff This trap indicates that the Errored Path Label C2 byte error condition signalled by the asxSonetPath LabelOn trap has been cleared ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual QO fe E a amp i E Ss Co o Z v Configuring SNMP Table A 14 SNMP Traps Supported on the FORE Switches Continued Trap Sans Namie Trap Name Description 40 asxSonetLineAISon This trap indicates that the specified SONET port is receiving a Line level Alarm Indication Signal from the far end equipment 41 asxSonetLineATISoff This trap indicates that
94. telephone company pro vided equipment to the public telephone network Federal Communications Commission FCC a board of commissioners appointed by the Pres ident under the Communications Act of 1934 with the authority to regulate all interstate tele communications originating in the United States including transmission over phone lines Fiber Distributed Data Interface FDDI high speed data network that uses fiber optic as the physical medium Operates in similar manner to Ethernet or Token Ring only faster File Transfer Protocol FTP a TCP IP protocol that lets a user on one computer access and transfer data to and from another computer over a network ftp is usually the name of the program the user invokes to accomplish this task First In First Out FIFO method of coordinating the sequential flow of data through a buffer Flag a bit pattern of six binary 1 s bounded by a binary 0 at each end forms a 0111 1110 or Hex 7E It is used to mark the beginning and or end of a frame Flow Control The way in which information is controlled in a network to prevent loss of data when the receiving buffer is near its capacity ForeThought PNNI FT PNNI a FORE Systems routing and signalling protocol that uses pri vate ATM NSAP addresses a precursor to ATM Forum PNNI see PNNI Forward Error Correction FEC A technique used by a receiver for correcting errors incurred in transmission over a communications chan
95. terminate N A 37 3K 5 35 pvc 1A2 0 terminate N A 0 8 5 6 pve 1A3 0 terminate N A 0 8K 5 6 pvc 1A3 65 terminate N A 0 8 120 6 pve 1A4 0 terminate N A 0 8K 5 6 pvc 1CTL 0 terminate N A 45 4K 1023 85 pvc originate 1A1 0 N A l4K 5 T pvc originate 1A2 0 N A 0 8 5 6 pvc originate 1A3 0 N A 0 8K 5 6 pve originate 1A3 65 N A 0 8K 120 6 pvc originate 1A4 0 N A 0 8K 5 6 pvc Press return for more q to quit q and you enter the following conf signalling new 1A3 65 ilmi down minvci 70 maxvci 200 then the actual range is computed as an intersection based on the range you enter 70 200 and the range available in that VP 1 120 To see what the actual VCI range is enter the following command conf signalling show atmranges Admin Admin Oper Oper Admin Oper Oper Port VPI MinVCI MaxVCI MinVCI MaxVCI MaxVPI MaxSvccVPI MaxSvpcVPI SvpCapable 1A1 0 32 SEI 32 511 1022 N A N A N A 1A2 0 32 511 32 511 1022 N A N A N A 1A3 0 32 SIL 32 SLL 1022 N A N A N A 1A3 65 70 200 70 120 1022 N A N A N A 1A4 0 32 SIT 32 511 1022 N A N A N A ICTL 0 32 1023 32 1023 0 N A N A N A In this example since VCIs 1 120 are already reserved on VP 65 the range of 70 120 is the actual range allowed ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 7 3 Signalling 7 1 2 Determining the VCI Allocation Range with ILMI Up If ILMI is operational then the peer switch s VCI allocation range is obtained by reading its ILMI MIB variable atmfAtmLayerMaxVccs The V
96. terminator The default is 1 MaxVCI The top number for the range of VCIs that are reserved for VCCs on this virtual path ter minator The default is 511 VCs The number of virtual channels that are currently using this vpt Protocol The type of protocol running on this channel ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 1 9 Configuring PVCs To list all of the advanced options about all of the existing virtual path terminators enter the following parameters configuration vpt show advanced Input Output Port VPI Port VPI ShapeVPI LoopVPI VBROB BuffOB 1Bl 0 terminate N A N A N A N A 1Bl 1 terminate N A N A N A N A originate 1B1 0 port port originate 1B1 1 10 port port The fields in the advanced display are defined as follows Field Description Input Port The incoming port number of the vpt Shows originate if it is an originating path Input VPI The incoming virtual path number Output Port The outgoing port number of the vpt Shows terminate if itis a terminating path Output VPI The outgoing virtual path number ShapeVPI Shows the output port on which traffic shaping has been enabled for this originating vpt This only applies to Series C network modules N A means that shaping has not been con figured on this port LoopVPI Shows the looping port that has been configured to loop traffic on that port for shaping on a Series D port N A means that looping has not been confi
97. that makes FIT PNNI s simplified routing pos sible By segmenting a large network into smaller peer groups of nodes FI PNNI reduces the amount of network topology information that those very nodes must maintain ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 5 1 mn oc gt E Ke gt U Z z ForeThought PNNI 5 1 FT PNNI Routing The FI PNNI routing protocol serves to distribute topology and address reachability informa tion between switches and groups of switches in a network This topology and addressing information is used by switches to compute paths through the network The functions of the FI PNNI routing protocol include the following e Hello Protocol e Topology Database Exchange e Flooding e Hierarchical Routing 5 1 1 Hello Protocol FI PNNI hello packets are exchanged between neighboring nodes Each switch node trans mits a hello indication on each of its FIT PNNI routing channels at regular intervals The time between these hello indications is called the Hello Indication Interval When a switch receives a hello indication from one of its neighbors it stores the logical link loglink from that neigh bor to itself in the topology database Based on the hello indications loglinks are refreshed periodically Since loglinks discovered as a result of hello indications are unidirectional each switch stores unidirectional loglinks with its immediate neighbor as the source and itself as the destinatio
98. the LEC is still registering with the ELAN Wait a few seconds and check it again When it has finished the OperStatus field displays up You can also use the command conf lane lec show advanced to display more information about the LEC 3 After the first LEC has joined the ELAN you can perform the same steps in this section on another switch to allow a LEC to run on that switch You can also use the VLAN Manager or the host software to add more LECS to this ELAN Once all the LECs have joined the ELAN is complete 3 44 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 7 Upgrading an ELAN to Use DLE This section describes how to upgrade your ELAN if you had previously configured LANE you want to upgrade some or all of the clients from ForeThought 4 1 x to ForeThought 5 3 x and you want to upgrade all the equipment that is running services to ForeThought 5 3 x using DLE If you used the VLAN Manager to create your E ELAN you should use it to upgrade the ELAN Refer to the ForeView VLAN Manager User s Manual for the appropriate steps The following basic steps are involved in upgrading your ELAN to use DLE Each of these steps is described in detail in the following sections It is recommended that you read the entire section before attempting to upgrade to DLE These steps describe the commands for a switch Refer to the corresponding User s Manual for the appropriate steps for commands for hosts PowerH
99. the channel is connected to the source node which is outside the network tran transit means that the egress endpoint of the channel is connected to a node within the network and term terminating means that the egress endpoint of the channel is connected to the destination node which is outside the network pmp Indicates this is a point to multipoint channel mpp Indicates this is a multipoint to point channel 1 30 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring PVCs Parameter Description mpmp Indicates this is a multipoint to multipoint channel 1 By indicating pmp mpp or mpmp you are only assigning a label for record keeping purposes The switch does not neces sarily create the type of channel you have specified If you assign a connection type but do not assign a pmp mpp or mpmp label the switch assigns a label of pp point to point The following is an example of how to create a uni directional virtual channel which specifies the call record connection type as transit localhost config vcc gt new 3b1 0 100 3b4 0 100 inctype tran outctype tran The following is an example of how to create a uni directional virtual channel which has the name customer_a assigned to it ie e E Q c E Q U lt i9 0 myswitch configuration vcc gt new 3b2 0 145 3b3 0 145 name customer_a The following is an example of how to create a bi directional virtual cha
100. tions 8 1 2 1 Admin Privileges A person whose userid is configured with admin privileges is allowed to access and use all of the AMI commands This level of privileges should be reserved for the system administrator 8 1 2 2 User Privileges A person whose userid is configured with user privileges is allowed to access and use all AMI commands except the following conf security login backup conf security login delete conf security login modify conf security login new conf secu rity login password to modify passwords other than your own conf security login restore conf security login show all conf security login securid commands all conf security ipaccess commands all conf security nsapfiltering commands conf snmp sets and all debug commands The default is admin 8 1 3 AMI Access Levels The network administrator can configure four different levels of AMI access for userids serial network all and none Each method is described in the following sections 8 1 3 1 Serial Access A person whose userid has a serial level of access is allowed to login to the switch only via the serial port 8 1 3 2 Network Access A person whose userid has a network level of access is allowed to login to the switch only via telnet Ayanoasg 8 1 3 3 All Access A person whose userid has an a11 level of access is allowed to login to the switch via the serial port and via telnet 8 1 3 4 No Access A person whose userid has a no
101. to log in by an unauthorized person NetSP CLIENTS Used for IBM s Network Security Program P EXTENDED TACACS Indicates if the server supports XTACACS clients s TACACS PLUS Indicates if the server supports TACACS clients MASTER SERVER The name of the master server MASTER SERVER ADDRESS The IP address of the master server SLAVE SERVER Indicates that the slave server may be installed If it is installed its name and IP address become part of the configuration record AUTHENTICATION SERVICE The name of this authentication service as it appears in the etc services or in a NIS Services file PORT NUMBER The UDP port number that has been assigned for the use of this service ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 8 7 Security Parameter Description ADDRESSES Indicates how network devices shall have the IP addresses resolved BAD PASSCODES The number of failed login attempts with incorrect passcodes after which the server puts the token associated with that userid into Next Token Mode When the token is in this mode the next time the same user tries to log in and gets the passcode correct he or she is also prompted to enter the next token code i e the one that appears next on the token after 60 seconds RESPONSE DELAY Indicates how long an authentication request should be held by the server before a response is returned to the client TOKENS IN LICENSE The number of tokens
102. to the topology is recognized immediately by all nodes switches having a direct connection to the new node Then each switch that has recognized the new switch sends a message to each of its direct connections and so on Even tually and within a very brief period of time every switch in the network is aware of the new addition and the links by which that new addition can be reached This topology is stored by each switch in its local topology database mn oc gt c vo gt U zZ In a small local area network LAN the topology is relatively simple meaning that the switches in the LAN have a relatively small topology database to maintain As the LAN grows however and more switches are added that same database can grow to be very large in a short period of time As this topology database grows the amount of information a switch must look up when searching for an address also grows In the end this can result in delayed connection set up congestion in the network and even lost data Figure 5 2 depicts a typical ATM network containing 21 FORE switches 6 The hierarchy of this network is flat meaning that each switch must be aware of all the other switches in the network as well as all the possible routes to those switches As more switches are added to this network the hierarchy will become more complex and the switches will have to contend with larger topology databases ATM Switch
103. transfer electronic mail between hosts Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP the Internet standard protocol for managing nodes on an IP network Glossary 30 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary Simple Protocol for ATM Network Signalling SPANS FORE Systems proprietary signalling protocol used for establishing SVCs between FORE Systems equipment Single Mode Fiber SMF Fiber optic cable in which the signal or light propagates in a single mode or path Since all light follows the same path or travels the same distance a transmitted pulse is not dispersed and does not interfere with adjacent pulses SMF fibers can support longer distances and are limited mainly by the amount of attenuation Refer to MMF 11 110 3 Small Computer Systems Interface SCSI a standard for a controller bus that connects hard ware devices to their controllers on a computer bus typically used in small systems Smart PVC SPVC a generic term for any communications medium which is permanently provisioned at the end points but switched in the middle In ATM there are two kinds of SPVCs smart permanent virtual path connections SPVPCs and smart permanent virtual channel connections SPVCCs snmpd an SMNP agent for a given adapter card Source Part of communications system which transmits information Source Address SA The address from which the message or data originated Source MAC Address SA A six octet
104. type auto publicUNI IISP privateNNI privateUNI The type and version either both have to be auto or both have to be given a parameter other than auto Specifying the type as auto and hard configuring the version or vice versa is not allowed If a type is not entered then the type parameter defaults to auto Similarly the ver sion parameter defaults to auto if a version is not entered The one exception to this rule to allow backward compatibility is for the type to be entered as publicUNI and the version to be entered as aut o Table 7 3 shows the valid combinations Table 7 3 Valid Type and Version Combinations Type Version auto auto privateUNI uni30 privateUNI uni31 privateUNI uni40 publicUNI auto publicUNI uni30 publicUNI uni31 publicUNI uni40 IISP uni30 IISP uni31 IISP uni40 privateNNI pnnil0 1 This is the only exception to the rule 7 12 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Signalling 7 3 2 1 1 Examples of Valid Configurations The following are examples of valid configurations to enter into AMI conf sig new conf sig new type privateUNI version uni30 conf sig new type privateUNI version uni31 conf sig new type privateUNI version uni40 conf sig new type publicUNI conf sig new type publicUNI version auto conf sig new conf sig new type publicUNI version uni31 conf sig new type publicUNI version uni40 conf sig new type IISP version u
105. using seg 1ist allows you to specify the segments for which you want to display the specified bridge statistics Any messages that appear on the screen during software installation and network interface administration are shown in Courier font to distinguish them from the rest of the text as fol lows Are all four conditions true iv ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Preface Important Information Indicators To call your attention to safety and otherwise important information that must be reviewed to ensure correct and complete installation as well as to avoid damage to the FORE Systems product or to your system FORE Systems utilizes the following WARNING CAUTION NOTE indicators EETTCTRI WARNING statements contain information that is critical to the safety of the operator and or the system Do not proceed beyond a WARNING statement until the indicated conditions are fully understood or met This information could prevent serious injury to the operator dam age to the FORE Systems product the system or currently loaded software and is indicated as follows WARNING Hazardous voltages are present To reduce the risk of electrical shock and danger to personal health follow the instructions carefully CAUTION statements contain information that is important for proper installation opera tion Compliance with CAUTION statements can prevent possible equipment damage and or loss of data and are indicated
106. value uniquely identifying an end point and which is sent in an IEEE LAN frame header to indicate source of frame Source Traffic Descriptor a set of traffic parameters belonging to the ATM Traffic Descriptor used during the connection set up to capture the intrinsic traffic characteristics of the connec tion requested by the source Spanning Tree Protocol provides loop free topology in a network environment where there are redundant paths Static Route a route that is entered manually into the routing table Statistical Multiplexing a technique for allowing multiple channels and paths to share the same link typified by the ability to give the bandwidth of a temporarily idle channel to another channel Stick and Click SC Designation for an Optical Connector featuring a 2 5 mm physically con tacting ferrule with a push pull mating design Commonly referred to as Structured Cabling Structured Connectors or Stick and Click Stick and Turn ST A fiber optic connector designed by AT amp T which uses the bayonet style coupling rather than screw on as the SMA uses The ST is generally considered the eventual replacement for the SMA type connector Store and Forward the technique of receiving a message storing it until the proper outgoing line is available then retransmitting it with no direct connection between incoming and out going lines Straight Tip ST see Stick and Turn Structured Cabling SC see Stick and Cl
107. wait Connected to 198 29 22 46 asx200bx fishtank 2 Run the following command on the destination switch to obtain that switch s NSAP address fishtank conf spvx spvcc pnni destnsap 1 1d1 Destination Nsap 0x47 000580ffe1000000f21a2ec0 0020480d0211 00 3 Go back to the source switch and create a new PNNI SPVC Copy the NSAP address into the command for the lt destnsap gt parameter fishtank gt localhost myswitch conf spvx spvcc pnni new lal O0 100 0x47 000580 f e1000000 21a2ec0 0020480d0211 00 The following is an example of how to create a PNNI SPVC that uses DTLs 1 Perform steps 1 and 2 above 2 Go back to the source switch and create a new PNNI SPVC Copy the NSAP address into the command for the lt destnsap gt parameter Indicate the indices and weights that you want to use for the DTLs fishtank gt localhost myswitch conf spvx spvcc pnni new lal O 100 0x47 000580 fe1000000 21a2ec0 0020480d0211 00 reroute enable ftpnniDtlIndexl 1 ftpnniDTLWeight1 300 ftpnniDtlIndex2 2 ftpnniDTLWeight2 250 ftpnniDtlIndex3 3 ftpnniDTLWeight3 200 1 38 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring PVCs 1 6 Traffic Types The following sections contain informal Eu definitions of the concepts presented For a detailed understanding of these issues please see the ATM Forum s UNI 3 1 and TM 4 0 Specifications Quality of Service QOS Management is based on the bandwidth parameter
108. you could use the following syntax unan Buunfiuo5 m 3 E 2 E wn e t s L 2 myswitch configuration ces new port lt timeslots gt idlesupp enable disable idlepat idle pattern cas pattern idleintp lt idleintp gt oport lt oport gt ots ots oidlesupp enable disable oidlepat idle pattern cas pattern oidleintp lt idleintp gt For example myswitch configuration ces new 1a3 1 idlesupp enable idlepat 2F idleintp 500 oport 1b2 ots 1 oidlesupp enable oidlepat 1F oidleintp 600 Alternatively you could use the following syntax myswitch configuration ces new port lt timeslots gt idlesupp enable disable idlepat idle pattern cas pattern idleintp lt idleintp gt oport lt oport gt ovpi lt ovpi gt ovci lt ovci gt For example myswitch configuration ces new 1a3 1 idlesupp enable idlepat 2F idleintp 500 oport 1b2 ovpi 0 ovci 100 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual B 7 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services B 2 Configuring CES Connections The ces commands let you create and delete CES connections as well as display the status of existing connections You can display the list of available subcommands by typing at the ces level myswitch configuration ces gt new delete show B 2 1 Creating a New CES Connection To create anew CES connection you must set several parameters Enter the following t
109. 00 Mktg anycast c5 0005 80 e100 0000 21c 1265b 0020481c126b 66 peers 47 0005 80 e100 0000 21a 24 9 0020481a24 9 00 47 0005 80 e100 0000 21c 10bb 0020481c10bb 90 Use the show command to verify the information that you entered myswitch configuration lane les show Admin Oper Les ELAN ELAN Index State State Sel Type MTU Name SECURE FwdTLVs FwdARPs ID 1 up up 0x00 ethernet 1516 Mktg disable enable disable 100 LES 0x47 0005 80 6e100 0000 21a 24 9 0020481a24 9 00 c5 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21c 126b 0020481c126b 66 ANYCAST BUS 0x47 0005 80 6e100 0000 21a 24 9 0020481a24 9 00 Co Located PEER 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 21c 10505 0020481c10Dbb 90 Create each of the other peer servers using the same anycast address and giving them the peer address es of each peer in the ELAN In this example there is only one peer myswitch configuration lane les new 0x90 Mktg anycast c5 0005 80 e100 0000 21c 1265 0020481c126b 66 47 0005 80 e100 0000 21c 10bb 0020481c10bb 90 47 0005 80 e100 0000 21a 24 9 0020481a24 9 00 peers Use the show command to verify the information that you entered 3 g ze 03 myswitch configuration lane les gt show re Admin Oper Les ELAN ELAN Py Index State State Sel Type MTU Name SECURE FwdTLVs FwdARPs ID 23 1 up up 0x90 ethernet 1516 Mktg disable enable disable 100 LES 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21c 10bb 0020481c10bb 90 BUS 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21
110. 1 3 LevelS 0 cee eee ee 6 3 2 2 Domains 0 cee ee 6 3 2 2 1 Configuring Domains 6 3 2 3 Propagation of Reachability Information 6 3 2 3 1 PONCIOS 22 up her EEA ting 6 3 2 3 2 Scope 2 eee ee eee 6 3 2 3 3 The Process for Leaking Reachability Information 0 0200 eae 6 3 84 VP Trunk QoS Extension ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Table of Contents TOC 5 Table of Contents CHAPTER 7 Signalling 7 1 VCI Allocation Range 0 0 cece e 7 1 7 1 1 Determining the VCI Allocation Range with ILMI Down 7 2 7 1 2 Determining the VCI Allocation Range with ILMI Up 7 4 7 2 Signalling SCOPE sorde ME tees oe Die ne A UAR RN MEET RE ER 7 7 7 2 1 VG SDaCO s track cpi adhe a hs nae Pe oeebdasd ed alesis tee add 7 7 7 2 2 Dynamic Paths 00000 e 7 8 7 3 Signalling Channel Auto Configuration Procedures 000000 7 9 7 3 1 Overview of Signalling Channel Auto Configuration 7 9 7 3 2 Rules for Signalling Channel Auto Configuration 7 12 7 3 2 1 Specifying the Type and Interface Version 7 12 7 3 2 1 1 Examples of Valid Configurations 7 13 7 3 2 1 2 Examples of Invalid Configurations 7 14 7 3 2 2 Specifying the Scope and Mode 5 7 15 7 3 2 2 1 Examples of Valid Configurations 7 16 7 8 2 2 Exa
111. 1 Edit the LECS CFG File reds tenaaa de cee 3 46 3 7 2 Delete the LES and BUS 0 0 cee eee 3 47 3 7 3 Upgrade the Switches Running Services 0 0005 3 48 3 7 4 Create the DLE Peer Servers llli lll llle 3 48 3 7 5 Transfer the Updated LECS CFG File 0000 3 50 3 7 6 R siarbihe LEGS s aver Lt T eere lee eere Slee da 3 50 3 7 7 Recreate the EEGS i cuve wee ade Ente rs 3 50 3 7 8 Create the Last DLE Peer 20 0 c cece eee eee 3 52 3 7 9 Add the Last DLE Peer to Each Peer List 3 52 3 7 10 Update the LECS CFG File 0 cece eee 3 53 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual TOC 3 Table of Contents 3 7 11 Transfer the Final LECS CFG File 20 0 0c cee eee ee 3 53 3 7 12 Restartthe LECS 0 0 tees 3 54 3 8 Upgrading an ELAN without Using DLE 0 0 000 eae eee 3 55 3 8 1 Deleting the Non Co located Services 0 0000e ee eee 3 56 3 8 1 4 Administer Down the Services 0000 000 3 56 3 8 1 2 Delete the Non Co located LES and BUS 3 56 3 8 1 2 1 Edit the LECS CFG File 3 56 3 8 2 Upgrade the Switches Running Services 000 3 57 3 8 3 Recreate the LES and BUS Together 000000 3 57 3 8 4 Administer the Services Up lisse lessen 3 58 CHAPTER4 MPOA 4 1 Overview of LANE MPOA lssessee eas 4 1 4 2 LANE
112. 2 Classical IP over ATM 2 1 Classical IP PVC 0 00 ee eee 2 10 Index 1 CLP bit a ox ins ht abba ded YS 1 41 configuration emulated LAN example 4 3 connection configuration direct 3 4 control direct 204 3 4 control distribute 3 4 data direct 00 0 e eee 3 4 multicast forward 3 4 multicast send 3 4 connection process LEC 4 5 Constant Bit Rate CBR 1 39 containing path 7 1 7 8 Crank back 2 Gerd 2 east vitertestee RaT ee 6 4 D data encryption 004 8 5 database exchange protocol 6 2 defining an ELAN sssss 3 30 Distributed LAN Emulation DLE i eee RC Se 3 9 4 6 distributed timing 9 1 ASX 1000 sess 9 4 ASX 200BX 1 0 ccc cee 9 4 ASX 200WG 2 0 ccc cee ee 9 4 AASX 4000 5 iE 9 6 ForeRunnerLE 155 a an 9 5 ForeRunnerLE 25 uusuu 9 5 TNX 1100 eerta 9 4 TINIXS2 TO 28 e t ee ise ont ss 9 4 TEE gusce eun rotto ut t css 3 9 DLE peer servers Starting cuocere Eb PU 3 40 COMA x SP eL ELO E Rau 6 8 dynamic path sssssssssss 7 8 Index 2 E egress rate enforcement configuring 00008 D 10 ELAN s etti atte eS ET RS 3 3 1 components eee eee 3 2 configuring 3 1 3 22 JOUNING o cde eR NS dtr reed 3 43
113. 2 1 2 Convert Peer Group C 1 Peer group C is the first to be converted Start with switch C 6 Modify the default protocol of the default domain in C 6 to gateway using the following AMI command T v z i U z wo BurjoAuo2 conf atmroute domain modify domain ID gateway Reboot the switch This creates the first PNNI node in the network with a default area 5 and level 5 as shown in Figure C 15 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual C 19 Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI PNNI peer group boundary PNNI node PNN link FT PNNI peer group boundary O FT PNNI node PGA FT PNNI link Voi HE IE MN A1 X L4 ari C1 C3 pec NA pe 62 N i PG B J b ec N C 4 eee B 1 255 ur ji A couse wet fe C6 A5 i 7 N 4 Figure C 15 C 6 as a Gateway 2 Modify the default protocol of the default domain in C 5 to gateway using the fol lowing AMI command conf atmroute domain modify lt domain ID gt gateway Reboot switch C 5 This creates the second PNNI node in the network and the first PNNI link in area 5 between C 6 and C 5 3 Modify the default protocol of the default domain in C 3 to gateway using the fol lowing AMI command conf atmroute domain modify lt domain ID gt gateway Reboot switch C 3 This creates the second PNNI link in the network between C 5 and C C 20 ATM
114. 2 46 1b1 0 50 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 1 33 Configuring PVCs 1 5 5 Displaying SPANS SPVC Information This command allows you to display all of the SPANS SPVCs on an individual switch fabric Enter the following parameters myswitch configuration spvx spvcc spans show Local Remote ID Port VPI VCI BW Direction ID Port VPI VCI Switch 35664 1C1 0 Bl 0 0 bidirectional 10427 1B1 0 52 198 29 22 46 65364 1C1 0 49 0 0 bidirectional 42591 1B1 0 50 198 29 22 46 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Local ID The unique number that the local switch fabric s SCP assigned to this SPANS SPVC when it was created Local Port The port number on the local switch fabric Local VPI The virtual path number on the local switch fabric Local VCI The virtual channel number on the local switch fabric Local BW The amount of peak bandwidth allocated for this SPANS SPVC specified in Kbps Remote ID The unique number that the remote switch fabric s SCP assigned to this SPANS SPVC when it was created Remote Port The port number on the remote switch fabric Remote VPI The virtual path number on the remote switch fabric Remote VCI The virtual channel number on the remote switch fabric Switch The IP address or name of the remote switch fabric s SCP The following is displayed if no SPANS SPVCS have been configured myswitch configuration spvc spans show No
115. 2 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual A 35 Configuring SNMP ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Ta d 5 4 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services FORE Systems Circuit Emulation Services CES Network Modules NMCE 6 DS1A and NMCE 6 E1A provide adaptation from time division multiplexed TDM equipment i e PBXs WAN multiplexers channel banks video codecs etc and traffic to ATM Both modules provide structured and unstructured services with a maximum of 127 connections supported on each module e All six ports of the DS1 CES Network Module may support fractional DS1 services n x 56 Kbps n x 64 Kbps where 1 to 24 contiguous or non contiguous DSO channels are mapped to a single ATM VCC not to exceed 127 total connec tions e All six ports of the E1 CES Network Module may support fractional E1 services n x 56 Kbps n x 64 Kbps where 1 to 31 contiguous or non contiguous DSO channels are mapped to a single ATM VCC not to exceed 127 total connections Structured services provide digital access and cross connect system DACS connectivity where n x 64 Kbps and n x 56 Kbps digital signal level zero DSO channels are adapted to ATM cells and mapped to unique ATM virtual connections VCCs Unstructured services provide support and maintenance of a single full bandwidth 1 544 Mbps DS1 or 2 048 Mbps E1 clear channel across a single ATM virtual connection
116. 3 50 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring an Emulated LAN Use the following command to get the interface name from the I Name field as follows myswitch configuration lane lec show advanced Admin Oper Index Status Status Sel Mode MACaddress IfName ELAN 1 up up Ox11 wellknown 0a20481a2c78 e117 Mktg 0 LECS 0x47 0079 00 000000 0000 0000 0000 00a03e000001 00 LES c5000580ffe1000000f21c126b0020481c126b66 BUS 47000580ffe1000000f21c126b0020481c126b66 LEC ID 13057 Discovered ELAN name Mktg O Configure Direct VCC 0 323 Maximum Frame Size 1516 Control Direct VCC 0 667 Control Distribute VCC 0 203 Multicast Send VCC 0 674 Multicast Forward VCC 0 205 Last Error Configure that LEC down myswitch configuration gt ip admin e117 down Delete all instances of the LEC including anything that had been lt ELAN name gt n myswitch configuration lane lec gt delete 1 myswitch configuration lane lec gt delete 2 Recreate the LEC You now only need one instance per LEC and you will not specify n in the name anymore myswitch configuration lane lec new 0x11 Mktg ip 192 168 61 25 mask 255 255 255 0 moO 33 cS De os Ta m z5 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 3 51 Configuring an Emulated LAN Use the following command to verify that the LEC has joined the ELAN by looking at the OperStatus field as follows myswitch configuration gt lane lec show advanced Admin Oper Index Status
117. 3 53 Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 7 12 Restart the LECS Administer the LECS down and back up again This forces the active LECs to re establish their connection with the LECS and forces the LECS to read and use the new LECS CFG file myswitch configuration lane lecs gt admin 1 down myswitch configuration lane lecs gt admin 1 up Use the show command and look at the OperStatus field to verify that the LECS has come up again myswitch configuration lane lecs gt show Index AdminStatus OperStatus Selector WKA Database 1 up up 0x00 atm forum lecs cfg The transfer of your ELAN to DLE services is now complete 3 54 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 8 Upgrading an ELAN without Using DLE This section describes how to upgrade your ELAN if you had previously configured LANE you want to leave the clients running ForeThought 4 1 x and you want to upgrade all the equipment that is running services to ForeThought 5 3 x without using DLE The following basic steps are involved in upgrading your ELAN ForeThought 5 3 x without using DLE Each of these steps is described in detail in the following sections It is recom mended that you read the entire section before attempting the upgrade 1 If the LES and BUS are not co located they must be deleted and re created as co located because ForeThought 5 3 x on the switch only supports co located ser vices If the LES and BUS are already co located sk
118. 42 asxSonetAtmLCDDetected This trap indicates that the specified SONET port is experiencing Loss of Cell Delineation LCD A LCD failure is declared when the LCD defect persists for a period of 2 5 0 5 seconds 143 asxSonetAtmLCDCleared This trap indicates that the LCD failure identified by trap asxSonetAtmLCDDetected has been cleared A LCD failure is cleared when the LCD defect is absent for 10 0 5 seconds 160 asxDS3IdleDetected This trap indicates that an Idle Maintenance Signal IDLE is detected on the incoming signal 161 asxDS3IdleCleared This trap indicates that an Idle Maintenance Signal IDLE is cleared on the incoming signal 162 asxDS3AtmLCDDetected This trap indicates that the specified DS3 port is expe riencing Loss of Cell Delineation LCD An LCD fail ure is declared when the LCD defect persists for a period of 2 5 0 5 seconds ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual QO fe E a amp E 3 Co o z v Configuring SNMP Table A 14 SNMP Traps Supported on the FORE Switches Continued Trap Number Trap Name Description 163 asxDS3AtmLCDCleared This trap indicates that the LCD failure identified by trap asxDS3AtmLCDDetected has been cleared An LCD failure is cleared when the LCD defect is absent for 10 0 5 seconds 176 asxDS1PRBSDetected This trap indicates that PRBS pattern is detected on the
119. 63 and 1d16 through 1d63 are not shown here Table A 7 ASX 4000 Port Card 2 Port Numbering Port Name Software Port Port Name Software Port Number Number Port Card 2 Switch Control Port 5CTL 1024 1c1 128 1d1 192 1c2 129 1d2 193 1c3 130 1d3 194 1c4 131 1d4 195 1c5 132 1d5 196 1c6 133 1d6 197 1c7 134 1d7 198 1c8 135 1d8 199 1c9 136 1d9 200 1c10 137 1d10 201 1c11 138 1d11 202 1c12 139 1d12 203 1c13 140 1d13 204 1c14 141 1d14 205 1c15 142 1d15 206 1c64 191 1d64 255 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring SNMP Table A 8 shows the numbering conventions that are referred to in the MIBs for ports on port card 3 on an ASX 4000 In the interest of space ports 2a16 through 2a63 and 2b16 through 2b63 Oo are not shown here S E Table A 8 ASX 4000 Port Card 3 Port Numbering Port Name dd im Port Name Erde we S Port Card 3 Switch Control Port 5CTL 1024 2al 256 2b1 320 2a2 257 2b2 321 2a3 258 2b3 322 2a4 259 2b4 323 2a5 260 2b5 324 2a6 261 2b6 325 2a7 262 2b7 326 2a8 263 2b8 327 2a9 264 2b9 328 2a10 265 2b10 329 2all 266 2b11 330 2a12 267 2b12 331 2a13 268 2b13 332 2al4 269 2b14 333 2a15 270 2b15 334 2a64 319 2b64 383 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual A 9 Configuring SNMP Table A 9 shows the numbering conventions that are referred to in the MIBs
120. 7 2 7 es ML bs 2 1 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual S SCOpe e eS s uU eo AES 6 10 SG RUS i cac titan nes lost 1 39 1 40 sdconfrec file u ouo e eri heed fees 8 5 edititig ceci ee de eR exa 8 6 transferring to the switch 8 5 SecurID data encryption 8 5 installing the server software 8 5 node secret file 8 5 Passcode 22e e 8 4 personal identification number PIN udis eret 8 3 8 4 PIN number s 8 4 SCIVED eve mg ee Re PEE 8 4 tokens 145 Ros Lus 8 4 SecurID authentication 8 3 SeCUTILY eese pea be va ted bes gg 8 1 selector field 2 5 2 4 SNMP indexing ssssss A 1 SNMP trapo ciama ennea genah ga annaa A 15 adding s cere ea ies A 34 deleting oer enean A 35 displaying 08 A 34 supported on the switch A 15 source area ID 00000 6 10 SPANS interface lllsssesn 2 3 SPANS SPVC Creating suite eit LEVA 1 32 SPANS SPVCs displaying 08 1 34 Split switebi uet e dane tal ede 6 5 SPVC configuring on a FramePlus network module D 15 D 21 SRTS Synchronous Residual Time Stamp os esas eM Eee B 9 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Index Sustainable Cell Rate SCR bci inch t o a 1 39 1 40 switchclock 00 0 ccc ccc eee 9 1 fatlOVer case Salen an aes ERO 9 2 Synchronous Residual Time Stamp BRI S cado asa B 9 T tagging
121. 77 and No ILMI Support To configure a network with a third party vendor s switch that does not support ILMI but does support RFC 1577 as shown in Figure 2 3 perform the following steps C mcd i FORE FORE Switch A Switch B Ob mn m Third Party Switch RFC 1577 no ILMI 5 FORE Systems host Figure 2 3 Configuring a Third Party Switch with RFC 1577 and No ILMI Support 1 Be sure that ForeThought software has been installed on all of the FORE hosts and that ILMI was set in the process ILMI dynamically performs address registration for all of the FORE hosts and FORE switches 2 Statically configure the non FORE hosts with ATM addresses edit the firmware download script using the same switch prefix for all of the hosts 3 Configure a static ATM route to the third party switch on FORE switch B that is physically connected to the third party switch using the AMI command conf atmr ftpnni staticroute new lt NSAP gt mask port port vpi lt vpi gt Be sure to use a network mask value of 104 Also be sure to use the same prefix that was used to configure the hosts 4 Configure two static ATM routes on the third party switch one to each of the FORE switches to which the third party switch is connected using the third party vendor s configuration software Be sure to use a network mask value of 104 2 14 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual
122. 846 4a64 831 4b64 895 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual A 13 Configuring SNMP Table A 13 shows the numbering conventions that are referred to in the MIBs for ports on port card 8 on an ASX 4000 In the interest of space ports 4c16 through 4c63 and 4d16 through 4d63 are not shown here Table A 13 ASX 4000 Port Card 8 Port Numbering Port Name Software Port PortName Software Port Number Number Port Card 8 Switch Control Port 5CTL 1024 4c1 896 4d1 960 4c2 897 4d2 961 4c3 898 4d3 962 4c4 899 4d4 963 4c5 900 4d5 964 4c6 901 4d6 965 4c7 902 4d7 966 4c8 903 4d8 967 4c9 904 4d9 968 4c10 905 4d10 969 4c11 906 4d11 970 4c12 907 4d12 971 4c13 908 4d13 972 4c14 909 4d14 973 4c15 910 4d15 974 4c64 959 4d64 1023 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual A 4 SNMP Traps Configuring SNMP SNMP traps are used to update the state of the network automatically to remote network management hosts The SNMP agent on the switch supports several SNMP traps The traps generated by the switch s SNMP agent can be sent to as many destinations as needed These destinations are configurable via the ATM Management Interface AMI Each destination must be an IP address of a network management host The network management host specified for a trap destination can be any host with which the switch has connectivity This means that the host does not have to
123. 9 107 SLAVE SERVER allowed but not configured AUTHENTICATION SERVICE securid PORT NUMBER 1024 ICENSE CREATION Mon July 27 15 06 08 1998 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Security ADDRESSES By name in host file or name service BAD PASSCODES 3 RESPONSE DELAY 2 TOKENS IN LICENSE 25 LICENSE CONFIGURATION This license was created for Fore Systems Inc 1000 FORE Drive Warrendale PA 15086 These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description LICENSE CREATION The date the ACE server license was created LICENSE ID The ACE server license ID ACE Server VERSION The version number of the server software FILE OWNERSHIP The account that owns the ACE server files i e that has permissions to run the ACE server administration programs root is the default but the login of any other adminis trator can be specified here SETUID BIT If set allows anyone who can run the programs to run them with the permissions of the files owner CLIENT RETRY Specifies how many times a client attempts to establish communications with the server before reporting an error CLIENT TIMEOUT Specifies how many seconds should elapse between attempts to establish client server communications DES ENCRYPTION Shows if DES or Security Dynamics encryption is used for client server communications DURESS MODE Allows a user to enter a special PIN to signal that he or she is being forced
124. A ATM networks co exist with and support network applications which may not be ATM aware Consequently ATM protocols are needed to monitor legacy network protocol IP IPX Appletalk etc packets and perform translation into ATM cells and circuits This monitoring and translation can be performed in one of the following ways e ina host protocol stack after packet construction and before packet transmission e inaLAN to ATM edge device as packets move through the network LANE is one example of such a protocol It resolves datalink layer addresses into ATM addresses and establishes circuits to the destination addresses Network addresses within a subnet can be learned using LANE s broadcast support However LANE relies on physical routers to deliver packets across subnets see Figure 4 2 Because routers must examine and modify every packet ATM cells must be reassembled into packets modified and re segmented at every router hop This process imposes significant transmission delays between the source and destination of the network traffic Router ATM Cloud engineering Figure 4 2 LANE without MPOA ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 4 7 MPOA In addition to LANE protocols such as IP can operate over an ATM network via the IETF Internetworking Over NBMA Networks ION Working Group s Next Hop Resolution Protocol NHRP NHRP allows the ATM network to be divided into Logical IP Subnets LISs
125. A03E000001 00 by using PVC 0 17 or by using an address that is locally configured on LEC1 Once it knows the location of the LECS LEC1 establishes a configuration direct connection o to the LECS When connected the LECS provides LEC1 with the information necessary to con nect to the ELAN it wishes to join This information includes such parameters as the ATM address of the ELAN s LES the type of LAN being emulated the maximum packet size and the name of the ELAN engineering for example This configuration information is con tained in a configuration file that must be built and maintained by the network administrator Detailed information about the LECS E configuration file may be found in Section 3 6 1 3 6 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 3 2 Registration and Address Resolution After obtaining the address of the LES LEC1 establishes a control direct connection to the LES When using DLE this address is a single anycast E address which allows the LEC to reach one of the other DLE peer servers for its ELAN if its local server goes down This address is routed via PNNI to the nearest active DLE peer server for this ELAN If the LES is configured to perform ELAN access E control see Section 3 5 upon receiving a request from a LEC to join the ELAN the LES sends a message to the LECS to verify that the LEC is allowed to join If verification is received from the L
126. ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Q R E MANUO148 05 Rev A 8 17 98 SYSTEMS Software Version 5 3 x FORE Systems Inc 1000 FORE Drive Warrendale PA 15086 7502 Phone 724 742 4444 FAX 724 742 7742 http www fore com Legal Notices Copyright 1995 1998 FORE Systems Inc All rights reserved FORE Systems is a registered trademark and ForeRunner ForeRunnerLE ForeThought ForeView PowerHub and CellPath are trademarks of FORE Systems Inc All other brands or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders U S Government Restricted Rights If you are licensing the Software on behalf of the U S Government Government the following provisions apply to you If the Software is supplied to the Department of Defense DoD it is classified as Commercial Computer Software under paragraph 252 227 7014 of the DoD Supplement to the Federal Acquisition Regu lations DFARS or any successor regulations and the Government is acquiring only the license rights granted herein the license rights customarily provided to non Government users If the Software is supplied to any unit or agency of the Government other than DoD it is classified as Restricted Computer Software and the Government s rights in the Soft ware are defined in paragraph 52 227 19 of the Federal Acquisition Regulations FAR or any successor regulations or in the cases of NASA in
127. ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 Use the following AMI command to verify that the LECS has been started and is running configuration lane lecs show Index AdminStatus OperStatus Selector WKA Database 1 up up OxOc atm forum lecs cfg The OperStatus field shows up meaning that the LECS is running Now you must start the DLE peer servers as described in the next section If you used an address other than the ATM E Forum s address the WKA field would show other and that address would be displayed below the entry If you disabled the well known address the WKA field would show none If you used the default option then that LES E address would be displayed below this entry in a field titled Default LES moO 33 cS De os Ta m z5 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 3 39 Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 6 3 2 Starting the DLE LES BUS Peer Servers The LES and BUS services must be started for the ELAN This example assumes you are using DLE therefore you must enter a distinct anycast address that is unique within the first 19 bytes for the LECs to use to contact the LES and the address of each of the DLE peer servers so that this server can communicate with its peers 1 To start the services use the following AMI command on the switch that is going to run one of the DLE peer servers conf lane les new lt LES Selector Byte HEX gt lt LES name gt bus BUS Select
128. ATM pro viding the transport there would be no need for any translation D 2 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring FramePlus Modules D 2 Configuring the Module Before configuring any services or PVCs you should divide the buffer space between the high and low priority buffers as described in Section D 2 1 Cells are read from the high priority buffer first After the high priority buffer is emptied cells are read from the low priority buffer Then you should set the EPD PPD thresholds for the high and low priority buffers as described in Section D 2 2 D 2 1 Dividing the Buffer Space The FramePlus network module has two priority buffers high and low The total combined buffering space available is 32 768 cells The amount of buffering space is split between the two buffers using conf module fram setmen There are four fixed configuration models for partitioning the buffer sizes as shown in Table A 1 The default model is highzero Table D 1 Buffer Models Model High Priority Buffer Low Priority Buffer highzero 0 cells 32 768 cells high1 quarter 8 192 cells 24 576 cells high2quarter 16 384 cells 16 384 cells high3quarter 24 576 cells 16 384 cells If you choose highzero you want all of the buffering space to go in the low priority buffer and none in the high priority buffer If you choose highl1quarter then one fourth of the buffering space goes in the high priority buffer and three fo
129. B are not visible in peer group A FFPNNI peer group boundary O FT PNNI node FT PNNI link Backbone link Figure C 1 Invalid Configuration of ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 Split between Two FI PNNI Peer Groups Suppose you want to route from A 4 to B 3 After the initial step of prefix matching the Peer Group Summary Node PGSN of peer group B not shown in the figure is chosen as the des tination for this path computation Since B 1 and B 2 both advertise links to the PGSN and they are equidistant from A 4 A 4 may decide to construct the Destination Transit List DTL as A 4 to A 2 to B 2 to B s PGSN When the setup of this call proceeds into peer group B and reaches node B 2 the only way to route to B 3 is through B 1 But since you cannot take a two hop path across the ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 this call setup will fail C 2 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI This problem can be avoided by not breaking up an ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 between multiple FI PNNI peer groups For example in the network in Figure C 2 the entire ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 could have been made part of peer group B with only A 3 A 4 and A 5 in peer group A A 3 and A 4 would be the border nodes in peer group A connected to A 1 and A 2 re numbered to have B as their peer group ID in peer group B C 1 2 ASX 1000s or TNX 1100s in PNNI Areas The problem described in Section C 1 1 can also occur
130. Bits LL B 2 B 1 1 2 Active Detection 0 0 ee eee B 3 B 1 2 Basic Connections 0000 cette B 3 B 1 2 1 Idle Detection using Pattern Matching B 3 B 1 2 2 Idle Detection using Mask Patterns 0 B 3 B 1 2 3 Active Detection 0 cee eee B 4 B 1 3 Idle Channel Suppression Configuration Examples B 4 B 1 3 4 Enabling Idle Channel Suppression 5 B 4 B 1 3 2 Configuring Idle Detection 0 0000 cee eee B 5 B 1 8 2 1 Configuring Idle CAS Signalling Pattern Matching 0 cee eee B 5 B 1 3 2 2 Configuring an Idle Pattern for Pattern Matching iets tak hd oo Ye Lees B 6 B 1 3 3 Configuring Mask Patterns llli lesen B 6 B 1 3 4 Configuring an Integration Period 0 4 B 7 B 2 Configuring CES Connections liliis else B 8 B 2 1 Creating a New CES Connection 00 000 e eee eee B 8 B 2 2 Displaying CES Connections a n sasaaa aaaea B 12 APPENDIX C Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI C 1 ASX 1000 TNX 1100 Routing Configuration Issues 0000000 C 2 C 1 1 ASX 1000s or TNX 1100s in F PNNI Peer Groups C 2 C 1 2 ASX 1000s or TNX 1100s in PNNI Areas 2 00000000 C 3 C 1 3 Multiple Gateways in an ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 C 4 C 1 4 Migrating from FT PNNI to PNNI Routing 0000 C 4 C 2 Migration of a Non Hierar
131. C 1 to 2 Use the following AMI command to change both T v zZ o U z wo Buang conf atmroute pnni node modify lt index gt pgid d forelevel 2 2 Modify the default protocol of the default domain in C 1 to gateway using the fol lowing AMI command conf atmroute domain modify lt domain ID gt gateway Reboot switch C 1 Upon the reboot C 1 will come up with two nodes one FI PNNI node and one PNNI node There are now two areas one FI PNNI area 4 at level 4 and one PNNI area 5 at level 2 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual C 11 Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI 3 A 1 will be the second switch to be converted to a gateway between the existing FI PNNI area and the PNNI area to be created Change the peer group ID of its PNNI node currently down to D modify the level of its PNNI node to 2 and modify the default protocol of the default domain in A 1 to gateway using the fol lowing AMI commands conf atmroute pnni node modify index pgid d forelevel 2 conf atmroute domain modify domain ID gateway Reboot switch A 1 Upon the reboot the link between the PNNI nodes on C 1 and A 1 now becomes the first PNNI link in the network The state of the network at this stage is shown in Figure C 10 PNNI peer group boundary S 4 a PNNI fede j PGA X panne N PNNI link LevelL2 FT PNNI peer group boundary peu a l PGD O FT PNNI node 72 B1 FT
132. CI allocation range of the signalling chan nel is then determined as an intersection of the following e the VCI range of the path containing the signalling channel e the range specified for the signalling channel if applicable e the VCI range of the peer signalling entity For example if your peer has no VCIs reserved and you create a signalling channel with ILMI up ona VP that has no VCIs reserved and you specify a VCI range conf signalling new 1A3 65 ilmi up minvci 70 maxvci 200 the actual range is computed as an intersection based on the range you enter 70 200 the range available in that VP 1 511 and the range of the peer signalling entity 32 511 To display what the actual VCI range is enter the following command conf signalling show atmranges Admin Admin Oper Oper Admin Oper Oper Port VPI MinVCI MaxVCI MinVCI MaxVCI MaxVPI MaxSvccVPI MaxSvpcVPI SvpCapable 1A1 0 32 511 32 DA 1022 N A N A N A 1A2 0 32 SLT 32 511 1022 N A N A N A 1A3 0 32 STI 32 5I 1022 N A N A N A 1A3 65 70 200 70 200 1022 N A N A N A 1A4 0 32 511 32 511 1022 N A N A N A 1CTL 0 32 1023 32 1023 0 N A N A N A In this display the range that you have requested is shown in the Admin MinVCI and Admin MaxVCI fields The range that is computed and allowed is displayed in the Oper MinVCI and Oper MaxVCI fields In this example no VCIs are reserved on VP 65 and the signalling peer supports the range of 32 511 so the requested range of 70 200 is
133. Compatibility directive of the European Community and compliance to the Low Voltage Safety Directive Such marking is indicative that this system meets or exceeds the following technical standards EN 55022 Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference Characteristics of Information Tech nology Equipment EN 50082 1 Electromagnetic compatibility Generic immunity standard Part 1 Residential commercial and light industry IEC 1000 4 2 Electromagnetic compatibility for industrial process measurement and control equipment Part 2 Electrostatic discharge requirements IEC 1000 4 3 Electromagnetic compatibility for industrial process measurement and control equipment Part 3 Radiate electromagnetic field requirements IEC 1000 4 4 Electromagnetic compatibility for industrial process measurement and control equipment Part 4 Electrical fast transient burst requirements SAFETY CERTIFICATIONS ETL certified to meet Information Technology Equipment safety standards UL 1950 CSA 22 2 No 950 and EN 60950 Table of Contents List of Figures List of Tables Preface Chapter Summaries nananana 00 cect eee Related Manuals canes ea snm EP Bea aldgda zeae ged EGRE RE UR Technical SUP POM tte ce be there wk Bie Ex med re ee Rr es Typographical Styles aii a i Rec Ee pU E abs anne IRR RE ERE Important Information Indicators lille IR Laser Warning s ox ex EUER a Pe ho Pee d
134. Configure LEDs 28 Request application revision 29 Create a FUNI service 30 Create a Frame Relay service 31 Request to change service admin status 32 Request to enable disable service statistics 33 Request to enable disable network module statistics 34 Request to enable disable network module admin status 35 Request to enable disable port admin status 36 Delete a service 37 Create a Frame Relay connection 38 Create a FUNI connection 40 Request to enable disable connection admin status 41 Request to enable disable service egress rate enforcement ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual A 31 Configuring SNMP Table A 15 Message Type Encodings for Trap 2003 Continued MessageType Message Request 42 Request to enable disable connection ingress rate enforcement 43 Delete a connection 47 Configure port to be timing source Table A 16 defines the error codes for Trap 2003 and their meanings Table A 16 Error Codes for Trap 2003 Error Code Error Code Meaning 1 Invalid or out of range parameter 2 System disabled 3 Memory allocation failure 4 Timer allocation failure 5 Circuits on link exceeded 6 Invalid CIR configuration 7 No CCB for link 8 Unknown link 9 Unknown DLCI 0A Link number out of range OB DLCI number out of range 0C Link already exists 0D Circuit on link already exists OE Link contains circuits OF Out of memory
135. Cs and MPSs and also distributes MPOA parameters to LEC MPCs in response to queries This is the mechanism used by LEC MPCs to determine whether routers in the ELAN are MPOA aware Broadcast and Unknown Server Runs on a PowerHub 7000 a PowerHub 8000 an BUS ASN 9000 a FORE ATM switch or a Solaris workstation Provides services within a single ELAN allowing broadcasts multicasts and unknown unicasts The BUS is MPOA ignorant 4 2 2 An Example LANE Configuration Figure 4 1 shows an example configuration of a single ELAN in a FORE network The ELAN includes e PC Workstations each running a LEC MPC Each has a ForeRunner ATM adapter the ForeRunner driver for the adapter and one or more ForeRunner ELAN drivers installed e Two ForeRunner ASX 200BX switches running LESs BUSs and LECs Each switch is also running an LECS The LES BUS pairs are configured as peers under Dis tributed LAN Emulation The peer configuration allows the LECs associated with a particular LES BUS automatically to reconnect to the remaining functional peer if their home LES BUS fails e A PowerHub 7000 running a LEC MPC and providing access to non ATM net works ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 4 3 MPOA PowerHub 7000 Runs a LEC MPC DA L Fast Ethernet FDDI Ethernet uM Figure 4 1 An Example of an ELAN 4 2 2 1 Thelnitialization Process Each LEC MPC goes through the following process when it st
136. E4 FDDI based Fiber Channel based and STP These range in speeds from 1 544Mbps through 622 08 Mbps Physical Medium Dependent PMD a sublayer concerned with the bit transfer between two network nodes It deals with wave shapes timing recovery line coding and electro optic con versions for fiber based links Plesiochronous two signals are plesiochronous if their corresponding significant instants occur at nominally the same rate with variations in rate constrained to specified limits Point of Demarcation the dividing line between a carrier and the customer premise that is governed by strict standards that define the characteristics of the equipment on each side of the demarcation Equipment on one side of the point of demarcation is the responsibility of the customer Equipment on the other side of the point of demarcation is the responsibility of the carrier Glossary 26 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary Point to Multipoint Connection a collection of associated ATM VC or VP links with associated endpoint nodes with the following properties 1 One ATM link called the Root Link serves as the root in a simple tree topology When the Root node sends information all of the remaining nodes on the connection called Leaf nodes receive copies of the information 1 11 10 3 2 Each of the Leaf Nodes on the connection can send information directly to the Root Node The Root Node cannot distinguish which
137. ECS then the LES gives the LEC permission to join If verification is not received from the LECS the LES rejects the join request and the LEC is dropped The LES assigns LEC1 a unique identifier and LEC1 registers its own MAC and ATM addresses with the LES The LES maintains a table containing the MAC addresses and corre sponding ATM addresses of all members of the ELAN At this point LEC1 has joined the ELAN The LES then establishes a control distribute connection back to LEC1 Connections and can now be used by LECI to send LAN Emulation ARP LE ARP requests to the LES and receive replies LEC1 now sends an LE ARP request to the LES to get the ATM address of the BUS corre sponding to the broadcast MAC address FF FF FF FF FF FF The LEC then establishes a multicast send connection to the BUS The BUS responds by setting up a multicast forward connection to the LEC At this point the LEC is ready to transfer data ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 3 7 moO 33 cS De os reo Bo z5 Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 3 3 Data Transfer When LEC receives a network layer packet from a higher layer protocol to transmit to some destination MAC address for example LEC2 LEC1 initially does not know the correspond ing ATM address of the destination Consequently LEC1 transmits an LE ARP request to the LES The example shown in Figure 3 2 assumes that E LEC2 has already registered with t
138. ECS CFG file would look like this Match Ordering Mktg Mktg 0 Mktg 1 Mktg Address c5000580 61000000 21c12650020481c126066 Mktg Accept XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Mktg 0 Address c5000580 6e1000000 21c12650020481c126066 Mktg 0 Accept XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Mktg 1 Address 47000580 f 6e1000000 21a3906e0020481a390e00 Mktg 1 Accept XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 3 7 2 Delete the LES and BUS Display the LES information so that you can find the index number of the LES myswitch configuration lane les show Index AdminStatus OperStatus Selector Type MTU ELAN 1 up up 0x00 ethernet 1516 Mktg 0 LES 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 24f9 0020481a24f9 00 BUS 0x47 0005 80 6100 0000 21a 24 9 0020481a24 9 00 Co Located Administer the LES and BUS down for Mktg 0 using the following AMI command myswitch configuration lane les admin 1 down Delete the co located LES and BUS myswitch configuration lane les delete 1 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 3 47 moO 33 cS De os Ta m z5 Configuring an Emulated LAN Verify the LES has been deleted myswitch configuration lane les gt show No LES information is available The LES and BUS in this example were E co located If yours are not co located you need to administer the BUS down using conf lane bus admin index down and to delete the BUS using conf lane bus delete index Th
139. ELAN access control 3 21 3 30 disabling 000 3 21 enabling sees 3 21 Emulated LAN ELAN 3 1 address resolution 3 7 data transfer 0 3 8 initialization 00000 3 6 operation 6 ee eae 3 4 registration on ssie ensaio eee 3 7 emulated LAN ELAN example configuration 4 3 running multiple 4 6 ESI End System Identifier 2 4 F flooding protocol 00 6 2 FOREIP x exEEb CWEY uta 2 3 ForeThought PNNI 005 5 1 backbone topology 5 29 border switches 5 8 hello indication messages 5 8 link m trics eol 5 8 peer group summary fiode si asa r 5 8 5 9 physical network 5 5 topology database 5 5 two level hierarchy 5 6 Frame based UNI FUNI D 1 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual FramePlus network module configuring an application D 17 FUNI Frame based UNI D 1 G gateway switch 0000 6 5 GORA Aeris er tuc ne ont dae eda 1 40 Generic Cell Rate Algorithm GCRA Y p ciactt acer Cah ir E PE 1 40 H Hello protocol ssssseessee 6 1 hierarchical routing ATMETININL 4 ict reta pain 6 3 horizontal links 000 6 1 I idle channel suppression B 2 basic connections
140. FORE S cell ATM Switch cell e 3 VPI X VCI Y VPI A VCI B a 2 Figure 1 8 An Example of a Virtual Channel Six parameters are needed to define a virtual channel input port input VPI input VCI out put port output VPI and output VCI Virtual channels are represented by the following nota tion lt iport gt lt ivpi gt lt ivci gt lt oport gt lt ovpi gt lt ovci gt Virtual channels switch cells using both the VPI and VCI values Both the VPI and VCI values may change when a cell is switched via a virtual channel For example the virtual channel C21 1120 gt D219125 switches cells received on port C2 with VPI 1 and VCI 20 such that they are transmitted out port D2 with VPI 9 and VCI 25 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 1 11 Configuring PVCs itch fabri C2 switch fabric D2 cell P p cell VPI 1 VPI 9 VCI 20 VCI 25 Virtual Channel C2 1 20 gt D2 9 25 Figure 1 9 Example of a Virtual Channel In order to establish two way communications between two ports on a switch fabric two vir tual channels are necessary because virtual channels are unidirectional For example switch fabric A is configured with the virtual channel C317112 D11812 If a cell is received on port D1 with VPI 8and VCI 2 itis not transmitted out port C3 with VPI 7 and VCI 12 An addi tional channel namely D11812 gt C317112 would have to exist
141. Frame is cleared on the incoming signal 82 asxE3AtmLCDDetected This trap indicates that the specified E3 port is experi encing Loss of Cell Delineation LCD An LCD failure is declared when the LCD defect persists for a period of 2 5 0 5 seconds ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual QO fe E E amp c z E Co o zZ v Configuring SNMP Table A 14 SNMP Traps Supported on the FORE Switches Continued Trap Sans Nabe Trap Name Description 83 asxE3AtmLCDCleared This trap indicates that the LCD failure identified by trap asxE3AtmLCDDetected has been cleared An LCD failure is cleared when the LCD defect is absent for 10 0 5 seconds 86 asxE3PLCPYellowDetected This trap indicates that the specified E3 port has detected incoming PLCP Yellow Alarm 87 asxE3PLCPYellowCleared This trap indicates that the specified E3 port has detected clearance of incoming PLCP Yellow Alarm 90 asxE1 Yellow Detected This trap indicates that the Yellow Alarm is being detected on the incoming signal 91 asxE1YellowCleared This trap indicates that Yellow alarm has cleared on the incoming signal 92 asxE1LOFDetected This trap indicates that LOF is being detected on the incoming signal 93 asxE1LOFCleared This trap indicates that LOF is cleared on the incoming signal 96 asxE1PLCPYellowDetected This trap indicates that the specified El port has detected incomi
142. HBER is detected on the incoming signal ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring SNMP Table A 14 SNMP Traps Supported on the FORE Switches Continued Trap EU NOD Trap Name Description 227 asxJ2HBERCleared This trap indicates that High Bit Error Rate HBER is cleared on the incoming signal 228 asxJ2PAISDetected This trap indicates that Payload Alarm Indication Sig nal PAIS is detected on the incoming signal 229 asxJ2PAISCleared This trap indicates that Payload Alarm Indication Sig nal PAIS is cleared on the incoming signal 230 asxJ2AtmLCDDetected This trap indicates that the specified J2 port is experi encing Loss of Cell Delineation LCD An LCD failure is declared when the LCD defect persists for a period of 2 5 0 5 seconds 231 asxJ2AtmLCDCleared This trap indicates that the LCD failure identified by trap asxJ2AtmLCDDetected has been cleared An LCD failure is cleared when the LCD defect is absent for 10 0 5 seconds 232 asxJ2TLOCDetected This trap indicates that Transmit Loss of Clock TLOC is detected 233 asxJ2TLOCCleared This trap indicates that Transmit Loss of Clock TLOC is cleared 250 asxTP25LOSDetected This trap indicates that LOS Alarm is detected on the incoming signal 251 asxTP25LOSCleared This trap indicates that LOS Alarm is cleared on the incoming signal 1024 asxOutputQueueCongested This trap indicates that the output q
143. I HSSI ICMP Acronyms Domain Naming System Digital Standard n n 0 1 1C 2 and 3 Data Set Ready Data Terminal Equipment Data Terminal Ready Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Explicit Forward Congestion Indication Exterior Gateway Protocol Electronics Industries Association Extended Industry Standard Architecture Emulated Local Area Network Electromagnetic Interference Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Equalization Explicit Rate End System or Errored Second Extended Super Frame End System Identifier Excessive Zeroes Error Event Face Contact Federal Communications Commission Frame Check Sequence Fiber Distributed Data Interface Frequency Division Multiplexing Far End Block Error Forward Error Correction Forward Explicit Congestion Notification Far End Receive Failure First In First Out Frame Relay Service File Transfer Protocol ForeThought PNNI Frame Based UNI Generic Connection Admission Control Generic Cell Rate Algorithm Generic Flow Control High Density Bipolar High Level Data Link Control Header Error Control High Performance Parallel Interface High Speed Serial Interface Internet Control Message Protocol ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Acronyms 3 gt 7 53 lt 3 Acronyms IDU Interface Data Unit IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IETF Internet Engineering Task Force ILMI Interim Local Management
144. Idle pat terns are observed for this period before declaring that an active connection has gone idle For both CAS and basic connections the range of values is 500 us to 2 seconds and the default is 1 second oidlesupp enable disable enable means idle channel suppression is going to be used on the outgoing side of this connection disable means idle channel suppression is not going to be used on the out going side of this connection The default is disable When this option is enabled a total of 144 timeslots 6 ports for DS1 or 4 8 ports for E1 is supported When this option is enabled on structured basic connections a minimum partialfill size of 24 is required oidlemask lt idlemask gt The mask pattern for idle detection on the outgoing side of this connection This method is only used for structured basic service The range of values is 01 to FF The default is FF oidlepat lt idle pattern gt lt cas pattern gt The patterns for idle detection on the outgoing side of this connection For detection based on both idle and mask patterns it contains the idle octet patterns For detection based on signalling it contains one of the following CAS patterns em00 em01 fxolsuser01 fxolsuserll fxolsnet00 fxolsnet01 fxslsuser00 fxslsuser01 fxslsnet01 fxslsnet11 fxsgsuser01 fxsgsnet10 fxsgsnet11 fxogsuser10 fxogsuser11 fxogsnet01 r210 A maxi mum of one idle pattern can be used for structured basic
145. Interface IP Internet Protocol IPX Internetwork Packet Exchange IS Intermediate system ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network ISO International Standards Organization ITU T International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication IWF Interworking Function IXC Interexchange Carriers JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group Kbps Kilobits per second LAN Local Area Network LANE LAN Emulation LAPB Link Access Procedure Balanced LATA Local Access and Transport Area LBO Line Build Out LCV Line Code Violations LE ARP LAN Emulation Address Resolution Protocol LEC LAN Emulation Client LECS LAN Emulation Configuration Server LES LAN Emulation Server LLC Logical Link Control LOF Loss Of Frame LOP Loss Of Pointer LOS Loss Of Signal LSB Least Significant Bit MAC Media Access Control MAN Metropolitan Area Network MAU Media Attachment Unit MBS Maximum Burst Size MCDV Maximum Cell Delay Variance MCLR Maximum Cell Loss Ratio MCR Minimum Cell Rate MCTD Maximum Cell Transfer Delay MIB Management Information Base MIC Media Interface Connector MID Message Identifier MMF Multimode Fiber Optic Cable MPEG Motion Picture Experts Group MPOA Multiprotocol over ATM Acronyms 4 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual MSB MTU NM NML NMS NNI NPC NRZ NRZI NSAP NTSC OAM OC n OID OOF OSI OSPF OUI PAD PAL PBX PCI PCM PCR PDN PDU PHY ping PLCP PLP PM PMD PNNI PPP PROM PRS PSN PT PVC PVCC PVPC QD
146. LAN Emulation Model 004 3 12 IP ARP Broadcast from LEC 1 toLEC9 3 13 Re distributing the Broadcast across DLE Peer Servers 3 13 LE ARP for Unknown Host Sent to Proxies not shown and DLE Peer Servers llis 3 14 LE ARP Query Answered by One DLE Peer Server and Re distributed by Another 0 2000e eee eeee 3 14 LE ARP Response Delivered and LEC 9 Contacts LEC 1 3 15 ELAN with a Single Server and Multiple Switches Connecting to Services liliis 3 16 ELAN with Single Server and Remote Connection l0 SOI VOI cete Foe edet b e RO eit ha vea 3 17 ELAN with Single Server in Operation 3 17 Registrations on an ELAN with Multiple Servers 3 18 ELAN with Multiple Servers in Operation 3 19 Failure of One ELAN Server and the Recovery Process 3 19 ELAN Re established Using the Second Server 3 20 Sample LECS Configuration File Part One of Two 3 36 Sample LECS Configuration File Part Two of Two 3 37 MPOA An Example of an ELAN lleseleeeleleeee 4 4 LANE without MPOA 2 2000 cece sees 4 7 LANE with MPOR oe oedeadad enn ei edea ha webs deen ned eae 4 9 MPOA Example Network 000 0 eee eee eee 4 11 Fore Thought PNNI Example of a 13 byte Switch Prefix 0000 5 3 Private ATM Network with 21 Switches and 34 Bidirectional Links 000 ce eee eee 5
147. M Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring an Emulated LAN Table 3 1 LECS Configuration File Parameters Continued Parameter Definition lt frame time gt Specifies the format for the number of seconds for the set up and tear down thresholds The range is 0 through 65535 lt qos gt Specifies the parameters used in signalling a connection for the specified flow The format is qos flags qos class Currently qos 1ags is unused and its value should be 0 lt qos class gt Specifies the Quality of Service QoS class for this flow Shared specifies a UBR connection will be shared among all flows to the same destination UBR specifies a non shared UBR connection The format is UBR lt rate gt CBR specifies a CBR connection The format is CBR lt rate gt VBR specifies a VBR connection The format is VBR lt rate gt lt rate gt lt burst gt for CLP 0 1 cells rate burst for CLP 0 cells NRT VBR specifies a non real time VBR connection The format is NRT VBR lt rate gt lt rate gt lt burst gt for CLP 0 1 cells lt rate gt lt burst gt for CLP 0 cells ABR specifies an ABR con nection There is no format currently defined for ABR lt rate gt Specifies the rate for the QoS class specified For UBR and CBR this is the Peak Cell Rate PCR in cells per sec ond For VBR and NRT VBR this is the PCR for cells that are CLP 0 1 in cells per second the Sustainable Cell Rate SCR
148. M Switch Network Configuration Manual 7 17 Signalling 7 4 Allowable Combination of Traffic Parameters 7 4 14 PNNI 1 0 UNI 4 0 The following information applies to both signalled connections and to PNNI SPVCs 7 4 1 1 Service Categories The ATM service categories assigned to connections in PNNI 1 0 and UNI 4 0 are defined in the ATM Traffic Management Specification Version 4 0 TM 4 0 For PNNI 1 0 interfaces ForeThought 5 3 x supports the service categories defined in TM 4 0 with a few exceptions An explicit way of requesting a particular ATM service category is not provided in PNNI 1 0 and UNI 4 0 signalling Instead it must be derived from three pieces of information in the SETUP message e the broadband bearer class in octet 5 of the broadband bearer capability BBC information element e the absence or presence of the ATM transfer capability ATC octet octet 5a in the BBC information element e the value of the ATC if present and the absence or presence of the best effort indi cator in octet 18 of the ATM Traffic Descriptor information element Derivation of a service category from the above information is specified in Section A9 2 Determination of ATM service Category of the ATM User Network Interface UNI Signal ling Specification Version 4 0 UNI 4 0 However ForeThought 5 3 x does not support the fol lowing from Table A9 1 of this specification The Transparent VP Service in the BBC information element i
149. M cells AAL layer types are used as follows AAL 1 constant bit rate time dependent traffic such as voice and video AAL 2 still undefined a placeholder for variable bit rate video transmission AAL 3 4 variable bit rate delay tolerant data traffic requiring some sequencing and or error detection support originally two AAL types connection oriented and connectionless which have been combined AAL 5 variable bit rate delay tolerant connection oriented data traffic requiring minimal sequencing or error detection support ATM Address Defined in the UNI Specification as 3 formats each having 20 bytes in length ATM Forum an international non profit organization formed with the objective of accelerating the use of ATM products and services through a rapid convergence of interoperability specifi cations In addition the Forum promotes industry cooperation and awareness ATM Inverse Multiplexing AIMUX A device that allows multiple Tl or E1 communications facilities to be combined into a single broadband facility for the transmission of ATM cells ATM Layer link a section of an ATM Layer connection between two adjacent active ATM Layer entities ATM entities ATM Link a virtual path link VPL or a virtual channel link VCL ATM Management Interface AMI the user interface to FORE Systems ForeThought switch con trol software SCS AMI lets users monitor and change various operating configurations of FORE Syst
150. N A N A In this example since the peer supports VCIs 32 511 but VCIs 1 120 are already reserved on VP 65 the range of 70 120 is the actual range allowed ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 7 5 Signalling In a third example if the peer only supports the range of 32 180 and VCIs 1 120 are already reserved on VP 65 and you enter the following conf signalling new 1A3 65 ilmi up minvci 70 maxvci 200 then the actual range is computed as an intersection based on the range you enter 70 200 the range available in that VP 1 120 and the range supported by the peer 32 180 To see what the actual VCI range is enter the following command conf signalling show atmranges Admin Admin Oper Oper Admin Oper Oper Port VPI MinVCI MaxVCI MinVCI MaxVCI MaxVPI MaxSvccVPI MaxSvpcVPI SvpCapable 1A1 0 32 511 34 SII 1022 N A N A N A 1A2 0 32 ME 32 Bill 1022 N A N A N A 1A3 0 32 511 32 511 1022 N A N A N A 1A3 65 70 200 70 120 1022 N A N A N A 1A4 0 32 511 32 511 1022 N A N A N A 1CTL 0 32 1023 32 1023 0 N A N A N A In this example since the peer supports VCIs 32 180 and VCIs 1 120 are already reserved on VP 65 the range of 70 120 is the actual range allowed 7 6 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Signalling 7 2 Signalling Scope A signalling channel can be configured to control either VCs within its own VP VP scope the default or to control VCs in its own VP in addition to controlling VCs in other V
151. Network Configuration Manual 5 5 ForeThought PNNI Figure 5 2 Private ATM Network with 21 Switches and 34 Bidirectional Links It is in these large single level networks that FI PNNI is most useful because it lets you sim plify large network topologies by creating a two level hierarchy In this hierarchy clusters of contiguous switches are grouped together and they are collectively summarized by a single logical node Figure 5 3 shows the same network as in Figure 5 2 after being organized into peer groups now having a two level hierarchy The subsections that follow explain the organization of these peer groups how they simplify the overall network topology and how they change the logical view of the network 5 6 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual ForeThought PNNI Peer Group Border Switch Peer Group D Switch Node D4 D lt INNd 146noy e104 Logical Link loglink Peer Group A Figure 5 3 Example of FI PNNI Hierarchy Showing
152. Network Module can support fractional DS1 services n x 64 Kbps where 1 to 24 contiguous or non contiguous DS0 channels are mapped to a single ATM port All four ports of the E1 FramePlus Network Module can support fractional E1 services n x 64 Kbps where 1 to 31 contiguous or non contiguous DSO channels are mapped to a single ATM port This appendix provides an overview of a FramePlus network module and provides configura tion examples Topics that are covered include the following Section D 1 Frame Relay Overview Section D 2 Configuring the Module Section D 3 Profiles Section D 4 Services Section D 5 Configuring Frame Relay Section D 6 Configuring FUNI Section D 7 Upgrading the FramePlus Network Module Software ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual m RI D 3 2 a o 2 2 Ie fe Q ra 3 Q Configuring FramePlus Modules D 1 Frame Relay Overview Serving as an interface between user and network equipment Frame Relay provides a means for statistically multiplexing many logical data channels or virtual circuits over a single physical transmission link Frame Relay is ideal for supporting multiple data streams because it provides flexible and efficient utilization of available bandwidth D 1 1 Interworking Function IWF When connecting an ATM Customer Premise Equipment CPE and a Frame Relay CPE each device has no knowledge that the distant device supports a
153. PNNI link see ae C x ETG SES rhe peT UR um M Gal i C2 PGC RS V4 Figure C 10 C 1 and A 1 as Gateway Switches C 12 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI 4 B 1 will be the next switch to be converted to a gateway switch Administer the node down Change the peer group ID of its PNNI node to D modify the level of its PNNI node to 2 modify the default protocol of the default domain in B 1 to gateway then administer the node up using the following AMI commands conf atmroute pnni node admin lt index gt down conf atmroute pnni node modify index pgid d forelevel 2 conf atmroute domain modify domain ID gateway conf atmroute pnni node admin index up Reboot switch B 1 Upon the reboot the link between the A 1 and B 1 now becomes a PNNI link 5 At this point the FI PNNI peer group A is now severed from the rest of the FI PNNI area Since there are now two areas with area ID 4 one of them has to be renamed Change the area ID of the FI PNNI node on A 1 to 2 using the following AMI command conf atmroute ftpnni forearea 2 Reboot A 1 so the change takes effect Figure C 11 shows the state of the network at this point BNNI peer group boundary PNNI node RN PNNI link FT PNNI peer group boundary O FTPNNI node FT PNNI link 25 ak gt PGB D 7 l B TN ees C 2 PGC
154. PVC if the user speci fies that revalidation should occur by using the reval option to cliparp add pvc at the time the PVC is created e g reval 10 means revalidation will occur every 10 minutes If the equipment attached to the FORE equipment supports revalidation the user must choose the reval option If an InARP reply is not received the revalidation fails the PVC is marked invalid as shown through cliparp show and communication over the PVC is no longer possible Once a PVC is marked invalid an attempt is made to validate the PVC before transmitting Transmission proceeds only when validation is successful It is possible to disable this revali dation feature by not specifying the reval option This is often desirable when the remote end of the PVC such as a video camera does not support InARP A Classical IP PVC is removed on the host side using cliparp delete pvc Both the incoming and outgoing connections are removed simultaneously The PVC must then be removed from each of the network switches involved 2 10 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring Classical IP 2 5 Configuring the Network In an ATM network before any connections can be made the two parties must know each other s ATM address in order to set up that connection To allow those connections to work the ideal scenario is for all hosts and switches in the net work to have support for both ILMI and for RFC 1577 Classical IP over ATM How
155. PVCS orare ien tiran ia aina ete 2 10 2 4 1 Theory and Configuration s sasaaa eaaa 2 10 2 4 2 Revalidation and Removal 0 0 00 000 cee eee eae 2 10 2 5 Configuring the Network 0000 cee eee nn 2 11 2 5 1 Third Party Host with No ILMI and No RFC 1577 Support 2 12 2 5 2 Third Party Switch with ILMI and No RFC 1577 Support 2 13 2 5 3 Third Party Switch with RFC 1577 and No ILMI Support 2 14 CHAPTER 3 Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 1 Introduction vx utt etx ur Ee ER ebur aes he 3 1 3 1 1 Ethernet ELANS 0000 ea eee ee 3 1 3 1 2 Token Ring ELANS 0 0 00 eee eet eee 3 1 3 2 ELAN Components 00 0 e eee hr 3 2 3 2 1 LAN Emulation Client LEC 000 000 e eee eee 3 3 3 2 2 LAN Emulation Configuration Server LECS 3 3 3 2 3 LAN Emulation Server LES liliis elle eee eee 3 3 3 2 4 Broadcast and Unknown Server BUS 00000200 eee 3 3 TOC 2 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Table of Contents 3 3 Emulated LAN Operation 0 0 eideann eenia eaa tenn eens 3 4 3 3 1 Initializatlon seb Lr RR dme Re RS 3 6 3 3 2 Registration and Address Resolution 0000 00005 3 7 3 3 3 Data Transfer cire noL E bere Rie PER Fate ty RUE RAS REA e 3 8 3 4 Distributed LAN Emulation liliis 3 9 3 4 1 Single Server LANE Services Model 2000000 ee eee 3 9 3 41 1 Using a Single Server
156. PVPs and PVCs are not E supported by NSAP filtering This feature also has a filter lookup mechanism and it provides statistics about calls that were filtered and information about the last call that was rejected by the filtering process 8 3 1 Filters and Templates Each filter is composed of an ordered set of templates A template consists of the following e anincoming UNI port VPI e asource NSAP address mask e anoutgoing UNI port VPI adestination NSAP Mask anaction to either accept or reject the UNI or NSAP address Masks may be wildcarded using a 0 Ports VPIs and NSAP addresses may be wildcarded using an asterisk If is specified for the port then any port is accepted by the filter If is specified for the VPI then any VPI is accepted by the filter If is specified for the NSAP address or if 0 is specified for the mask then any NSAP address is accepted by the filter Ayanoasg Templates within a filter are applied in the order in which they appear in the filter not by max imum prefix match See Part 2 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual for more information about how to create modify and delete filters and templates ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 8 13 Security 8 3 2 NSAP Filtering Lookup A filter lookup mechanism is provided which allows you to enter components of a call setup message to test whether a call setup attempt with the supplied addresses and ports would be acce
157. Ps on the link link scope The following criteria must be satisfied in order to use link scope signalling channels e There can be only one link scope signalling channel on a given link e Alink scope signalling channel must be created within VP 0 on the given link e The path containing the link scope signalling channel must be an elastic path e A backplane signalling channel in an ASX 1000 or a TNX 1100 cannot be a link scope signalling channel 7 2 4 VC Space The VC space of a signalling channel is the VPI VCI space within which a signalling channel can allocate connections This is determined by the allocation scope of the signalling channel and the VCI allocation range see Section 7 1 for the signalling channel The VC space of a VP scope signalling channel is the VCI allocation range of the signalling channel applied only to the path that contains the signalling channel The VC space of a link scope signalling channel is comprised of the aggregate VCI allocation range of the signalling channel applied to all paths controlled by the signalling channel i e the path containing the signalling channel and all other paths in which the signalling channel has allocated connections ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 7 7 Signalling 7 2 2 Dynamic Paths A link scope signalling channel allocates new virtual channel connections based on the avail ability of virtual channel connections within the VC space of the link scop
158. RLE BAAVCCHEM IMAL TBO EF tio Cy EERE RTO LeMINCHAT SEL SYF FV EVA RER EREEREER RAT kA ETF MRSS Co TELOR RYeEL TFS This equipment is in the Class 1 category Information Technology Equipment to be used in commercial and or industrial areas and conforms to the standards set by the Voluntary Control Council For Interference by Information Technology Equipment aimed at preventing radio interference in commercial and or industrial areas Consequently when used in a residential area or in an adjacent area thereto radio interference may be caused to radios and TV receivers etc Read the instructions for correct handling FCC REQUIREMENTS Notice to Users of DS1 Service The following instructions are provided to ensure compliance with the Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules Part 68 1 This device must only be connected to the DS1 network connected behind an FCC Part 68 registered channel service unit Direct connection is not allowed 2 Before connecting your unit you must inform the telephone company of the following information Port ID REN SOC FIC USOC NM 6 DS1C 6 0N 04DU9 BN RJ48C NM 2 DS1C 04DU9 DN NM 8 DS1D 04DU9 1ZN and NM 4 DS1D 04DU9 1SN 3 If the unit appears to be malfunctioning it should be disconnected from the telephone lines until you learn if your equipment or the telephone line is the source of the trouble If your equipment needs repair it should not be reconnected until
159. Rate CBR a type of traffic that requires a continuous specific amount of band width over the ATM network e g digital information such as video and digitized voice Controlled Slip CS a situation in which one frame s worth of data is either lost or replicated A controlled slip typically occurs when the sending device and receiving device are not using the same clock Convergence Sublayer CS a portion of the AAL Data is passed first to the CS where it is divided into rational fixed length packets or PDUs Protocol Data Units For example AAL 4 processes user data into blocks that are a maximum of 64 kbytes long Corresponding Entities peer entities with a lower layer connection among them cpath a FORE program used to manage virtual paths on a ForeRunner switch running asxd ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary 9 Glossary cport a FORE program that monitors and changes the state of ports on a ForeRunner switch running asxd Cross Connection a mapping between two channels or paths at a network device Customer Premise Equipment CPE equipment that is on the customer side of the point of demarcation as opposed to equipment that is on a carrier side See also point of demarcation Cut Through Establishment of a complete path for signaling and or audio communications Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC an error detection scheme in which a number is derived from the data that will be transmitted
160. SNI SNMP SONET SPANS SPARC SPE SPVC SS7 SSCOP SSCS ST STM Acronyms 6 Routing Domain Requests For Comment Radio Frequency Interference Routing Information Protocol Reduced Instruction Set Computer Request To Send Source Address Source MAC Address Service Access Point Segmentation And Reassembly Structured Cabling or Structured Connectors or Stick and Click Sustainable Cell Rate Small Computer Systems Interface Synchronous Data Link Control Service Data Unit Simple and Efficient Adaptation Layer Systeme En Coleur Avec Memoire Selector Severely Errored Seconds Super Frame Simple Gateway Management Protocol Sustained Information Rate Serial Line IP Switched Multimegabit Data Service Single Mode Fiber Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Systems Network Architecture SubNetwork Access Protocol Subscriber Network Interface Simple Network Management Protocol Synchronous Optical Network Simple Protocol for ATM Network Signalling Scalable Processor Architecture Reduced instruction set Computer Synchronous Payload Envelope Smart PVC Signaling System No 7 Service Specific Connection Oriented Protocol Service Specific Convergence Sublayer Straight Tip or Stick and Turn Synchronous Transfer Mode ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual STP STS SVC SVCC SVPC TAXI TC TCP TCP IP TCR TCS TDM TE TFTP TM UAS UBR UDP UNI UPC UTOPIA UTP VBR vc VCC VCI VCL VINES VLAN VP VPC VPDN
161. SONET port is experiencing Loss Of Pointer LOP A LOP failure is declared when the LOP defect persists for a period of 2 5 0 5 seconds 137 asxSonetPathLOPCleared This trap indicates that the LOP failure identified by trap asxSonetLOPDetected has been cleared A LOP failure is cleared when the LOP defect is absent for 10 0 5 seconds ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring SNMP Table A 14 SNMP Traps Supported on the FORE Switches Continued Trap Number Trap Name Description 138 asxSonetPathUNEQDetected This trap indicates that the specified SONET port is experiencing unequipped UNEQ A UNEQ failure is declared when the UNEQ defect persists for a period of 2 5 0 5 seconds 139 asxSonetPathUNEQCleared This trap indicates that the UNEQ failure identified by trap asxSonetUNEQDetected has been cleared A UNEQ failure is cleared when the UNEQ defect is absent for 10 0 5 seconds 140 asxSonetPathRDIDetected This trap indicates that the specified SONET port is experiencing Path Remote Defect Indication PRDI A Path RDI failure is declared when the incoming Path RDI defects lasts for 2 5 0 5 seconds 141 asxSonetPathRDICleared This trap indicates that the Path RDI failure identified by trap asxSonetPathRDIDetected has been cleared The Path RDI failure is cleared when no Path RDI defects are detected for 10 0 5 seconds 1
162. SX 1000 or TNX 1100 as a gateway between a single FI PNNI area and a single PNNI area or all of the fabrics on an ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 as a gateway between the same FI PNNI area and the same PNNI area C 1 4 Migrating from FT PNNI to PNNI Routing The migration of FI PNNI networks to PNNI networks is discussed in the following sections It is possible that while migrating a network containing ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 switches invalid configurations similar to the ones described in this section may occur during the inter mediate steps To avoid these potential problems migrate all of the fabrics in an ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 at once keeping them in the same peer groups or areas C 4 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI C 2 Migration of a Non Hierarchical FT PNNI Network This section discusses the conversion of a non hierarchical FI PNNI network to a non hierar chical single peer group PNNI network It is assumed that all switches in your network are FORE switches C 2 1 Migration Overview The following basic steps are involved in converting your network Each of these steps is described in detail in the following section It is recommended that you read the entire section before attempting to change over your network 1 Upgrade each switch in the network to ForeThought 5 3 x 2 Choose a switch that is at the edge of the network Convert it to a gateway switch by changing the default protocol of this
163. SX 4000 Port Card 6 Port Numbering ASX 4000 Port Card 7 Port Numbering ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual LOT 1 List of Tables Table A 13 ASX 4000 Port Card 8 Port Numbering A 14 Table A 14 SNMP Traps Supported on the FORE Switches A 15 Table A 15 Message Type Encodings for Trap 2003 A 31 Table A 16 Error Codes for Trap 2003 0000 c eee A 32 APPENDIX D Configuring FramePlus Modules Table D 1 Buffer Models lllllsleslselleleleellllllees D 3 LOT 2 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Preface This manual provides the technical information needed to configure the ForeRunner and TNX family of ATM Switches the ForeRunner network modules and the accompanying ForeThought software This document also provides general ATM information and general product information This document was created for users with various levels of experience If you have any questions or problems please contact the FORE Systems Technical Assistance Center TAC Chapter Summaries Chapter 1 Configuring PVCs Describes how to create PVCs on a switch through the ATM Management Interface AMI Chapter 2 Configuring Classical IP Describes how to design configure and maintain a Classical IP ATM network Chapter 3 Configuring an Emulated LAN Provides an overview of LAN Emulation and gives an example of how to configure
164. Servers The peers do not re distribute the packet to other E peers this would create a loop ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 3 13 Configuring an Emulated LAN LEC 9 recognizes its IP address and prepares an IP ARP response As shown in Figure 3 9 it then sends an LE ARP request to its local LES O asking for the ATM address that matches LEC 1 s MAC address Since LEC 9 s local LES does not have an entry for LEC 1 the local LES passes the query along to all of its locally attached proxy LECs none are shown in this figure and all of its DLE peer servers A Eng Eng e Eng O LES BUS 1 LES BUS 2 7 7 77 LES BUS 3 x Eng LEC 1 Eng LEC 2 Eng LEC 3 Eng LEC 4 Eng LEC 5 Eng LEC 6 Eng LEC 7 Eng LEC 8 Eng LEC 9 Figure 3 9 LE ARP for Unknown Host Sent to Proxies not shown and DLE Peer Servers In Figure 3 10 the second DLE peer server is attached to two proxy LECs LEC 4 and LEC 5 When the DLE peer server receives the LE ARP query it cannot resolve the query so the DLE peer server re distributes the query to its proxy LECs Q but not to its peer servers again to avoid a loop Meanwhile the first peer server has been able to resolve the LE ARP for the address of LEC 1 and has sent an LE ARP response to the third server ame Um E Less 3 LES BUS 3 o Eng LES BUS 1
165. Switch Network Configuration Manual Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI 4 Atthis point C 5 does not have any more FI PNNI links left 5o modify the default protocol of the default domain in C 5 to pnni using the following AMI command conf atmroute domain modify lt domain ID gt pnni Reboot switch C 5 5 C 4 is the next switch to be converted Modify the default protocol of the default domain in C 4 to gateway using the following AMI command conf atmroute domain modify lt domain ID gt gateway Reboot switch C 4 6 Since C 6 has now lost its last FI PNNI link change the default protocol of the default domain in C 6 to pnni using the following AMI command conf atmroute domain modify lt domain ID gt pnni Reboot switch C 6 7 C 1 is the next switch to be changed to a gateway Since the FI PNNI peer group of C will become partitioned when C 1 becomes a gateway switch it is a good idea to change the peer group ID of the FI PNNI node on C 1 so that other peer groups will not attempt to use peer group C as a transit peer group while computing inter peer group routes Change the peer group ID of the FI PNNI node on C 1 to E something other than C using the following AMI commands T v z S U z zZ wo DurjoAuo2 conf atmroute ftpnni pgmask lt mask gt conf atmroute ftpnni prefix lt prefix gt Answer no to the question of whether or not you want to the switch to be rebooted 8 Modify the default protoco
166. Terminal Equipment TTE Directive 91 263 EEC Thus the following CE mark applies Ce168X The E1 and E3 network modules conform to safety standard EN60950 1992 following the provisions of Low Voltage Product Safety Directive 73 23 EEC and CE Marking Directive 93 68 EEC and can be marked accordingly with the CE symbol The E1 and E3 network modules conform to EN55022 1994 and EN50082 1 1992 following the provisions of the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and can be marked accordingly with the CE symbol National Approvals UK Network Module Connects to Approval Number E1 PTO provided private circuits AA60953 with 75 Q interfaces E3 PTO provided private circuits NS 4387 1 T 605954 with 75 Q interfaces CEM E1 PTO provided private circuits AA607478 with 75 Q or 120 Q unstructured interfaces Required User Guide Statements UK Installation The network modules are designed for use only with FORE Systems ATM Switches Use of the network modules in any product not listed in this manual may result in a hazard and will invalidate the regulatory approval The network modules must be installed in accordance with the installation instructions provided The following table shows the available ports and their safety status Ports Safety Status E1 and E3 Ports TNV operating at SELV Bus Connector SELV CE NOTICE Marking by the symbol CE indicates compliance of this system to the EMC Electromagnetic
167. Thought software 4 1 Overview of LANE MPOA FORE System s ForeThought software is compliant with the ATM Forum s LAN Emulation Over ATM Version 1 0 specification LANE allows higher level protocols and LAN applications to interoperate without modifications with an ATM network The LANE components running on the ATM network interact to emulate an Ethernet or Token Ring LAN This emulated Ethernet or Token Ring LAN is called an emulated LAN ELAN The ELAN components resolve MAC addresses to ATM addresses replace the con nectionless operation of legacy LANs with point to point connections and provide broadcast and multicast services The ELAN consists of a LANE MPOA Client LEC MPC running on each host in the ELAN and the following LANE Services e the LAN Emulation Server LES e the Broadcast and Unknown Server BUS e the LAN Emulation Configuration Server LECS The LANE services may operate on a FORE Systems ATM switch PowerHub 7000 PowerHub 8000 ASN 9000 or Solaris workstation ForeThought also provides support for Distributed LAN Emulation DLE which provides load sharing and improved fault tolerance within an ELAN ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 4 1 MPOA 4 2 LANE Primer LANE is the foundation on which MPOA is built Therefore before presenting an explanation of MPOA an understanding of LANE components and their operation in an ELAN is needed 4 2 1 LANE Components An ELAN includes the following c
168. Traffic Type Timing Required is absent these 3 codings are treated as equivalent A blank entry indicates that the parameter is not present 7 20 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Of f ldi Security ForeThought software that is version 5 0 x or greater provides various forms of switch secu rity Security can be implemented by creating userids There are also security methods that prevent access to the switch which include IP filtering and NSAP filtering Each of these secu rity methods is described in the following sections 8 1 Configuring Userids The network administrator creates and assigns a userid for each user or for a group of users via the conf security login new command in the ATM Management Interface AMI See Part 2 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual for more information about this command A userid consists of the following e a method of login authentication e alevel of AMI command privileges e alevel of AMI access levels e an optional password On a new switch running ForeThought 5 0 x or greater there are two separate default userids ami and asx Both are configured with the local authentication method with admin privi leges meaning you are allowed to use all AMI commands and a11 access meaning you are allowed to login to the switch using all the possible methods Both userids are assigned a null password The network administrator should configure userids for all people w
169. Virtual Channels Created on Terminating Path C3 3 1 13 Virtual Channels Created on Originating Path C2 2 1 13 The Path of a Cell ViaSPVCs 0 0 0 0 c eee eee 1 14 PVPs Looped through Port 1A2 and Output on Port 1A1 TOV WAM dne exei eoe Ped at eee ide Ra RR RES 1 24 PVPs Coming in Port 1A1 from WAN and Looped through io pm 1 25 Configuring Classical IP Configuring a Third Party Host with No ILMI and No REG 1577 SUppott zoe uen f aee MERERI REB IC REDE Ua 2 12 Configuring a Third Party Switch with ILMI Support and No HEG 157 2 ets Portes etre ona er diss 2 13 Configuring a Third Party Switch with RFC 1577 and No TEM SUP BDO GE iru ter tete Re acne We Pacte aea 2 14 Configuring an Emulated LAN Basic Emulated LAN Interconnections 3 2 ELAN Operation 3 5 Single Server LANE Services Model 05 3 9 Broadcast IP ARP Request 0 00 cece eee eee 3 10 IP ARP Response Handling 0 00 e eee eee 3 10 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual LOF 1 List of Figures Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 Figure 3 20 CHAPTER 4 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 CHAPTER 5 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 CHAPTER 6 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 6 3 Figure 6 4 LOF 2 Distributed
170. _b The following is an example of how to create a virtual path which specifies a name and a con nection type myswitch configuration vpc new 3b6 62 3b2 62 name customer c inctype tran outctype tran The following is an example of how to create a virtual path on an ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 To create a through path going in port 2A1 VPI 1 on the switch board installed in slot 2 and going out port 4B1 VPI 1 on the switch board installed in slot 4 enter the following myswitch myswitch myswitch myswitch configuration vpc new 2al 1 2e4 1 configuration vpc new 2e4 1 2a1 1 configuration vpc new 4b1 1 4e2 1 configuration vpc new 4e2 1 4b1 1 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 1 19 Configuring PVCs In the first line in the first pair notice that the output port is 2E4 This is the intra fabric port The 2 means the connection is coming out of the switch board in slot 2 through the intra fabric port The E represents the intra fabric port The 4 means the connection is destined for switch board in slot 4 2E4 then becomes the input port in the second line In the first line in the second pair notice that the output port is 4E2 This is the intra fabric port The 4 means the connection is coming out of the switch board in slot 4 through the intra fabric port The E represents the intra fabric port The 2 means the connection is destined for switch board in slot 2 4E2 then becomes the input port in the
171. a rate of 34 368 Mbps E3 lines can be leased for private use from common carriers Edge Device A physical device which is capable of forwarding packets between legacy inter working interfaces e g Ethernet Token Ring etc and ATM interfaces based on data link and network layer information but which does not participate in the running of any network layer routing protocol An Edge Device obtains forwarding descriptions using the route distri bution protocol elarp a FORE program that shows and manipulates MAC and ATM address mappings for LAN Emulation Clients LECs elconfig a FORE program that shows and modifies LEC configuration Lets the user set the NSAP address of the LAN Emulation Configuration Server display the list of Emulated LANs configured in the LECS for this host display the list of ELANs locally configured along with the membership state of each and locally administer ELAN membership Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory EEPROM an EPROM that can be cleared with electrical signals rather than the traditional ultraviolet light Electromagnetic Interference EMI signals generated and radiated by an electronic device that cause interference with radio communications among other effects Electronics Industries Association EIA a USA trade organization that issues its own stan dards and contributes to ANSI developed RS 232 Membership includes USA manufacturers Embedded SNMP Agent an SNMP a
172. a with an area ID of 2 and level 2 with a single PNNI peer group in the new network e Peer group B would become a PNNI area with an area ID 1 and level 4 a lower level than 2 with a single PNNI peer group e Peer group C would become a PNNI area with an area ID 3 and level 4 a lower level than 2 with a single PNNI peer group ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual C 27 Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI e The link between B 2 and C 2 in the FI PNNI network can be placed in a new area with peer group ID D which is a higher level area connecting peer groups B and C and acts as a back door entry between the two peer groups This provides the redundancy that this link offered in the original FI PNNI network Figure C 20 shows the state of the network on the completion of the migration PNNI peer group boundary PNNI node VISA CN tp Pe PNNI link gum A 1 fe PGA N A2 M L2 ELE tame ee Ke Ke N L2 PGB K D Y RN A1 Z x a cete DOS Dil xe A3 MES NN PGD NS LI Figure C 20 Hierarchical PNNI Network after Migration C 28 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Tadd zi PEE Configuring FramePlus Modules FORE Systems FramePlus network modules NMFR 4 DS1A and NMFR 4 E1A are four port interfaces that support interworking between ATM and Frame Relay or ATM and Frame based UNI FUNI All four ports of the DS1 FramePlus
173. above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunica tions company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Caution Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate E1 AND E3 NOTICE The E1 NM 6 E1C NM 2 E1C NM 8 E1D and NM 4 E1D and E3 NM 4 E3C NM 2 E3C NM 4 E3D and NM 2 E3D network modules that are described in this manual are approved for use in FORE Systems host systems providing that the instructions below are strictly observed Failure to follow these instructions invalidates the approval Pan European Approval CE Marking Pan European approval of the E1 network module was issued by BABT following assessment against CTR12 This means that it can be connected to ONP and unstructured PTO provided private circuits with 120 Q interfaces in all European countries according to Telecommunications
174. ach operating at 64K bps at the aggregate rate of 1 544M bps full duplex Also referred to as DS 1 T3 a specification for a transmission line the equivalent of 28 T1 lines T3 lines run at 44 736 Mbps In common usage the term T3 is used interchangeably with DS3 Tachometer in ForeView the tachometer shows the level of activity on a given port The num ber in the tachometer shows the value of a chosen parameter in percentage with a colored bar providing a semi logarithmic representation of that percentage Tagged Cell Rate TCR An ABR service parameter TCR limits the rate at which a source may send out of rate forward RM cells TCR is a constant fixed at 10 cells second Telephony The conversion of voices and other sounds into electrical signals which are then transmitted by telecommunications media Telnet a TCP IP protocol that defines a client server mechanism for emulating directly con nected terminal connections Terminal Equipment TE Terminal equipment represents the endpoint of ATM connection s and termination of the various protocols within the connection s Throughput Measurement of the total useful information processed or communicated by a computer during a specified time period i e packets per second Time Division Multiplexing TDM a method of traditional digital multiplexing in which a sig nal occupies a fixed repetitive time slot within a higher rate signal Token Ring a network a
175. adapters and terminals Broadcast Data transmission to all addresses or functions Broadcast and Unknown Server BUS in an emulated LAN the BUS is responsible for accept ing broadcast multicast and unknown unicast packets from the LECs to the broadcast MAC address FFFFFFFFFFFF via dedicated point to point connections and forwarding the pack ets to all of the members of the ELAN using a single point to multipoint connection Brouter bridging router a device that routes some protocols and bridges others based on con figuration information Buffer A data storage medium used to compensate of a difference in rate of data flow or time of occurrence of events when transmitting data from one device to another Building Integrated Timing Supply BITS a master timing supply for an entire building which is a master clock and its ancillary equipment The BITS supplies DS1 and or composite clock timing references for synchronization to all other clocks and timing sources in that building Bursty Errored Seconds BES a BES contains more than 1 and fewer than 320 path coding violation error events and no severely errored frame or AIS defects Controlled slips are not included in determining BESs Bursty Second a second during which there were at least the set number of BES threshold event errors but fewer than the set number of SES threshold event errors Byte A computer readable group of bits normally 8 bits in length Ca
176. address it first checks if a shortcut circuit to that ATM address already exists If a shortcut circuit to that address already exists it sends the packets via the existing shortcut circuit If no shortcut circuit exists it opens a new shortcut circuit and begins sending packets over it to the destination 4 3 4 5 Shortcut Teardown Application programs and networking protocol stacks are MPOA ignorant and therefore do not tear down shortcut circuits when the shortcut is no longer needed Therefore the MPOA layer itself tears down seldom used shortcuts to avoid circuit exhaustion in the client and net work When a shortcut is idle for a period exceeding a set limit the shortcut is torn down 4 14 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual On didie ForeThought PNNI PNNI Private Network Node Interface or Private Network to Network Interface is an ATM Forum approved protocol which defines interoperability between private ATM switches PNNI defines both the routing and signalling standards for inter switch interoperability This chapter provides an overview of FORE Systems pre standard version of PNNI ForeThought PNNI FI PNNL and its use in a multiple switch network FT PNNI is a scalable routing and signalling protocol used in networks containing multiple FORE switches FI PNNI simplifies large network topologies by organizing the nodes switches in that net work into smaller groups It is this reorganization of the network topology
177. ade in this manual to the following manuals AMI Configuration Command Reference Manual Part 1 Describes the configuration level AMI commands and menus from configuration alarms to configuration nsap gt AMI Configuration Command Reference Manual Part 2 Describes the configuration level AMI commands and menus from configuration port to configuration vpt ATM Management Interface AMI Manual Describes the root display operation and statistics level AMI commands and menus ATM Switch Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Manual Describes the debug level AMI com mands and menus Also describes error messages loopbacks SCP diagnostics and ATM Forum PNNI debugging information These manuals can be found on the CD and can be read and printed using Acrobat Reader which is also included on the CD If Acrobat Reader is installed locally run Acrobat and open the manual from the DOCS directory of the CD If Acrobat Reader is not installed locally run the Acrobat installer to load Acrobat Reader on your machine Then run the ACROREAD EXE file in the DOCS directory of the CD ii ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Preface Technical Support In the U S A customers can reach FORE Systems Technical Assistance Center TAC using any one of the following methods PETER 1 Select the Support link from FORE s World Wide Web page http www fore com 2 Send questions via e mail to support fore
178. age ACM A B ISUP call control message from the receiving exchange to sending exchange indicating the completion of address information Address Mask a bit mask used to identify which bits in an address usually an IP address are network significant subnet significant and host significant portions of the complete address This mask is also known as the subnet mask because the subnetwork portion of the address can be determined by comparing the binary version of the mask to an IP address in that sub net The mask holds the same number of bits as the protocol address it references Address Prefix A string of 0 or more bits up to a maximum of 152 bits that is the lead portion of one or more ATM addresses Address Resolution The procedure by which a client associates a LAN destination with the ATM address of another client or the BUS ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary 1 Glossary Address Resolution Protocol ARP a method used to resolve higher level protocol addressing such as IP into the appropriate header data required for ATM i e port VPI and VCI also defines the AAL type to be used Agent a component of network and desktop management software such as SNMP that gathers information from MIBs alarm an unsolicited message from a device typically indicating a problem with the system that requires attention Alarm Indication Signal AIS In T1 an all ones condition used to alert a receiver that
179. al Network Layer Layer three In the OSI model the layer that is responsible for routing data across the network Network Management Entity NM body of software in a switching system that provides the ability to manage the PNNI protocol NM interacts with the PNNI protocol through the MIB Network Management Layer NML an abstraction of the functions provided by systems which manage network elements on a collective basis providing end to end network monitoring Network Management Station NMS system responsible for managing a network or portion of a network by talking to network management agents which reside in the managed nodes Network Module ATM port interface cards which may be individually added to or removed from any ForeRunner ATM switch to provide a diverse choice of connection alternatives Network Parameter Control NPC Defined as the set of actions taken by the network to moni tor and control traffic from the NNI Its main purpose is to protect network resources from malicious as well as unintentional misbehavior which can affect the QoS of other already established connections by detecting violations of negotiated parameters and taking appropri ate actions Refer to UPC ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary 23 Glossary Network Redundancy Duplicated network equipment and or data which can provide a backup in case of network failures Network Service Access Point NSAP OSI generic stand
180. al Configuring FramePlus Modules D 5 2 Creating the Services for Frame Relay Create any Frame Relay services that you want and apply the LMI and service profiles For example myswitch myswitch he newly myswitch he newly myswitch he newly myswitch Searching name lt name gt configuration fratm gt new lt port gt lt timeslots gt lmi lt index gt service lt index gt created configuration fratm gt new created configuration fratm gt new created egress_re enable disable id lt bnp cc gt service id is 4A1 00 service id is 4A1 01 service id is 4A1 02 configuration fratm gt show for FR ATM services SvcId TimeSlot 4A1 00 1 4A1 01 2 4A1 02 3 Admin EgressRE Lmi Serv up disabled 0 0 up disabled 1 0 up disabled 0 0 Traps enabled enabled enabled admin configuration fratm new 4al 1 name service a 4al 3 name service c Stats disabled disabled disabled up down 4al 2 lmi 1 name service b Name service a service b service c As you can see in the Stats field the collection of statistics is disabled by default at the ser vice level It is enabled by default at the module level If you want to collect statistics you must enable that functionality here at the service level as well myswitch myswitch myswitch myswitch myswitch Searching configuration fr
181. allowed 7 4 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Signalling In another example if the peer supports the range of 32 511 but there are VCIs already reserved on VP 65 as shown below in the MinVCI and MaxVCI fields configuration vpt show Input Output Port VPI Port VPI ResBW CurBW MinVCI MaxVC VCs Protocol 1A1 0 terminate N A 37 3K 5 35 pvc 1A2 0 terminate N A 0 8K 5 6 pve 1A3 0 terminate N A 0 8K 5 6 pvc 1A3 65 terminate N A 0 8 120 6 pve 1A4 0 terminate N A 0 8K 5 6 pvc 1CTL 0 terminate N A 45 4K 1023 85 pvc originate 1A1 0 N A l4K 5 T pvc originate 1A2 0 N A 0 8K 5 6 pvc originate 1A3 0 N A 0 8K 5 6 pve originate 1A3 65 N A 0 8K 120 6 pvc originate 1A4 0 N A 0 8K 5 6 pvc Press return for more q to quit q and you enter the following conf signalling new 1A3 65 ilmi up minvci 70 maxvci 200 then the actual range is computed as an intersection based on the range you enter 70 200 the range available in that VP 1 120 and the range supported by the peer 32 511 To see what the actual VCI range is enter the following command conf signalling show atmranges Admin Admin Oper Oper Admin Oper Oper Port VPI MinVCI MaxVCI MinVCI MaxVCI MaxVPI MaxSvccVPI MaxSvpcVPI SvpCapable 1A1 0 32 SEI 32 511 1022 N A N A N A 1A2 0 32 511 32 511 1022 N A N A N A 143 0 32 SIL 32 SLL 1022 N A N A N A 1A3 65 70 200 70 120 1022 N A N A N A 1A4 0 32 SIT 32 511 1022 N A N A N A ICTL 0 32 1023 32 1023 0 N A
182. also used when creating the through path that connects from the WAN port to the looping port The through path loopvpi should be the same vpi as the terminating path on the looping port See Section 1 5 2 1 for more information vbrob The bandwidth overbooking level for this vpt specified as a percentage Valid values are integers from 1 to 32 767 100 means that no overbooking has been defined Values less than 100 cause underbooking Values greater than 100 cause overbooking Overbooking cannot be specified on an elastic path Therefore you can only specify an overbooking fac tor for an originating path when you also have reserved bandwidth for the path i e spec ified the reserved lt Kbs gt parameter vbrbuffob The buffer overbooking level for this vpt specified as a percentage Valid values are inte gers greater than or equal to 1 100 means that no overbooking has been defined Values less than 100 cause underbooking Values greater than 100 cause overbooking Over booking cannot be specified on an elastic path Therefore you can only specify an over booking factor for an originating path when you also have reserved bandwidth for the path i e specified the reserved lt Kbs gt parameter none The specified class of service CBR real time VBR non real time VBR UBR ABR is not supported default The default parameters of 0 CTD 0 CDV and 0 CLR are to be used for the CBR class of service qos
183. ance to PCR of the aggregate of the CLP 0 cells and the CLP 1 cells Cells which fail the PCR CLP 0 1 test are discarded The MCR is the guaranteed minimum rate and the PCR is the maximum required rate The MCR may be set to 0 which indicates best effort service If MCR is set greater than 0 then the rate is guaranteed up to MCR However between MCR and PCR cells may be dropped when congestion is experienced 1 42 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring PVCs 1 7 4 AMI UPC Commands AMI allows you to create a UPC contract using these combinations of traffic parameters To create a UPC contract in AMI enter the following parameters configuration upc new index ubr aal5 noPktDisc ubrTagging ALtCLP estbw lt kcps gt name lt name gt OR configuration upc new index abr lt pcr01 gt mcr cdvt lt us gt noGCRA aal5 noPktDisc PPPol name lt name gt OR configuration upc new index UPC edvt lt us gt noGCRA aal5 noPktDisc PPPol A1tCLP scheduling roundrobin smoothed guaranteed name lt name gt o e 3 zh Z z v lt ie o Where UPC is one of the following combinations of traffic parameters cbr lt pcr0l1 gt cbr0 lt pcr0 gt pcr01 tag vbr lt pcr01 gt lt scr01 gt lt mbs01 gt vbr0O pcr01 scr0 lt mbs0 gt tag Advanced options to generate UPC contract from Frame Relay parameters be bits
184. anual Vee E24 Configuring SNMP The switch control software for the FORE ATM switches includes an SNMP agent The SNMP agent enables the remote monitoring and configuration of these switches A 1 SNMP Indexing There are two main SNMP indexing schemes used software port indices and hardware port indices Software port indices are single numbers starting at 0 for the first port incrementing 8 ports per module on an ASX 200WG TNX 210 and on an ASX 200BX For example port A1 on an ASX 200WG TNX 210 or an ASX 200BX has a software port index of 0 Port C3 on an ASX 200WG TNX 210 or an ASX 200BX has a software port index of 18 or 8 2 2 Hardware port indices are of the form board network module port or bnp notation They start at 0 0 0 for the first port and increment across boards network modules and ports For example port C3 on an ASX 200WG TNX 210 or an ASX 200BX is hardware port 0 2 2 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual A 1 Oo o E E amp zt E Co o zZ v Configuring SNMP Table A 1 summarizes the port numbering conventions and related SNMP indexing format used for an ASX 200WG TNX 210 and an ASX 200BX Table A 1 ASX 200WG ASX 200BX TNX 210 Port Numbering Port Software Port Board Netmod Port Software Port Board Netmod Name Number Port Index Name Number Port Index A1 0 0 0 0 C1 16 0 2 0 A2 1 0 0 1 C2 17 0 2 1 A3 2 0 0 2 C3 18 0 2 2 A4
185. apter assume that you do not have a TCM installed 9 5 1 Configuring Timing on an ASX 200BX TNX 210 or ASX 200WG This example assumes that you are going to use 1A1 as your primary clock and 1B1 as your secondary clock Use the following ATM Management Interface AMI commands to set your primary and secondary switchclocks conf timing switchclock primary lal conf timing switchclock secondary 1bl 9 5 2 Configuring Timing on an ASX 1000 or a TNX 1100 Single Timing Domain This example assumes that you are going to use 3A1 as your primary clock and 3B1 as your secondary clock The only limitation on an ASX 1000 or a TNX 1100 is that you must configure both the primary and secondary clocks to be on the same fabric On all fabrics installed in the switch use the following AMI commands to set your primary and secondary clocks conf timing switchclock primary 3al conf timing switchclock secondary 3bl 9 4 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring Timing 9 5 3 Configuring Timing on an ASX 1000 or a TNX 1100 Multiple Timing Domains This example assumes that you are going to use 1C1 as your primary clock and 1D1 as your sec ondary clock for fabrics 1 and 2 and that you are going to use 3A1 as your primary clock and 3B1 as your secondary clock for fabrics 3 and 4 The only limitation on an ASX 1000 or a TNX 1100 is that you must configure both the primary and secondary export clocks to be on the same fabric 1 On fabrics 1 a
186. ard for a network address consisting of 20 octets ATM has specified E 164 for public network addressing and the NSAP address structure for private network addresses Network to Network Interface or Network Node Interface NNI the interface between two pub lic network pieces of equipment Node A computer or other device when considered as part of a network Non Return to Zero NRZ a binary encoding scheme in which ones and zeroes are represented by opposite and alternating high and low voltages and where there is no return to a zero ref erence voltage between encoded bits Non Return to Zero Inverted NRZI A binary encoding scheme that inverts the signal on a 1 and leaves the signal unchanged for a 0 Also called transition encoding Nonvolatile Storage Memory storage that does not lose its contents when power is turned off NuBus a high speed bus used in Macintosh computers structured so users can put a card into any slot on the board without creating conflict over the priority between those cards nx64K This refers to a circuit bandwidth or speed provided by the aggregation of nx64 kbps channels where n integer gt 1 The 64K or DSO channel is the basic rate provided by the T Carrier systems Nyquist Theorem In communications theory a formula stating that two samples per cycle is sufficient to characterize a bandwidth limited analog signal in other words the sampling rate must be twice the highest frequ
187. are geographically separated from the LES BUS may have poor throughput even when connecting to each other because address queries and broadcasts may traverse slow wide area links e A failure of the LES or BUS brings down the ELAN moO 3S cz gt DG os reo Py z5 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 3 11 Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 4 2 Distributed LAN Emulation Model To address the limitations of the single server model DLE distributes the LANE services load among a mesh of LES BUS DLE peer servers as shown in Figure 3 6 ee PES 4 Ln eeu te wm B Dom PP 7o 7 x N Eng Eng Eng LES BUS 1 LES BUS 2 LES BUS 3 Eng LEC 1 EngLEC 2 Eng LEC 3 Eng LEC 4 Eng LEC 5 Eng LEC 6 Eng LEC 7 Eng LEC 8 Eng LEC 9 Figure 3 6 Distributed LAN Emulation Model Each DLE peer server actually maintains two sets of connections one is a point to multipoint connection to each of its peers for broadcasting multicast data and flooding control information and the other includes individual point to point connections to each peer for directed control traffic Each DLE peer server that supports the ELAN is responsible for registering and giving reports about the LECs that are attached to it directly Each DLE peer server propagates this informa tion to both its locally attached LECs and its peers Each device running a DLE peer server must u
188. art is a unique code from the SecurID token that only the user possesses and which cannot be counterfeited Each authorized user on a protected system is assigned a SecurID token to use when accessing a protected switch SecurID tokens are small hand held devices that use microprocessors to calculate and display random codes These codes change at a specified interval which is usually once every minute The random code displayed on a user s token is the same code the server software has generated for that moment 8 1 1 2 3 SecurlD Server The server can run on a UNIX system or on a Windows NT system Each FORE switch has a defined set of authorized users See Part 2 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual for more information When a user is designated as someone who has SecurID autho rization that user is not permitted access to that switch until his or her identity is validated based on the scenarios listed in Table 8 1 When a user attempts to login with a SecurID passcode the SecurID software running on the switch verifies the passcode with the server verifies the authenticity of the server so that no other machine can pretend to be the server in order to capture security data and encrypts and decrypts messages sent between the switch and the server 8 1 1 2 3 1 Slave Server A backup or slave server can be installed to ensure that authentication services are not inter rupted even if the server goes down When the slave det
189. arts up 1 The LEC MPC obtains its own ATM address via address registration Optionally you can manually specify the ATM address 2 The LEC MPC establishes a connection to a LECS using an address obtained via ILMI a well known address or PVC 0 17 Optionally you can manually specify the LECS address 4 4 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual MPOA 3 The LEC MPC requests the information needed to join a specified ELAN or the default ELAN The LECS has information about available ELANs what ELANs each LEC MPC can join and which ELAN the LEC MPC should attempt to join first If a LECS is not available or if you choose not to use it you can manually specify the information required to join a specific ELAN 4 The LEC MPC contacts the LES associated with the ELAN it wants to join and reg isters its MAC ATM address pair It also contacts the BUS associated with the ELAN At this point the LEC MPC and the LES have the information required to allow this host to communicate with other hosts on the ELAN as if it were an Ether net or Token Ring network Refer to the following section for a description of how the LEC MPC connects to other hosts on the ELAN 4 2 2 2 The Connection Process To send packets to another host on the ELAN 1 The LEC MPC calls the LES to map the MAC destination address into an ATM address The LES maintains a mapping table of the address of all LEC MPCs on the ELAN 2 Ifthe LES finds an entry
190. as been configured these services must be started so that they are available for LECs to attempt to use Using ForeThought 5 0 or greater the LES BUS services must run in the same device 3 6 3 1 Starting the LECS Once an LECS configuration file has been configured you need to retrieve the LECS configu ration database file that you built elsewhere and put it on the switch that is going to run the LECS 1 Use the following AMI command to retrieve the file configuration lane lecs get lt host gt lt remotefile gt lt localfile gt For example you would enter something similar to the following configuration lane lecs get 198 29 22 46 lecs cfg 2 After you have retrieved the LECS configuration database file use the following AMI command to start the LECS service on the switch conf lane lecs new lt LECS Selector byte HEX gt db lt LECS database file N default LES atm address gt LECS wka none For example to start the LECS service using the db option and using the ATM Forum s well known address you would enter something similar to the following configuration lane lecs new 0x0c db lecs cfg If you want to use an address other than the E ATM Forum s address you would enter that address at the end of the command If you want to disable the well known address so that the LECS can only be contacted by using the switch s actual address with selector byte type none at the end of the command 3 38
191. as follows CAUTION You risk damaging your equipment and or software if you do not follow these instructions NOTE statements contain information that has been found important enough to be called to the special attention of the operator and is set off from the text as follows If you change the value of the LECS control E parameters while the LECS process is running the new values do not take effect until the LECS process is stopped and then restarted ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual V Preface Laser Warning Every FORE Systems network module having a single mode fiber optic interface contains a Class 1 laser Class 1 Laser Product This product conforms to applicable requirements of 21 CFR 1040 at the date of manufacture Class 1 lasers are defined as products which do not permit human access to laser radiation in excess of the accessible limits of Class 1 for applicable wavelengths and durations These lasers are safe under reasonably foreseeable conditions of operation WARNING Do not stare into the beam or view the beam with optical instruments vi ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Preface Safety Precautions For your protection observe the following safety precautions when setting up equipment e Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the equipment e Ensure that the voltage and frequency of your power source matches the voltage and frequency inscribed on the equipment s electr
192. assess the conformance to PCR of the aggregate of the CLP 0 and the CLP 1 cells If the tag option is set the cells which fail the PCR CLP 0 test are tagged as CLP 1 and passed on to the second leaky bucket to be tested for PCR CLP 0 1 conformance Cells which fail the PCR test on CLP 0 1 are discarded If the tag option is not set cells which fail the PCR CLP 0 test are discarded and cells which fail the PCR test on CLP 0 1 are discarded The vbr lt pcr01 gt lt scr01 gt lt mbs01 gt contract is for VBR traffic The first leaky bucket assesses the conformance to PCR of the aggregate of CLP 0 cells and the CLP 1 cells and the second leaky bucket assesses the conformance to SCR and BT of this same combination Cells which fail the PCR test are dropped Cells which pass the PCR test but which fail SCR and BT test are dropped The vbr0 pcr01 lt scr0 gt mbs0 tag contract is for VBR traffic It uses the first leaky bucket to assess the conformance to PCR of the aggregate of the CLP 0 and the CLP 1 cells Cells that fail this test are discarded It uses the second leaky bucket to assess the conformance to SCR and BT of the CLP 0 cells If the tag option is set the cells which fail the SCR and BT CLP 0 test are tagged as non conforming cells If the tag option is not set cells which fail the SCR and BT CLP 0 test are discarded The abr pcr01 mcr contract is for ABR traffic It only uses the first leaky bucket to assess the conform
193. associate the profile s and service s with it These steps are described in detail in the following sections There are also steps described for configuring SPANS SPVCs and PNNI SPVCs on a FramePlus network module A FramePlus network module can run either a Frame Relay over ATM or Frame based User to Network Interface FUNI application Because Frame Relay is the default it is assumed that you do not need to change the application from FUNI to Frame Relay at this point If you need to change the application see the instructions in Section D 6 1 The Appin field under conf mod show displays which application is currently running either fratm for Frame Relay or funi for FUNI D 5 1 Choosing Frame Relay Profiles First you need to decide which profiles you want to use For most profile types several default profiles are provided for your convenience If a service or connection is created without specifying any profile the first default profile in the list index 0 is used To display the default profiles use the show command under each profile e g conf profile epdppd show If these defaults do not match your network s needs you can create your own using the new command under each profile e g conf profile epdppd new Cre ate the new profiles for each profile type that you are going to use Once you have determined which default profiles to use you can move on to Section D 5 2 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manu
194. ated to PNNI C 22 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI C 3 1 2 1 3 Convert Peer Group A Peer group A is chosen next to be migrated to PNNI Step 7 from the conversion of peer group C is unnecessary in peer group A s case because there is only one border node in this peer group and therefore the peer group does not get partitioned during the migration Also ensure that the area ID of the PNNI nodes in peer group A is different from the area ID of peer group C Make 6 the area ID of peer group A and make the level 5 the same level as peer group C Migrate all of the nodes in peer group A using the same method that was used to migrate peer group C in Section C 3 1 2 1 2 C 3 1 2 1 4 Convert the Backbone Once all of the nodes in peer group A have been modified the link between A 1 and C 1 will become an inoperational PNNI link because it is between two gateway switches and because the peer group IDs of the PNNI nodes on A 1 and C 1 do not match However connectivity between the peer groups is still possible through the FI PNNI backbone 1 Modify the default protocol of the default domain in C 1 to pnni using the follow ing AMI command conf atmroute domain modify domain ID pnni Reboot switch C 1 2 Create a second PNNI node in C 1 with a node index of 2 the peer group ID set to D area 3 and level 2 using the following AMI commands T v z o U z zZ woj Bunanuog
195. ath myswitch configuration vpt new 1a2 0 loopvpi 2 myswitch configuration vpt new 1a2 1 loopvpi 3 4 CreateaPVP tothe shaping port on a Series D network module and apply the UPC contract that you created in step 1 so that it shapes the cells myswitch configuration vpt conf vpc myswitch configuration vpc new 1a2 2 1al 2 upc 2 myswitch configuration vpc new 1a2 3 1al 3 upc 2 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring PVCs 5 Create a PVP in the opposite direction and use 1oopvpi to ensure that the cells on each through path get looped back the terminating paths on the looping port 1a2 myswitch configuration vpc new lal 2 1a2 2 loopvpi 0 myswitch configuration vpc new lal 3 1a2 3 loopvpi 1 6 Now use a loopback command to loop the transmit side to the receive side on the looping port 1a2 myswitch configuration vpt conf port admin 1a2 down myswitch configuration vpt conf port sonet loop 1a2 diag Any required signalling paths must be recreated E at this point 7 Additional shaped originating paths can be added later on these same two ports as needed by repeating the steps in this section ie e E Q z E Q U lt i9 V 1 5 2 2 Terminating a PVC at a Switch Sometimes it is necessary to create a PVC between a host and a switch fabric that is at a remote location In this case the PVC should be created from the host to the control port CTL of the
196. ather this informa tion through routing protocol exchanges with other MPS s 4 3 4 2 Initialization When its host boots each LEC MPC automatically goes through the following sequence to establish a connection to the MPS 1 The LEC MPC registers via ILMI with the switch to which it is attached 2 The LEC MPC connects to an LECS to which it sends its own ATM address and the name of the ELAN it wishes to join the ELAN name is an empty string unless the LEC MPC has been site configured with an ELAN name The LEC MPC also supplies a LANE 1 0 compliant parameter identifying itself as an MPOA aware client 3 Next the LEC MPC receives the following from the LECS the name of the ELAN to which it is assigned the ATM address of the LES for the ELAN it is joining the parameters containing the flow detection and shortcut establishment poli cies it is to use 4 The LEC MPC then connects to its assigned LES and provides the LES with a parameter identifying itself as MPOA aware 5 Finally the LEC MPC connects to the ELAN s BUS Once the LANE MPOA connections are established third party network layer protocol driv ers on the host can establish network layer connectivity The methods these upper layer driv ers use to determine host IP addresses default gateway and backup gateway addresses vary depending on the third party product For example the LANE MPOA driver itself permits these drivers to use BOOTP or DHCP to obtain IP conf
197. ating paths are the endpoints of virtual paths and are used primarily for bandwidth allocation The bandwidth allocated to originating and terminating paths is used to control the amount of virtual channel VCC bandwidth entering or leaving a virtual path The total guaranteed bandwidth used by virtual channels on an originating path or a terminating path cannot exceed the amount of bandwidth allocated to that path For example as illustrated in Figure 1 7 if each of the four virtual channels shown is using 10 Mbps of bandwidth then the originating and terminating paths must have at least 40 Mbps of bandwidth allocated UBR traffic bandwidth which is a best effort E service class is not limited by the VP s allocated bandwidth since its bandwidth is not guaranteed Actual UBR VCC traffic transmitted within a VP may exceed the VP s allocated bandwidth Originating Path Terminating Path FORE amp Na FORE j p 24 R ATM Switch 9 M I ATM Switch PA 44 oOo Virtual Channels Figure 1 7 Using Originating and Terminating Paths for Bandwidth Allocation 1 6 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring PVCs 1 3 Listing Virtual Paths 1 3 1 Listing Through Paths By logging in to AMI see Chapter 1 of the ATM Management Interface AMI Manual for infor mation about logging into AMI it is possible to display either all of the existing through paths on an i
198. ation PCM a modulation scheme that samples the information signals and transmits a series of coded pulses to represent the data Q 2931 Derived from Q 93B the narrowband ISDN signalling protocol an ITU standard describing the signalling protocol to be used by switched virtual circuits on ATM LANs Quality of Service QoS Quality of Service is defined on an end to end basis in terms of the following attributes of the end to end ATM connection Cell Loss Ratio Cell Transfer Delay Cell Delay Variation Queuing Delay QD refers to the delay imposed on a cell by its having to be buffered because of unavailability of resources to pass the cell onto the next network function or element This buffering could be a result of oversubscription of a physical link or due to a connection of higher priority or tighter service constraints getting the resource of the physical link Radio Frequency Interference RFI the unintentional transmission of radio signals Computer equipment and wiring can both generate and receive RFI Real Time Clock a clock that maintains the time of day in contrast to a clock that is used to time the electrical pulses on a circuit Red Alarm In T1 a red alarm is generated for a locally detected failure such as when a condi tion like OOF exists for 2 5 seconds causing a CGA Carrier Group Alarm Reduced Instruction Set Computer RISC a generic name for CPUs that use a simpler instruc tion set than more t
199. atm stats serviceid configuration fratm stats 4A1 00 configuration fratm stats 4A1 01 configuration fratm stats 4A1 02 configuration fratm show for FR ATM services SvcId TimeSlot 4A1 00 1 4A1 01 2 4A1 02 3 Admin EgressRE Lmi Serv up disabled 0 0 up disabled 1 0 up disabled 0 0 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual enable enable enable Traps enabled enabled enabled enable disable Stats enabled enabled enabled T o Mel Do U5 3 5o zS 9 amp 8 z n Name service a service b service c D 13 Configuring FramePlus Modules D 5 3 Creating Frame Relay PVCs Now that the profiles and services have been created you can create your PVCs and apply the EPD PPD FRES and FRRATE profiles to the PVCs For example myswitch configuration fratm pvc gt new lt serviceid gt lt dlci gt oport lt oport gt ovpi lt ovpi gt ovci lt ovci gt faupe lt index gt afupe lt index gt epdppd lt index gt admin up down frrate lt index gt frf8 lt index gt name lt name gt note if oport ovpi ovci aren t specified a dangling FRATM PVC will be created Currently the FramePlus network module does not permit the establishment of Frame to Frame connections across a single fabric This restriction prevents connections between FramePlus ports located on the same network module or FramePlus ports located across separate m
200. ave learned from Switch 1 that it no longer offers a connection to N1 or Switch 2 may attempt a route through Switch 1 and be bounced back through ATM Forum PNNI crankback Either way Switch 2 finally routes the connection through Switch 3 to Eng LES 2 This recovery process occurs quickly clients typically recover at a rate of 100 clients per minute and the result is a re configured ELAN as shown in Figure 3 18 Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 i Eng LEC 1 Eng LEC 2 Eng LEC 3 Eng LEC 4 Eng LEC 5 Eng LEC 6 Eng LEC 7 Eng LEC 8 Eng LEC 9 Figure 3 18 ELAN Re established Using the Second Server 3 20 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 5 ELAN Access Control Basic ATM Forum LAN Emulation Servers do not guard against unauthorized users learning an ELAN s LES address and then joining the ELAN However a method of authorization checking is available After a LEC obtains the address of its LES the LEC sends a request to the LES to join the ELAN If the LES has ELAN access control enabled it sends a message to the LECS to verify that the LEC is allowed to join If verification is received from the LECS then the LES gives the LEC permission to join If verification is not received from the LECS the LES rejects the join request and the LEC is dropped Usin
201. be created bidirectional means the pair of unidirectional SPANS SPVCs will be created The default direction if you do not specify one is bidirectional To create a bidirectional SPANS SPVC you must E either specify bidirectional or you must set up two unidirectional SPANS SPVCs with one going in each direction 1 32 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring PVCs To create a SPANS SPVC you need to configure the two ends concurrently on the two switch fabrics Therefore you first need to open an AMI session to the destination switch fabric by using the SCP s IP address along with the SNMP read write community string The following example depicts how to create a bidirectional SPVC from the local switch fabric myswitch to a remote switch fabric 198 29 22 46 named fishtank The asterisk in front of the prompt indicates that it is a remote session To return to the local session you must type localhost instead of the prompt name myswitch gt open 198 29 22 46 private Opening a session for 198 29 22 46 please wait Connected to 198 29 22 46 asx200bx fishtank localhost myswitch configuration spvx spvcc spans new port lt vpi gt vci dest session dest port dest vpi lt dest vci gt ie e E Q z E Q U lt i9 V peak lt Kb sec gt source destination bidirectional myswitch configuration spvx spvcc spans new 1c1 0 49 198 29 2
202. bed in the following sections 8 1 1 1 Local Authentication When a user is configured for local password authentication he or she is prompted for a login ID userid and a password which is stored locally in the switch whenever he or she attempts to open an AMI session either via telnet or via the serial port The login password is not required if the user tries to open an AMI session via a remote switch or via ForeView After a validation check is made based on the scenarios listed in Table 8 1 an AMI session is started provided that a local AMI session is not already running For specific information and examples of how to log in to the switch via telnet via the serial port or via a remote switch see the ATM Management Interface AMI Manual For information about logging in via ForeView see the ForeView Network Management User s Manual 8 1 1 2 SecurlD Authentication When a user is configured for SecurID authentication and he or she attempts to log in the user is prompted for a login ID userid and a SecurID passcode The two part passcode consists of a secret memorized personal identification number PIN and the current code generated by the user s assigned SecurID token The passcode is not required if the user tries to open an AMI session via a remote switch or via ForeView After a validation check is made based on the scenarios listed in Table 8 1 an AMI session is started provided that a local AMI session is not alread
203. between border switches and loglinks from border switches to PGSNs are called backbone links and considered part of the backbone topology Information regarding these backbone links is propagated across peer group boundaries during database exchange and flooding 5 2 6 Single Switch Perspective The main reason for grouping switches in large networks is to simplify each individual switch s view of the topology For example each switch in peer group A is aware of every other switch in peer group A the border switches in the rest of the network the links between them and the backbone topology Switches in peer group A are not aware however of the internal topology of other peer groups Instead individual switches see a PGSN see Figure 5 4 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 5 9 ForeThought PNNI Backbone Link Peer Group Summary Node PGSN Figure 5 4 View of the Network from Switches in Peer Group A 5 10 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual e Vase ATM Forum PNNI PNNI Private Network Node Interface or Private Network to Network Interface is a scalable protocol that defines both the routing and signalling standards for interoperability between private ATM switches PNNI simplifies large network topologies by organizing the nodes in a network into smaller groups Through this re organization PNNI reduces the amount of topology information that those nodes must maintain This c
204. bric enter the following parameters configuration vpt show Input Output Port VPI Port VPI ResBW CurBW MinVCI MaxVC VCs Protocol LC 0 terminate N A 0 8K 1 511 6 pvc ICI 1 terminate 1 0M 0 8K 5 2 pvc Q LC2 0 terminate N A 0 8K 511 6 pvc i Q 1C3 0 terminate N A 0 8K 5 6 pvc c Lc4 0 terminate N A 0 8K 511 6 pve a ICTL 0 terminate N A 7 6K 1023 24 pve u originate 1C1 0 N A 0 8K 511 6 pvc originate 1C1 1 1 0M 0 8K 5 2 pvc e originate 1C2 0 N A 0 8K 511 6 pvc originate 1C3 0 N A 0 8K 5 6 pve originate 1C4 0 N A 0 8K 511 6 pvc originate 1CTL 0 N A 7 6K 1023 30 pve The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Input Port The incoming port number of the vpt Shows originate if it is an originating path Input VPI The incoming virtual path number Output Port The outgoing port number of the vpt Shows the number of the output port of the vpt Shows terminate if it is a terminating path Output VPI The outgoing virtual path number ResBW The maximum amount of bandwidth in Kbps that is reserved for the virtual channels using this vpt A value of N A indicates that this path is an elastic path Elastic paths allo cate and de allocate bandwidth for their channels from the link CurBW The amount of bandwidth in Kbps being used by the virtual channels using this vpt MinVCI The bottom number for the range of VCIs that are reserved for VCCs on this virtual path
205. bucket 1 40 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring PVCs 1 7 2 Non conforming Cells Tagging vs Dropping Second it is important to understand the concept of tagging and dropping Each ATM cell has a Cell Loss Priority CLP bit which indicates if the network can drop it under congested con ditions When the CLP bit is set to 0 or CLP 0 the cell is assessed for compliance with traffic parameters associated with the CLP 0 stream If the traffic parameters dictate that non com pliant cells should be tagged the CLP bit is set to 1 or CLP 1 by the UPC contract which means that upon experiencing congestion further in the network these CLP 1 cells are dropped in preference to CLP 0 cells Table 1 1 shows the various traffic contracts and user configurable actions to be executed upon the detection of non conforming cells 9 5 Table 1 1 Summary of Traffic Contract Variables and Policing Actions E 2 7 5 Traffic policing a MUN cells E Type PCR SCR MBS Bucket 1 Bucket 2 on Switch 9 Fabric Bucket 1 Bucket 2 v CBR PCRO1 PCRO1 Yes Drop CDVT CLP 0 1 CBRO PCRO PCRO1 PCRO CDVT Yes Drop If enabled Tag CLP 0 PCRO1 CDVT CLP 0 1 else Drop CLP 0 VBR PCRO1 SCRO1 MBSO1 PCROI SCROI Yes Drop Drop CLP 0 1 CDVT BT01 CDVT CLP 0 1 VBRO PCRO1 SCRO MBSO PCRO1 SCRO Yes Drop If enabled Tag CLP 0 CDVT BT0 CDVT CLP 0 1 else Drop CLP 0 1 7 3 UPC T
206. buffer sizes are approximations D 4 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring FramePlus Modules D 2 2 1 Noting the CLPOPPD Threshold Each buffer has four different thresholds The first is for Partial Packet Discard PPD on cells with CLP 0 This threshold is automatically set for you as 87 5 of the size of each buffer and cannot be changed It is not displayed in AMI currently but you need to know this value because the other thresholds are calculated on the remaining buffer size Therefore in this example since the total buffer size you set is 16 384 cells then the threshold for CLPOPPD is 87 5 of each buffer as shown in Figure D 2 16 384 cells 0 875 percent 14 336 cells 14 336 16 384 cells 16 384 cells CLPOPPD fixed 87 5 14 336 High Priority Buffer Low Priority Buffer CLPOPPD fixed 87 5 Figure D 2 CLPOPPD Automatically Calculated ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual m TI D 3 n 77 o 2 2 ie fe 3 Q z E a Configuring FramePlus Modules D 2 2 2 Configuring the CLP1EPD Threshold Next calculate the CLP1EPD threshold for each buffer You have four choices 25 37 50 or 62 percent For example you could set the threshold to 50 percent of the remaining buffer size of each buffer which is 14 336 as shown by the arrow in Figure D 3 14 336 cells 0 5 7 168 cells 16 384 cells
207. by other applica tions 3 4 2 2 2 Improved Performance for Remote LECs With DLE broadcast delivery and LE ARP resolution across peer servers can take a little longer than if all LECs were connected to a single server since extra processing steps and transmissions are needed However ELANs with groups of LECs in different locations can be designed for higher performance by providing a DLE peer server with each group Broadcasts and address resolution within each group will improve moO 39S cS De 9 amp 5 reo m z5 3 4 2 2 3 Fault Tolerance Perhaps the most important advantage of DLE is fault tolerance In a single server ELAN the server can be a single point of failure If the server fails endstations in the ELAN are unable to discover each other through broadcast queries and unable to resolve MAC addresses into ATM addresses Increased network reliability therefore requires that ELANs have backups for LES and BUS functions To illustrate this point the single server model is again discussed ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 3 15 Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 4 2 2 3 1 Single Server ELAN Figure 3 12 shows a single server ELAN composed of nine LECs attached to three different switches The LECS and the LES BUS are attached to a host connected to a single switch The process for LEC 1 to connect to the LANE services takes several steps 1 LEC 1 asks the signalling software on its switch to open a connection to th
208. by the buckets as shown in Table 1 1 These parameters are informally defined as follows e Peak Cell Rate PCR the maximum number of cells per second e Cell Delay Variation Tolerance CDVT the tolerance for variation in the inter arrival time of these cells or the amount of jitter that can be accepted by the net work e Sustainable Cell Rate SCR the average rate of cell transmission for this connec tion taking bursting into account e Burst Tolerance BT the maximum amount of cells that can be transmitted e Minimum Cell Rate MCR the minimum rate that the network has to guarantee for an ABR connection The leaky bucket algorithm is basically a timer which assesses if cells entering the switch fab ric conform to the parameters listed above As a cell arrives the timer assesses if the cell is on time late or early If the cell is determined to be on time or late based on the traffic parame ters the cell is allowed to pass unchanged If the cell is early which in turn causes the cell stream to exceed the specified parameters the cell is considered non conforming and is either dropped or tagged the CLP bit is set to 1 depending on the specified contract The first bucket in this analogy measures the PCR or the rate at which the bucket drains It also considers the CDVT or the depth of the bucket The second bucket measures the SCR or the rate at which the bucket drains and the BT or the depth of the second
209. c 10bb 0020481c10bb 90 Co Located c5000580ffe1000000f21c126 0020481c126b66 ANYCAST PEER 0x47 0005 80 6100 0000 21a 24 9 0020481a24 9 00 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 7 5 Transfer the Updated LECS CFG File Transfer the updated LECS CFG file back to the switch that is running the LECS myswitch operation flash gt get 169 144 85 195 tftpboot lecs cfg lecs cfg 3 7 6 Restart the LECS Administer the LECS down and back up again This forces any active clients to re establish their connection with the LECS and forces the LECS to read and use the new LECS CFG file myswitch configuration lane lecs admin 1 down myswitch configuration lane lecs admin 1 up Use the show command and look at the OperStatus field to verify that the LECS has come up again myswitch configuration lane lecs gt show Index AdminStatus OperStatus Selector WKA Database 1 up up 0x00 atm forum lecs cfg 3 7 7 Recreate the LECs If you are going to upgrade any or all of the clients to ForeThought 5 3 x you should do so now Use the following AMI command to upgrade any of the clients that are running on switches oper upgrade lt remotehost gt lt full path to remotefile gt The rest of these instructions apply whether you E upgraded the LEC on the switch to ForeThought 5 3 x or not For commands to recreate LECs that are on platforms other than a switch refer to the appropriate User s Manual
210. ccess method in which the stations circulate a token Stations with data to send must have the token to transmit their data ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary 33 Glossary topology a program that displays the topology of a FORE Systems ATM network An updated topology can be periodically re displayed by use of the interval command option Traffic the calls being sent and received over a communications network Also the packets that are sent on a data network Traffic Management TM The traffic control and congestion control procedures for ATM ATM layer traffic control refers to the set of actions taken by the network to avoid congestion condi tions ATM layer congestion control refers to the set of actions taken by the network to mini mize the intensity spread and duration of congestion The following functions form a framework for managing and controlling traffic and congestion in ATM networks and may be used in appropriate combinations Connection Admission Control Feedback Control Usage Parameter Control Priority Control Traffic Shaping Network Resource Management Frame Discard ABR Flow Control Traffic Parameter A parameter for specifying a particular traffic aspect of a connection Trailer the protocol control information located at the end of a PDU Transit Delay the time difference between the instant at which the first bit of a PDU crosses one designated boundary and the instant at which the
211. ceiving a hello message the link is declared to be down ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 6 1 INNd Uin404 WLV ATM Forum PNNI 6 1 2 Database Exchange Protocol When neighboring nodes determine that they are peers i e that they belong to the same peer group and they are running compatible versions of the PNNI protocol they begin a database exchange process At regular intervals each node tells the other what information it has in its topology database and requests similar information from the other neighboring nodes This exchange of information ensures that the topology databases of all switches in the network stay synchronized 6 1 3 Flooding Protocol Topology information is organized into smallest units called PNNI Topology State Elements PTSEs PNNI routing uses a flooding mechanism to propagate these PTSEs throughout the network in a hop by hop fashion PISEs are encapsulated into PNNI Topology State Packets PTSPs for transmission PTSPs always contain the node identifier ID and the peer group ID of the switch that originated all of the PTSEs When a PTSP is received its component PTSEs are examined Each PTSE is acknowledged by sending a PTSE acknowledgment packet containing possibly a bundle of PISE acknowledg ments to the sending peer If the PTSE is more recent than the copy that the receiving node has in its topology database the database copy is updated and is re flooded to all neighboring peers except t
212. cells 000 1 41 Technical Assistance Center TAC contacting sse iii terminating path 0 1 6 terminating paths 1 6 creating oso A E eA 1 21 displaying espt inae potepa e a 1 9 displaying advanced information 1 10 through paths 005 1 4 displaying advanced information 1 8 timeslots 0 ccc cee eee B 2 timing ASX 1000 ys os beet as Re es 9 4 ASX 200BX 20 0 ccc cee 9 4 ASX 200WG 1 1 ccc cee 9 4 ASX 4000 2 eee 9 6 ForeRunnerLE 155 00065 9 5 ForeRunnerLE 25 000 00s 9 5 portle vel erepto 9 3 TNX TIO sens 9 4 TNX 2I O a eo 9 4 timing on a switch 0 9 1 traffic policing 0 1 40 U UBR tresao e pence etn pa ee de 1 39 Unspecified Bit Rate UBR 1 39 UP us terit erdt p be hr ELM 1 40 Index 5 Index UPC contract creating 6 eee eee ane 1 43 UPC traffic contract parameters 1 41 Usage Parameter Control UPC 1 40 serids dece cle PP tC ee een 8 1 AMI access level 8 9 AMI command privileges 8 9 changing a password 8 10 configuring 000088 8 1 setting a password 8 10 V Variable Bit Rate VBR 1 39 VBR Sue i eto Be ie EIN 1 39 VCI allocation range sssss 7 1 VG space orasida eet hoe EIOS 7 7 virtual channel
213. changes in the amount of bandwidth it is allocated e g data applications Virtual Channel or Circuit VC a communications path between two nodes identified by label rather than fixed physical path Virtual Channel Connection VCC a unidirectional concatenation of VCLs that extends between the points where the ATM service users access the ATM Layer The points at which the ATM cell payload is passed to or received from the users of the ATM Layer i e a higher layer or ATMM entity for processing signify the endpoints of a VCC Virtual Channel Identifier VCI the address or label of a VC a value stored in a field in the ATM cell header that identifies an individual virtual channel to which the cell belongs VCI values may be different for each data link hop of an ATM virtual connection Virtual Channel Link VCL a means of unidirectional transport of ATM cells between the point where a VCI value is assigned and the point where that value is translated or removed Virtual Channel Switch a network element that connects VCLs It terminates VPCs and trans lates VCI values The Virtual Channel Switch is directed by Control Plane functions and relays the cells of a VC Virtual Connection an endpoint to endpoint connection in an ATM network A virtual con nection can be either a virtual path or a virtual channel Virtual Local Area Network VLAN Work stations connected to an intelligent device which provides the capabiliti
214. chical F PNNI Network essleeeereene C 5 C 2 1 Migration Overview sss eh C 5 C 2 2 Detailed Migration Example aaa aaaaaaaaaan nananana C 6 TOC 8 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Table of Contents C 3 Migration of a Hierarchical FT PNNI Network 0000020e0 ees C 3 1 Migration of a Hierarchical FT PNNI Network with a Contiguous Backbone 0 0c eee eee C 3 1 1 Migration Starting with the Backbone C 3 1 1 4 Migration Overview l l essen C 3 1 1 1 1 Upgrade the Switches C 3 1 1 1 2 Convert the Backbone C 3 1 1 1 3 Convert the Individual Peer Groups weet ERI ue C 3 1 2 Migration Starting with the Peer Groups C 3 1 2 1 Overview of the Migration C 3 1 2 1 1 Upgrade the Switches C 3 1 2 1 2 Convert Peer GroupC C 3 1 2 1 3 Convert Peer GroupA C 3 1 2 1 4 Convert the Backbone C 3 1 2 1 5 Convert Peer GroupB C 3 2 Migration of a Hierarchical FT PNNI Network with a Non Contiguous Backbone 00 cece eee eee eas APPENDIX D Configuring FramePlus Modules D 1 Frame Relay Overview lsssllssseese D 1 1 Interworking Function IWF llle IRR D 1 1 1 Translation Mode 00 cee ae D 1 1 2 Transparent Mode 0 eee D 2 Configuring the Module 0000 cece teen ee D 2 1 Dividi
215. com 3 Telephone questions to support at 800 671 FORE 3673 or 724 742 6999 4 FAX questions to support at 724 742 7900 Technical support for customers outside the United States should be handled through the local distributor or via telephone at the following number 1 724 742 6999 No matter which method is used to reach FORE Support customers should be ready to pro vide the following e A support contract ID number e The serial number of each product in question e All relevant information describing the problem or question ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual iii Preface Typographical Styles Throughout this manual all specific commands meant to be entered by the user appear on a separate line in bold typeface In addition use of the Enter or Return key is represented as lt ENTER gt The following example demonstrates this convention ed usr lt ENTER gt File names that appear within the text of this manual are represented in the following style the fore install program installs this distribution Command names that appear within the text of this manual are represented in the following style using the 1ush cache command clears the bridge cache Subsystem names that appear within the text of this manual are represented in the following style to access the bridge subsystem Parameter names that appear within the text of this manual are represented in the following style
216. com ing IP packets by determining if there is a match between the packet s header source address and this table of authorized incoming IP addresses If the addresses match the packets are accepted provided that they meet the requirements set up by the other IP filtering flags oth erwise they are rejected Statistics are kept of the number of rejected IP packets and about the last IP packet that was rejected 8 2 4 Authorized IP Address Table Using the conf security ipaccess accept command the administrator can create an entry in a table of authorized IP addresses from which IP packets will be accepted When the administrator creates an IP address entry in the table he or she can apply a mask to specify a wildcard range of allowable addresses For example an IP address of 163 26 54 6 with a mask of 255 255 255 255 means only address 163 26 54 6 is accepted against that entry However an IP address of 163 26 54 6 with a mask of 255 255 0 0 means addresses 163 26 are accepted against that entry The table can contain a maximum of 32 entries The administrator can also delete entries from the table and display the contents of the table The table will persist across a reboot See Part 2 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual for more information CAUTION When the authorized IP address table is empty all addresses are accepted This is the default state Therefore it is recommended that at least one address be entered int
217. connections Idle patterns are filled from the least significant byte The default is FF for structured basic connections The default CAS idle AB bit pattern is em00 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Parameter Description oidleintp lt idleintp gt The integration period for idle detection on the outgoing side of this connection Idle pat terns are observed for this period before declaring that an active connection has gone idle For both CAS and basic connections the range of values is 500 us to 2 seconds and the default is 1 second m 3 2 EJ wn oO s 7 iv o unan Hurnbyuog ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual B 11 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services B 2 2 Displaying CES Connections To display the current CES connections enter the following myswitch CES Service 24 31 32 33 configuration ces show State down down down down Input Output Port Timeslots VPI VCI Type Port TimeSlots VPI VCI 1A1 1 0 129 1A1 2 3 0 130 spve 103 0 32 1A1 4 5 0 131 pvc 1D4 0 150 1A1 6 7 0 132 spve 1D3 0 35 The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description CES Service The identification number assigned by the switch of this CES connection State Indicates whether the CES connection is enabled up or disabled down Input Port The
218. contend for access Excessive Zeroes EXZ Error Event An Excessive Zeroes error event for an AMI coded signal is the occurrence of more than fifteen contiguous zeroes For a B8ZS coded signal the defect occurs when more than seven contiguous zeroes are detected Explicit Forward Congestion Indication EFCI the second bit of the payload type field in the header of an ATM cell the EFCI bit indicates network congestion to receiving hosts On a con gested switch the EFCI bit is set to 1 by the transmitting network module when a certain number of cells have accumulated in the network module s shared memory buffer When a cell is received that has its EFCI bit set to 1 the receiving host notifies the sending host which should then reduce its transmission rate Explicit Rate ER The Explicit Rate is an RM cell field used to limit the source ACR to a spe cific value It is initially set by the source to a requested rate such as PCR It may be subse quently reduced by any network element in the path to a value that the element can sustain ER is formatted as a rate Extended Industry Standard Architecture EISA bus architecture for desktop computers that provides a 32 bit data passage and maintains compatibility with the ISA or AT architecture Extended Super Frame ESF a T1 framing format that utilizes the 193rd bit as a framing bit but whose Superframe is made up of 24 frames instead of 12 as in D4 format ESF also pro vides
219. cy DARPA the US government agency that funded the ARPANET Demultiplexing a function performed by a layer entity that identifies and separates SDUs from a single connection to more than one connection see multiplexing Destination End Station DES An ATM termination point which is the destination for ATM messages of a connection and is used as a reference point for ABR services See SES Digital Access and Cross Connect System DACS Digital switching system for routing T1 lines and DS 0 portions of lines among multiple T1 ports Digital Cross connect System DCS an electronic patch panel used to route digital signals in a central office Digital Standard n 0 1 1C 2 and 3 DSn a method defining the rate and format of digital hierarchy with asynchronous data rates defined as follows DSO 64kb s 1 voice channel DS1 1 544Mb s 24 DSOs DS1C 3 152 Mb s 2 DS1s DS2 6 312 Mb s 4 DS1s DS3 44 736 Mb s 28 DS1s Synchronous data rates SONET are defined as STS 1 OC 1 51 84 Mb s 28 DS1s or 1 DS3 STS 3 OC 3 155 52 Mb s 3 STS 1s byte interleaved STS 3c OC 3c 155 52 Mb s Concatenated indivisible payload STS 12 OC 12 622 08 Mb s 12 STS 1s 4 STS 3cs or any mixture STS 12c OC 12c 622 08 Mb s Concatenated indivisible payload STS 48 OC 48 2488 32 Mb s 48 STS 1s 16 STS 3cs or any mixture DIP Dual In line Package Switch a device that has two parallel rows of contacts that let the user switch electrical current th
220. cy applies to an address Therefore the suppress and advertise policies provide limited filtering since addresses matching a broad prefix can be filtered at the split switch or gateway switch through the suppress policy then a particular service device or switch can be exempted by advertising an address within the suppressed range The summary policy is best for scalability since one address prefix is shared rather than dozens or hundreds of more specific addresses For example suppose you have an area A which contains peer groups A 1 and A 2 Suppose you create two policies one says suppress all address that are area A and the other policy says advertise all address that are peer group A 1 If an address comes in to the area that has the prefix for A 1 the policy for advertise takes precedence over the policy for suppress the advertise policy is a longer prefix match Therefore the address will be advertised However if an address comes in to the area that has a prefix for A 2 it will be suppressed since there is no advertise or summary match for A 2 6 3 2 3 2 Scope Each piece of reachability information has a source area ID and a scope associated with it The source area ID of reachability information originated in a given area is 0 within that area meaning that is local The source area ID of reachability information advertised from for example area A1 into area A2 has source area ID A1 6 10 ATM Switch Network Configuration Man
221. d are as follows E amp M Loop Start FXS Loop Start FX0 Ground Start FXS and Ground Start FX0 These patterns can be user to network or network to network The available options are as follows em00 em01 fxolsuser01 fxolsuserll fxolsnet00 fxolsnet01 fxslsuser00 fxslsuser01 fxslsnet01 fxslsnet11 fxsgsuser01 fxsgsnet10 fxsgsnet11 fxogsuser10 fxogsuser11 fxogsnet01 r210 The default pattern is em00 The default integra tion period is 1 second and is user configurable from 500 us to 2 seconds B 2 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring Circuit Emulation Services B 1 1 2 Active Detection A connection is declared active when at least one timeslot becomes active The active detection mechanism is not user configurable The AB bits are compared against the configured pattern for idle states and if different the connection is immediately declared active B 1 2 Basic Connections For Basic Common Channel Signalling CCS connections only one idle pattern is used to determine the connection state When the data received from the line interface matches the idle pattern for a short period of time the integration period the connection becomes idle When a connection is idle OAM F5 cells are used to maintain the connection When the first data cell that is received does not match the idle pattern the connection immediately becomes active m 3 E El wn oO E s 7 o 7 unay Buunfiyuo 5 I
222. d in detail in Part 2 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual 8 1 1 2 5 Installing SecurlD on a Switch The following sections describe how to install SecurID on a switch 8 1 1 2 5 1 Installing the Server Software A SecurID server must be run to implement the SecurID authentication method for users of the switch Refer to the Security Dynamics ACE Server or Client user s manuals for instruc tions about installing the software on the server 8 1 1 2 5 2 Transferring the Configuration File As described earlier the server and the switches need to maintain some common configura tion parameters The desired configuration information is specified in the sdconf rec file when the server is installed Once you have installed the server software copy this file to the switch using the AMI command conf security login securid get This command uses the tftp or ftp protocol depending on what is set under conf system protocol to transfer the specified file from the specified server to the switch This get command can be executed only by the E users with admin privileges Ayanoasg This configuration file is read and information is stored in the FLASH so that they persist across reboots Additionally the first time the switch contacts the server it receives a node secret file which is a string of about 16 bytes This string which is known only to the server and this switch is used in encrypting messages between the server an
223. d is 125 microseconds then the EIR is 10 x 8192 or 81 920 bps CIR is very similar to VBR SCR and EIR is very similar to VBR PCR D 10 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring FramePlus Modules D 3 4 LMI Profile The Link Management Interface LMI profile lets you define the version of LMI that is sup ported by a particular Frame Relay service The profile can be applied on a per service basis using the 1mi index option under conf fratm new If you do not want to use LMI then enter the none option for flavor under conf fratm new and use this profile when creat ing your services LMI serves a function that is similar to ILMI for ATM LMI signalling occurs on DLCI 1023 LMI timers poll the network and report if services are up or down This information can be optionally translated into ATM OAM F5 cells so that when a DLCI goes down it triggers an F5 cell for the corresponding PVC This profile lets you specify the values of the various LMI tim ers Please see Part 2 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual for the default val ues and the ranges for the timers D 3 5 Service Profile The generic service profile lets you specify service attributes that are common to Frame Relay interworking services and FUNI services The profile then can be applied on a per service basis to a Frame Relay service using the service index option under conf fratm new or to a FUNI service using the service index option u
224. d of this ATM address port pair the host may begin signalling e o 5 ES amp c 3 5 amp o 5 7 o o D 2 2 4 Configuration The choice to use ILMI for address registration is made at software installation time Since ILMI uses SNMP as its management protocol the use of ILMI is tied into snmpd The choice can be made to run FORE s SNMP agent and use ILMI snmpd run FORE s SNMP agent without using ILMI snmpd n or just use ILMI snmpd i or ilmid i ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 2 5 Configuring Classical IP 2 3 ARP and ARP Servers 2 3 1 Theory In order for a host to establish a connection to another host it must first determine the other host s ATM address ATM ARP ATM address resolution protocol is the procedure used to resolve an IP address into an ATM address Since the ATM standards do not currently support broadcast on an ATM LAN address resolution is performed by direct communication with a special ARP server rather than broadcasting ARP requests as is done in legacy LANs Each LIS must have only one ARP server configured but a single ARP server can be the server for several LISs Each host in an LIS must be configured with the ATM address of the host providing ARP ser vice for its LIS On a switch the ATM address of the ARP server can be obtained by using the AMI command conf atmarp arpserver show On a host the ATM address of the ARP server can be obtained by using clipconfig show
225. d subsequent reroute information is sent to the originator of the DTL 6 4 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual ATM Forum PNNI 6 3 Internetworking between PNNI and FT PNNI When ATM Forum PNNI is deployed some networks running FI PNNI will be connected to networks running PNNI To provide internetworking of these protocols ForeThought 5 3 x allows reachability information to be leaked dynamically between FI PNNI and PNNI peer groups 6 3 1 Gateway Switches and Split Switches PNNI or FI PNNI interfaces are attached to nodes PNNI or FI PNNI node When you upgrade a switch to ForeThought 5 3 x it has a single FI PNNI node by default ForeThought 5 3 x allows you to create a second node on that same switch that runs PNNI so you have both a single FI PNNI node and a single PNNI node running concurrently within a single switch This is called a gateway switch A gateway switch connects a PNNI network with a FI PNNI network You can also create two PNNI nodes instead on single switch This is called a split switch A split switch connects two PNNI areas INNd Uin404 WLV The FI PNNI and PNNI nodes within a gateway switch and the two nodes within a split switch do not share topology information but they dynamically exchange reachability infor mation to facilitate connectivity between a source in one network and a destination in another The means by which this exchange of reachability information occurs is discussed in the next sectio
226. d the switch and is also stored in the FLASH ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 8 5 Security Even though this information is stored in the E FLASH it cannot be accessed using any of the oper flash commands The conf security login securid get delete and show commands must be used If the configuration file is not found if the wrong file was copied or if the file is corrupted the SecurID service does not work an appropriate error message is logged to the console and the user trying to log in is denied access 8 1 1 2 5 3 Editing the Server Configuration File Once SecurID is running it possible to make changes to the sdconf rec file for the server s clients The file can be modified on the server itself by running sdset up again and changing the desired parameters After the changes are made on the server use the E conf security login securid get AMI command to copy the updated sdconf rec file back to all of the switches that are using that file A sample of the contents of a sdconf rec file and a description of the parameters follows Server License and Configuration L LICENSE ID 96012648 ACE Server VERSION v 2 1 104 FILE OWNERSHIP root SETUID BIT off CLIENT RETRY 5 times CLIENT TIMEOUT 5 sec DES ENCRYPTION allowed and enabled DURESS MODE not allowed NetSP CLIENTS not allowed EXTENDED TACACS disabled TACACS PLUS disabled MASTER SERVER linus MASTER SERVER ADDRESS 204 95 8
227. ddress gt The recommended and default method for E starting a LEC is to use the wellknown mode meaning that the LEC will attempt to contact the LECS on the well known address as defined by the ATM Forum s LAN Emulation standards 47 0079 00 000000 0000 0000 0000 00 A03E000001 00 moO 33 cS De os Ta m z5 For example to start a LEC that attempts to join the ELAN called engineering enter the following configuration lane lec new 2 engineering ip 192 168 61 25 mask 255 255 255 0 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 3 43 Configuring an Emulated LAN If you want to use the manual mode you must E enter either a LECS address other than the well known address or you must enter a LES address If you enter a LES address this means that the LEC bypasses the LECS and directly contacts the specified LES In order to use DLE the LES address to be used E must be the anycast address of the DLE peer server not the server NSAP address 2 Verify that the LEC has joined the ELAN by using the following AMI command configuration lane lec show Admin Oper Index Status Status Sel Mode MACaddress IfName ELAN 1 up up 0x02 wellknown 00204815096b e110 engineering LECS 0x47 0079 00 000000 0000 0000 0000 00a03e000001 00 LES c000580ffe1000000f21a35960020481a3596f0 The OperStatus field shows up meaning that the LEC has successfully joined the ELAN If the OperStatus field shows joining this E means that
228. ded Traps are active as soon as they are set A 4 2 Displaying SNMP Trap Destinations To list all of the current SNMP trap destinations log in to AMI and open a session on the switch The SNMP traps supported by this switch are detailed in the FORE Switch MIB Enter the following parameters configuration snmp trap destinations show The switch responds with a list similar to the following Trap Destination 1 192 88 243 18 2 198 29 16 14 3 198 29 16 18 If no trap destinations have been configured then the following is displayed myswitch configuration snmp trap destinations gt show No trap information is available A 34 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring SNMP A 4 3 Removing SNMP Trap Destinations To delete one or more SNMP trap destinations for a FORE switch log in to AMI and open a session on the switch Prior to deleting any trap that may need to be recreated later as a pre caution a recommended practice is to list all trap destinations using AMI and either copy the screen or write down the destinations To delete a trap enter the following parameters o o E E a zi E t o zZ v configuration snmp trap destinations delete lt trap gt The lt trap gt variable indicates the index number of the SNMP trap destination that is to be removed Repeat this for as many SNMP trap destinations as needed For more information about the SNMP trap E destination commands see Part
229. ded that you read the entire section before attempting to change over your network 1 Upgrade each switch in the network to ForeThought 5 3x 2 Convert the backbone of the FI PNNI network 3 Convert the individual peer groups of the FI PNNI network C 3 1 1 1 1 Upgrade the Switches Upgrade all of the switches to ForeThought 5 3 x using the following AMI command oper upgrade lt remotehost gt lt full path to remotefile gt For more information about upgrading your switches see Chapter 4 of the ATM Switch Installation and Maintenance Manual After the upgrade there is only one FI PNNI area with area ID 4 and level 4 The three FI PNNI peer groups are contained within this one area C 3 1 1 1 2 Convert the Backbone C 1 will be the first switch to be converted to a gateway between the existing FI PNNI area and the PNNI area to be created Since the backbone is being migrated to PNNI first the back bone PNNI area should have a higher level numerically smaller than the FI PNNI area The level of the backbone will be 2 1 Change the peer group ID of the PNNI node on C 1 to D so that it has a new peer group ID which is different from the peer group IDs of the three existing FI PNNI peer groups A B and C Although the PNNI node in C 1 will not be activated until the default protocol gets changed to gateway it is possible to change the level of the PNNI node while it is still down So change the level of the PNNI node at switch
230. different protocol The FramePlus network module performs a service interworking function IWF to terminate the respective Frame Relay and ATM services and to perform appropriate interworking conversions before transmitting the CPE information IWF uses two different modes of operation to address interoperability between upper layer user protocol encapsulation techniques on the FramePlus network module translation mode and transparent mode D 1 1 1 Translation Mode When the two CPEs support different standard encapsulation protocols a translation or re encapsulation must take place in the CPE payload portion of the cells that are being transmit ted Because Frame Relay supports RFC 1490 encapsulation and ATM supports RFC 1483 encapsulation the information in the frames is converted to cells and vice versa D 1 1 2 Transparent Mode When both CPEs support the same encapsulation protocol there is no need for any translation or re encapsulation of the CPE payload portion of the cells that are being transmitted There fore the traffic is sent transparently Transparent mode must be used if the CPEs support non standard encapsulation protocols When the transparent method of IWF is used there is a mapping that occurs of each Frame Relay DLCI to an ATM VPI VCI combination One example would be if proprietary encapsulation techniques are being used A second example would be if there is FR CPE equipment at both edges of the network with
231. dle channel suppression is not supported on E unstructured connections Structured basic connections require a partial fill size of at least 24 to support idle channel suppression B 1 2 1 Idle Detection using Pattern Matching This method of idle detection is used only for basic CCS services Depending on the applica tions the idle pattern can vary Additionally different idle patterns can be used to identify for example an out of service channel In this implementation a single idle pattern determines the idle status of a channel The default idle pattern is FF An idle code pattern must be consistent during an integration period before it can be deter mined that a time slot has become idle This eliminates the false detection of an idle state due to the natural occurrence of the specified idle data patterns in the connection s normal data content from time to time For basic connections the default integration period is 1 second and is user configurable from 500 us to 2 seconds B 1 2 2 Idle Detection using Mask Patterns This method of idle detection is used only for basic CCS services The idle patterns can be provided by the user in a mask format The mask pattern is provided in a format for example F0 hex This means that pattern matching is performed only on the four most significant bits This method is useful for example in T1 robbed bit signalling systems ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual B 3 Conf
232. e well known LECS address Other addressing methods could also be used 2 Thesignalling software knows that this address is attached to port N the port on which the host resides on the switch and opens a circuit between LEC 1 and port N LEC 1 sends a message to the LECS asking for the address of the LES for LEC 1 s ELAN The LECS responds with the ATM address of the LES and LEC 1 estab lishes a circuit to the LES and then the BUS LAN Eng LES BUS e o d A Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 van BS E Eng LEC 1 EngLEC 2 Eng LEC 3 Eng LEC 4 Eng LEC 5 Eng LEC 6 Eng LEC 7 Eng LEC 8 Eng LEC 9 Figure 3 12 ELAN with a Single Server and Multiple Switches Connecting to Services In Figure 3 13 when LEC 7 goes through the same process it is slightly more complicated When LEC 7 asks its local switch s signalling software to establish a circuit to the LECS the local switch must use inter switch link information IISP or PNNI tables to establish a cross switch circuit to the LECS Once this circuit is established however the process is identical 3 16 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring an Emulated LAN ELAN Eng LES BUS 1 e O3 9 22 uut qe iu S 3 7 na o y Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 9
233. e BUS will be automatically created as a co located BUS when you use the conf lane les new command Do the same for each old LES and BUS except for the last LES and BUS in this case Mktg 1 All clients will still be using the last LES BUS temporarily until the DLE peer servers have been established The last LES and BUS will be changed over at the very end of the process 3 7 8 Upgrade the Switches Running Services Upgrade each of the switches that is going to be running services to ForeThought 5 3 x using the following AMI command oper upgrade lt remotehost gt lt full path to remotefile gt Do not upgrade the switch that is running the last LES and BUS in this case Mktg 1 The LECs will still be using the last LES BUS temporarily until the DLE peer servers have been established 3 7 4 Create the DLE Peer Servers You must enter the address of each of the DLE E peer servers when you are starting DLE e g if you want four peers then all four must be configured with the addresses of the other three peers as well as their own LES address at the time that each LES BUS is started If you want to add new peers to the list you can use the conf lane les peeradd command 3 48 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring an Emulated LAN Create a DLE peer server LES BUS pair with the new ELAN name in this case Mktg on each switch that is to become a DLE peer server myswitch configuration lane les new 0x
234. e EUR EX IEEE S E dtes Safety Pr cauti ns ie kr eo xr ibam tee M e ER MFEENR ve Rake dre Modifications to Equipment lsslleeseeee RIA Placement of a FORE Systems Product 00 00 cece eee n eens Power Cord Connection 6 saaana aana CHAPTER1 Configuring PVCs 1 1 General Concepts are a cette 1 2 Mirtual Pathis z 2 ned xtate itm ek xe ente prem dnb eet 1 2 1 Thirough Paths si o ode ene bh edt et agin o cs 1 2 2 Originating and Terminating Paths liiis 1 3 Listing Virtual Paths 0 curre eoa ke eh 1 3 1 Listing Through Paths 0 0 eee 1 3 2 Listing Originating and Terminating Paths 2 05 1 4 Virtual Channels 0 0 0 0 ee 1 1 4 1 Smart Permanent Virtual Circuits anaana aaaea 1 1 4 2 Listing Virtual Channels 00 0c eee eee 1 1 5 Creating PVCs and SPVCs 0 000 cette 1 1 5 4 Creating a Through Path 0 00 cece eee 1 1 5 2 Creating an Originating or Terminating Path 1 1 5 2 1 Shaping Multiple Originating Paths on a Single Port 1 1 5 2 2 Terminating a PVC ata Switch 0 05 1 1 5 2 8 Creating ATM ARP Entries 00 000 cease 1 1 5 2 4 Listing ATM ARP Entries 0 0002 c ee eee 1 1 5 3 Creating a Virtual Channel llle 1 1 5 4 Creating a SPANS SPVC 0 000 cece 1 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual TOC 1
235. e link or node to the total number of cells arriving at the link or node Maximum Cell Transfer Delay MCTD This is the sum of the fixed delay component across the link or node and MCDV Maximum Transmission Unit MTU the largest unit of data that can be sent over a type of physical medium Mbps megabits per second million Media Access Control MAC a media specific access control protocol within IEEE 802 specifi cations currently includes variations for Token Ring token bus and CSMA CD the lower sublayer of the IEEE s link layer OSI which complements the Logical Link Control LLC Media Attachment Unit MAU device used in Ethernet and IEEE 802 3 networks that provides the interface between the AUI port of a station and the common medium of the Ethernet The MAU which can be built into a station or can be a separate device performs physical layer functions including conversion of the digital data from the Ethernet interface collision detec tion and injection of bits onto the network ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary 21 Glossary Media Interface Connector MIC fiber optic connector that joins fiber to the FDDI controller Message Identifier MID message identifier used to associate ATM cells that carry segments from the same higher layer packet Metasignalling an ATM Layer Management LM process that manages different types of sig nalling and possibly semipermanent virtual channels
236. e signalling channel at that time A link scope signalling channel allocates connections in a new originating termi nating path called a dynamic path because signalling uses such a path on the fly when its cur rent VC space is exhausted Every time a link scope signalling channel uses a E new path for allocating connections its VC space increases To avoid conflicts of ownership of the path a link scope signalling channel never uses an existing provisioned terminating originating path apart from the path that contains the sig nalling channel to allocate virtual channel connections Dynamic paths inherit the characteristics of the virtual path that contains the signalling chan nel called the containing path Therefore dynamic paths have the same VCI range as the con taining path and are elastic paths To see which paths are dynamic paths look at the Protocol field associated with each path under the AMI command conf vpt show This field displays q2931 for dynamic paths and displays pvc for provisioned terminating originating paths A dynamic path is controlled only by the link scope signalling channel that uses it Therefore a dynamic path is not open to any provisioning such as the creation of a PVC connection SPANS signalling path etc 7 8 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Signalling 7 3 Signalling Channel Auto Configuration Procedures This section provides an overview of signalling channel auto configurat
237. e specified SONET port is experiencing Loss Of Frame LOF failure An LOF failure is declared when the LOF defect persists for a period of 2 5 0 5 seconds except when an LOS defect or failure is present 131 asxSonetLOFCleared This trap indicates that the LOF failure identified by trap asxSonetLOFDetected has been cleared The LOF failure is cleared when the LOS failure is declared or when the LOF defect is absent for 10 0 5 seconds 132 asxSonetLineRDIDetected This trap indicates that the specified SONET port is experiencing Line Remote Defect Indication LRDI A Line RDI failure is declared when the incoming Line RDI defects lasts for 2 5 0 5 seconds 133 asxSonetLineRDICleared This trap indicates that the Line RDI failure identified by trap asxSonetLineRDIDetected has been cleared The Line RDI failure is cleared when no Line RDI defects are detected for 10 0 5 seconds 134 asxSonetPathAISDetected This trap indicates that the specified SONET port is experiencing Path Alarm Indication Signal PAIS A Path AIS failure is declared when the Path AIS defect persists for 2 5 0 5 seconds 135 asxSonetPathAISCleared This trap indicates that the Path AIS failure identified by trap asxSonetPathAISDetected has been cleared A PAIS failure is cleared when the PAIS defect is absent for 10 0 5 seconds 136 asxSonetPathLOPDetected This trap indicates that the specified
238. e that helps ensure reasonable service for VBR connections in an ATM network based on a priority sustained cell rate SCR and peak cell rate PCR During times of congestion bandwidth is reduced to the SCR based on the priority of the connection Connection the concatenation of ATM Layer links in order to provide an end to end informa tion transfer capability to access points Connection Admission Control CAC the procedure used to decide if a request for an ATM connection can be accepted based on the attributes of both the requested connection and the existing connections Connection Endpoint CE a terminator at one end of a layer connection within a SAP Connection Endpoint Identifier CEI an identifier of a CE that can be used to identify the con nection at a SAP Connectionless Broadband Data Service CBDS A connectionless service similar to Bellcore s SMDS defined by European Telecommunications Standards Institute ETSI Connectionless Service a type of service in which no pre determined path or link has been established for transfer of information supported by AAL 4 Connectionless Service CLS A service which allows the transfer of information among ser vice subscribers without the need for end to end establishment procedures Connection Oriented Service a type of service in which information always traverses the same pre established path or link between two points supported by AAL 3 Constant Bit
239. eased facilities such as T1s Virtual Source Virtual Destination VS VD An ABR connection may be divided into two or more separately controlled ABR segments Each ABR control segment except the first is sourced by a virtual source A virtual source implements the behavior of an ABR source end point Backwards RM cells received by a virtual source are removed from the connection Each ABR control segment except the last is terminated by a virtual destination A virtual destination assumes the behavior of an ABR destination endpoint Forward RM cells received by a virtual destination are turned around and not forwarded to the next segment of the con nection 11 110 3 Virtual Tributary VT a structure used to carry payloads such as DS1s that run at significantly lower rates than STS 1s Warm Start Trap an SNMP trap which indicates that SNMP alarm messages or agents have been enabled Wide Area Network WAN a network that covers a large geographic area Wideband Channel Communications channel with more capacity 19 2K bps than the stan dard capacity of a voice grade line X 21 ITU T standard for serial communications over synchronous digital lines The X 21 pro tocol is used primarily in Europe and Japan X 25 a well established data switching and transport method that relies on a significant amount of processing to ensure reliable transport over metallic media Yellow Alarm An alarm signal sent back toward t
240. econds The default is 1 200 seconds IP Flows lt ip flow gt lt ip flow gt Specifies a set of IP flows that are defined by the param eters listed below lt ip flow gt Specifies the IP information that is defined by the parameters listed below The format is lt src dst gt lt proto gt thresholds qos src dst Specifies the source and destination addresses of an IP flow The format is lt ip addr gt ip addr with the source address first and the destination address second lt ip addr gt Specifies the format for the IP addresses lt ip addr gt used above The format is lt dotted addr gt lt prefix leng gt ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual moO 38 cS DG os Ta m z5 Configuring an Emulated LAN Table 3 1 LECS Configuration File Parameters Continued Parameter Definition lt dotted addr gt Specifies the format for the IP addresses dotted addr gt used above The format is lt octet gt lt octet gt lt octet gt lt octet gt The range of each octet is from 0 to 255 lt prefix leng gt Specifies the prefix length to indicates how much of a given IP address is significant The range is 0 through 32 0 means any IP address can be matched and 32 means the entire IP address is significant proto Optionally specifies for which protocol this flow applies ICMP IGMP TCP or UDP The format is one of ICMP
241. ection Complete Timer 4 LAN Type Ethernet IEEE 802 3 Maximum Frame Size 1516 ShortCut Protocols IP ShortCut Threshold 10 1 Resolution Initial Retry Time 5 Resolution Maximum Retry Time 40 Resolution Hold Down Time 160 MPOA KeepAlive Time 10 MPOA KeepAlive Lifetime 35 Resolution GiveUp Time 40 Resolution Default Holding Time 1200 IP Flows 0 0 0 0 0 202 19 88 0 24 TCP 0 23 N 20 1 1 600 0 1 N 0x0 UBR 10000 Parameters for the default elan default Address C5 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 21b8 0097036324b2 25 default Accept XX XXXX XX XXXXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX XX Figure 3 19 Sample LECS Configuration File Part One of Two 3 96 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring an Emulated LAN Parameters for elan engineering engineering Address C5 0005 80 ffe1l00 0000 f21a 01b9 0020480605b2 11 engineering Accept 002048080011 0020481020ef engineering Maximum_Frame_Size 4544 Parameters for elan marketing marketing Address C5 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f 21a 01b9 0020480605b2 21 marketing Accept 002048080011 0020481020ef Figure 3 20 Sample LECS Configuration File Part Two of Two moO 30 EZ 2 Q os r m z5 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 3 37 Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 6 3 Starting the LAN Emulation Services LAN Emulation services include the LECS and the LES BUS Once the LECS configuration database file h
242. ects that the master has failed the slave takes over authentication services This failover is transparent to the user 8 1 1 2 3 2 Server Database The server s database includes records for all tokens a list of switches to be protected an audit trail of SecurID and administrative activity and a list of users who are authorized to access each switch 8 4 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Security 8 1 1 2 3 3 Data Encryption between the Server and Switches Messages sent between the server and the switches are encrypted either using the DES algo rithm or Security Dynamics proprietary encryption algorithm The server can use either method but all switches must use the same algorithm as the one configured on the server This data encryption method protects communications between the server and the switches because the first time the switch contacts the server it receives a node secret file which is a string of about 16 bytes This string which is known only to the server and this switch is used in encrypting messages between the server and the switch Additionally communications between the master and slave servers and stored token information are encrypted No one including system administrators can breach security by inspecting secured token data 8 1 1 2 4 SecurlID AMI Commands A new AMI menu called conf security login securid has been added to allow the configuration of SecurID on the switch These commands are describe
243. ed or contracted rate i e PCR Least Significant Bit LSB lowest order bit in the binary representation of a numerical value lecs a FORE program that implements the assignment of individual LECs to different emu lated LANs leq a FORE program that provides information about an ELAN This information is obtained from the LES and includes MAC addresses registered on the ELAN together with their corre sponding ATM addresses Line Build Out LBO Because T1 circuits require the last span to lose 15 22 5 dB a selectable output attenuation is generally required of DTE equipment typical selections include 0 0 7 5 and 15 dB of loss at 772 KHz Line Code Violations LCV Error Event A Line Coding Violation LCV is the occurrence of either a Bipolar Violation BPV or Excessive Zeroes EXZ Error Event Link An entity that defines a topological relationship including available transport capacity between two nodes in different subnetworks Multiple links may exist between a pair of sub networks Synonymous with logical link Link Access Procedure Balanced LAPB Data link protocol in the X 25 protocol stack LAPB is a bit oriented protocol derived from HDLC See also HDLC and X25 Link Down Trap an SNMP trap sent when an interface changes from a normal state to an error state or is disconnected Link Layer layer in the OSI model regarding transmission of data between network nodes Link Up Trap an SNMP trap
244. ee EA RERA 9 1 9 3 SWItCHClOCK X aiu id tedden ebur Rp u EHE ub e REY 9 2 9 3 1 Failover of the Switchelock s s ss sasaaa aaeeea 9 2 9 4 Port Level Timing se srren cece eee ete a 9 3 9 5 Timing Configuration Examples lisse 9 4 9 5 1 Configuring Timing on an ASX 200BX TNX 210 or ASX 200WG 9 4 9 5 2 Configuring Timing on an ASX 1000 or a TNX 1100 Single Timing Domain llis esee 9 4 9 5 3 Configuring Timing on an ASX 1000 or a TNX 1100 Multiple Timing Domains lle BIS 9 5 9 5 4 Configuring Timing on a ForeRunnerLE 155 or LE 25 9 5 9 5 5 Configuring Timing on an ASX 4000 0 0000 e eee eee 9 6 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual TOC 7 Table of Contents APPENDIX A Configuring SNMP A 1 SNMP Indexing sslsssseeseesee re A 1 A 2 ASX 1000 TNX 1100 Port Numbering 2000 ccc esee A 3 A 3 ASX 4000 Port Numbering 0000 c cece tee A 7 A 4 SNMP Tapsee n ao e dateien Fax nr RH dae anne Shaper eae ipe aerea A 15 A 4 1 Adding SNMP Trap Destinations 00000 cee eee A 34 A 4 2 Displaying SNMP Trap Destinations 0 000 20 eee A 34 A 4 3 Removing SNMP Trap Destinations 0 00000 eee ee A 35 APPENDIX B Configuring Circuit Emulation Services B 1 Idle Channel Suppression 00 0000 c cee eh B 2 B 1 1 CAS Gonnectioris s soe temet vade wurden wid eta pep B 2 B 1 1 1 Idle Detection using Signalling
245. eer changes version to UNI 4 0 Auto UNI 3 0 SSCOP 30 stack initialized UNIS 1 SSCOP 31 stack initialized UNI4 0 SSCOP 31 stack initialized PNNI 1 0 SSCOP 31 stack initialized Both stacks initialized as SSCOP 31 if both sides support UNI Auto 3 1 or UNI 4 0 otherwise both sides are initialized to SSCOP 30 If both sides support PNNI then both sides are initialized to SSCOP 31 and the version is set to PNNI 1 0 7 10 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Signalling An alternative way of looking at the auto configuration procedure is to look at the atmfAtmLayerUniVersion variable Table 7 2 shows actions taken based on the atmfAtmLayerUniVersion variable supported by the peer switch Table 7 2 Action Taken Based on the Peer s Supported MIB Variable Configured atmfAtmLayer UNI Version UNI Version EX Te sn UNI 3 0 Version 3 0 SSCOP 30 stack initialized Version 3 1 SSCOP 30 stack initialized error message displayed on syslog Version 4 0 SSCOP 31 stack initialized error message displayed on syslog Version 2 0 SSCOP 30 stack initialized version 2 0 is not supported and error message displayed on syslog MIB variable SSCOP 30 stack initialized not supported UNI 3 1 Version 3 0 SSCOP 31 stack initialized error message displayed on syslog Version 3 1 SSCOP 31 stack initialized Version 4 0 SSCOP 31 stack initialized error message displayed on syslog Version 2 0 SSCOP 30 stack initialized version 2 0 is not sup
246. el suppression is going to be used on the incoming side of this connection disable means idle channel suppression is not going to be used on the incoming side of this connection The default is disable When this option is enabled a total of 144 timeslots 6 ports for DS1 or 4 8 ports for E1 is supported When this option is enabled on structured basic connections a minimum partialfill size of 24 is required idlemask lt idlemask gt The mask pattern for idle detection on the incoming side of this connection This method is only used for structured basic service The range of values is 01 to FF The default is FF idlepat lt idle pattern gt lt cas pattern gt The pattern for idle detection on the incoming side of this connection For detection based on both idle and mask patterns it contains the idle octet pattern For detection based on signalling it contains one of the following CAS patterns em00 em01 fxolsuser01 fxolsuserll fxolsnet00 fxolsnet01 fxslsuser00 fxslsuser01 fxslsnet01 fxslsnet11 fxsgsuser01 fxsgsnet10 fxsgsnet11 fxogsuser10 fxogsuser11 fxogsnet01 r210 A maxi mum of one idle pattern can be used for structured basic connections Idle patterns are filled from the least significant byte The default is FF for structured basic connections The default CAS idle AB bit pattern is em00 idleintp lt idleintp gt The integration period for idle detection on the incoming side of this connection
247. ement parameters are specified the default values are applied The egress rate enforcement also provides an option by which frames on a per VC basis can be buffered as opposed to being discarded when thresholds have been crossed This buffering option can increase goodput The selection of buffering is configured at a service level but only takes effect on a connection if egress rate enforcement has been enabled The amount of buffering assigned to a connection is finite and is determined internally by the system If the buffering has been selected then the system holds traffic in excess of Bc Be for a period Tc Bc CIR before trying to resend the buffered traffic If the buffer becomes full excess traffic is discarded The rate adaptation mechanism is activated for a PVC after an ingress frame addressed to the PVC has been received with BECN set The Frame Relay rate profile performs the exact same function that UPC contracts do for ATM If you want to use the overbooking option in the service profile then you need to apply a Frame Relay rate profile Bc is the committed burst Be is the excess burst and CIR is the com mitted information rate CIR is derived as follows CIR Bc time period For example if the Bc is 10 and the time period is 125 microseconds then the CIR is 10 x 8192 or 81 920 bps EIR is the excess information rate and is derived as follows EIR Be time period For example if the Be is 10 and the time perio
248. ems switches and network module hardware and software IP connectivity and SNMP network management ATM Peer to Peer Connection a virtual channel connection VCC or a virtual path connection VPC directly established such as workstation to workstation This setup is not commonly used in networks ATM Traffic Descriptor a generic list of parameters that can be used to capture the intrinsic traffic characteristics of a requested ATM connection ATM User to User Connection an association established by the ATM Layer to support com munication between two or more ATM service users i e between two or more next higher layer entities or between two or more ATM entities The communication over an ATM Layer connection may be either bidirectional or unidirectional The same Virtual Channel Identifier VCI is used for both directions of a connection at an interface ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary 3 Glossary atmarp a FORE program that shows and manipulates ATM ARP entries maintained by the given device driver This is also used to establish PVC connections ATM attached Host Functional Group AHFG The group of functions performed by an ATM attached host that is participating in the MPOA service atmconfig a FORE program used to enable or disable SPANS signalling atmstat a FORE program that shows statistics gathered about a given adapter card by the device driver These statistics include ATM layer and ATM
249. ency component of the signal i e sample 4 KHz analog voice channels 8000 times per second Object Identifier OID the address of a MIB variable Octet a grouping of 8 bits similar but not identical to a byte One s Density The requirement for digital transmission lines in the public switched telephone network that eight consecutive 0 s cannot be in a digital data stream exists because repeaters and clocking devices within the network will lose timing after receiving eight 0 s in a row a number of techniques are used to insert a 1 after every seventh consecutive 0 see Bit Stuffing Open Shortest Path First OSPF Protocol a routing algorithm for IP that incorporates least cost equal cost and load balancing Open Systems Interconnection OSI the 7 layer suite of protocols designed by ISO commit tees to be the international standard computer network architecture OpenView Hewlett Packard s network management software Operation and Maintenance OAM Cell a cell that contains ATM LM information It does not form part of the upper layer information transfer Glossary 24 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary Optical Carrier level n OC n The optical counterpart of STS n the basic rate of 51 84 Mbps on which SONET is based is referred to as OC 1 or STS 1 Organizationally Unique Identifier OUI Part of RFC 1483 A three octet field in the SubNet work Attachment Point SNAP header ide
250. entered auto conf sig new 1a1 0 type auto version pnni10 The type is auto conf sig new 1al 0 type privateUNI The version is not entered auto conf sig new 1a1 0 type privateUNI version auto The version is auto conf sig new 1a1 0 type privateUNI version pnni10 pnnil0 is an NNI protocol conf sig new 1al 0 type publicUNI version pnni10 pnnil0 is an NNI protocol conf sig new 1a1 0 type IISP The version is not entered auto conf sig new 1a1 0 type IISP version auto The version is auto conf sig new 1a1 0 type IISP version pnni10 IISP and pnnilO are conflicting NNI protocols conf sig new 1a1 0 type privateNNI The version is not entered auto conf sig new 1al 0 type privateNNI version auto The version is auto conf sig new lal 0 type privateNNI version uni30 The NNI type and the UNI version are conflicting protocols conf sig new lal 0 type privateNNI version uni31 The NNI type and the UNI version are conflicting protocols conf sig new lal 0 type privateNNI version uni40 The NNI type and the UNI version are conflicting protocols ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Signalling 7 3 2 2 Specifying the Scope and Mode In AMI the signalling scope designated in AMI as sig alloc and the signalling mode designated in AMI as sig mode are now treated as a pair The pertinent portion of the
251. equipment as an alarm condition Payload Type PT bits 2 4 in the fourth byte of an ATM cell header The PT indicates the type of information carried by the cell At this time values 0 3 are used to identify various types of user data values 4 and 5 indicate management information and values 6 and 7 are reserved for future use Peak Cell Rate at the PHY Layer SAP of a point to point VCC the Peak Cell Rate is the inverse of the minimum inter arrival time TO of the request to send an ATM SDU Peak Cell Rate PCR parameter defined by the ATM Forum for ATM traffic management In CBR transmissions PCR determines how often data samples are sent In ABR transmissions PCR determines the maximum value of the ACR Peer Entities entities within the same layer Peripheral Component Interconnect PCI a local bus standard created by Intel ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary 25 Glossary Permanent Virtual Channel Connection PVCC A Virtual Channel Connection VCC is an ATM connection where switching is performed on the VPI VCI fields of each cell A Perma nent VCC is one which is provisioned through some network management function and left up indefinitely Permanent Virtual Circuit or Channel PVC a circuit or channel through an ATM network provisioned by a carrier between two endpoints used for dedicated long term information transport between locations Permanent Virtual Path Connection PVPC A Vi
252. er of multicast connections On a Series C network module use model number 5 under conf module traffic c setmodel On a Series LC network module use model number 6 7 or 8 under conf module traffic lc setmodel ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 1 25 oO e E Q c E Q U lt oO V Configuring PVCs To configure the shaped originating paths as shown in the example in Figure 1 14 and Figure 1 15 perform the following steps 1 26 1 First create the UPC contract to be used on the through paths that are going to be output on the shaping port on the Series D network module to the WAN myswitch configuration upc gt new 2 cbr 42452 noGCRA scheduling smoothed You must use the noGCRA option to disable E policing This allow bursts without dropping cells The shaped rate is equal to PCR for CBR traffic and equal to SCR for VBR traffic You must also use the smoothed scheduling option so that a rate group is created when a PVC or PVP is configured with this UPC 2 Next delete any existing path s on the looping port as follows myswitch configuration upc conf vpt myswitch configuration vpt conf vpt del 1a2 0 By default path 0 is the only path that exists If E path 1 already exists you must delete it using the command conf vpt del 1a2 1 3 Recreate the paths on the looping port using the 1oopvpi option to ensure that cells from the WAN port get looped back into the terminating p
253. es for FUNI 00 0c eee eee eee D 18 D 6 3 Creating FUNI Services 000 cece eee D 19 D 6 4 Creating FUNI PVCS nananana aaan D 20 D 6 5 Configuring FUNI SPVCs 0000 e eee D 21 D 6 5 1 Creating a FUNI SPANS SPVC 000505 D 21 D 6 5 2 CreatingaFUNIPNNISPVC 00000 00s D 22 D 7 Upgrading the FramePlus Network Module Software 25 5 D 23 Acronyms Glossary Index TOC 10 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual List of Figures CHAPTER 1 Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 Figure 1 4 Figure 1 5 Figure 1 6 Figure 1 7 Figure 1 8 Figure 1 9 Figure 1 10 Figure 1 11 Figure 1 12 Figure 1 13 Figure 1 14 Figure 1 15 CHAPTER 2 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 CHAPTER 3 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Configuring PVCs Th Gell Ls C ro S ie Bete o QR PIT cn 1 2 Virtual Channels in a Virtual Path 0000 000 1 3 An Example of a Virtual Path 0 0 0 eee eee 1 3 Composition of a Virtual Path anaana llle 1 4 An Example of a Through Path 00 00 eeae 1 5 Through Paths are Unidirectional 000000 1 5 Using Originating and Terminating Paths for Bandwidth Allocation llle 1 6 An Example of a Virtual Channel 020005 1 11 Example of a Virtual Channel 0 20000 eae 1 12 Virtual Channels are Unidirectional 005 1 12
254. es to define LAN membership Virtual Network Software VINES Banyan s network operating system based on UNIX and its protocols Virtual Path VP a unidirectional logical association or bundle of VCs Virtual Path Connection VPC a concatenation of VPLs between virtual path terminators VPTs VPCs are unidirectional Virtual Path Identifier VPI the address or label of a particular VP a value stored in a field in the ATM cell header that identifies an individual virtual path to which the cell belongs A vir tual path may comprise multiple virtual channels Virtual Path Link VPL a means of unidirectional transport of ATM cells between the point where a VPI value is assigned and the point where that value is translated or removed Virtual Path Switch a network element that connects VPLs it translates VPI not VCI values and is directed by Control Plane functions The Virtual Path Switch relays the cells of a Virtual Path Virtual Path Terminator VPT a system that unbundles the VCs of a VP for independent pro cessing of each VC Glossary 36 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary Virtual Private Data Network VPDN a private data communications network built on public switching and transport facilities rather than dedicated leased facilities such as T1s Virtual Private Network VPN a private voice communications network built on public switch ing and transport facilities rather than dedicated l
255. etry Time 5 Resolution Maximum Retry Time 40 Resolution Hold Down Time 160 MPOA server MPS parameters can also be specified For example the following parameters indicate that the MPS must send Keep Alive messages every 10 seconds Each of these mes sages is valid for 35 seconds The MPS must wait 40 seconds before giving up on a pending resolution request and should use 1200 seconds as the default holding time in NHRP Resolu tion Replies MPOA KeepAlive Time 10 MPOA KeepAlive Lifetime 35 Resolution GiveUp Time 40 Resolution Default Holding Time 1200 moO 35 cS De os Ta m z5 Parameters can also be specified for flow descriptors which determine whether and when to trigger creation of shortcut circuits The LECS sends the LEC MPC this set of parameters These parameters consist of the following elements in the following order a source destina tion specifier flow establishment thresholds and a QoS descriptor ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 3 33 Configuring an Emulated LAN For example you could specify that telnet traffic to the Class C 202 19 88 0 subnet should be sent on a UBR VCC with a peak rate of 10 000 cells per second but only after the traffic on that connection exceeds 20 frames per second If the VCC is idle for more than 10 minutes then the shortcut should be torn down IP Flows 0 0 0 0 0 202 19 88 0 24 TCP 0 23 20 1 1 600 0 1 0x0 UBR 10000 The parameters in the IP
256. ever when using other vendors equipment this may not be the case This section describes how to configure a network with the following scenarios e Configuring a third party host that has no ILMI and no RFC 1577 support e Configuring a third party switch that has ILMI support but no RFC 1577 support e Configuring a third party switch that has no ILMI support but has RFC 1577 support ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 2 11 e o 5 ES amp c 3 5 amp o 5 7 o o D Configuring Classical IP 2 5 1 Third Party Host with No ILMI and No RFC 1577 Support To configure a network with a third party vendor s host or an edge device that supports nei ther ILMI nor RFC 1577 as shown in Figure 2 1 perform the following steps FORE Switch FORE Switch ARP server Third Party Host no ILMI no RFC 1577 Figure 2 1 Configuring a Third Party Host with No ILMI and No RFC 1577 Support 1 Before beginning this process be sure that ForeThought software is installed and running on the FORE equipment 2 Using the configuration software of the third party host assign that host an NSAP address that has the same prefix as the switch fabric to which it is connected 3 Configure the switch that is the ARP server so that it has a static route to the third party host using the following AMI command conf atmr ftpnni staticroute new lt NSAP gt mask port port vpi lt vp
257. f the interworking connection is supported via the SPVC logic D 16 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring FramePlus Modules D 6 Configuring FUNI To configure FUNI on a FramePlus network module these steps must be performed in the fol lowing order 1 Change the application key if necessary 2 Choose or create any profiles that you wish to use 3 Create each service that you need and associate the profile s with it 4 Create each PVC and associate the profile s and service s with it These steps are described in detail in the following sections There are also steps described for configuring PNNI SPVCs on a FramePlus network module D 6 1 Changing the Application Key This command lets you configure a FramePlus network module to run either Frame Relay over ATM or to run frame based User to Network Interface FUNI The network module can only run one application or the other at a time However you can have some network modules run ning FUNI and some running Frame Relay in the same switch fabric FramePlus network modules run Frame Relay by default To run FUNI services on the network module please contact FORE s Technical Assistance Center for a valid FUNI key To change from FUNI back to Frame Relay the key is ratm170358 The Appln field under conf module show displays which application is currently running myswitch configuration module fram show Module Appin Appl Boot Stats Oam Operational Produc
258. fault name name The name you want to assign to this through path to help identify it uniquely It is most useful for billing purposes so you can identify which paths are being used by which cus tomers Can be up to 32 ASCII characters long inctype orig tran term The path connection type for the incoming path For billing purposes it denotes on which switch this path is arriving Orig originating means that the ingress endpoint of the path is connected to the source node which is outside the network tran transit means that the ingress endpoint of the path is connected to a node within the network and term ter minating means that the ingress endpoint of the path is connected to the destination node which is outside the network outctype orig tran term The path connection type for the outgoing path For billing purposes it denotes on which switch this path is leaving Orig originating means that the egress endpoint of the path is connected to the source node which is outside the network tran transit means that the egress endpoint of the path is connected to a node within the network and term ter minating means that the egress endpoint of the path is connected to the destination node which is outside the network pmp Indicates this is a point to multipoint path mpp Indicates this is a multipoint to point path mpmp Indicates this is a multipoint to multipoint path 1 18 ATM
259. ferent technologies to interoperate IP Address a unique 32 bit integer used to identify a device in an IP network You will most commonly see IP addresses written in dot notation e g 192 228 32 14 IP Netmask a 32 bit pattern that is combined with an IP address to determine which bits of an IP address denote the network number and which denote the host number Netmasks are use ful for sub dividing IP networks IP netmasks are written in dot notation e g 255 255 0 0 ISA Bus a bus standard developed by IBM for expansion cards in the first IBM PC The origi nal bus supported a data path only 8 bits wide IBM subsequently developed a 16 bit version for its AT class computers The 16 bit AT ISA bus supports both 8 and 16 bit cards The 8 bit bus is commonly called the PC XT bus and the 16 bit bus is called the AT bus Isochronous signals carrying embedded timing information or signals that are dependent on uniform timing usually associated with voice and or video transmission International Telecommunications Union Telecommunications ITU T an international body of member countries whose task is to define recommendations and standards relating to the international telecommunications industry The fundamental standards for ATM have been defined and published by the ITU T Previously CCITT Glossary 18 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary J2 Wide area digital transmission scheme used predominantly in Ja
260. ffic within the same ELAN and subnet they function like LECs However when handling traffic that crosses subnets LEC MPCs initially work with MPOA servers MPSs to use MPS established hop by hop circuits Then for traffic flows that exceed configurable limits shortcut circuits are built that allow the traffic to traverse the route without the necessity of the router s e reassemble packets from ATM cells e modify the packets e and then re segment the packets for transmission to the next hop Consequently traffic flowing through a shortcut VCC moves at essentially wire speed from source to destination see Figure 4 3 4 8 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual MPOA Figure 4 3 LANE with MPOA ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 4 9 MPOA 4 3 3 MPOA Components MPOA requires LANE services for both ELAN traffic handling and MPOA configuration LANE MPOA Client LEC MPC The LEC MPC can wear two different hats When wearing its LEC hat it simply communicates with other ELAN components the LES and BUS to resolve MAC addresses into ATM addresses When it puts on its MPC hat the additional function of the LEC MPC in an MPOA aware network is to source and sink internetwork shortcut circuits A LEC MPC that is the source of a shortcut is known as an ingress LEC MPC A LEC MPC that is the sink of a shortcut is known as an egress LEC MPC The LEC MPC includes an NHRP Client NHC An i
261. figuration Manual Glossary Synchronous Payload Envelope SPE the payload field plus a little overhead of a basic SONET signal Synchronous Transfer Mode STM a transport and switching method that depends on infor mation occurring in regular fixed patterns with respect to a reference such as a frame pattern Synchronous Transport Signal STS a SONET electrical signal rate DS LIT 3 Systeme En Coleur Avec Memoire SECAM Sequential and Memory Color Television Started in France in the late 60s and used by other countries with a political affiliation This is The B Y and R Y signals are transmitted on alternate lines modulated on an FM subcarrier The memory is a one line delay line in the receiver to make both color difference signals available at the same time on all lines Due to FM the signal is robust in difficult terrain Systems Network Architecture SNA a proprietary networking architecture used by IBM and IBM compatible mainframe computers T1 a specification for a transmission line The specification details the input and output char acteristics and the bandwidth T1 lines run at 1 544 Mbps and provide for 24 data channels In common usage the term T1 is used interchangeably with DS1 T1 Link A wideband digital carrier facility used for transmission of digitized voice digital data and digitized image traffic This link is composed of two twisted wire pairs that can carry 24 digital channels e
262. figuration Manual 3 23 Configuring an Emulated LAN You may make changes to the LECS E configuration file while the LECS process is running The configuration file is reread periodically by the LECS process the default period is ten minutes Consequently any changes that you make to the configuration file are not recognized until the file is reread 3 6 1 2 LECS Configuration File Syntax Each line that you enter in the configuration file takes the general form group key value The group field may represent e ELANs by name ELAN names are case sensitive and may not exceed 32 char acters in length e clients ATM or MAC addresses e miscellaneous LECS control information specified by using a group name of LECS The key field is used to denote an individual parameter within a group The value field contains the value assigned to the key Omitting the group implies that the key and value apply to all groups in the configuration ay file Leading and trailing spaces as well as spaces on either side of the are ignored For example to specify a maximum frame size of 1516 bytes for the ELAN named engineering enter the following engineering Maximum_Frame_Size 1516 Similarly to specify a default maximum frame size of 1516 bytes for all ELANs defined in a given configuration file enter the following Maximum_Frame_Size 1516 3 24 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring an Emula
263. flash put command If you are using TFIP as the transfer protocol this is the default the remote host to which the FLASH file will be sent must be running the TFIP server code and must have an empty file in the tftpboot directory on the remote host to receive the FLASH file See Chapter 3 in the ATM Management Interface AMD Manual for more information If you are using FIP as the transfer protocol you only need to enter the command shown below to perform the transfer 3 56 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring an Emulated LAN Transfer the LECS CFG file that is currently being used by the LECS to a workstation other than the one to which you backed up the file so you can edit the file myswitch operation gt flash put lecs cfg 169 144 85 195 tftpboot lecs cfg Transferred 2323 bytes of fs lecs cfg On the workstation that has the LECS CFG file use a text editor to delete any lines that refer to any non colocated BUSs After you have made the changes transfer the LECS CFG file back to the LECS myswitch operation flash gt get 169 144 85 195 tftpboot lecs cfg lecs cfg 3 8 2 Upgrade the Switches Running Services Upgrade the switch es running each of the services to ForeThought 5 3 x using the following AMI command oper upgrade lt remotehost gt lt full path to remotefile gt 3 8 3 Recreate the LES and BUS Together If your LES and BUS are already co located skip to step 4 If your LES and BUS were
264. for this license LICENSE CONFIGURATION Information about the owner of the license 8 1 1 2 5 4 An Example Login Using SecurlD Once the SecurID server is set up and the configuration file has been copied to the switch all users who are configured for securID will see a passcode prompt after the AMI login prompt when they attempt to log in to that switch In the following example a userid eng has been created on a switch that has the sdconf rec file in FLASH and that has the MCA method for userid eng set to securid The following is a transcript of how the user logs in with the switch output in plain courier font and the user input in bold courier font localhost telnet fishtank Trying 169 144 48 45 Connected to bx02 Escape character is S ForeThought 5 3 0 1 28144 asx200bx fishtank login eng ENTER Enter PASSCODE PIN Code on SecurID Token ENTER If the passcode entered by the user is accepted an AMI session to the switch is started If the server denies access to the user the following message appears on the screen Login incorrect After three unsuccessful attempts the telnet connection is torn down by the switch 8 8 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Security 8 1 2 AMI Command Privileges The network administrator can configure two different levels of AMI command privileges for userids admin privileges and user privileges Each method is described in the following sec
265. ftpnniDtlIndex1 index ftpnniDtlIndex2 lt index gt ftpnniDtlIndex3 lt index gt ftpnniDtlIndex4 lt index gt A Designated Transit List DTL index assigned to this SPVC Up to four different indices may be assigned to a given SPVC The DTL specifies the preferred call routing for the SVC portion of the SPVC The DTL must already exist To create the DTL use conf atmr ftpnni dtl new To find the DTL index look in the Index field under conf atmr ftpnni dt1 show See Section 4 3 3 in Part 1 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual for more information about creating DTLs The associated weight determines the order in which the DTLs are tried ftpnniDtlWeight1 weight ftpnniDtlWeight2 lt weight gt ftpnniDtlWeight3 lt weight gt ftpnniDtlWeight4 lt weight gt The weight priority assigned to the corresponding DTL index The weight must be a positive integer and cannot be specified without an index The default weight is 0 When multiple DTLs are assigned to an SPVC the DTL with the highest weight is tried first If it is unusable the one with the next highest weight is tried backoff enable disable enable means the backoff mechanism will be used for this SPVC Directed DTLs that are configured for this SPVC will not be retried for 30 minutes upon a failure This allows old information to age out disable means the backoff mechanism will not be used for this SPVC Directed DTLs that are configu
266. g that profile You cannot delete any profile that is currently in use has a non zero reference count in the Ref field under the profile s show command There are six different profiles that are supported by the FramePlus network module FRES8 EPD PPD FRRATE LMI service and FUNI The FRE8 and FRRATE profiles can only be applied to Frame Relay PVCs The FUNI profiles can only be applied to FUNI PVCs The EPD PPD profiles can be applied to either Frame Relay or FUNI PVCs The LMI profiles can only be applied to Frame Relay services The service profiles can be applied to either Frame Relay or FUNI services All profiles can be configured under the conf profile menu Please see Part 2 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual for detailed information about the AMI parameters Each of these profiles is discussed in the following sections D 3 1 EPD PPD Profile The Early Packet Discard Partial Packet Discard EPD PPD profile lets you determine how selective cell discard is performed The profile then can be applied on a per VC basis to a Frame Relay PVC using the epdppd index option under conf fratm pvc new or to a FUNI PVC using the epdppd index option under conf funi pvc new The EPD PPD profile lets you specify which priority buffer high or low will handle the traffic of the given PVC The different thresholds can be enabled or disabled per PVC These thresholds can be configured under conf module fram D 3 2 FRF 8 Prof
267. g this feature an authorization check is also performed each time the LECS reloads the LECS configuration file The LECS periodically checks whether its configuration file has been modified and if it has the file is re read The length of this period in seconds is defined by the Reload_Period key If the file has changed to disallow some clients that were previ ously allowed those clients will be dropped from the ELAN ELAN access control also works with a third E party LECS The LES revalidates the client every 600 seconds since the third party LECS will not contact the LES with configuration changes You can enable ELAN access control when you are creating the LES When you use the conf lane les new command specify the secure option This indicates you want to activate a secure LES BUS pair ELAN access control is disabled by default myswitch configuration lane les new LES Selector Byte HEX LES name bus BUS Selector Byte HEX gt type ethernet token ring mtu 1516 1580 4544 9234 18190 secure wka LECS ATM Address gt registertlvs enable disable elanid lt ELAN ID gt segid lt TR Segment ID gt fwdarp enable disable anycast LES Anycast ATM Address gt peers lt atm addr gt moO 33 cS De 9 amp 5 Ta m z5 If you enter wka with the secure option the ATM Forum well known LECS address is used In this case you do n
268. gateways split switches with one FI PNNI and one PNNI node to a PNNI area The ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 can only have at most one of its fabrics as a gateway between the FI PNNI area and the PNNI area This is because if two or more of the fabrics have gateways to the PNNI area then the link connecting any two of the gateways will come up as a PNNI link in the PNNI area This will divide up the backplane links between two different peer groups This invalid configuration is shown in Figure C 3 PNNI peer group boundary es PNNI node d B4 B3 PNNI link pA e O FT PNNI peer group boundary l O FT PNNI node l FT PNNI link E 1 A2 B2 B 4 Ne NM 4 Figure C 3 Multiple Fabrics of an ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 Incorrectly Configured as Gateways In the above figure the ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 shown is predominantly part of the FI PNNI peer group B However the ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 has gateways configured to the PNNI peer group A Since fabric 1 and fabric 2 are both configured as gateways the link between them comes up as a PNNI link in peer group A Because of this the backplane links of the ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 are divided between peer group A and peer group B This may cause two hop paths to be taken across the backplane links and is an invalid configuration To avoid this prob lem be sure that you configure either only one of the fabrics on an A
269. gent can come in two forms embedded or proxy An embedded SNMP agent is integrated into the physical hardware and software of the unit Emulated Local Area Network ELAN A logical network initiated by using the mechanisms defined by LAN Emulation This could include ATM and legacy attached end stations Glossary 12 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary End System ES a system where an ATM connection is terminated or initiated an originat ing end system initiates the connection a terminating end system terminates the connection End System Identifier ESI This identifier distinguishes multiple nodes at the same level in case the lower level peer group is partitioned End to End Connection when used in reference to an ATM network a connection that travels through an ATM network passing through various ATM devices and with endpoints at the termination of the ATM network 11 110 3 Enterprise Terminology generally referring to customers with multiple non contiguous geo graphic locations Equalization EQL the process of compensating for line distortions Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory EPROM A PROM which may be erased and rewritten to perform new or different functions normally done with a PROM burner Errored Second ES a second during which at least one code violation occurred Ethernet a 10 Mbps coaxial standard for LANs in which all nodes connect to the cable where they
270. ger value the LEC MPC tries to establish a shortcut circuit to the destination LEC MPC called the egress LEC MPC If the flow does not exceed the trigger value the ingress LEC MPC simply sends the packet traffic to the gate way router 4 3 4 4 Making a Shortcut When the ingress LEC MPC determines that the packet traffic flow exceeds the shortcut enable trigger value the ingress LEC MPC tries to establish a shortcut circuit to the egress LEC MPC The following describes how a shortcut is set up 1 The ingress LEC MPC initiates the shortcut creation process by sending an MPOA resolution request to the MPS it uses as a gateway router this MPS is called the ingress MPS The MPS converts the request to a next hop resolution protocol NHRP request This NHRP request includes the destination s IP address and asks for the corresponding ATM destination address 2 This request is passed along hop by hop until it reaches the final MPS called the egress MPS on the route to the destination IP address 3 The egress MPS sends a cache imposition request to the egress LEC MPC The egress LEC MPC sends a cache imposition reply which is converted to a NHRP response by the egress MPS The ingress MPS converts the NHRP response to an MPOA resolution response and transmits it to the ingress LEC MPC ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 4 13 MPOA 4 When the ingress LEC MPC receives the NHRP response containing the destina tion s ATM
271. ginating Path Through Path Terminating Path T ForeRunner zie ATM Switch Sp FORE w T T FORE ATM Switch N Pa di ATM Switch Virtual Path Figure 1 4 Composition of a Virtual Path 1 2 1 Through Paths Through paths route an entire virtual path through an ATM switch fabric When a cell is received by a switch fabric on a through path the VPI is examined to determine the output port and VPI The VCI component of the ATM header remains unchanged and can have any value So all of the channels within the through path are switched correctly without altering the VCI value of cells on these channels Four parameters are needed to define a through path on a FORE switch fabric input port input VPI output port and output VPI Through paths are represented as follows lt iport gt lt ivpi gt lt oport gt lt ovpi gt The VCI value remains unchanged when cells are switched via a through path For example the through path A4110 gt B4120 maps cells received on port A4 with VPI 10 and any VCI to port B4 with VPI 20 and the same VCI 1 4 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring PVCs cell VPI 10 VCI X switch fabric p oy cell Through Path A4 10 gt B4 20 VPI 20 VCI X Figure 1 5 An Example of a Through Path By definition through paths only switch cells in one direction they are unidirec
272. gins with qa On a host each of the Classical IP interfaces begins with ci and is user configurable On a switch all of the Classical IP interfaces associated with physical unit zero have a as the next letter All of the Classical IP interfaces associated with physical unit one have b as the next letter and so forth Finally each Classical IP interface has its interface number as a suffix As an example of the above naming convention for switches the name of the third Classical IP interface unit 2 on physical unit one is qab2 2 2 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring Classical IP 2 1 3 SPANS Interface While each of the Classical IP interfaces for a given physical interface is designed to support Classical IP using Q 2931 signalling a SPANS interface also exists for each physical interface The SPANS interface is asx0 in switch software and is fa0 in host adapter software The SPANS interface supports FORE IP on top of SPANS signalling FORE IP allows commu nication using AAL4 or AAL5 with no encapsulation uses a broadcast ARP for SPANS address resolution and supports direct communication of all hosts on a physical ATM net work without the use of IP routers Since SPANS and Q 2931 signalling use different VCIs a host can simultaneously support FORE IP over SPANS as well as Classical IP over Q 2931 on the same physical interface As a result of standard IP routing all traffic sent out a SPANS interface uses FORE IP
273. gned name for this channel If no name is assigned shows N A ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 1 15 o e 3 zh Z z Q v lt Oo o Configuring PVCs To list advanced information about all of the existing permanent virtual channels on a switch board enter the following parameters Input Port VPI 3BI 3B1 3Bl ABI 3B1 3B2 3B2 3B2 3B2 CK x O G a a a C e Press return configuration vcc show advanced Output VCI Port VPI VCI Protocol ConType 5 3CTL 0 49 uni N A 14 3CTL 0 48 spans N A 1s 3CIL 0 47 spans N A 16 3CTL 0 50 uni N A 100 3B4 0 100 pvc tran tran pp 9 CTL 0 53 uni N A 14 3CTL 0 52 spans N A 15 3CTL 0 51 spans N A 16 3CTL 0 54 uni N A for more q to quit q The fields in the advanced display are defined as follows Field Description Input Port The incoming port number of the virtual channel Input VPI The incoming virtual path number Input VCI The incoming virtual channel number Output Port The outgoing port number of the virtual channel Output VPI The outgoing virtual path number Output VCI The outgoing virtual channel number Protocol Indicates what type of channel this is Can be spans pvc uni spvc or rcc rcc is the routing control channel 0 18 on PNNI links over which PNNI exchanges routing infor mation ConType The connection type for the endpoints of this channel with respect to a particular netw
274. guration Manual D 15 Configuring FramePlus Modules D 5 4 2 Creating a Frame Relay PNNI SPVC To create a Frame Relay PNNI SPVC perform the following steps 1 Configure the ingress Frame Relay PVC without specifying the oport ovpi and ovci parameters For example myswitch configuration fratm pvc new 4A1 00 100 epdppd 1 name spvc a 2 Display the Frame Relay PVC so you can see what Input Port Input VPI and Input VCI values were assigned to the PVC For example myswitch configuration fratm pvc show Input Output SvcId dlci Port VPI VCI Port VPI VCI Admin Epd Frr Frf8 IngRE Name 4A1 00 100 4A1 0 32 up 1 0 0 disable spvc_a 3 Configure anew PNNISPVC where the port lt vpi gt and vci values are the Input Port Input VPI and Input VCI values that are displayed in step 2 The dest parameters identify the endpoint of the connection For example myswitch configuration spvx spvcc pnni gt new 4al 0 32 47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 21b 19cd 1d1 destvpi 0 destvci 100 name spvc a Usually when creating a PNNI SPVC the E destvpi and destvci parameters are optional i e if these values are not supplied the terminating switch uses the same VPI and VCI values as the originating switch However when at least one endpoint of the PNNI SPVC is a port on a FramePlus network module you must specify these parameters This creates a bi directional PNNI SPVC from the source to the destination where the ATM portion o
275. gured on this port VBROB The bandwidth overbooking level assigned to this vpt specified as a percentage The default is 100 which means that no overbooking has been defined Values less than 100 cause underbooking Values greater than 100 denote overbooking port means this is an elastic path Since elastic paths derive their overbooking factors from their parent ports use conf port show to display the overbooking value BuffOB The buffer overbooking level assigned to this vpt specified as a percentage The default is 100 which means that no overbooking has been defined Values less than 100 cause underbooking Values greater than 100 denote overbooking port means this is an elastic path Since elastic paths derive their overbooking factors from their parent ports use conf port show to display the overbooking value For more information about setting overbooking E parameters VBROB and BuffOB see Section 1 52 1 10 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring PVCs 1 4 Virtual Channels Virtual channels ride inside of virtual paths The combination of the two specifies a virtual connection On a switch fabric each virtual channel switches cells with a specific VPI and VCI received on a specific port to another port with a new VPI and a new VCI Unlike through paths which carry one or more VCCs virtual channels describe a single virtual connection between two endpoints S
276. hapter provides an overview of FORE Systems implementation of ATM Forum PNNI hereafter referred to as PNNI and its use in a multiple switch network To understand PNNI it is important to first understand how PNNI s routing and signalling protocols work 6 1 PNNI Routing Protocol The PNNI routing protocol enables the distribution of topology and address reachability information between switches and groups of switches Reachability information is the data that explains how to contact a single ATM address or a group of ATM addresses that are summa rized by a single prefix This information is used to compute routes across the network The key elements of the PNNI routing protocol are as follows e Hello Protocol e Database Exchange Protocol e Flooding Protocol e Path Computation e Hierarchical Routing 6 1 1 Hello Protocol The Hello protocol is used to discover and verify the identity of neighbor nodes and to deter mine the status of the logical links to those nodes Logical links between nodes in the same peer group are called horizontal links Hello packets are exchanged at regular intervals over links connecting neighboring nodes Initially these packets are used to exchange identities between the nodes and to determine if they belong to the same peer group After that Hello packets are used as keep alive messages for the links over which the packets are exchanged After a configured number of hello intervals have passed without re
277. he LES and that connections similar to those described for LEC1 already exist While waiting for the LES to respond LEC1 forwards the packet to the BUS The BUS broad casts the packet to all LECs on the ELAN This is done to avoid data loss and to minimize con nection set up latency due to the LE_ARP process that may not be acceptable to some network protocols If the LE ARP response is received LEC1 establishes a data direct connection Q to the desti nation address of LEC2 This path will be used for subsequent data transfers Before LECT begins to use this connection it first sends a flush packet via the BUS to the destination LEC2 When LEC2 acknowledges receipt of this packet signifying that the BUS path is empty only then does LECI begin to use the data direct connection for data transfer This process ensures that the network protocol s frames arrive in the proper order If no response is received to the LE ARP LECI continues to send data via the BUS while con tinuing to LE ARP until a response is received and a data direct connection to LEC2 is estab lished If LEC1 already has a data direct connection to a MAC address it wishes to reach it need not go through the LE ARP process again Instead it continues to use the current connection This is possible because each LEC maintains a cache of MAC address to ATM address mappings that it receives in response to the LE ARPs it has sent Entries in this cache are aged out
278. he PGLs For example suppose a switch A 1 1 belongs to the lowest level peer group A 1 which in turn belongs to a higher level peer group A Then A 1 1 has detailed topology information of peer group A 1 as well as higher level topology information of peer group A Suppose peer group A 2 also belongs to peer group A Then switch A 1 1 knows about the logical group node representing A 2 although it does not know the detailed topology inside A 2 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 6 3 ATM Forum PNNI 6 2 PNNI Signalling Protocol PNNI signalling is used to establish point to point and point to multipoint connections across the network This protocol is based on ATM Forum UNI signalling with mechanisms added to support source routing and crankback 6 2 1 Source Routing A DTL is a source route which specifies the preferred call routing path that the ForeThought PNNI or PNNI router should use when setting up an SVC Each DTL is a source route and each entry in the DTL represents a single hop in that source route Each hop is represented by a ForeThought PNNI or PNNI node and the logical output port at that node 6 2 2 Crankback During PNNI signalling a call being processed according to a DTL may encounter a blocked node or link along the designated route Crankback allows a partial reroute of such a rejected call so that it does not have to be cleared the whole way back to the source Additionally an indication of the blockage an
279. he cell is switched through the network ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 1 1 o e 3 re Z z Q v lt o o Configuring PVCs VPI 1 VCI 37 FORE ATM cell i FORE ATM Switch B portC1 T port B4 po rt A4 FORE ATM Switch A 7 cell VPI 0 VCI 32 Workstation P VPI 1 VCI 35 port D1 VPI 2 VCI 33 Switch C port B1 port A1 FORE ATM Switch D VPI 0 VCI 36 port B3 Workstation Q Figure 1 1 The Cell The mappings in an ATM network used to route cells from a source to a destination are gener ally referred to as virtual channels and virtual paths The following sections is to explain how to create the necessary mappings to establish these virtual paths and virtual channels in a net work of FORE ATM switches ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring PVCs 1 2 Virtual Paths Virtual paths which are carried within a physical transit medium e g DS1 E1 DS3 E3 OC3c or OC12c link are used to establish connections between two nodes in an ATM net work Many virtual paths can be transmitted within a single physical link Two types of vir tual paths exist virtual path connections VPCs also known as through paths and originating terminating paths also k
280. he one from which the PTSE was received A PTSE sent to a neighboring peer is periodically retransmitted until it is acknowledged In this fashion when a link is created or goes down this information is propagated immedi ately throughout the network Similarly when a significant change is seen in the metrics of a link this state change is flooded throughout the network 6 1 4 Path Computation Path computation is done on the source or originating switch All of the network topology information obtained and updated by the higher layers of the protocol is used to determine a path through the network which is efficient and which satisfies all of the relevant Quality of Service QoS parameters The path is fully specified by the source switch all the way to the destination Path information is stored in a Designated Transit List DTL which is forwarded along with the setup message to establish the circuit for a particular call 6 2 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual ATM Forum PNNI 6 1 5 Hierarchical Routing Hierarchical routing allows contiguous switches to be organized into peer groups The switches within each peer group exchange detailed topology information about their own group that is not visible to switches outside the peer group Similarly switches within each peer group do not receive detailed topology information about switches outside of their peer group Instead each peer group is represented externally by its Peer G
281. he source of a failed signal due to the pres ence of an AIS may be used by APS equipment to initiate switching Zero Byte Time Slot Interchange ZBTSI A technique used with the T carrier extended super frame format ESF in which an area in the ESF frame carries information about the location of all zero bytes eight consecutive 0 s within the data stream Zero Code Suppression The insertion of a 1 bit to prevent the transmission of eight or more consecutive 0 bits Used primarily with T1 and related digital telephone company facilities which require a minimum 1 s density in order to keep the individual subchannels of a mul tiplexed high speed facility active Zero Bit Insertion A technique used to achieve transparency in bit oriented protocols A zero is inserted into sequences of one bits that cause false flag direction ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary 37 Glossary Glossary 38 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Index A ABR ioi Sortie T MARRE RR 1 39 active detection basic connections B 4 CAS connections B 3 address registration 2 4 AMI access level all SE 8 9 network c2 m8 ticus RIS 8 9 MONE eue ux Vb Nie 8 9 serial 5 9 sctbsi UEM IMMO 8 9 AMI command privileges 8 9 adimi oad Soha E 8 9 HSOGTt hs oh M es e 8 9 application configuring on a FramePlus network module D 17 area zonilibeszipe5A U
282. his unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void this user s authority to operate this equipment NOTE The TNX 210 TNX 1100 ASX 200WG ASX 200BX ASX 1000 ASX 4000 ForeRunnerLE 25 and ForeRunnerLE 155 have been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of the equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to cor rect the interference at his own expense DOC CLASS A NOTICE This digital apparatus does not exceed Class A limits for radio noise emission for a digital device as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications Le present appareil numerique n emet pas de bruits radioelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils nume riques de la class A prescrites dans le reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des Communica tions du Canada VCCI CLASS 1 NOTICE CORE B THGHLHRE ALERE Bo CHA SNARE HRE CHM LAWIMCO RRB ILE HEEL LEAR S RMSE E
283. ho will have access to each switch Changing a userid only changes it in the switch s local login file If the adminis trator wants to use the same set of userids on each switch in the network he or she should configure the entire set of userids on any one switch Then he or she can backup the login file to a host using the conf security login backup command Then the administrator can copy the login file to each of the other switches in the network using the conf security login restore command on each switch See Part 2 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual for more information about these commands INTERES ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 8 1 Security If the administrator wants to change add or delete one or more userids and propagate these changes to the other switches he or she should use the same method First make all of the modifications on one switch back up the login file to a host and restore the login file to each of the other switches There are several different scenarios that can occur such as the SecurID server being down or a userid not being listed on a particular switch Table 8 1 shows the different login scenarios and the action taken by the switch for each In this table port refers to the access method assigned to the userid e g telnet or serial port Table 8 1 Possible Login Scenarios Login Scenarios Action Userid not listed and SecurID server not accessible Reject
284. i gt Be sure to use a host mask value of 152 2 12 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring Classical IP 2 5 2 Third Party Switch with ILMI and No RFC 1577 Support To configure a network with a third party vendor s switch that supports ILMI but not RFC 1577 as shown in Figure 2 2 perform the following steps F Cp g C eH cJ ILMI no RFC 1577 Cp c Third Party Switch O Ch QO C FORE Systems host Li Figure 2 2 Configuring a Third Party Switch with ILMI Support and No RFC 1577 1 Be sure that ForeThought software has been installed on all of the hosts and that ILMI was set in the process ILMI dynamically performs address registration for all of the hosts 2 Configure a static ATM route to the third party switch on FORE switch B that is physically connected to the third party switch using the following AMI command conf atmr ftpnni staticroute new lt NSAP gt mask port port vpi lt vpi gt Be sure to use a network mask value of 104 3 Configure two static NSAP routes on the third party switch one to each of the FORE switches to which the third party switch is connected using the third party vendor s configuration software Be sure to use a network mask value of 104 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 2 13 e E E Q c f El Q Q P ao EJ O EJ Configuring Classical IP 2 5 3 Third Party Switch with RFC 15
285. ical rating label e Never push objects of any kind through openings in the equipment Dangerous voltages may be present Conductive foreign objects could produce a short circuit that could cause fire electric shock or damage to your equipment Modifications to Equipment Do not make mechanical or electrical modifications to the equipment FORE Systems Inc is not responsible for regulatory compliance of a modified FORE product Placement of a FORE Systems Product CAUTION lo ensure reliable operation of your FORE Systems product and to protect it from overheating openings in the equipment must not be blocked or covered A FORE Systems product should never be placed near a radiator or heat register ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual vii PETER Preface Power Cord Connection WARNING FORE Systems products are designed to work with single phase power systems having a grounded neutral conductor To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not plug FORE Systems products into any other type of power system Contact your facilities manager or a qualified electrician if you are not sure what type of power is supplied to your building WARNING Your FORE Systems product is shipped with a grounding type 3 wire power cord To reduce the risk of electric shock always plug the cord into a grounded power outlet viii ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual On Ez Configuring PVCs To establish a permanent comm
286. ick ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary 31 Glossary Structured Connectors SC see Stick and Click Sublayer a logical subdivision of a layer SubNetwork Access Protocol SNAP a specially reserved variant of IEEE 802 2 encoding SNAP indicates to look further into the packet where it will fine a Type field Subscriber Network Interface SNI the interface between an SMDS end user s CPE and the network directly serving the end user supported by either a DS1 or DS3 access arrangement Super Frame SF a term used to describe the repeating 12 D4 frame format that composes a standard non ESF T1 service Super User a login ID that allows unlimited access to the full range of a device s functionality including especially the ability to reconfigure the device and set passwords Sustainable Cell Rate SCR ATM Forum parameter defined for traffic management For VBR connections SCR determines the long term average cell rate that can be transmitted Sustained Information Rate SIR In ATM this refers to the long term average data transmis sion rate across the User to Network Interface In SMDS this refers to the committed informa tion rate similar to CIR for Frame Relay Service Switch Equipment used to interconnect lines and trunks Switched Connection A connection established via signaling Switched Multimegabit Data Service SMDS a high speed datagram based public data net work service expected to
287. idlesupp enable disable oidlesupp enable disable For example myswitch configuration ces new 1a3 1 oport 1bl ovpi 0 ovci 100 idlesupp enable oidlesupp enable B 4 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring Circuit Emulation Services B 1 3 2 Configuring Idle Detection Idle channel suppression is enabled when any idle channel suppression option is used in the AMI command line An idle detection mechanism is used on a per connection basis When idle pattern matching is used the default pattern is FF The same default pattern is used for mask pattern matching When the signalling method is used the default value is as per Cus tomer Installation to Network idle patterns The idle detection method is based on the connec tion type as follows e CAS connections use idle CAS signalling pattern matching Structured Basic connections use idle pattern matching B 1 3 2 1 Configuring Idle CAS Signalling Pattern Matching Standard idle signalling patterns are used by names Only one type can be selected To config ure CAS signalling pattern matching you could use the following syntax myswitch configuration ces new port lt timeslots gt idlesupp enable disable m 3 E 2 E wn e s L 2 unan Buunfiuo5 idlepat idle pattern cas pattern oport lt oport gt ots ots oidlesupp enable disable oidlepat idle pattern cas pattern For example my
288. igh speed link and controls the flow Channel Service Unit CSU An interface for digital leased lines which performs loopback testing and line conditioning Channelization capability of transmitting independent signals together over a cable while still maintaining their separate identity for later separation Circuit A communications link between points Circuit Emulation Service CES The ATM Forum circuit emulation service interoperability specification specifies interoperability agreements for supporting Constant Bit Rate CBR traffic over ATM networks that comply with the other ATM Forum interoperability agree ments Specifically this specification supports emulation of existing TDM circuits over ATM networks Classical IP CLIP IP over ATM which conforms to RFC 1577 Clear to Send CTS and RS 232 modem interface control signal sent from the modem to the DTE on pin 5 which indicates that the attached DTE may begin transmitting issuance in response to the DTE s RTS Clocking Regularly timed impulses Closed User Group A subgroup of network users that can be its own entity any member of the subgroup can only communicate with other members of that subgroup Coaxial Cable Coax is a type of electrical communications medium used in the LAN environ ment This cable consists of an outer conductor concentric to an inner conductor separated from each other by insulating material and covered by some protective ou
289. iguration Server LECS LAN Emulation Server LES LAN Emulation LAN Emulation Client Client LEC Broadcast and Unknown LEC Server BUS LAN Emulation Services Figure 3 1 Basic Emulated LAN Interconnections 3 2 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 2 1 LAN Emulation Client LEC The LEC is the component in an end system that performs data forwarding address resolution and other control functions when communicating with other components within the ELAN It also provides a MAC level emulated Ethernet or Token Ring interface and appears to higher level software as though a physical interface is present Each LEC must register with both the LES and BUS associated with the ELAN it wishes to join before it may participate in the ELAN To participate in multiple ELANs an end system must have multiple LECs ForeThought 5 3 x supports up to 16 LECs on ES 3810 switches and on adapter cards running Solaris or Win dows NT software and up to 4 LECs on on adapter cards running Windows 95 3 2 2 LAN Emulation Configuration Server LECS The LECS is responsible for the initial configuration of LECs It provides information about available ELANs that a LEC may join together with the address of the LES associated with each ELAN Using DLE in ForeThought 5 3 the user may also configure the LECS to associate multiple LES BUS pairs with a given ELAN This feature allows LECs to u
290. iguration information 4 12 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual MPOA 4 3 4 3 Flow Analysis On a LEC MPC s host or edge device IP packets with destinations within the host s subnet are sent using LANE 1 0 methods i e the client puts on its LEC hat and works directly with its ELAN s services to connect with local destinations Packets destined for remote subnets cause the LEC MPC to put on its MPC hat This client is then referred to as an ingress LEC MPC Ingress LEC MPCs associate destination IP addresses with shortcut circuits Ingress LEC MPCs use configurable parameters called flow descriptors to determine whether and when to trigger creation of shortcut circuits The ingress LEC MPC also monitors the most recent use of a shortcut circuit to determine when to tear down the shortcut Specifically when an ingress LEC MPC sends a packet 1 Ifa shortcut circuit already exists to the IP destination the LEC MPC sends the packet over this circuit 2 Ifnoshortcut circuit exists the LEC MPC determines whether shortcuts to this IP address are allowed If shortcuts to the destination IP address are not allowed the LEC MPC sends the packet to the gateway router 3 If no shortcut circuits exist and shortcuts to the IP address are allowed the LEC MPC determines if the packet traffic flow exceeds the shortcut enable trigger value set by the flow descriptors for the destination IP address s flow If the flow exceeds the trig
291. iguration of the link and scope procedures can correctly determine what is valid for a given interface 7 3 2 2 2 Examples of Invalid Configurations Table 7 6 shows examples of invalid configurations to enter into AMI and the reasons why they are invalid Table 7 6 Invalid Scope and Mode Combinations Invalid Combination Reason conf sig new 1a1 0 sig mode vpAssoc The scope is not entered auto conf sig new 1a1 0 sig alloc auto sig mode vpAssoc The scope is auto conf sig new 1a10 sig mode nonAssoc The scope is not entered auto conf sig new 1a1 0 sig alloc auto sig mode nonAssoc The scope is auto conf sig new 1a1 0 sig_alloc vp The mode is not entered auto conf sig new 1a1 0 sig alloc vp sig mode auto The mode is auto conf sig new 1a1 0 sig alloc link The mode is not entered auto conf sig new 1a1 0 sig alloc link sig mode auto The mode is auto conf sig new 1a1 0 sig alloc link sig mode vpAssoc This is an invalid combination for an interface conf sig new 1a1 0 sig alloc vp sig mode nonAssoc This is an invalid combination if the type is auto default conf sig new lal 0 type privateNNI version pnnil0 sig_alloc vp sig_mode nonAssoc VP scope and nonAssoc mode are incompatible with the type privateNNI ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Signalling There is a potential invalid configuration tha
292. iguring Circuit Emulation Services B 1 2 3 Active Detection A connection is declared active when at least one timeslot becomes active The active detection mechanism is not user configurable If at least one of the timeslots is not matched against the idle patterns configured the connection is declared active The integration period is not user configurable and the transition from idle to active is immediate i e when the first cell does not have idle patterns B 1 3 Idle Channel Suppression Configuration Examples Various examples are provided in this section for configuring idle channel suppression When idle channel suppression is enabled the E total number of timeslots supported is 144 The full 6 ports are supported for DS1 and 4 8 ports are supported for E1 B 1 3 1 Enabling Idle Channel Suppression Idle channel suppression is enabled on a per connection basis The default idle detection mechanism is idle pattern matching To enable idle channel suppression you could use the following syntax myswitch configuration ces new port lt timeslots gt oport lt oport gt ots ots idlesupp enable disable oidlesupp enable disable For example myswitch configuration ces new 1a3 1 oport 1b1 ots 1 idlesupp enable oidlesupp enable Alternatively you could use the following syntax myswitch configuration ces new port lt timeslots gt oport lt oport gt ovpi lt ovpi gt ovci lt ovci gt
293. ile FRES is the Frame Relay Forum s FR ATM PVC Service Interworking Implementation Agree ment The FRES profile allows you to define the interworking mappings between Frame Relay and ATM The profile then can be applied on a per VC basis to a Frame Relay PVC using the frf8 index option under conf fratm pvc new T g Ee 2o v5 3 5a zS os 2a c oO 7 The FRES profile lets you decide if the Discard Eligibility DE field in every frame is mapped to the Cell Loss Priority CLP field in every ATM cell It lets you define if the Forward Explicit Congestion Notification FECN field in every frame is mapped to the EFCI field of every ATM cell It also lets you define the possible encapsulation translation protocols that can be used ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual D 9 Configuring FramePlus Modules D 3 3 Frame Relay Rate Profile The Frame Relay rate profile allows you to manage and define rate enforcement and rate adaptation characteristics that can be applied on a per VC basis to a Frame Relay PVC using the rrate lt index gt option under conf fratm pvc new You can explicitly enable rate enforcement in both the ingress and the egress direction on a FramePlus network module Ingress rate enforcement is configured using the parameters inBc inBe and inCir Egress rate enforcement is configured using the parameters outBc outBe and outCir The rate adaptation parameters are minBc and cmPeriod If no rate enforc
294. in Figure C 17 PNNI peer group boundary PNNI node PNNI link FT PNNI peer group boundary O FT PNNI node M m FT PNNI link PGA S pas A1 L5 e t ye A Je RES PGB an l o l A e EST A X B1 f N m Figure C 17 Peer Group B Disconnected from Peer Group A ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI To quickly restore the connectivity the rest of the backbone should be migrated to PNNI 7 Change the peer group ID to D the level to 2 and area to 3 on the PNNI node in B 1 and change the default protocol of the default domain in B 1 to gat eway using the following AMI commands conf atmroute pnni node modify 1 pgid d forelevel 2 forearea 3 conf atmroute domain modify domain ID gateway Reboot switch B 1 The link between A 1 and B 1 should now be restored as a PNNI link and connectivity resumes between A and B 8 C2 no longer needs to be a gateway switch Modify the default protocol of the default domain in C 2 to pnni using the following AMI command conf atmroute domain modify domain ID pnni Reboot switch C 2 Upon the reboot the backbone and peer groups A and C are now running PNNI and only peer group B needs to be migrated The current state of the network is shown in Figure C 18 T v z i U z wo Bunanuog ATM Switch Networ
295. in a network of two PNNI peer groups areas For example in the poorly constructed network shown in Figure C 2 the fabric on the top left fabric 1 is configured as a split switch with two nodes one in peer group A and the other in peer group B All of the other fabrics have one node each The node on the bottom left fabric fabric 2 is in peer group A and the nodes in the other two fabrics 3 and 4 are in peer group B The links between the fabric 2 and the fabrics 3 and 4 do not come up because the peer group IDs of the PNNI nodes connected these links do not match PNNI peer group boundary MO e Hin icm Jd E M PNNI lin d f B 1 B 3 E d A 1 V4 Bae lh PGB ly B 4 2 N gt ud Figure C 2 Invalid Configuration of ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 Split between Two PNNI Peer Groups The problem in the network shown above occurs when computing a path from A 2 to B3 In this case routing is forced to use a two hop path across the backplane thereby failing to set up a call To avoid this problem be sure that you configure all fabrics in an ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 as part of the same peer group ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual T Uv z o U z zZ wodj HuljsaAUuo0D Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI C 1 3 Multiple Gateways in an ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 Another potential problem can occur when an ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 in a FI PNNI area has
296. in its table for the destination MAC address it returns the destination ATM address to the LEC MPC 3 The LEC MPC then opens up a point to point ATM connection to the destination host to send the packet 4 2 2 3 Multicast and Broadcast Packets The LEC MPC sends outgoing multicast and broadcast packets to the BUS which uses a point to multipoint connection to send the packets to multiple ATM addresses in the ELAN 4 2 2 4 Accessing Fast Ethernet and FDDI Networks Note that the diagram in Figure 4 1 shows dotted lines from the PowerHub 7000 to the Fast Ethernet and FDDI networks This shows how the PowerHub can provide access to non ATM networks ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 4 5 MPOA 4 2 2 5 Multiple ELANs It is possible to set up more than one ELAN in a FORE network For each new ELAN you must configure another LES BUS instance for that LAN On the access devices bridge groups must be used to associate physical ports with ELANs on the ATM side An end station in the ELAN with a ForeRunner adapter can connect to up to 16 ELANs simultaneously 4 2 2 6 Distributed LAN Emulation To provide greater resilience support larger ELANs and support separated clusters of users in an ELAN ForeThought software provides Distributed LAN Emulation DLE DLE allows the LES BUS functions to be distributed among multiple interconnected LES BUS instances called peers In the example ELAN shown in Figure 4 1 the two LES BUS pairs run
297. incoming signal 177 asxDS1PRBSCleared This trap indicates that PRBS pattern is cleared on the incoming signal 178 asxDS1AtmLCDDetected This trap indicates that the specified DS1 port is expe riencing Loss of Cell Delineation LCD An LCD fail ure is declared when the LCD defect persists for a period of 2 5 0 5 seconds 179 asxDS1AtmLCDCleared This trap indicates that the LCD failure identified by trap asxDS1AtmLCDDetected has been cleared An LCD failure is cleared when the LCD defect is absent for 10 0 5 seconds 192 asxE3TrailChangeDetected This trap indicates that a change in the trail trace mes sage was detected on the incoming signal 208 asxE1AtmLCDDetected This trap indicates that the specified E1 port is experi encing Loss of Cell Delineation LCD An LCD failure is declared when the LCD defect persists for a period of 2 5 0 5 seconds 209 asxE1AtmLCDCleared This trap indicates that the LCD failure identified by trap asxE1AtmLCDDetected has been cleared An LCD failure is cleared when the LCD defect is absent for 10 0 5 seconds 224 asxJ2RLOCDetected This trap indicates that Receive Loss of Clock RLOC is detected on the incoming signal 225 asxJ2RLOCCleared This trap indicates that Receive Loss of Clock RLOC is cleared on the incoming signal 226 asxJ2HBERDetected This trap indicates that High Bit Error Rate
298. index The index of the set of QoS extension parameters See conf qosext show for this number Bandwidth and or buffer overbooking are used when the number of VBR VCCs configured across an originating or terminating VPT exceeds the guaranteed capacity of the VP While overbooking removes service guarantees in the case when all users transmit at full contract rate simultaneously a network can be engineered in a more cost effective manner if it is assumed that all VCC sources do not transmit simultaneously Guideline An initial buffer overbooking value of 500 700 is recommended until live traffic patterns and VPC utilization can be measured If bandwidth is still under utilized a higher VBROB setting can be used ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring PVCs The following is an example of how to create a terminating path myswitch configuration vpt gt new 3b3 99 term Would you like to create the originating side also y y The following is an example of how to create a originating path myswitch configuration vpt new 3b4 88 orig Would you like to create the terminating side also y y The following is an example of how to delete a terminating path myswitch configuration vpt del 3b4 88 term Would you like to delete the originating side also y y o fo 3 z E Q v lt io o The following is an example of how to delete an originating path myswitch configurat
299. indicates that the specified E3 port has detected incoming PLCP LOF Alarm 109 asxE3PLCPLOFCleared This trap indicates that incoming PLCP LOF alarm has been cleared on the specified E3 port 112 asxJ2YellowDetected This trap indicates that Yellow Alarm is detected on the incoming signal 113 asxJ2YellowCleared This trap indicates that Yellow Alarm is cleared on the incoming signal 114 asxJ2AISDetected This trap indicates that AIS Alarm is detected on the incoming signal 115 asxJ2AISCleared This trap indicates that AIS Alarm is cleared on the incoming signal 116 asxJ2LOSDetected This trap indicates that LOS Alarm is detected on the incoming signal 117 asxJ2LOSCleared This trap indicates that LOS Alarm is cleared on the incoming signal 118 asxJ2LOFDetected This trap indicates that LOF Alarm is detected on the incoming signal 119 asxJ2LOFCleared This trap indicates that LOF Alarm is cleared on the incoming signal 120 asxDS3LOSDetected This trap indicates that the specified DS3 port has detected incoming LOS Alarm ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual QO fe E amp E 3 Co o zZ v Configuring SNMP Table A 14 SNMP Traps Supported on the FORE Switches Continued Trap Number Trap Name Description 121 asxDS3LOSCleared This trap indicates that the incoming LOS Alarm has been cleared on the specified DS3 port 130 asxSonetLOFDetected This trap indicates that th
300. int VCC set up by the LEC to the BUS for sending multicast data to the BUS The LEC must attempt to maintain this connection while participating in the ELAN e Multicast Forward Connection a unidirectional point to multipoint VCC set up from the BUS to LECs participating in the ELAN The LEC must attempt to main tain this connection while participating in the ELAN e Data Direct Connection a bidirectional point to point VCC set up between LECs that want to exchange unicast data traffic and torn down after 20 minutes default of inactivity Each LEC normally establishes many Data Direct Connec tions For the following discussion please refer to Figure 3 2 3 4 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring an Emulated LAN LEC1 Q CONFIGURATION DIRECT LECS O CONTROL DIRECT LES CONTROL DISTRIBUTE MULTICAST SEND MULTICAST FORWARD Q DATA DIRECT engineering E eaceseerciceesennkhsd aiia Figure 3 2 ELAN Operation mo 39 Ez 9 Q os re m z5 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 3 5 Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 3 1 Initialization Upon initialization LEC1 obtains its own ATM address via ILMI address registration LEC1 obtains the address of the LECS in one of four ways by querying the switch to which LECI is connected via ILMI by connecting to the well known address defined by the ATM Forum s LANE standards 47 0079 00 000000 0000 0000 0000 00
301. ion Manual 1 31 Configuring PVCs 1 5 4 Creating a SPANS SPVC To create a SPANS SPVC you must configure both ends of the connection concurrently on the two switch fabrics This means you must have an AMI session open on both the local switch fabric and the destination switch fabric To create a new SPANS SPVC log in to AMI and enter the following parameters configuration spvx spvcc spans new port lt vpi gt vci dest session dest port dest vpi dest vci N peak lt Kb sec gt source destination bidirectional These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description port The port number on the local switch fabric vpi The virtual path number on the local switch fabric vci The virtual channel number on the local switch fabric dest session The IP address of the remote switch dest port The port number on the remote switch fabric dest vpi The virtual path number on the remote switch fabric dest vci The virtual channel number on the remote switch fabric peak lt Kb sec gt The amount of peak bandwidth allocated for this SPANS SPVC specified in kilobits per second The default is 0 source destination bidi source means a unidirectional SPANS SPVC going from the local switch fabric to the rectional remote switch fabric will be created destination means a unidirectional SPANS SPVC going from the remote switch fabric to the local switch fabric will
302. ion and describes some rules for configuring signalling interfaces Auto configuration requires that ILMI is up on that signalling interface 7 3 1 Overview of Signalling Channel Auto Configuration Signalling support for UNI 3 0 UNI 3 1 and UNI 4 0 is provided in ForeThought 5 3 x The switch can be configured to detect which interfaces are UNI3 0 which are UNI 3 1 and which are UNI 4 0 automatically The switch also translates signalling messages between interfaces of different types When a signalling channel is created using conf signalling new version auto then the creation is delayed until a response is obtained from the peer or until the ILMI keep alive requests time out Based on the peer response the appropriate SSCOP stack is initialized If the peer does not support the atm AtmLayerUniVersion variable then the switch software defaults to UNI 3 0 Similarly if the ILMI keep alive requests time out then the switch soft ware defaults to UNI 3 0 The switch periodically checks the version supported on the peer by querying the atm AtmLayerUniVersion variable If the peer version has changed since the last query the signalling stack is recreated to reflect the change ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 7 9 Signalling The following two tables summarize the above information Table 7 1 highlights the actions taken based on the configurations of the FORE switches on both sides of an interface ForeThought versions prior t
303. ion functional ity usually used for diagnostic purposes to determine if an interface is functioning properly Loss Of Frame LOF a type of transmission error that may occur in wide area carrier lines Loss Of Pointer LOP a type of transmission error that may occur in wide area carrier lines Loss Of Signal LOS a type of transmission error that may occur in wide area carrier lines or a condition declared when the DTE senses a loss of a DS1 signal from the CPE for more the 150 milliseconds the DTE generally responds with an all ones Blue or AIS signal Management Information Base MIB the set of parameters that an SNMP management station can query or set in the SNMP agent of a networked device e g router Maximum Burst Size MBS the Burst Tolerance BT is conveyed through the MBS which is coded as a number of cells The BT together with the SCR and the GCRA determine the MBS that may be transmitted at the peak rate and still be in conformance with the GCRA Maximum Burst Tolerance the largest burst of data that a network device is guaranteed to handle without discarding cells or packets Bursts of data larger than the maximum burst size may be subject to discard Maximum Cell Delay Variance MCDV This is the maximum two point CDV objective across a link or node for the specified service category Maximum Cell Loss Ratio MCLR This is the maximum ratio of the number of cells that do not make it across th
304. ion oriented service that is capable of carrying up to 4096 bytes per frame Framing a protocol that separates incoming bits into identifiable groups so that the receiving multiplexer recognizes the grouping Frequency Division Multiplexing FDM a method of dividing an available frequency range into parts with each having enough bandwidth to carry one channel Gbps gigabits per second billion Generic Cell Rate Algorithm GCRA an algorithm which is employed in traffic policing and is part of the user network service contract The GCRA is a scheduling algorithm which ensures that cells are marked as conforming when they arrive when expected or later than expected and non conforming when they arrive sooner than expected Generic Connection Admission Control GCAC This is a process to determine if a link has potentially enough resources to support a connection Generic Flow Control GFC the first four bits of the first byte in an ATM cell header Used to control the flow of traffic across the User to Network Interface UNI and thus into the net work Exact mechanisms for flow control are still under investigation and no explicit defini tion for this field exists at this time This field is used only at the UNI for NNI NNI use between network nodes these four bits provide additional network address capacity and are appended to the VPI field GIO a proprietary bus architecture used in certain Silicon Graphics Inc work
305. ion vpt del 3b3 99 orig Would you like to delete the terminating side also y y If you do not specify term or orig the switch automatically deletes both sides of the path myswitch configuration vpt del 3b4 88 Before deleting a virtual path you must first delete all VCCs which use that path ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 1 23 Configuring PVCs 1 5 2 1 Shaping Multiple Originating Paths on a Single Port This feature allows you to shape several originating paths to be output on a single port This feature is useful if you have several remote sites interconnected by a PVP mesh If you only need to shape one originating path you can simply use the conf port traffic d ratelimit command on a Series D network module This feature requires the use of two ports One port which can be on a Series C Series LC or Series D network module is used for originating and terminating path s This port is put in either physical or diagnostic loopback and is configured with the new option 1oopvpi under conf vpt new The other port provides the actual output on a shaped through path so this port must be on a Series D network module Switch A EI oM VP3 RU Ax V P4 shaping port WAN PVP Mesh x rS Met ve 2 9 d E X Y 39 N S56 ore amp vp2 xX A nm a NS zu a Switch C VP 1 E y Ing E looping port orig and term paths VP 0 and VP 1
306. ip to step 2 2 Upgrade the switches that are running services 3 Re create the LES and BUS if they were not co located If the LES and BUS were already co located skip to step 4 4 Administer up the switches that are running services If you used the VLAN Manager to create your ELAN you should use it to upgrade the ELAN Refer to the ForeView VLAN Manager User s Manual for the appropriate steps These steps describe commands for services running on a switch Refer to the corresponding User s Manual for the appropriate steps for commands for any services that are running on hosts PowerHubs or ES 3810s moO 33 cS De os Ta m z5 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 3 55 Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 8 1 Deleting the Non Co located Services There are several steps involved in changing the non co located services 3 8 1 1 Administer Down the Services Administer down the LECS myswitch configuration lane lecs admin LECS index down Administer down the LES and BUS myswitch configuration lane les admin LES index down myswitch configuration lane bus admin BUS index down 3 8 1 2 Delete the Non Co located LES and BUS Delete the LES and BUS myswitch configuration lane les delete LES index myswitch configuration lane bus delete BUS index 3 8 1 2 1 Edit the LECS CFG File Before you edit the LECS CFG file you may wish E to back it up to a host using the oper
307. ir cabling Category 3 4 or 5 10BaseT which is part of the IEEE 802 3 specification has a distance limit of approx imately 100 meters per segment 802 1d Spanning Tree Bridging the IEEE standard for bridging a MAC layer standard for transparently connecting two or more LANs often called subnetworks that are running the same protocols and cabling This arrangement creates an extended network in which any two workstations on the linked LANs can share data 802 3 Ethernet the IEEE standard for Ethernet a physical layer standard that uses the CSMA CD access method on a bus topology LAN 802 5 Token Ring the IEEE physical layer standard that uses the token passing access method on a ring topology LAN AAL Connection an association established by the AAL between two or more next higher layer entities Adapter A fitting that supplies a passage between two sets of equipment when they cannot be directly interconnected Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation ADPCM A technique that allows analog voice signals to be carried on a 32K bps digital channel Sampling is done at 8Hz with 4 bits used to describe the difference between adjacent samples Adaptive Pulse Code Modulation APCM A technique that effectively reduces occupied band width per active speaker by reducing sampling rates during periods of overflow peak traffic Address A unique identity of each network station on a LAN or WAN Address Complete Mess
308. is identified by hwPortBoard hwPortModule hwPortNumber was configured up but lost its carrier or the framing bit and is currently down 29 asxLinkUp This trap alerts that the link that is identified by hwPortBoard hwPortModule hwPortNumber is back up 30 asxSpansDown This trap alerts that the SPANS signalling on the link that is identified by the sigPathPort and sigPathVPI failed ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring SNMP Table A 14 SNMP Traps Supported on the FORE Switches Continued Trap Number Trap Name Description 31 asxSpansUp This trap alerts that the SPANS signalling on the link that is identified by the sigPathPort and sigPathVPI is up 32 asx TempSensorOverTemp This trap alerts that one of the temperature sensors indicates over temperature The temperature sensor is identified by the temperature sensor index 33 asxTempSensorRegularTemp This trap alerts that one of the temperature sensors indicates regular temperature The temperature sensor is identified by the temperature sensor index 34 asxFabricTemperature OverTemp This trap alerts that one of the temperature sensors indicates over temperature The temperature sensor is identified by the temperature sensor index 35 asxFabricTemperature RegularTemp This trap alerts that one of the temperature sensors indicates regular temperature The temperature
309. is vpt vpi The path number for this vpt term Specifies that the vpt to be created is a terminating path orig Specifies that the vpt to be created is an originating path reserved The amount of bandwidth in Kbps that you want to reserve on this vpt If this option is not used an elastic path is created Elastic paths allocate and de allocate bandwidth for their channels from the link minvci The bottom number for the range of VCIs to be reserved for VCCs on this vpt The default is 1 maxvci The top number for the range of VCIs to be reserved for VCCs on this vpt The default is 511 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 1 21 Configuring PVCs Parameter Description shapeovpi The output path on a traffic shaping originating vpt Setting this value configures traffic shaping on the originating path Cells bound for the network leave the traffic shaping port with this VPI When the traffic shaping port is the WAN port this value equals the input VPI of the originating path If the traffic shaping port is not the WAN port this value equals the input VPI of the through path from the shaping port to the WAN port This parameter only applies to the Series C network modules See Section 1 5 2 1 loopvpi The originating vpi will be shaped by a through path going to a Series D network module You should enter the input vpi of the through path that goes from the looping port to the WAN port This option is
310. ister these NSAP addresses dynamically 2 2 1 NSAP Addresses For private ATM networks addresses uniquely identify ATM endpoints The UNI 3 0 address format is modeled after that of an OSI Network Service Access Point hence the name NSAP address Three address formats have been specified DCC ICD and E 164 FORE implements the ICD AIM format Per the UNI 3 0 specification all private networks should accept initial call set up messages containing ATM addresses with any of the approved formats and forward the calls as necessary An NSAP address consists of the following e a 13 byte network side prefix The prefix is the NSAP prefix of the switch to which the host is attached e aseven byte user side part This consists of the following a six byte End System Identifier ESI The ESI is the unique IEEE MAC address of the interface aone byte selector Although each Classical IP interface for a given physical interface uses the same prefix and ESI the selector field is the part that indi cates the number of the specific Classical IP interface On a switch the selec tor field is 00 for qaa0 01 for qaal 02 for qaa2 and 03 for qaa3 2 4 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring Classical IP 2 2 2 Operating with ILMI Support FORE Systems switches running ForeThought software provide support for ILMI If ILMI is supported on all of the switches and hosts in a given network when a switch boots up ILMI enables
311. istering and resolving MAC addresses to ATM addresses LAN Emulation LANE technology that allows an ATM network to function as a LAN back bone The ATM network must provide multicast and broadcast support address mapping MAC to ATM SVC management and a usable packet format LANE also defines Ethernet and Token Ring ELANs lane a program that provides control over the execution of the LAN Emulation Server LES Broadcast Unknown Server BUS and LAN Emulation Configuration Server LECS on the local host Latency The time interval between a network station seeking access to a transmission chan nel and that access being granted or received Layer Entity an active layer within an element Layer Function a part of the activity of the layer entities Layer Service a capability of a layer and the layers beneath it that is provided to the upper layer entities at the boundary between that layer and the next higher layer ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary 19 Glossary Layer User Data the information transferred between corresponding entities on behalf of the upper layer or layer management entities for which they are providing services le a FORE program that implements both the LAN Emulation Server LES and the Broad cast Unknown Server BUS Leaky Bucket informal cell policing term for the Generic Cell Rate Algorithm which in effect receives cells into a bucket and leaks them out at the specifi
312. ithm This bit pattern is specified with the MAC Address Base key LECS MAC Address Base 38fe 3 32 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 6 1 6 LECS MPOA Parameters MPOA requests use similar and in many cases the same database keys as LANE requests However there are some MPOA specific keys that can be specified LEC MPC parameters can be specified for shortcuts For example the following group of parameters indicates that shortcuts should be established for IP flows but only after a threshold of 10 frames per second is surpassed ShortCut Protocols IP ShortCut Threshold 10 1 LEC MPC parameters can also be specified for resolution requests When a LEC MPC sends an MPOA Resolution Request it sets a timer to a Resolution Initial Retry Time If an MPOA Resolution Reply is not received in that amount of time a retry may be sent Each time a retry is sent the timer is set to the Resolution Initial Retry Time value a retry multiplier If the value exceeds the Resolution Maximum Retry lime value the LEC MPC assumes the request has failed A new request may not be sent until the Resolution Hold Down Time has been surpassed For example the following parameters indicate that an initial MPOA Resolution Request should be retried after 5 seconds backing off to a maximum retry time of 40 seconds and then the MPOA Resolution Request process is re initialized after 160 seconds Resolution Initial R
313. its incoming signal or frame has been lost The loss of signal or frame is detected at the receiv ing end and the failed signal is replaced by all the ones condition which the receiver interprets as an AIS The normal response to this is AIS is for the receiving end to generate a yellow alarm signal as part of its transmission towards the faulty end The AIS itself is sometimes called a Blue Signal A Law The PCM coding and companding standard used in Europe Allowable Cell Rate ACR parameter defined by the ATM Forum for ATM traffic manage ment ACR varies between the MCR and the PCR and is dynamically controlled using con gestion control mechanisms Alternate Mark Inversion AMI A line coding format used on T1 facilities that transmits ones by alternate positive and negative pulses Alternate Routing A mechanism that supports the use of a new path after an attempt to set up a connection along a previously selected path fails American National Standards Institute ANSI a private organization that coordinates the set ting and approval of some U S standards It also represents the United States to the Interna tional Standards Organization American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII a standard character set that typically assigns a 7 bit sequence to each letter number and selected control characters AppleTalk a networking protocol developed by Apple Computer for communication between Apple s pr
314. k Configuration Manual C 25 Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI PNNI peer group boundary PNNI node PNNI link FFPNNI peer group boundary O FT PNNI node Pac FFPNNI link xs A l L4 X Figure C 18 A Migrated Backbone C 3 1 2 1 5 Convert Peer Group B Migrate all of the nodes in peer group B using the same method that was used to migrate peer group C in Section C 3 1 2 1 2 Once peer group B has been converted the migration to PNNI is complete C 26 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI C 3 2 Migration of a Hierarchical FT PNNI Network with a Non Contiguous Backbone This section gives a detailed example of how to migrate a hierarchical FI PNNI network with a non contiguous backbone as shown in Figure C 19 to a PNNI network In this figure only the border nodes are shown The individual nodes within each peer group are not shown FT PNNI peer group boundary O FT PNNI node FT PNNI link X n v z o U z zZ wo DurjjaAuo2 Figure C 19 Hierarchical FI PNNI Network with 3 Peer Groups and a Non contiguous Backbone Upon the complete migration of this network to PNNI the network is modified as follows e Make peer group A the backbone area in a split switch based hierarchical net work e Peer group A would become a PNNI are
315. l of the default domain in C 1 to gateway using the fol lowing AMI command conf atmroute domain modify lt domain ID gt gateway Now reboot switch C 1 Two more PNNI links between C 1 and C 3 and between C 1 and C 4 are created 9 Since C 3 no longer needs to be a gateway switch modify the default protocol of the default domain in C 3 to pnni using the following AMI command conf atmroute domain modify lt domain ID gt pnni Reboot switch C 3 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual C 21 Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI 10 C 2 is the last switch in the peer group to become a gateway Modify the default protocol of the default domain in C 2 to gateway using the following AMI command conf atmroute domain modify lt domain ID gt gateway Upon the reboot of C 2 the last FI PNNI link between C 2 and C 4 in the peer group becomes a PNNI link 11 Modify the default protocol of the default domain in C 4 to pnni using the follow ing AMI command conf atmroute domain modify lt domain ID gt pnni Reboot switch C 4 This completes the migration of peer group C to PNNI The current state of the network is shown in Figure C 16 PNNI peer group boundary PNNI node PNNI link FFPNNI peer group boundary FTFPNNI node PG FT PNNI link A4 L4 PGB l Bal Ss Figure C 16 Peer Group C Fully Migr
316. le A 2 Table A 3 Table A 4 Table A 5 Table A 6 Table A 7 Table A 8 Table A 9 Table A 10 Table A 11 Table A 12 Configuring PVCs Summary of Traffic Contract Variables and Policing ACTIONS es Fx aes ce get age age dp eons eae a ER EET qb be Configuring an Emulated LAN LECS Configuration File Parameters 20005 Signalling Action Taken Based on Both Switches Signalling Channel Configurations 0 0 00 cece eee eee Action Taken Based on the Peer s Supported MIB Variable Valid Type and Version Combinations 4 Invalid Type and Version Combinations Valid Scope and Mode Combinations Invalid Scope and Mode Combinations UNI 3 1 Allowable Combination of Traffic Parameters in ForeThought5 3 X csse Security Possible Login ScenarioS 00 cece eee eee Configuring SNMP ASX 200WG ASX 200BX TNX 210 Port Numbering ASX 1000 TNX 1100 Board 1 Port Numbering ASX 1000 TNX 1100 Board 2 Port Numbering ASX 1000 TNX 1100 Board 3 Port Numbering ASX 1000 TNX 1100 Board 4 Port Numbering ASX 4000 Port Card 1 Port Numbering ASX 4000 Port Card 2 Port Numbering ASX 4000 Port Card 3 Port Numbering ASX 4000 Port Card 4 Port Numbering ASX 4000 Port Card 5 Port Numbering A
317. letely E characterize the traffic characteristics of a given service category are incomplete and not supported For example a VBR contract that is received with an ATM traffic descriptor information element that does not specify SCR and MBS cell rates does not fully characterize a VBR contract Such a contract is therefore rejected by the switch fabric ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 7 19 Signalling Table 7 7 shows the subset of the UNI 3 1 allowable combination of traffic parameters sup ported by ForeThought 5 3 x Table 7 7 UNI3 1 Allowable Combination of Traffic Parameters in ForeThought 5 3 x Broadband Bearer Class A X C X C X A X C X Traffic Type CBR amp amp CBR amp Timing Required Y amp amp amp amp Y amp amp PCR CLP 0 S S PCR CLP 0 1 S S S S S S S S S S SCR and MBS CLP 0 S S SCR and MBS CLP 0 1 S S Best Effort S S Tagging Y N Y N Y N Y N N N N N N N QoS Class io i id is 0 0 The following are used in the table above Y Ys N No S Specified Y N Either Yes or No is allowed All QoS classes are supported amp The parameter is coded to either no indication or VBR or for UNI 3 1 Octet 5a Traffic Type Timing Required is absent these 3 codings are treated as equivalent amp amp The parameter is coded to either no indication or No or for UNI 3 1 Octet 5a
318. ll an association between two or more users or between a user and a network entity that is established by the use of network capabilities This association may have zero or more connec tions Carrier a company such as any of the baby Bell companies that provide network commu nications services either within a local area or between local areas Carrier Group Alarm CGA A service alarm generated by a channel bank when an out of frame OOF condition exists for some predetermined length of time generally 300 millisec onds to 2 5 seconds The alarm causes the calls using a trunk to be dropped and trunk condi tioning to be applied Carrier Identification Parameter CIP A 3 or 4 digit code in the initial address message identi fying the carrier to be used for the connection cchan a FORE program that manages virtual channels on a ForeRunner switch running asxd Glossary 6 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary Cell an ATM Layer protocol data unit PDU The basic unit of information transported in ATM technology each 53 byte cell contains a 5 byte header and a 48 byte payload Cell Delay Variation CDV a quantification of cell clumping for a connection The cell clump ing CDV yk is defined as the difference between a cell s expected reference arrival time ck and its actual arrival time ak The expected reference arrival time ck of cell k of a specific connection is max T is the reciprocal of the
319. lows Field Description Input Port The incoming port number of the through path Input VPI The incoming virtual path number Output Port The outgoing port number of the through path Output VPI The outgoing virtual path number Shape Indicates whether or not traffic shaping has been enabled for this path This field only applies to the Series C network modules ConType The connection type for the endpoints of this path with respect to a particular network Orig originating means that the ingress egress endpoint of the path is connected to the source node which is outside the network tran transit means that the ingress egress endpoint of the path is connected to a node within the network and term terminating means that the ingress egress endpoint of the path is connected to the destination node which is outside the network pp means this is labelled as a point to point path pmp means this is labelled as a point to multipoint path mpp means this is labelled as a multi point to point path mpmp means this is labelled as a multipoint to multipoint path 1 8 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring PVCs 1 3 2 Listing Originating and Terminating Paths By logging in to AMI it is possible to display either all of the existing originating and termi nating paths on an individual switch fabric or on a specified port To list all of the originating and terminating paths on an individual switch fa
320. lt domain in S4 to gateway using the following AMI command conf atmroute domain modify domain ID gateway Reboot switch S4 Upon the reboot S4 will come up with a FI PNNI node in area 4 and a PNNI node in area 5 The link between S4 and S5 will come up as a PNNI link and the link between S3 and S4 will come up as a PNNI link since they are both gateway switches 5 At this point S5 no longer has any links attached to its FI PNNI node so it does not need to be a gateway switch anymore Modify the default protocol of S5 to pnni using the following AMI command conf atmroute domain modify domain ID pnni Reboot switch S5 The state of the network at this point is shown in Figure C 7 PNNI peer group boundary 4 PNNI node E y 4 PNNI link N Fore Area A4 ca FT PNNI peer group boundary FOIS LVSLEn S3 O FFPNNI node N M FT PNNI link L5 b l S5 N d aS Es a uL L Figure C 7 54 Changed to a Gateway Switch and S5 to PNNI 6 Convert 2 to a gateway switch by modifying the default protocol of the default domain in S2 to gateway using the following AMI command conf atmroute domain modify domain ID gateway Reboot switch 52 Upon the reboot S2 will come up with a FI PNNI node in area 4 and a PNNI node in area 5 The only FI PNNI links left in the network are between S1 and S2 and between S1 and S4 C 8 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual
321. lution Protocol NHRP path must exist between MPSs The following example illustrates a typical ATM network that allows MPOA shortcuts to be employed E o E Each of Lal PC 0 these runs PC PC aLEC MPC ELAN cd z engineering Runs a LECS ASX 200BX LES and BUS Runs an MPS anda PowerHub 7000 oe LEC MPC l Runs an MPS and PowerHub 7000 aLEC MPC E Runs a LECS ASX 200BX LES and BUS am _ z z Each of Ld a id these runs PC PC PC aLEC MPC Figure 4 4 MPOA Example Network ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 4 11 MPOA 4 3 4 4 MPS Configuration The network administrator must configure each MPS with the site specific IP address match ing the gateway address being used by LEC MPCs in its ELAN The MPS on each PowerHub 7000 is configured as follows 1 For each LANE MPOA virtual port specify an ELAN name The LECS configura tion must also be updated to allow the MPS to join these ELANs For each LANE MPOA virtual port specify an IP address Enable LANE MPOA support Enable routing Qu TESS coger NS Save the configuration and reboot the MPS if necessary to make the changes effective Router table information need not be configured The MPS will instead g
322. me PNNI but will not become operational At this point the peer group is temporarily separated from the backbone and other peer groups in the network as shown in Figure C 13 It will be restored to full connectivity when C 1 and C 2 have their second PNNI nodes created PNNI node PNNI peer group boundary PNNI link Inoperational PNNI link Figure C 13 C 1 and C 2 Not Part of Peer Group C 6 Since C 5 and C 4 do not need to be gateway switches anymore change the default protocol of the default domain in C 5 and in C4 to pnni using the following AMI command conf atmroute domain modify domain ID pnni Reboot switch C 5 and switch CA C 16 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI 7 Change the default protocol of the default domain in C 1 to pnni using the follow ing AMI command conf atmroute domain modify lt domain ID gt pnni Reboot switch C 1 8 Create a second PNNI node in C 1 with a node index of 2 the peer group ID set to C area 6 and level 6 using the following AMI commands conf atmroute pnni node modify 2 pgid c forelevel 6 forearea 6 conf atmroute domain modify domain ID gt pnni Reboot switch C 1 Then modify the interfaces on C 1 corresponding to the links to C 4 and C 3 and attach them to node 2 on C 1 Use the following AMI command for each link conf atmroute pnni interface modify p
323. me configu ration parameters for a client whose MAC address is 002048080011 on the engineering ELAN 002048080011 LAN Name engineering 002048080011 VCC_TimeOut_Period 1200 002048080011 Aging_Time 30 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 3 31 Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 6 1 5 LECS Control Parameters Specifying values for keys in the LECS group provides control over the operation of the LECS process If you change the values of the LECS control E parameters while the LECS process is running the new values do not take effect until the LECS process is stopped and then restarted When a client contacts the LECS the connections established are known as Configuration Direct VCCs To override the default value of the VCC TimeOut Period key the number of seconds before an idle Configuration Direct VCC is automatically closed by the LECS enter a statement similar to the following LECS VCC TimeOut Period 1200 The LECS periodically checks whether its configuration file has been modified and if it has the file is reread The length of this period in seconds is given by the Reload Period key LECS Reload Period 600 The Permanent Circuits key holds a comma separated list of VPI VCI pairs denoting the local ends of 0 17 PVCs on which the LECS should listen For example LECS Permanent Circuits 0 42 0 112 The LECS can provide the client with a fourteen bit pattern to permute the MAC address gen eration algor
324. mples of Invalid Configurations 7 16 7 4 Allowable Combination of Traffic Parameters 0 0000 cece eee 7 18 7 4 1 PNNI 1 0 UNI 4 0 0 0000 cece eee 7 18 7 4 1 1 Service Categories 0 0 00 ee 7 18 7 4 1 2 Allowable Combination of Traffic Parameters 7 18 7 4 2 UNIS Xe Sec iz ces me Rb etes dae Bi el e RO Pacing X RO QA 7 19 CHAPTERS8 Security 8 1 Configuring Userids lille e 8 1 8 1 1 Login Authentication Method lille esses 8 3 8 1 1 1 Local Authentication 0 0 00 eee ee 8 3 8 1 1 2 SecurlD Authentication 0000 eee eee 8 3 8 1 1 2 1 SecurlD Protection on Switches 8 3 8 1 1 22 SecurlD Passcode 000 eee 8 4 8 1 1 2 2 1 PIN Number 5 8 4 8 1 1 2 2 2 SecurlD Tokens 0000505 8 4 8 4 1 23 SecurlD Server 0 00 cee suus 8 4 8 1 1 2 3 1 Slave Server 0 2 0 00 eee eae 8 4 8 1 1 2 3 2 Server Database 8 4 8 1 1 2 3 3 Data Encryption between the Server and Switches 0 8 5 8 1 1 2 4 SecurlD AMI Commands 8 5 8 1 1 2 5 Installing SecurID on a Switch 8 5 8 1 1 2 5 1 Installing the Server Software 8 5 8 1 1 2 5 2 Transferring the Configuration File 8 5 8 1 1 2 5 3 Editing the Server Configuration File 8 6 8 1 1 2 5 4 An Example Login Using SecurlD 8 8 TOC 6 ATM Switch Network Configuratio
325. n 5 1 2 Topology Database Exchange Each switch sends to each of its neighbors a group of loglinks from its topology database at regular intervals called the NSAP map indication interval This exchange of information between neighboring switches ensures that the topology databases of the switches stays syn chronized 5 1 3 Flooding Flooding is a reliable hop by hop propagation of loglinks throughout a peer group Whenever a new loglink is discovered by a switch the switch immediately broadcasts the existence of this link to all of its neighbors The neighboring switches then broadcast the existence of the same link to all of their neighbors Very quickly the existence of the new loglink is flooded throughout all of the switches in the network Similarly when a link goes down or when a significant change is seen in the metrics of a loglink the latest state of the loglink is propagated immediately throughout the network 5 2 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual ForeThought PNNI 5 1 4 Hierarchical Routing FI PNNI operates in a hierarchical topology The structure of the hierarchy is defined by the peer group ID in a routing domain Address assignment in FI PNNI therefore corresponds to this hierarchical topology providing increased scalability mn oc gt E vo gt U zZ 104 bits Peer Group ID o Switch Summary Prefix Switch Prefix Figure 5 1 Example
326. n As far as Designated Transit List DTL processing is concerned a gateway switch or a split switch appears as either a DTL terminating or DTL originating node For example Figure 6 1 shows that S3 is a DTL terminating node for the FI PNNI DTL and a DTL originating node for the PNNI DTL for a connection going from switch S1 to switch 5S4 NK area S3 gateway switch PNNI node O _ S1 0 S3 6 O FTPNNI node A S2 S4 Figure 6 1 Internetworking of FI PNNI and PNNI ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 6 5 ATM Forum PNNI 6 3 2 Dynamic Leaking of Reachability Information This feature allows dynamic leaking of reachability information between the single FI PNNI node and the single PNNI node within a gateway switch It may also be used to control the leaking of reachability information between two PNNI peer groups Using split switches it possible to connect and exchange reachability information between any number of PNNI peer groups This dynamic leaking is controlled using the following user configurable settings grouping of nodes within a switch into areas and domains and configuring policies that allow you to summarize suppress or advertise reachability addresses between peer groups See Section 6 3 2 3 1 for more information about policies 6 3 2 1 Areas An area is a subset of nodes within a domain that are contiguous and that together execute a link state routing
327. n Manual Table of Contents 8 1 2 AMI Command Privileges 000 0c eee eee 8 9 8 1 21 Admin Privileges lille 8 9 8 1 2 2 User Privileges 0 0 2 eee ees 8 9 8 1 3 AMI Access Levels osoen ee aE ing ER et Rc RR RD 8 9 B31 Serial Access yaad x Eire E REECIX Ree otras 8 9 8 1 3 2 Network Access eee 8 9 8 1 3 3 AILAGGOSS 2 085 ean PaaS ine Sank EE EX do eid ee RUE 8 9 8 L3 4 NO ACCESS es uem Biche Ree x S CR UC Pade ek ae 8 9 8 1 4 Userid PasswOoId au deeteelee danetad beau uER fee Wade bed 8 10 8 1 5 Privilege Level for Unlisted Users liess 8 10 8 2 IP Filteririgt ea a a a une eye peg te ene cb e te ep e ede 8 11 8 2 1 Authorized IP Address Table 0 0 00 cece ee 8 11 8 2 2 IP Filtering Flags 0 0 eee cee ee 8 11 8 2 2 1 Strict Source Routing Flag 0002 cee ae eee 8 12 8 2 2 2 Loose Source Routing Flag 00 0 cee eeeee 8 12 9 2 2 9 A Fla 2 mecca sek Oe wna teer Rer een ees eee EAE 8 12 8 2 3 IP Access Statistics 2 0 0 cece eee 8 12 8 3 NSAP Filtering a nos rr eme a ceeds Y PIRE ba Go GW aed QR 8 13 8 3 1 Filters and Templates 0 0 00 eee ee eee 8 13 8 3 2 NSAP Filtering Lookup lle BIB 8 14 8 3 3 NSAP Filtering Statistics 0 0 00 8 14 CHAPTER9 Configuring Timing 9 1 OVERVIOW CC iis ant aa De pla a a a aa a a ieai aa a aia aa 9 1 9 2 Timirig Modes iiie Wake Gre Pp ey Re Paes SE Ge
328. n atmarp getnsap qaa0 qaa0 NSAP address 47000580f fe1000000f 12400de0020481900de00 2 Setthe NSAP address of the ARP server to be the ATM address of the interface that you displayed in step 1 using the following AMI command conf atmarp arpserver set lt NSAPaddress gt lt interface gt For example conf atmarp arpserver set 0x47000580ffe1000000f 12400de0020481900de00 qaa0 e o 5 ES amp c 3 5 amp o 5 7 o o D 3 Setthe ATM address of the ARP server on each of the other switches that will use that switch as the ARP server using the same command found in step 2 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 2 7 Configuring Classical IP 2 3 3 Classical IP Operation Once a host knows its own ATM address and the ATM address of its ARP server it attempts to establish a connection to the ARP server which is used to send ARP requests and receive ARP replies When the connection to the ARP server has been established the ARP server sends an inverse ARP InARP request on the new VC to learn the host s IP address When an InARP reply is received the ARP server places that host s IP address to ATM address mapping in its ARP cache Therefore over time the ARP server dynamically learns the IP to ATM address mappings of all the hosts in its LIS It can then respond to ARP requests directed toward it for hosts in its LIS In order for a host to communicate with an ARP E server it must have learned its own ATM
329. n on the switch 1073 asxSwitchLoginFailed An asxSwitchLoginFailed trap signifies that a user s attempt to log in on the switch failed 1074 pnniTdbGuardbandResrv Fail This trap is generated when the guardband memory reserve for any of the PNNI TDB Topology Database related functionality like creation modification and deletion on objects like node PTSE flags internal pre fixes external prefixes etc fails The switch is low on memory ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring SNMP Table A 14 SNMP Traps Supported on the FORE Switches Continued Trap NODE Trap Name Description 1075 pnniTdbInconsistentState This trap is generated when the PNNI TDB Topology Database is in an unrecoverable error condition due to MALLOC and other TDB related failures When this happens the associated logical node is shut down and this trap is sent The switch has to be rebooted to bring this PNNI logical node up again QO fe E a a E 3 Co o z v 1077 asxShmem2OutputQueue This trap indicates that the output queue for the Congested given priority has exceeded its dedicated length and has begun overflowing into the shared buffer space on the network module 1078 asxShmem2OutputQueue This trap indicates that the output queue for the CellLoss given priority has overflowed and cells have been dropped 1080 fabricLvl3Lookup This trap is generated when a fab
330. n the switch summary prefix The pgmask gives the number of most significant bits of the switch summary prefix that constitute the peer group ID Each peer group has a peer group ID that uniquely identifies it from every other peer group Every node switch or end system in a particular peer group shares that same unique peer group ID thereby indicating membership to that peer group A simple example of summarizing by peer group ID can be seen in Figure 5 3 where every switch and end system although not shown in peer group A is identified starting with A 5 1 4 2 Path Computation Path computation is performed on demand whenever FI PNNI signalling requests a path to a given destination The Bellman Ford Shortest Path algorithm is used to compute the shortest path tree of all nodes in the topology with the local node as the source The administrative weight metric in the loglinks is used as the minimizing criterion in computing the shortest path route In the case of finding multiple equal cost paths to a given destination available cell rate is used to break ties 5 4 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual ForeThought PNNI 5 2 The Physical Network In an AIM network data is sent and received over virtual circuits or circuits that only exist when needed This communication over these virtual circuits is made possible by signalling that occurs between the switches in the network In a network of FORE switches any new addition
331. n the third switch that will run a DLE peer server and enter something similar to the following conf lane les new 44 engineering anycast c5 0005 80 e100 0000 21a 3596 0020481a3596 0 peers 47 0005 80 e100 0000 21a 3218 0020481a3218 44 47 0005 80 e100 0000 21a 10bb 0020481al0bb 90 47 0005 80 e100 0000 21a 3552 0020481a3552 10 Once all of the peers have been created use the conf 1ane les show advanced command to verify that the peers have established point to point and point to multipoint connections to each other 3 42 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 6 4 Starting the LEC s and Joining an ELAN Now that the ELAN services have been started you can have LECs join the ELAN that you have created The switch software only allows you to create an E instance of a LEC on a switch To create an instance of a LEC on a host you must use the ForeRunner VLAN Manager or use a ForeRunner host adapter Please refer to the respective User s Manual for instructions A LEC created on the switch cannot join a Token E Ring ELAN It can only join an Ethernet ELAN 1 Tostarta LEC that will attempt to join the ELAN use the following AMI command on the switch that is going to be a LEC conf lane lec new LEC Selector byte HEX ELAN name Tip IP Address mask IP netmask gt wellknown manual manual mode options lecs lt LECS address gt or les LES a
332. ncoming IP packets are accepted provided that they match an IP address in the table of authorized addresses Allowing all is the default setting If the all flag is set to disallow all incoming IP packets are rejected even if they match an IP address in the table of authorized addresses 8 2 3 IP Access Statistics The network administrator can display the total number of IP packets that have been filtered since the switch was rebooted using the stat ipaccess command This command also dis plays information about the last IP packet that was dropped This information includes the following e the reason that the last IP packet was dropped e the system time at which the last IP packet was dropped e the name of the interface on which the last dropped IP packet was received e the IP address contained in the source field of the header of the last IP packet that was dropped 8 12 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Security 8 3 NSAP Filtering This feature provides a mechanism for filtering calls based on a combination of the calling source and called destination addresses as well as the incoming and outgoing UNIs Each UNI may have one address filter for incoming call setups and one for outgoing call set ups If a call setup is routed from incoming UNI A to outgoing UNI B A s incoming call filter and B s outgoing call filter are applied A call setup message must be accepted by both filters if both are present SPVCs SPVPs
333. nd a service or system requiring transmission channels capable of supporting rates greater than the Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN primary rate Broadband Access an ISDN access capable of supporting one or more broadband services Broadband Connection Oriented Bearer BCOB Information in the SETUP message that indi cates the type of service requested by the calling user BCOB A Bearer Class A Indicated by ATM end user in SETUP message for connection ori ented constant bit rate service The network may perform internetworking based on AAL information element IE BCOB C Bearer Class C Indicated by ATM end user in SETUP message for connection ori ented variable bit rate service The network may perform internetworking based on AAL information element IE BCOB X Bearer Class X Indicated by ATM end user in SETUP message for ATM transport service where AAL traffic type and timing requirements are transparent to the network ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary 5 Glossary Broadband Integrated Services Digital Network B ISDN common digital network suitable for voice video and high speed data services running at rates beginning at 155 Mbps Broadband ISDN User s Part B ISUP A protocol used to establish maintain and release broadband switched network connections across an SS7 ATM network Broadband Terminal Equipment B TE An equipment category for B ISDN which includes terminal
334. nd 2 use the following AMI commands to set your primary and sec ondary clocks conf timing switchclock primary lcl conf timing switchclock secondary 1dl 2 On fabrics 3 and 4 use the following AMI commands to set your primary and sec ondary clocks conf timing switchclock primary 3al conf timing switchclock secondary 3b1 9 5 4 Configuring Timing on a ForeRunnerLE 155 or LE 25 The ports in interface groups A B C and the Port Expansion Module PEM interface D use the crystal on the fabric as their timing source by default Only the PEM can recover a clock from any of its ports and export it to the other interfaces If the PEM is installed the primary and secondary clocks be recovered from one of the PEM ports This example assumes that you are going to use 1D1 as your primary clock and 1D2 as your secondary clock Use the following AMI commands to set your primary and secondary clocks conf timing switchclock primary 1dl conf timing switchclock secondary 1d2 O o 3 amp lt 5 amp zi 5 amp ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 9 5 Configuring Timing 9 5 5 Configuring Timing on an ASX 4000 This example assumes that you are going to use 1A1 as your primary clock and 1B1 as your secondary clock Use the following AMI commands to set your primary and secondary switchclocks conf timing switchclock primary lal conf timing switchclock secondary 1bl 9 6 ATM Switch Network Configuration M
335. nder conf funi new This profile is important when using multiple timeslots on a port because you must ensure that the access rate of the referenced service profile index is large enough to support them For example the default access rate is 64 Kbps If you leave the rate at 64 you must only use a sin gle timeslot If you set the rate to 128 Kbps you must use two timeslots If you set the rate 1536 Kbps you must use 24 timeslots etc This profile also lets you define the maximum frame size the maximum number of DLCIs PVCs supported and input and output bandwidth overbooking for a given service D 3 6 FUNI Profile The FUNI profile lets you determine the VPI VCI range to use for FUNI connections The pro file then can be applied on a per service basis to a FUNI service using the funi index option under conf funi new T o Ele Qo U5 3 5o zS 9 amp 8 c O D 4 Services A service is a grouping of timeslots on a port In this respect a service is similar to an ATM PVP Multiple DLCIS connections can exist within each service ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual D 11 Configuring FramePlus Modules D 5 Configuring Frame Relay To configure Frame Relay on a FramePlus network module these steps must be performed in the following order 1 Choose or create any profiles that you wish to use 2 Create each service that you need and associate the profile s with it 3 Create each PVC and
336. ndividual switch fabric or all of the existing through paths on a specified port To list all of the existing through paths on an individual switch fabric enter the following configuration vpc show 9 E Input Output S Port VPI Port VPI UPC Prot Name a 3B1 40 3B4 40 0 pvc customer a UU 3B1 75 3B5 75 0 pvc customer b s 3B2 95 3B3 95 0 pvc customer e 3B6 62 3B2 62 0 pvc customer c 3B6 68 3B3 68 0 pvc customer d The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Input Port The incoming port number of the through path Input VPI The incoming virtual path number Output Port The outgoing port number of the through path Output VPI The outgoing virtual path number UPC The integer index that refers to a specific UPC traffic contract assigned to this through path UPC contracts can be displayed using conf upc show Prot The type of protocol running on this channel Name The user assigned name which helps to identify this through path uniquely ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 1 7 Configuring PVCs To list advanced options about all of the existing virtual through paths enter the following parameters Input Port 3B1 3B1 3B2 3B6 3B6 VPI 40 75 95 62 68 configuration vpc show advanced Output Port VPI Shape ConType 3B4 40 N A 3B5 75 N A 3B3 95 tran tran pmp 3B2 62 tran tran pp 3B3 68 N A The fields in the advanced display are defined as fol
337. ne level of access is not allowed to log in to the switch at all ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 8 9 Security 8 1 4 Userid Password The network administrator may also assign a password to a userid using the conf security login password command This command replaces the old oper password command When a user logged in with user privileges wants to modify the password he or she must correctly enter the old password first before typing the new password However a user logged in with admin privileges can change any userid password without first entering the old local password except their own The maximum size is for a password is 512 characters Any characters are allowed except the colon character 8 1 5 Privilege Level for Unlisted Users One of the login scenarios in Table 8 1 allows users who are not listed in the switch to login provided that the SecurID server is accessible and provided that the SecurID server accepts the userid The network administrator may assign a privilege level of user access to only a certain subset of the AMI commands or a privilege level of admin access to all AMI com mands for these users via the conf security login upriv command 8 10 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Security 8 2 IP Filtering The IP filtering feature lets the network administrator limit access to the control port of the switch to prevent unauthorized access to the switch The switch performs filtering on in
338. neering marketing The names of all ELANs that have Accept keys must be included in Match Ordering The LE CONFIGURE REQUEST frame contains an ATM address and an optional MAC address or route descriptor which is always present for ELAN access control requests The Accept Reject checking proceeds in two distinct phases first for the MAC address or route descriptor if present and second for the ATM address So even though a client might be rejected by its MAC address it can be accepted by its ATM address Therefore when configur ing the Accept and Reject rules ensure that you write them either as explicit lists of only MAC addresses or route descriptors or only as ATM address matches 3 6 1 4 Defining a Client Clients need not be defined in the LECS configuration file Typically you would define a client for the purpose of overriding one or more of the default configuration parameters for that par ticular client A client is defined by using its ATM address MAC address or route descriptor in the group field and perhaps giving the name of its ELAN as the value of the LAN Name key For example 47 0005 80 FFE100 0000 0000 0000 002048222222 22 LAN Name engineering 002048ABCDEF LAN Name marketing 012F LAN Name publications moO 3S cz gt De os reo Bo z5 Configuration parameter overrides can also be given on a per client basis For example the following statements override the default VCC_TimeOut_Period and Aging_Ti
339. nel without requiring retransmission of any information by the transmitter typically involves a convolution of the transmitted bits and the appending of extra bits by both the receiver and transmitter using a common algorithm Forward Explicit Congestion Notification FECN Bit set by a Frame Relay network to inform data terminal equipment DTE receiving the frame that congestion was experienced in the path from source to destination DTE receiving frames with the FECN bit set can request that higher level protocols take flow control action as appropriate Fractional T1 the use of bandwidth in 64Kbps increments up to 1 544Mbps from a T1 facility Glossary 14 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary Frame a variable length group of data bits with a specific format containing flags at the beginning and end to provide demarcation Frame Check Sequence FCS In bit oriented protocols a 16 bit field that contains transmis sion error checking information usually appended to the end of the frame Frame Relay a fast packet switching protocol based on the LAPD protocol of ISDN that per forms routing and transfer with less overhead processing than X 25 11 110 3 Frame Synchronization Error an error in which one or more time slot framing bits are in error Frame Based UNI FUNI An ATM switch based interface which accepts frame based ATM traffic and converts it into cells Frame Relay Service FRS A connect
340. network placing a host on a specific subnet is a logical choice rather than a physical one In this type of environment communication between hosts in different LISs is only permitted by communicating through an IP router which is a member of both LISs as per RFC 1577 The number of LISs and the division of hosts into each LIS is purely an administrative issue Limitations of IP addressing IP packet filtering and administrative boundaries may guide a manager into establishing several LISs onto a single ATM network Keep in mind though that communication between LISs must occur through IP routers 2 1 2 Classical IP Interfaces In order to support routing between multiple LISs the switch software allows a switch to be configured as a member of and a router between up to four distinct LISs The host adapter software allows a host to be configured as a member of and a router between up to 16 dis tinct LISs Each LIS membership is through a separate Classical IP network interface Existing system level IP routing configuration tools are used to control routing through each of the Classical IP interfaces in the same manner as routing among several physical interfaces Even though each Classical IP interface associated with a given physical interface uses the same physical hardware they are each configured separately with their own MTU IP address and ATM address By default the name of each of the Classical IP interfaces on a switch be
341. nfiguring SNMP Table A 11 shows the numbering conventions that are referred to in the MIBs for ports on port card 6 on an ASX 4000 In the interest of space ports 3c16 through 3c63 and 3d16 through 3d63 are not shown here Table A 11 ASX 4000 Port Card 6 Port Numbering Port Name Software Port PortName Software Port Number Number Port Card 6 Switch Control Port 5CTL 1024 3cl 640 3d1 704 3c2 641 3d2 705 3c3 642 3d3 706 3c4 643 3d4 707 3c5 644 3d5 708 3c6 645 3d6 709 3c7 646 3d7 710 3c8 647 3d8 711 3c9 648 3d9 712 3c10 649 3d10 713 3c11 650 3d11 714 3c12 651 3d12 715 3c13 652 3d13 716 3c14 653 3d14 717 3c15 654 3d15 718 3c64 703 3d64 767 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring SNMP Table A 12 shows the numbering conventions that are referred to in the MIBs for ports on port card 7 on an ASX 4000 In the interest of space ports 4a16 through 4a63 and 4b16 through 4b63 Oo are not shown here S E Table A 12 ASX 4000 Port Card 7 Port Numbering Port Name boh p Port Name Erde ae E Port Card 7 Switch Control Port 5CTL 1024 4a1 768 4b1 832 4a2 769 4b2 833 4a3 770 4b3 834 4a4 771 4b4 835 4a5 772 4b5 836 4a6 773 4b6 837 4a7 774 4b7 838 4a8 775 4b8 839 4a9 776 4b9 840 4a10 777 4b10 841 4a11 778 4b11 842 4a12 779 4b12 843 4a13 780 4b13 844 4a14 781 4b14 845 4a15 782 4b15
342. ng PLCP Yellow Alarm 97 asxE1PLCPYellowCleared This trap indicates that the specified E1 port has detected clearance of incoming PLCP Yellow Alarm 98 asxE1PLCPLOFDetected This trap indicates that the specified E1 port has detected incoming PLCP LOF Alarm 99 asxE1PLCPLOFCleared This trap indicates that incoming PLCP LOF alarm has been cleared on the specified E1 port 100 asxE1LOSDetected This trap indicates that the specified E1 port has detected incoming LOS Alarm 101 asxE1LOSCleared This trap indicates that incoming LOS alarm has been cleared on the specified E1 port 102 asxE1 AISDetected This trap indicates that the specified E1 port has detected incoming AIS Alarm 103 asxE1AISCleared This trap indicates that incoming AIS alarm has been cleared on the specified E1 port A 20 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring SNMP Table A 14 SNMP Traps Supported on the FORE Switches Continued Trap eee Ra Trap Name Description 104 asxE3AISDetected This trap indicates that the specified E3 port has detected incoming AIS Alarm 105 asxE3AISCleared This trap indicates that incoming AIS alarm has been cleared on the specified E3 port 106 asxE3LOSDetected This trap indicates that the specified E3 port has detected incoming LOS Alarm 107 asxE3LOSCleared This trap indicates that incoming LOS alarm has been cleared on the specified E3 port 108 asxE3PLCPLOFDetected This trap
343. ng the Buffer Space liliis lees D 2 2 Setting the Thresholds liliis D 2 2 1 Noting the CLPOPPD Threshold lilius D 2 2 2 Configuring the CLP1EPD Threshold D 2 2 8 Configuring the CLPOEPD Threshold D 2 2 4 Configuring the CLP1PPD Threshold D 3 POMES cob eere Rea peau bb e eio ae ade e data wads D 3 1 ERD PRPD Profile rc ttes E torte utes och DS EA D 3 2 ERES Profile x coss ted wage ne dats cal Re RM hades Tdgus D 3 3 Frame Relay Rate Profile llle D 3 4 EMEProfile 5 err Remb aE E A UR REDE arate ecw KO d D 3 5 Service Profilet eite ERE ae ate wae CR CH EE D 3 6 FUNI Profile ieu mic EIE IE RR RLCVEIEOA El Re D 4 SOrviCeS coh xoti M esr ROM ee RE IDA acd pde Somes Soa tars ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual TOC 9 Table of Contents D 5 Configuring Frame Relay 0 0 00 cece eens D 12 D 5 1 Choosing Frame Relay Profiles llli lees D 12 D 5 2 Creating the Services for Frame Relay unanunua nauau naana D 13 D 5 3 Creating Frame Relay PVCs 0000 c cece eee D 14 D 5 4 Configuring Frame Relay SPVCs 0000 cece eens D 15 D 5 4 1 Creating a Frame Relay SPANS SPVC D 15 D 5 4 2 Creating a Frame Relay PNNISPVC D 16 D 6 Configuring FUNI llle RR rn D 17 D 6 1 Changing the Application Key liliis lessen D 17 D 6 2 Creating the Profil
344. nging the level of its PNNI node to 6 changing the area ID of C 4 to 6 and modifying the default protocol of the default domain in C 4 to gateway using the following AMI commands T v z o U z z woj DurioAuo2 conf atmroute pnni node modify index forelevel 6 forearea 6 conf atmroute domain modify domain ID gateway Reboot switch C 4 Upon the reboot the link between C 4 and C 6 comes up as PNNI in area 6 The links between C 4 and C 2 and between C 4 and C 1 will attempt to come up as PNNI because these links are between two gateway switches but they will not become operational because the PNNI links will not reach the two way inside hello state 4 Since C 6 does not need to be a gateway switch anymore change the default pro tocol of the default domain in C 6 to pnni using the following AMI command conf atmroute domain modify domain ID pnni Reboot switch C 6 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual C 15 Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI 5 Since C 3 is the last FI PNNI switch convert it directly to a PNNI switch by chang ing the level of its PNNI node to 6 changing the area ID of C 3 to 6 and modifying the default protocol of the default domain in C 3 to pnni using the following AMI commands conf atmroute pnni node modify index forelevel 6 forearea 6 conf atmroute domain modify domain ID pnni Reboot switch C 3 Upon the reboot the link between C 3 and C 1 will attempt to beco
345. ngress LEC MPC monitors traffic flow that is being forwarded over an ELAN to a router that contains an MPS When the ingress LEC MPC recognizes a flow rate configurable that could benefit from a shortcut and thus bypass the routed path it requests a shortcut to the destination If a shortcut is available the ingress LEC MPC sets up a shortcut VCC and forwards traffic for the destination over the shortcut An egress LEC MPC receives internetwork traffic from other LEC MPCs to be forwarded to its local interfaces users For traffic received over a shortcut the egress LEC MPC adds the appropriate encapsulation and forwards them via a LAN interface that may be a bridge port an internal host stack etc MPOA Server MPS An MPS includes an NHRP Server NHS and is the logical component of a router that provides internetwork layer forwarding information to LEC MPCs The MPS answers MPOA queries from ingress LEC MPCs and provides encapsulation information to egress LEC MPCs The MPS also converts between MPOA requests and replies and NHRP requests and replies on behalf of LEC MPCs 4 10 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual MPOA 4 3 4 MPOA Example The following are the basic requirements for establishing a shortcut across an MPOA enabled network e There must be LEC MPCs at each end of the network between which a shortcut is desired e The local router interface at each end must be running an MPS e A Next Hop Reso
346. ni30 conf sig new type IISP version uni31 conf sig new type IISP version uni40 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 type publicUNI version uni30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 5 m m o nm nmvo m conf sig new type privateNNI version pnnil0 The first example is the default that is most often used when configuring a signalling interface Using this specification allows the interface to auto configure to any possible valid combina tion like privUNI uni30 privUNI uni31 privUNI uni40 ftpnni uni30 ftpnni uni31 ftpnni uni40 or privateNNI pnnil0 This is the most preferred input The fifth and sixth examples illustrate the exception to the rule ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 7 13 Signalling 7 3 2 1 2 Examples of Invalid Configurations Table 7 4 shows examples of invalid configurations to enter into AMI and the reasons why they are invalid Table 7 4 Invalid Type and Version Combinations Invalid Combination Reason conf sig new 1a1 0 version uni30 The type is not entered auto conf sig new lal 0 type auto version uni30 The type is auto conf sig new 1a1 0 version uni31 The type is not entered auto conf sig new 1a1 0 type auto version uni31 The type is auto conf sig new 1a1 0 version uni40 The type is not entered auto conf sig new 1a1 0 type auto version uni40 The type is auto conf sig new 1a1 0 version pnnil0 The type is not
347. ning in the switches function as peers in the same ELAN The LEC MPCs are distributed such that they are not all connected to the same server With this arrangement should one of the peer servers fail the clients connected to the remaining server continue to maintain connectivity while the clients that were connected to the failed server automatically re establish connectivity to the ELAN within 60 seconds 4 2 2 7 Automatic ELAN Selection To simplify configuration of the ELAN a host is allowed to join an ELAN without specifying an ELAN name If the LECS has been configured to provide the required information and you do not manually specify an ELAN name to join when you configure the host s ELAN driver the host initially attempts to join the ELAN specified by the LECS The host successfully joins the ELAN if the LECS is available the proper LES address for the ELAN has been specified in the LECS and the LES and BUS are available 4 2 2 8 Intelligent BUS This feature reduces broadcast traffic by using the MAC address information in the LES When an intelligent BUS receives a unicast frame the BUS first checks the LES s mapping table to see if the MAC address is registered there If it is the BUS forwards the frame directly to the destination instead of broadcasting 4 6 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual MPOA 4 3 An Introduction to Multi Protocol Over ATM MPOA builds upon the foundation of LANE 4 3 1 LANE Without MPO
348. nnel on an ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 To create a VCC going in port 2A1 VPI 0 VCI 100 on the switch board installed in slot 2 and going out port 4B1 VPI 0 VCI 100 on the switch board installed in slot 4 enter the following myswitch configuration vcc gt new 2al 0 100 2e4 0 100 myswitch configuration vcc gt new 2e4 0 100 2a1 0 100 myswitch configuration vcc new 4b1 0 100 4e2 0 100 myswitch configuration vcc gt new 4e2 0 100 4b1 0 100 In the first line in the first pair notice that the output port is 2E4 This is the intra fabric port The 2 means the connection is coming out of the switch board in slot 2 through the intra fabric port The E represents the intra fabric port The 4 means the connection is destined for switch board in slot 4 2E4 then becomes the input port in the second line In the first line in the second pair notice that the output port is 4E2 This is the intra fabric port The 4 means the connection is coming out of the switch board in slot 4 through the intra fabric port The E represents the intra fabric port The 2 means the connection is destined for switch board in slot 2 4E2 then becomes the input port in the second line Once the parameters are entered the virtual channel is created instantly by the SCP At the same time a command is entered automatically into the current configuration database which means that this virtual channel is created every time the SCP is restarted ATM Switch Network Configurat
349. not co located re create each LES and BUS using the following single AMI command myswitch configuration lane les gt new lt LES Selector Byte HEX gt lt LES name gt bus lt BUS Selector Byte HEX gt type ethernet token ring mtu 1516 1580 4544 9234 18190 secure wka LECS ATM Address gt registertlvs enable disable elanid lt ELAN ID gt segid TR Segment ID gt moO 33 cS De os Ta m z5 fwdarp enable disable anycast lt LES Anycast ATM Address gt peers lt atm addr gt You need to specify the LES selector byte the BUS uses the same selector byte by default and you need to give the same LES name that you used before You may optionally specify any of the parameters except for the anycast address and the peer addresses since you are not using DLE ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 3 57 Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 8 4 Administer the Services Up Administer up the LES BUS pair and the LECS on the switch es running each of the services myswitch configuration lane gt les admin lt LES index gt up myswitch configuration lane gt lecs admin lt LECS index gt up The transfer of your ELAN to ForeThought 5 3 x is now complete 3 58 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual eds Essi MPOA This chapter provides an overview of LAN Emulation LANE and Multi Protocol Over ATM MPOA as implemented in FORE Systems Fore
350. nown as virtual path terminators VPTs VPCs allow virtual paths to be cross connected at a switch node while VPTs allow virtual channels VCCs to be cross connected or switched at a switch node o zi E S Virtual X Path 3 o 7t e Virtual Channels IN N N NS N p Al i P Medium Figure 1 2 Virtual Channels in a Virtual Path A single virtual path can be used to route many virtual channels through the ATM network Because a virtual path simply routes virtual channels through the network a cell is guaran teed to have the same VCI when it exits the virtual path as it had when it entered the virtual path FORE ATM Switch ATM FORE ATM Switch Network EDA A N cell N Prag cell VPI X VCI Y VPI Z VOI Y Figure 1 3 An Example of a Virtual Path ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 1 3 Configuring PVCs The VCI value of cells does not change as the cell is switched through the ATM network via a virtual path Each virtual path must originate at a switch fabric pass through zero or more switch fabrics and terminate at another switch fabric The origination and termination points are referred to as originating and terminating paths Virtual paths are switched through switch fabrics via through paths Virtual paths are made up of an originating path zero or more through paths and a terminating path Ori
351. ntees Because ATM is designed to provide a single network to transport this variety of traffic classes FORE s traffic policing and Connection Admission Control CAC schemes are vital to allowing this mix of traffic to flow smoothly ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 1 39 Oo e E Q c E Q U lt i9 Oo Configuring PVCs 1 7 Traffic Policing Usage Parameter Control Traffic policing also known as Usage Parameter Control UPC is a method of ensuring fair allocation of network resources and of assessing the cells entering the switch for conformance with pre established traffic bandwidth contracts Those cells that exceed the specified contract are tagged or dropped depending on what is defined in the contract This ensures that the connections with reserved bandwidth are not exceeding their reservations FORE Systems switches use a combination of leaky bucket or Generic Cell Rate Algorithm GCRA hard ware in the switch fabric and user configurable parameters in AMI to perform these policing functions 1 7 1 Leaky Bucket Algorithm The first important concept to understand is the leaky bucket algorithm Leaky buckets are a mechanism by which cells entering the switch fabric are monitored for compliance with UPC traffic contracts that have been negotiated at connection set up time Before the leaky buckets are discussed it is important to understand the parameters that are being measured
352. ntifying an organization which administers the meaning of the following two octet Protocol Identifier PID field in the SNAP header Together they identify a distinct routed or bridged protocol 11 110 3 Out of Band Management refers to switch configuration via the serial port or over Ethernet not ATM Out of Frame OOF a signal condition and alarm in which some or all framing bits are lost Packet An arbitrary collection of data grouped and transmitted with its user identification over a shared facility Packet Assembler Disassembler PAD interface device that buffers data sent to from charac ter mode devices and assembles and disassembles the packets needed for X 25 operation Packet Internet Groper ping a program used to test reachability of destinations by sending them an ICMP echo request and waiting for a reply Packet Level Protocol PLP Network layer protocol in the X 25 protocol stack Sometimes called X 25 Level 3 or X 25 Protocol Packet Switched Network PSN a network designed to carry data in the form of packets The packet and its format is internal to that network Packet Switching a communications paradigm in which packets messages are individually routed between hosts with no previously established communications path Payload Scrambling a technique that eliminates certain bit patterns that may occur within an ATM cell payload that could be misinterpreted by certain sensitive transmission
353. nual Glossary items are listed alphabetically according to the full term AAL ATM Adaptation Layer ABR Available Bit Rate ACM Address Complete Message ACR Allowable Cell Rate ADPCM Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation AHFG ATM attached Host Functional Group AIMUX ATM Inverse Multiplexing AIS Alarm Indication Signal AMI Alternate Mark Inversion AMI ATM Management Interface ANSI American National Standards Institute APCM Adaptive Pulse Code Modulation API Application Program Interface APP Application Program APS Automatic Protection Switching ARP Address Resolution Protocol ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange ATDM Asynchronous Time Division Multiplexing ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode AUI Attachment User Interface B8ZS Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution BCOB Broadband Connection Oriented Bearer BCOB A Bearer Class A BCOB C Bearer Class C BCOB X Bearer Class X BECN Backward Explicit Congestion Notification BER Bit Error Rate BES Bursty Errored Seconds BGP Border Gateway Protocol B ICI B ISDN Inter Carrier Interface 5 BIP Bit Interleaved Parity S B ISDN Broadband Integrated Services Digital Network E B ISUP Broadband ISDN User s Part o ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Acronyms 1 Acronyms BITS BNC BPDU bps BPV B TE BUS CAC CAS CBDS CBR CCITT CCS CDV CE CEI CES CGA CIP CIR CLIP CLP CLR CLS CMIP CMR CPE CRA CRC CRS CS CSU CTD CTS DACS DARPA
354. o ForeThought 4 1 x always default to UNI 3 0 Both UNI 3 1 and UNI 4 0 use SSCOP version 31 Table 7 1 Action Taken Based on Both Switches Signalling Channel Configurations Configured Fe dii Versi Configured Action Taken ersion Version UNI 3 0 UNI 3 0 SSCOP 30 stack initialized UNI 3 1 SSCOP 30 stack initialized error message displayed on syslog UNI 4 0 SSCOP 30 stack initialized error message displayed on syslog PNNI 1 0 SSCOP 30 stack initialized error message displayed on syslog Auto SSCOP 30 stack initialized peer changes version to UNI 3 0 UNI 3 1 UNI 3 0 SSCOP 31 stack initialized error message displayed on syslog UNI 3 1 SSCOP 31 stack initialized UNI4 0 SSCOP 31 stack initialized error message displayed on syslog PNNI 1 0 SSCOP 31 stack initialized misconfiguration Auto SSCOP 31 stack initialized peer changes version to UNI 3 1 PNNI 1 0 UNI 3 0 SSCOP 31 stack initialized error message displayed on syslog UNI3 1 SSCOP 31 stack initialized misconfiguration UNI4 0 SSCOP 31 stack initialized misconfiguration PNNI 1 0 SSCOP 31 stack initialized Auto SSCOP 31 stack initialized peer changes version to PNNI 1 0 if it supports PNNI UNI 4 0 UNI3 0 SSCOP 31 stack initialized error message displayed on syslog UNI 3 1 SSCOP 31 stack initialized error message displayed on syslog UNI4 0 SSCOP 31 stack initialized PNNI 1 0 SSCOP 31 stack initialized misconfiguration Auto SSCOP 31 stack initialized p
355. o create a new CES connection myswitch configuration ces new port lt timeslots gt The CES new command can also be used as shown below When the following parameters are used by default an appropriate entry is made in the UPC table and a bidirectional PVC is cre ated with the proper UPC index or new port lt timeslots gt oport lt oport gt ots ots or new port lt timeslots gt oport lt oport gt ovpi lt ovpi gt ovci lt ovci gt The following advanced options can be used when creating CES connections advanced options srts on off fupc lt index gt bupe lt index gt cas basic cas partialfill lt partialfill gt reassCDVT lt cdvt gt bufSize lt bufSize gt integ lt integ gt idlesupp enable disable idlemask lt idlemask gt idlepat lt idle pattern gt lt cas pattern gt idleintp lt idleintp gt oidlesupp enable disable oidlemask lt idlemask gt oidlepat lt idle pattern gt lt cas pattern gt oidleintp lt idleintp gt B 8 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring Circuit Emulation Services SRIS is only available on unstructured connections which are created by specifying a11 for the timeslots parameter The cas and partialfill options are not applicable to unstructured mode Structured mode is selected by indicating the exact timeslots to be used For example timeslots 1 2 and 3 would be entered as
356. o iat eres 5 2 TOC 4 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 5 1 4 Hierarchical Routing llle 5 1 4 1 Hierarchical Addressing lilius 5 1 4 1 1 Switch Prefix 0 2 000000 5 1 4 1 2 Switch Summary Prefix 5 1 4 1 3 PeerGroupID 5 1 4 2 Path Computation 0200 0000 5 2 The Physical Network 0 0 0 0 0 cece eee ee 5 2 1 Peer Groups res 5 2 2 Peer Group Topology s es auaa 5 2 3 Border Switches lisse 5 2 4 Peer Group Summary Node PGSN 5 2 5 Backbone Topology 0 0c eee ee tee eee eee 5 2 6 Single Switch Perspective 0 0 0c eee eeee CHAPTER6 ATM Forum PNNI 6 1 PNNI Routing Protocol aie tien s s oer p eh lek 6 1 1 Hello Protocol 0 cece eee 6 1 2 Database Exchange Protocol 200 ees 6 1 3 Flooding Protocol 0 00 eee eee eee 6 1 4 Path Computation 00000 cece eee 6 1 5 Hierarchical Routing llle 6 2 PNNI Signalling Protocol 000 c cece eee 6 2 1 Source Routing 00 0 e eee eee ee 6 2 2 Grankback ss selon XE FER pane 6 3 Internetworking between PNNI and FTI PNNI 6 3 1 Gateway Switches and Split Switches 6 3 2 Dynamic Leaking of Reachability Information 6321 AAS ve eria Aem oed 6 3 2 1 1 Peer Groups in AreaS 6 3 2 1 2 ArealDS 0 era roetan 6 3 2
357. o the table Otherwise anyone may access the switch via the control port The address you enter must be the address of the machine you are using Otherwise you will lock yourself out of the switch INTERES 8 2 2 IP Filtering Flags There are three IP filtering flags that can be configured to limit IP access in other ways ssr lsr and all These flags are set to allow or disallow IP packets using the conf security ipaccess ssr lsr and all commands See Part 2 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual for more information about these commands ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 8 11 Security 8 2 2 1 Strict Source Routing Flag If the ssr flag is set to allow all incoming IP packets that are strict source routed are accepted provided that they match an IP address in the table of authorized addresses If the ssr flag is set to disallow all incoming IP packets that are strict source routed are rejected even if they match an IP address in the table of authorized addresses 8 2 2 2 Loose Source Routing Flag If the 1sr flag is set to allow all incoming IP packets that are loose source routed are accepted provided that they match an IP address in the table of authorized addresses If the lsr flag is set to disallow all incoming IP packets that are loose source routed are rejected even if they match an IP address in the table of authorized addresses 8 2 2 3 All Flag If the a11 flag is set to al Low all i
358. oducts and other computers Independent of the network layer AppleTalk runs on LocalTalk EtherTalk and TokenTalk Application Layer Layer seven of the ISO reference model provides the end user interface Application Program APP a complete self contained program that performs a specific func tion directly for the user Application Program Interface API a language format that defines how a program can be made to interact with another program service or other software it allows users to develop custom interfaces with FORE products Assigned Cell a cell that provides a service to an upper layer entity or ATM Layer Manage ment entity ATMM entity asxmon a FORE program that repeatedly displays the state of the switch and its active ports Glossary 2 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary Asynchronous Time Division Multiplexing ATDM a multiplexing technique in which a trans mission capability is organized into a priori unassigned time slots The time slots are assigned to cells upon request of each application s instantaneous real need Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM a transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells It is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrence of cells containing information from an individual user is not necessarily periodic 11 110 3 ATM Adaptation Layer AAL the AAL divides user information into segments suitable for packaging into a series of AT
359. odules but attached to the same switch fabric myswitch configuration fratm pvc new 4A1 00 100 oport 4c1 ovpi 0 ovci 100 epdppd 1 name pvc a myswitch configuration fratm pvc new 4a1 01 101 oport 4c1 ovpi 0 ovci 101 name pvc b myswitch configuration fratm pvc new 4a1 02 102 oport 4c1 ovpi 0 ovci 102 name pvc c myswitch configuration fratm pvc show Input Output SvcId dlci Port VPI VCI Port VPI VCI Admin Epd Frr Frf8 IngRE Name 4A1 00 101 4A1 16 32 4C1l 0 101 up 1 0 0 disable pvc a 4A1 00 101 4C1 0 101 4A1 16 32 up 1 0 0 disable pvc_a 4A1 01 100 4A1 go 32 4C1 0 100 up 0 0 0 disable pvc_b 4A1 01 100 4C1 0 100 4Al 0 32 up 0 0 0 disable pvc_b 4A1 02 102 4A1 32 32 4C1l 0 102 up 0 0 0 disable pvo c 4A1 02 102 4C1l 0 102 4A1 32 32 up 0 0 0 disable pvo c D 14 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring FramePlus Modules D 5 4 Configuring Frame Relay SPVCs You can also configure SPVCs Smart Permanent Virtual Circuits on a FramePlus network module An SPVC is a connection that spans multiple switch fabrics and looks like a PVC at the local and remote endpoints with an SVC in the middle If a link carrying an SPVC goes down and there is an alternate route then the end switch fabrics of the SPVC automatically reroute the SPVC around the failed link However the procedure for creating both SPANS SPVCs and PNNI SPVCs on a FramePlus net work module is slightly different than it is for other net
360. of a 13 byte Switch Prefix 5 1 4 1 Hierarchical Addressing FI PNNI uses private ATM address prefixes NSAP prefixes as node identifiers FI PNNI does not distinguish between node identifiers and reachability information Thus the IDs of nodes in the FI PNNI addressing map are NSAP prefixes In the default case at the lowest level peer group the switches have a 13 byte prefix as their node ID and end systems hosts have a 19 byte prefix as their node ID 5 1 4 1 1 Switch Prefix Each switch in a FI PNNI network is configured with a 13 byte prefix called the switch prefix Hosts that are attached to the switch are presented with this prefix during ILMI address regis tration In this way end systems are configured with a private ATM address that includes the 13 byte switch prefix ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 5 3 ForeThought PNNI 5 1 4 1 2 Switch Summary Prefix Each switch is configured with a switch mask swmask which gives the length of the switch summary prefix within the switch prefix The swmask gives the number of most significant bits of the switch prefix that constitute the switch summary prefix Since all end system addresses attached to a switch have the same switch summary prefix their reachability information can be summarized by this prefix i e by the switch summary prefix 5 1 4 1 3 Peer Group ID Each switch is configured with a peer group mask pgmask which gives the length of the peer group ID withi
361. of transmission quality generally shown as a negative expo nent e g 107 which means 1 out of 10 bits 1 out of 10 000 000 bits are in error Bit Interleaved Parity BIP an error detection technique in which character bit patterns are forced into parity so that the total number of one bits is always odd or always even This is accomplished by the addition of a one or zero bit to each byte as the byte is transmitted at the other end of the transmission the receiving device verifies the parity odd or even and the accuracy of the transmission Bit Robbing The use of the least significant bit per channel in every sixth frame for signaling Bit Stuffing A process in bit oriented protocols where a zero is inserted into a string of ones by the sender to prevent the receiver from interpreting valid user data the string of ones as control characters a Flag character for instance Border Gateway Protocol BGP used by gateways in an internet connecting autonomous net works It is derived from experiences learned using the EGP bps bits per second Bridge a device that expands a Local Area Network by forwarding frames between data link layers associated with two separate cables usually carrying a common protocol Bridges can usually be made to filter certain packets to forward only certain traffic Bridge Protocol Data Unit BPDU A message type used by bridges to exchange management and control information Broadba
362. omponents LANE MPOA Client LEC MPC The LEC MPC can wear two different hats When wearing its LEC hat it simply communicates with other ELAN components the LES and BUS to resolve MAC addresses into ATM addresses When it puts on its MPC hat the additional function of the LEC MPC in an MPOA aware network is to source and sink internetwork shortcuts LAN Emulation Runs on a Solaris workstation or a FORE Systems Configuration Server LECS ATM switch Maintains information about all ELANs within the administrative domain When the LEC MPC successfully communicates with the LECS the LECS provides a list of ELANs which the LEC MPC can join The LECS may be configured with various MPOA parameters LEC MPCs that connect to LANE MPOA services through an MPOA aware LECS are configured with these centrally supplied MPOA parameters LEC MPCs that connect through an LECS that does not contain MPOA parameters still perform flow analysis and attempt inter ELAN shortcuts according to their user editable or factory default settings 4 2 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual MPOA LAN Emulation Server LES Runs on a PowerHub 7000 a PowerHub 8000 an ASN 9000 a FORE ATM switch or a Solaris workstation Maintains information about the LEC MPCs within a single ELAN and performs address resolution The LES can be configured to support or disable MPOA operation in an ELAN The LES accepts MPOA parameters from registering LEC MP
363. on Manual Configuring PVCs 1 4 2 Listing Virtual Channels By logging in to AMI you can display either all of the existing virtual channels on an individ ual switch fabric or on a specified port To list all of the virtual channels on an individual switch fabric enter the following parameters Input Port VPI 3B1 3B1 3B1 3B1 3B1 3B2 3B2 3B2 G Cr GOG O OG 2 OG Press return configuration vcc show Output VCI Port VPI VCI UPC Protocol Name 5 3cTL 0 49 0 fsig N A 14 3CTL 0 48 0 spans N A 15 SCIL 0 47 spans N A 16 3CTL 0 50 fsig N A 100 3B4 0 100 0 pvc N A 9 S3CTL 0 53 0 fsig N A L4 3CTL 0 52 0 spans N A 15 3CTL 0 51 spans N A for more q to quit q The fields in this display are defined as follows Field Description Input Port The incoming port number of the virtual channel Input VPI The incoming virtual path number Input VCI The incoming virtual channel number Output Port The outgoing port number of the virtual channel Output VPI The outgoing virtual path number Output VCI The outgoing virtual channel number UPC The integer index that refers to the specific UPC traffic contract assigned to this VCI Protocol Indicates what type of channel this is Can be spans pvc fsig spvc or rcc rcc is the routing control channel 0 18 on PNNI links over which PNNI exchanges routing infor mation fsig stands for ATM Forum signalling Name The unique user assi
364. or more information about these configurations see Part 2 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual o fo 3 z E Q v lt io o When these paths and channels are created a Eu command is entered automatically into the current configuration database CDB meaning that these paths and channels are created every time the switch control processor SCP is restarted The CDB should be backed up frequently ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 1 17 Configuring PVCs 1 5 1 Creating a Through Path To create a new through path log in to AMI and enter the following parameters conf vpc new lt iport gt lt ivpi gt lt oport gt lt ovpi gt upe lt index gt name lt name gt The optional parameters for call records and VP shaping using Series C network modules are as follows inctype orig pmp tran mpp term outctype orig tran term mpmp shapeivpi lt vpi gt These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description iport The incoming port number ivpi The incoming virtual path number oport The outgoing port number ovpi The outgoing virtual path number upc index The integer index that refers to a specific UPC traffic contract If no index is specified then no traffic policing will take place on this VPI It is assigned a UPC index of 0 and all traffic on this VPI is treated as UBR traffic This is the de
365. or Byte HEX gt type ethernet token ring mtu 1516 1580 4544 9234 18190 secure wka LECS ATM Address gt registertlvs enable disable elanid lt ELAN ID gt segid lt TR Segment ID gt fwdarp enable disable anycast LES Anycast ATM Address gt peers lt atm addr gt For example you would enter something similar to the following conf lane les new 90 engineering anycast c5 0005 80 e100 0000 21a 3596 0020481a3596 0 peers 47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 10bb 0020481a10bb 90 47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 3552 0020481a3552 10 47 0005 80 6e100 0000 21a 3218 0020481a3218 44 This command creates a co located LES and BUS E using a single AMI command You cannot create a BUS separately using ForeThought 5 0 or greater The conf lane bus commands are only useful in providing backwards compatibility with switches that are running earlier versions of ForeThought software If no ELAN type is entered the switch assumes E Ethernet and uses 1516 as the MTU size If Token Ring is used as the type but no MTU size is entered 4544 is used as the size 3 40 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring an Emulated LAN You must enter the address of each of the DLE E peer servers when you are starting DLE e g if you want four peers then all four must be configured with the addresses of the other three peers as well as their own LES address at
366. or detection based on signalling it con tains one of the following CAS patterns em00 em01 fxolsuser01 fxolsuser11 fxolsnet00 fxolsnet01 fxslsuser00 fxslsuser01 fxslsnet01 fxslsnetll fxsgsuser01 fxsgsnet10 fxsgsnet11 fxogsuser10 fxogsuser11 fxogsnet01 r210 A maximum of one idle pattern can be used for structured basic connections Idle patterns are filled from the least significant byte IdleInt Period us The integration period for idle detection on this connection Idle patterns are observed for this period before declaring that an active connection has gone idle ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual APPENDIX C Converting from FT PNNI to This appendix discusses the conversion of both non hierarchical and hierarchical FI PNNI networks to ATM Forum PNNI hereafter referred to as PNNI routing It is assumed that you are familiar with the fundamentals of FT PNNI and PNNI routing and familiar with FORE s implementation of PNNI as described in Chapter 6 of this manual The first section discusses PNNI routing in networks that contain ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 switches The various procedures for converting your network are described in the later sec tions If you do not have any ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 switches in your network you can skip to Section C 2 or Section C 3 to learn how to convert your network from FT PNNI to PNNI If you do have ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 switches in your network it is recommended that
367. ork Orig originating means that the ingress egress endpoint of the channel is connected to the source node which is outside the network tran transit means that the ingress egress endpoint of the channel is connected to a node within the network and term ter minating means that the ingress egress endpoint of the channel is connected to the desti nation node which is outside the network pp means this is labelled as a point to point channel pmp means this is labelled as a point to multipoint channel mpp means this is labelled as a multipoint to point channel mpmp means this is labelled as a multipoint to multipoint channel 1 16 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring PVCs 1 5 Creating PVCs and SPVCs FORE s ATM network modules provide ATM transmission connectivity while its intelligent network modules such as the Circuit Emulation Services CES network module provide adaptation for ports carrying one transmission format e g TDM to ATM cells This section describes how to create the following from one ATM port to another e apermanent virtual path through path apermanent virtual path terminator originating or terminating path e apermanent virtual channel through the network asmart permanent virtual channel through the network This section assumes that the physical port parameters of the switches have already been con figured and that the ATM network module traffic models have been set appropriately F
368. ork Configuration Manual QO fe E a amp E Ss Co o zZ v Configuring SNMP Table A 14 SNMP Traps Supported on the FORE Switches Continued Trap Number Trap Name Description 1054 q2931AFRejectUnknown This trap is generated whenever any q2931 UNI with Address Filtering enabled rejects a Setup request because the address matched no template The vari ables sent in the trap identify the source and destina tion UNI for the call 1061 q2931CreationFailure This trap is generated whenever a switch fails to create a UNI This is most likely due to a resource limitation on the switch 1068 asxPsCurrentDown This trap alerts that one ATM switch power supply had a current failure The power supply that failed is identified by the power supply index 1069 asxPsCurrentUp This trap alerts that one ATM switch power supply that had a current failure is now up The power supply that is back up is identified by the power supply index 1070 asxPs5VoltDown This trap alerts that one ATM switch power supply had a 5V failure The power supply that failed is identified by the power supply index 1071 asxPs5VoltUp This trap alerts that one ATM switch power supply that had a 5V failure is now up The power supply that is back up is identified by the power supply index 1072 asxSwitchLoginDetected An asxSwitchLoginDetected trap signifies that a user logged i
369. ormation about load balanced UBR routing scheduling roundrobin smoothed guaranteed Indicates the scheduling mode to be used for servicing traffic on the output side of a Series D network module roundrobin means that all service for these connections comes from one of the round robin queues in the network module This is the default mode for both SVCs and PVCs smoothed means that all service for these connections comes from the network module s rate controller which ensures that cells for these connections are trans mitted into the network at a fixed rate of R cells per second guaranteed is a combina tion of the round robin and smoothed modes Service for these connections are scheduled with both fixed rate R from the rate controller and they have an entry in the appropriate round robin queue name lt name gt The user defined name associated with this UPC traffic contract This helps you remember for what traffic type this specific contract is used If you do not specify a name a default name that relates to this type of traffic contract is assigned automatically bc bits The committed burst size of a connection in bits Can only be used on a Frame Relay con nection be bits The excess burst size of a connection in bits Can only be used on a Frame Relay connection cir kbps The committed information rate of a connection in kbps Can only be used on a Frame Relay connection ar kbp
370. ort lt vpi gt nodeix 2 This brings the links to C 3 and C 4 back to being operational 9 Change the default protocol of the default domain in C 2 to pnni using the follow ing AMI command conf atmroute domain modify domain ID pnni T v z o U z zZ wo Bunanuog Reboot switch C 2 10 Create a second PNNI node in C 2 with a node index of 2 the peer group ID set to C area 6 and level 6 using the following AMI commands conf atmroute pnni node modify 2 pgid c forelevel 6 forearea 6 conf atmroute domain modify lt domain ID gt pnni Reboot switch C 2 11 Modify the interfaces on C 2 corresponding to the link to C 4 and attach it to node 2 on C 2 Use the following AMI command for each link conf atmroute pnni interface modify lt port gt lt vpi gt nodeix 2 Reboot C 2 This brings the link between C 2 and C 4 back to being operational ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual C 17 Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI 12 Upon reboot of C 1 C 3 and C 4 will no longer need to be gateway switches So modify the default protocol to PNNI using the following AMI command on each switch conf atmroute domain modify lt domain ID gt pnni Reboot both C 3 and C 4 This completes the migration of peer group C to PNNI Peer groups A and B can be migrated to PNNI in a similar way using the steps found in Section C 3 1 1 1 3 Once they are changed over to PNNI the entire conversion is complete Afte
371. orts distrib uted timing use the command conf module show and look for yes under the Timing field In an ASX 1000 or a TNX 1100 the port may be from another fabric in the same chassis When the switchclock is set to any of the ports within the same fabric that port s clock is exported to all of the network modules within the same fabric On an ASX 1000 or a TNX 1100 only the switchclock is also exported to the network modules in all of the other fabrics in this chassis You can then configure each of the other fabrics to use that clock In this way all of the network modules in all of the fabrics will use the same timing source 9 3 1 Failover of the Switchclock You can configure a primary switchclock and a secondary switchclock If the primary clock is valid it is used If the primary switchclock fails the secondary clock is used When the pri mary clock returns it is used again as the clock source If both the primary and secondary values fail the switch fabric uses the crystal of the first available timing network module as the switchclock going from A to D For example if net work module A supports distributed timing then the crystal from A is used as the switch clock As another example if network module A is not installed and network modules B and C do not support distributed timing but network module D does support distributed timing then the crystal from D is used as the switchclock Failover of the switchclock happen
372. ot have to type the actual well known address However if you are using an LECS address that is different than the well known address then you must type the full LECS ATM address to be used If you want to disable ELAN access control or if you want to enable ELAN access control at a later time after the LES has been created you can use the conf lane les security com mand to do this See Part 1 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual for more information By using this command you do not have to delete and recreate the LES ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 3 21 Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 6 Configuring an ELAN There are different instructions for configuring an ELAN depending on how your network is currently configured Please read the following list to determine which set of instructions to use e If you had previously configured LANE you want to upgrade some or all of the clients to ForeThought 5 3 x and you want to upgrade all the equipment that is running services to ForeThought 5 3 x using DLE use the instructions found in Section 3 7 e If you had previously configured LANE you want to leave the clients running ForeThought 4 1 x and you want to upgrade all the equipment that is running ser vices to ForeThought 5 3 x without using DLE use the instructions found in Section 3 8 e If you are configuring LANE for the first time and all of your equipment is run ning ForeThought 5 3 x use the instruction
373. otal bandwidth used by the virtual channels see Figure 1 7 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 1 13 Configuring PVCs 1 4 4 Smart Permanent Virtual Circuits Smart Permanent Virtual Circuits SPVCs are connections that go across multiple switch fab rics An SPVC looks like a PVC at the local and remote endpoints with an SVC Switched Vir tual Circuit in the middle SVCs are channels established on demand by network signalling Similar to a dialed telephone call SVCs transport information between two locations and last only for the duration of the transfer SPVCs are more robust than PVCs If a link carrying a PVC goes down then the PVC goes down If a link carrying a SPVC goes down and there is an alternate route then the end switch fabrics of the SPVC automatically reroute the SPVC around the failed link As shown in Figure 1 13 interswitch links exist between the FORE switches The endpoints exist at switch A and switch E If a link goes down between switch A and switch B an SPVC can reroute the cell via an SVC through switch C FORE Switch val Mw FORE Switch B D cell VPI 1 VCI 35 N VPI 2 VCI 33 cell SS P XN ort A1 portA4 y zN p A GP FORE Switch VN JP FORE Switch K FORE Switch A E D E t SNCs Interswitch Links Figure 1 13 The Path of a Cell Via SPVCs 1 14 ATM Switch Network Configurati
374. pan that carries data at a rate of 6 312 Mbps Jitter analog communication line distortion caused by variations of a signal from its reference timing position Joint Photographic Experts Group JPEG An ISO Standards group that defines how to com press still pictures 11 110 3 Jumper a patch cable or wire used to establish a circuit often temporarily for testing or diag nostics also the devices shorting blocks used to connect adjacent exposed pins on a printed circuit board that control the functionality of the card Kbps kilobits per second thousand LAN Access Concentrator a LAN access device that allows a shared transmission medium to accommodate more data sources than there are channels currently available within the trans mission medium LAN Emulation Address Resolution Protocol LE_ARP A message issued by a LE client to solicit the ATM address of another function LAN Emulation Client LEC the component in an end system that performs data forwarding address resolution and other control functions when communicating with other components within an ELAN LAN Emulation Configuration Server LECS the LECS is responsible for the initial configura tion of LECs It provides information about available ELANs that a LEC may join together with the addresses of the LES and BUS associated with each ELAN LAN Emulation Server LES the LES implements the control coordination function for an ELAN by reg
375. paragraph 18 52 227 86 of the NASA Supplement to the FAR or any successor regulations Printed in the USA No part of this work covered by copyright may be reproduced in any form Reproduction adaptation or translation with out prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws This publication is provided by FORE Systems Inc as is without warranty of any kind either express or implied includ ing but not limited to the implied warranties or conditions of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose FORE Systems Inc shall not be liable for any errors or omissions which may occur in this publication nor for incidental or conse quential damages of any kind resulting from the furnishing performance or use of this publication Information published here is current or planned as of the date of publication of this document Because we are improving and adding features to our products continuously the information in this document is subject to change without notice RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND Use duplication or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 October 1988 and FAR 52 227 19 June 1987 The VxWorks and FlashLib software are licensed from Wind River Systems Inc Copyright 1984 1998 FCC CLASS A NOTICE WARNING Changes or modifications to t
376. path This trap is generated once when the virtual path is declared to be in the inactive AIS state 1039 asxVPRDIDetected This trap indicates that the Remote Defect Indication RDI is detected on the incoming terminating virtual path This trap is generated once when the virtual path is declared to be in the active RDI state 1040 asxVPRDICleared This trap indicates that the Remote Defect Indication RDI has been removed from the incoming terminat ing virtual path This trap is generated once when the virtual path is declared to be in the inactive RDI state 1041 asxNonextendedModevViola tion This trap indicates that a Series D network module was inserted into a switch board running in non extended mode Multicast will not work on the Series D module without removing all Series B modules and rebooting the switch 1042 asxUnsupportedNetwork Module This trap indicates that a unsupported network mod ule was inserted into a switch 1049 asxIpFilterViolation This trap occurs when an incoming IP packet is unau thorized to enter the switch control port and has been dropped 1053 q2931AFRejectKnown This trap is generated whenever any q2931 UNI with Address Filtering enabled rejects a Setup request because the request matched a template with the action reject The variables sent in the trap identify the source and destination UNI for the call ATM Switch Netw
377. ported and error message displayed on syslog MIB variable SSCOP 31 stack initialized error message displayed on syslog not supported UNI 4 0 Version 3 0 SSCOP 30 stack initialized Version 3 1 SSCOP 30 stack initialized error message displayed on syslog Version 4 0 SSCOP 31 stack initialized Version 2 0 SSCOP 30 stack initialized version 2 0 is not supported and error message displayed on syslog MIB variable SSCOP 30 stack initialized not supported Auto Version 3 0 SSCOP 30 stack initialized Version 3 1 SSCOP 31 stack initialized Version 4 0 SSCOP 31 stack initialized Version 2 0 SSCOP 30 stack initialized version 2 0 is not supported and error message displayed on syslog MIB variable SSCOP 30 stack initialized not supported ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Signalling 7 3 2 Rules for Signalling Channel Auto Configuration In ForeThought 5 0 x and greater there are two rules for signalling channel auto configuration The first deals with specifying the signalling interface type and signalling interface version The second rule concerns specifying the signalling scope and mode 7 3 2 4 Specifying the Type and Interface Version In AMI the signalling interface type and signalling interface version are now treated as a pair The pertinent portion of the AMI syntax is listed here for reference myswitch configuration signalling gt new lt port gt lt vpi gt version auto uni30 uni31 pnnilO uni40
378. protocol to exchange reachability information dynamically among them selves Because of the database exchange protocol two nodes that belong to an area will have identical copies of the link state topology database Using ForeThought 5 3 x an area can be one of the following e anon hierarchical PNNI network i e a single PNNI peer group because only the lowest level peer group is implemented e a hierarchical FI PNNI network i e a multiple FI PNNI peer group system using hierarchy e anon hierarchical FI PNNI network i e a single FI PNNI peer group Split switches can be used to connect two PNNI areas and gateway switches can be used to connect an FI PNNI area and a PNNI area as shown in Figure 6 2 The only restriction in con figuring areas is that a FI PNNI area cannot adjoin another FI PNNI area PNNI node O FT PNNI node Switch S2 GET D Area C Switch S3 Switch S1 Figure 6 2 Split Switches and Gateway Switches Connecting Areas 6 6 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual ATM Forum PNNI 6 3 2 1 1 Peer Groups in Areas Multiple peer groups can exist within an area Peer groups within an area are connected to each other by border links as shown in Figure 6 3 o Peer Group Border Link 06 Peer Group D jj CX Switch Node rd NE ax 4 M M i s C 559 y Horizontal Link
379. pted or rejected by a specific filter The switch returns an answer of accepted or rejected and the index number of the template that accepted or rejected the information entered If the information does not match any of the existing templates then an answer of rejected and address unknown is given When this feature is used none of the statistics are incremented and no traps are sent 8 3 3 NSAP Filtering Statistics To display statistics for NSAP filtering use the stat nsapfilter command See Part 2 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual for more information about this command NSAP filtering statistics and traps include e counts of accepted calls calls rejected because of an explicit match with a reject template calls rejected because of no match with any template A trap is sent when rejected calls occur more frequently than the user specified limit 8 14 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Ol P MEI Configuring Timing This chapter describes how to set up timing on a FORE ATM Switch Topics covered include e Section 9 1 Overview e Section 9 2 Timing Modes e Section 9 3 Switchclock e Section 9 4 Port Level Timing e Section 9 5 Timing Configuration Examples 9 1 Overview When running voice or video over an ATM network the equipment on the network should be timed so that all of the equipment is transmitting and receiving data in a synchronized man ner Even though ATM is asynchronous this only
380. r example myswitch configuration funi pvc new 4A1 00 0 40 epdppd 1 name spvc a 2 Display the FUNI PVC so you can see what Input Port Input VPI and Input VCI values were assigned to the PVC For example myswitch configuration funi pvc show FUNI FUNI Input Output SvclId VPI VCI Port VPI VCI Port VPI VCI Admin Eppd Name 4A1 00 0 40 4A1 0 40 up 0 pvc_a 3 Configure a new SPANS SPVC where the lt port gt lt vpi gt and lt vci gt values are the Input Port Input VPI and Input VCI values that are displayed in step 2 The dest parameters identify the endpoint of the connection For example T g Ee Do U5 3 5o zS 9 2 8 z 1 myswitch open 198 29 22 46 private Opening a session for 198 29 22 46 please wait Connected to 198 29 22 46 asx200bx fishtank gt localhost myswitch configuration spvx spvcc spans new 4al 0 40 198 29 22 46 1a2 0 100 This creates a SPANS SPVC where the ATM portion of the interworking connection is sup ported via the SPVC logic ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual D 21 Configuring FramePlus Modules D 6 5 2 Creating a FUNI PNNI SPVC To create a FUNI PNNI SPVC perform the following steps 1 Configure the ingress FUNI PVC without specifying the oport ovpi and ovci parameters For example myswitch configuration funi pvc new 4A1 00 0 40 epdppd 1 name spvc a 2 Display the FUNI PVC so you can see what iport ivpi and ivci val
381. r routing forwarding descriptions to clients 11 110 3 Router a device that forwards traffic between networks or subnetworks based on network layer information Routing Domain RD A group of topologically contiguous systems which are running one instance of routing Routing Information Protocol RIP a distance vector based protocol that provides a measure of distance or hops from a transmitting workstation to a receiving workstation Routing Protocol A general term indicating a protocol run between routers and or route servers in order to exchange information used to allow computation of routes The result of the routing computation will be one or more forwarding descriptions SBus hardware interface for add in boards in later version Sun 3 workstations Scalable Processor Architecture Reduced instruction set Computer SPARC a powerful work station similar to a reduced instruction set computing RISC workstation Segment a single ATM link or group of interconnected ATM links of an ATM connection Segmentation And Reassembly SAR the SAR accepts PDUs from the CS and divides them into very small segments 44 bytes long If the CS PDU is less than 44 bytes it is padded to 44 with zeroes A two byte header and trailer are added to this basic segment The header identi fies the message type beginning end continuation or single and contains sequence number ing and message identification The trailer gives
382. r the migration the network has four areas at two discrete levels Each area is a PNNI peer group The final state of the network upon completion of the conversion is shown in Figure C 14 PNNI node PNNI peer group boundary Figure C 14 A Completely Converted PNNI Network C 18 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI C 3 1 2 Migration Starting with the Peer Groups This section gives a detailed example of how to migrate a hierarchical FI PNNI network with a contiguous backbone as shown in Figure C 9 to a PNNI network In that figure only the bor der nodes are shown The individual nodes within each peer group are not shown C 3 1 2 1 Overview of the Migration The following basic steps are involved in the migration Each of these steps is described in detail in the following sections It is recommended that you read the entire section before attempting to change over your network 1 Upgrade each switch in the network to ForeThought 5 3x 2 Convert the individual peer groups of the FI PNNI network 3 Convert the backbone of the FI PNNI network C 3 1 2 1 1 Upgrade the Switches Upgrade all of the switches from to ForeThought 5 3 x using the following AMI command oper upgrade lt remotehost gt lt full path to remotefile gt For more information about upgrading your switches see Chapter 4 of the ATM Switch Installation and Maintenance Manual C 3 1
383. raditional designs Redundancy In a data transmission the fragments of characters and bits that can be elimi nated with no loss of information Registration The address registration function is the mechanism by which Clients provide address information to the LAN Emulation Server Relaying a function of a layer by means of which a layer entity receives data from a corre sponding entity and transmits it to another corresponding entity Glossary 28 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary Request To Send RTS an RS 232 modem interface signal sent from the DTE to the modem on pin 4 which indicates that the DTE has data to transmit Requests For Comment RFCs IETF documents suggesting protocols and policies of the Internet inviting comments as to the quality and validity of those policies These comments are collected and analyzed by the IETF in order to finalize Internet standards RFC1483 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 RFC1490 Multiprotocol Interconnect over Frame Relay RFC1577 Classical IP and ARP over ATM RFC1755 ATM Signaling Support for IP over ATM Robbed Bit Signaling In T1 refers to the use of the least significant bit of every word of frames 6 and 12 D4 or 6 12 18 and 24 ESF for signaling purposes Route Server A physical device that runs one or more network layer routing protocols and which uses a route query protocol in order to provide network laye
384. raffic Contract Parameters The ATM Forum has defined different types of traffic contracts to be used in conjunction with these leaky buckets The parameters that make up these types of contracts are defined as follows pcro PCR for cells with CLP 0 pcr01 PCR for the aggregate of the CLP 0 cells and the CLP 1 cells all cells scr0 SCR for cells with CLP 0 scr01 SCR for the aggregate of the CLP 0 cells and the CLP 1 cells all cells mbs0 MBS for cells with CLP 0 mbs01 MBS for the aggregate of the CLP 0 cells and the CLP 1 cells all cells tag sets CLP bit 1 for CLP 0 cells that fail the PCRO test for CBRO contracts or the SCRO MBSO test for VBRO contracts ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 1 41 Configuring PVCs The specific combinations of these parameters that make up the ATM Forum contracts are defined as follows l cbr lt pcr01 gt 2 cbr0 lt pcr0 gt lt pcr01 gt tag 3 vbr lt pcr01 gt lt scr01 gt lt mbs01 gt 4 vbr0 lt pcr01 gt lt scr0 gt lt mbs0 gt tag 5 abr lt pcr01 gt mcr The cbr pcr01 contract is for CBR traffic It only uses the first leaky bucket to assess the conformance to PCR of the aggregate of the CLP 0 cells and the CLP 1 cells Cells which fail the PCR CLP 0 1 test are discarded The cbr0 pcr0 pcr01 tag contract is for CBR traffic It uses the first leaky bucket to assess the conformance to PCR of the CLP 0 cells It uses the second leaky bucket to
385. reas config ured that belong to more than two distinct levels Furthermore there can only be one area that belongs to the higher level 6 3 2 2 Domains A domain is a group of areas that are configured to dynamically exchange reachability infor mation with one another This allows connectivity between end systems belonging to different areas without configuring static routes between areas However reachability information is exchanged between domains only if routes are statically configured between the two domains Figure 6 4 shows an example of how a static route can connect two domains PNNI node O FT PNNI node IISP link Switch S2 Switch S3 Switch S1 Switch S4 Domain 1 Domain 2 Figure 6 4 Static Route Connecting Two Domains 6 8 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual ATM Forum PNNI In Figure 6 4 the two nodes configured in switch S1 belong to different areas and so they do not share the same link state topology database The same is true for the nodes configured in switch 54 Dynamic reachability leaking takes place among the nodes in switch S1 enabling end systems in Area A to reach other end systems in Area B and vice versa within Domain 1 The same applies to the nodes in switch S4 The node in switch S2 and the node in switch S3 belong to two different areas each of which is part of a different domain Exchange of reachability information between
386. red for this SPVC will be retried continually upon a failure The default is enable 1 36 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring PVCs Parameter Description bearerClass X A IC The requested broadband bearer class for this SPVC X is for all types of ATM media A is for non ATM CBR media C is for non ATM VBR UBR and ABR media The default is X dip no yes During speech transmission clipping is the loss of a brief interval at the beginning of a speech spurt no indicates this SPVC is not susceptible to clipping yes indicates this SPVC is susceptible to clipping The default is no QoSExpIndex lt index gt The index number in the QoS expansion table that is used to do QoS class to parameter expansion when sending the SPVC call set up message across a PNNI link See the QoSExpIndex field under conf qos show for this number The qosindex that is specified for this SPVC must already be present in the switch The default is 0 fqos class0 class1 class2 The requested QoS class for this SPVC in the forward calling to called direction The 9 class3 class4 fqos and bqos options must be either both class0 or both a non zero class The default E is class0 c bqos class0 classi The requested QoS class for this SPVC in the backward called to calling direction The a class2 class3 class4 fqos and bqos options must be either both class0 or both a non zero cla
387. refers to the cell level transmission that occurs in the ATM Layer The physical layer underlying the cells is synchronous Therefore a time reference signal must be distributed to every element in the network to establish one cohesive entity This time reference on FORE ATM Switches is called a switchclock 9 2 Timing Modes There are two timing modes available on FORE ATM Switches TCM and switch TCM mode means that all network modules that support distributed timing import their clock source from the Timing Control Module TCM You must have a TCM installed in your switch in E order to use this timing mode See the CEC Plus User s Manual for information about configuring timing with a TCM All examples in this chapter assume that you do not have a TCM installed Switch mode means that all network modules that support distributed timing import their clock source from the designated switchclock port This is the default mode for any switch that does not have a TCM installed See Section 9 3 for more information about this mode O o 3 amp l 5 amp zi 5 amp ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 9 1 Configuring Timing 9 3 Switchclock If a TCM is not installed in the switch all of the ports within a fabric use the switchclock as their timing reference The switchclock can be any port that is able to recover a clock i e the network module supports distributed timing To see if the network module supp
388. ric detects exces sive level 3 lookup errors The level 3 lookup count is read every second If the lookup count is non null for 5 consecutive seconds then this trap is generated If the errors continue this trap will be generated continuously every 5 seconds This trap can be caused by a misconfigured PVC bad hard ware 1081 fabricCorrectedLookup This trap is generated when the SCP detects incon sistent information in the HDCOMP lookup The switch has corrected the bad information in the HDCOMP lookup ASIC s data structures 1090 spvcReroutelnitiated This trap is sent when a SPVC is being re routed due to a better path being found ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual A 29 Configuring SNMP Table A 14 SNMP Traps Supported on the FORE Switches Continued Trap Number Trap Name Description 2000 frf8PVCStatus This trap indicates when an interworking PVC has experienced an alarmed condition either on the ATM network side or Frame Relay side It is also generated when the PVC alarmed condition is cleared It carries the operational status of the PVC by the frf8ConnOperStatus as well as the reason why exiting entering or changing the alarmed state frf8ConnPVCAlarmReason If the interworking PVC changes its status by an AdminStatus command active inactive testing causing the frfSConnOperStatus to change up down this trap is generated with frfSConnPVCAlarmReason set to no
389. rough a pair of those contacts to on or off They are used to reconfigure components and peripherals Domain Name Server a computer that converts names to their corresponding Internet num bers It allows users to telnet or FIP to the name instead of the number ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary 11 Glossary Domain Naming System DNS the distributed name and address mechanism used in the Internet Duplex Two way communication DXI a generic phrase used in the full names of several protocols all commonly used to allow a pair of DCE and DTE devices to share the implementation of a particular WAN protocol The protocols define the packet formats used to transport data between DCE and DTE devices DXI Frame Address DFA a connection identifier associated with ATM DXI packets that serves the same functions as and translates directly to the VPI VCI on an ATM cell Dynamic Allocation A technique in which the resources assigned for program execution are determined by criteria applied at the moment of need E 164 A public network addressing standard utilizing up to a maximum of 15 digits ATM uses E 164 addressing for public network addressing E1 Wide area digital transmission scheme used predominantly in Europe that carries data at a rate of 2 048 Mbps E1 lines can be leased for private use from common carriers E3 Wide area digital transmission scheme used predominantly in Europe that carries data at
390. roup Leader PGL The PGLs exchange among themselves summary topology and reachability information pertain ing to their respective peer groups Although ForeThought 5 3 x does not support the dynamic configuration of ATM Forum PNNI PGL hierarchical networks FORE switches running ForeThought 5 3 x can be placed in and interact appropriately within PNNI hierarchical PGL networks For more information about how ForeThought 5 3 x can be configured to connect two ATM Forum PNNI peer groups see Section 6 3 1 Each peer group is summarized by its PGL as a single group node A node is a logical entity that resides in a switch and performs routing operations such as discovering other nodes in the network maintaining a topology database of its peer group exchanging that database with its neighbors and computing paths from itself to other nodes in the network INNd Wn104 WLV The interconnection of logical group nodes form a higher level topology Logical group nodes can in turn be grouped into higher level peer groups that in turn are represented by logical group nodes in an even higher level topology and so on PGLs of two adjacent peer groups communicate through an SVC that is established between them To better support QoS and multicast each switch has knowledge of all higher level topology information in addition to the detailed topology information of its own peer group Higher level topology information is propagated down the levels by t
391. row in Figure D 5 Then add the base of 7 168 back in as shown 10 752 cells 7 168 cells 3 584 cells 3 584 cells 0 5 1 792 cells 1 792 cells 7 168 cells 8 960 cells 16 384 cells 16 384 cells 14 336 CLPOPPD fixed 87 5 14 336 CLPOPPD fixed 87 5 10 752 CLPOEPD 50 10 752 i CLPOEPD 50 8 960 CLP1PPD 50 8 960 Y CLP1PPD 50 7 168 CLP1EPD 50 7 168 CLP1EPD 50 High Priority Buffer Low Priority Buffer Figure D 5 Calculated CLP1PPD D 8 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring FramePlus Modules D 3 Profiles A profile lets you define a set of information that can be applied to a particular service or PVC using a single index number much in the same way that you can define a set of traffic manage ment information in a UPC contract and then apply it to a PVC using a single index number For most profile types several default profiles are provided by the switch for your conve nience These default profiles reflect what typical networks may need You cannot delete the default profiles If a service or connection is created without specifying any profile the first default profile in the list index 0 is used You can also create new profiles and delete existing profiles but you cannot modify existing ones Each profile has an associated reference count which identifies the number of services or connections that are currently usin
392. rtual Path Connection VPC is an ATM con nection where switching is performed on the VPI field only of each cell A PVPC is one which is provisioned through some network management function and left up indefinitely Phase Alternate Line PAL Largely a German British development in the late 60s used in the UK and much of Europe The B Y and R Y signals are weighted to U and V then modulated onto a double sideband suppressed subcarrier at 4 43MHz The V R Y signal s phase is turned through 180 degrees on each alternate line This gets rid of NTSC s hue changes with phase errors at the expense of de saturation The carrier reference is sent as a burst in the back porch The phase of the burst is alternated every line to convey the phase switching of the V signal The burst s average phase is V see NTSC for U S Physical Layer PHY the actual cards wires and or fiber optic cabling used to connect com puters routers and switches Physical Layer Connection an association established by the PHY between two or more ATM entities A PHY connection consists of the concatenation of PHY links in order to provide an end to end transfer capability to PHY SAPs Physical Layer Convergence Protocol PLCP a framing protocol that runs on top of the T1 or E1 framing protocol Physical Medium PM Refers to the actual physical interfaces Several interfaces are defined including STS 1 STS 3c STS 12c STM 1 STM 4 DS1 E1 DS2 F3 DS3
393. s The access rate of a Frame Relay UNI in kbps Can only be used on a Frame Relay connec tion frsize bytes The average frame size in bytes Can only be used on a Frame Relay connection A The units for per0 per01 scr0 scr01 mbsO and mbs01 are specified either in cells per second or in kilobits per sec ond depending on what you used for conf system units To display the current setting use conf system show The default is cps cells per second The HDCOMP ASIC must be version 1 or greater to support AALS partial packet policing To display the ASIC version use the conf board show advanced command The scheduling option has an effect only on connections with outputs on Series D network modules All other net work module platforms only use roundrobin scheduling Remember when you create a UPC contract it is not actually used until you assign it to a VPC VCC or SPANS path UPC contracts are not assigned to VPIs When the advanced options are used they are converted to ATM UPC parameters and are displayed as ATM parameters ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 1 45 ie e Q E Q U lt i9 0 Configuring PVCs The following is an example of how to create a UPC contract myswitch configuration upc new 5 vbr0O 500 200 250 cdvt 1000 aal5 PPPol name vbr0_upc This example specifies a contract named vbr0_upc which is a VBRO contract with
394. s a hello indication message to every other switch with which it has a direct connec tion These hello indications contain the switch prefix peer group membership information and link metrics attributes for the physical link between the two switches Through this regular exchange of messages each switch learns which switches are its immedi ate neighbors to what peer groups they belong and whether or not the link between itself and its neighbors is valid 5 2 3 Border Switches A border switch is any switch that has at least one link to a switch in another peer group Bor der switches play an important role in FI PNNI because they are responsible for summarizing reachability information for their respective peer groups appropriately filtering the flow of topology database information across peer group boundaries and building the lowest level source route for call setups entering the peer group 5 8 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual ForeThought PNNI 5 2 4 Peer Group Summary Node PGSN A PGSN is a virtual logical or imaginary node that summarizes a peer group s reachability information The PGSN has the peer group ID of its peer group as its switch summary prefix Each border switch in the peer group advertises a logical link loglink to the PGSN The PGSN is a logical representation of the switches contained in a peer group mn oc gt E vo gt U Z z 5 2 5 Backbone Topology Loglinks
395. s are as follows Class A 255 0 0 0 Class B 255 255 0 0 Class C 255 255 255 0 Subnet masking is used when a portion of the host ID is used to identify a subnetwork For example if a portion of a Class B network address is used for a subnetwork the mask could be set as 255 255 255 0 This would allow the third byte to be used as a subnetwork address All hosts on the network would still use the IP address to get on the Internet Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP the protocol that handles errors and control mes sages at the IP layer ICMP is actually a part of the IP protocol layer It can generate error mes sages test packets and informational messages related to IP Internet Engineering Task Force IETF a large open international community of network designers operators vendors and researchers whose purpose is to coordinate the operation management and evolution of the Internet to resolve short and mid range protocol and archi tectural issues Internet Protocol IP a connectionless best effort packet switching protocol that offers a com mon layer over dissimilar networks Internetwork Packet Exchange IPX Protocol a NetWare protocol similar to the Xerox Net work Systems XNS protocol that provides datagram delivery of messages Interoperability The ability of software and hardware on multiple machines from multiple vendors to communicate Interworking Function IWF provides a means for two dif
396. s associated with a virtual connection and the class of service and ATM Adaptation Layer AAL used for that connection In order to support voice video and data the ATM Forum has defined four classes of service or traffic types Constant Bit Rate CBR Variable Bit Rate VBR Available Bit Rate ABR and Unspecified Bit Rate UBR e At connection set up time traffic that uses a CBR parameter such as a voice sig nal makes a request for a dedicated Peak Cell Rate PCR Once the PCR is defined the ATM network must be able to guarantee that amount of bandwidth for the duration of the connection e At connection set up time traffic that uses a VBR parameter such as a video and data makes a request for a dedicated PCR Sustainable Cell Rate SCR and Max imum Burst Size MBS Once these cell rates are defined the ATM network must be able to guarantee these rates for the duration of the connection e At connection set up time ABR traffic makes a request for a dedicated PCR and Minimum Cell Rate MCR Once these cell rates are defined the ATM network must be able to guarantee the MCR rate for the duration of the connection ABR traffic sources adjust their transmission rate in response to information they receive describing the status of the network and its capability to successfully deliver data e UBR traffic such as broadcast information and ARP messages is also known as best effort service UBR provides no bandwidth guara
397. s automatically when any of the following events occur e A carrier detect or carrier loss occurs on any port in this switch fabric e Anetwork module is swapped in or out e A switch fabric is swapped in or out 9 2 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring Timing 9 4 Port Level Timing In addition to the switchclock there is also a configurable parameter for each port called a transmit clock txclock Each port s txclock can be configured to use either the network clock or the internal clock e When the txclock is set to network the clock that is recovered from the receive line of a port is used to drive the transmit line of that port e When the txclock is set to internal the internal clock or switchclock is used to drive the transmit line of that port The Timing field under conf port sonet E show displays N A for all series of OC 12 network modules because they always use internal timing O o 3 amp lt 5 amp zi 5 amp ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 9 3 Configuring Timing 9 5 Timing Configuration Examples This section provides examples of how to set the switchclock on various types of switches For more information about the specific timing commands see Part 2 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual If you have a TCM installed in your switch see the CEC Plus User s Manual for information about configuring timing with a TCM All examples in this ch
398. s indicated by crXfrSecond aryUrl fails 1032 crConfMemAllocFail This trap is generated when Callrecord functionality is unable to allocate memory as specified by crMemory Allocated This can happen when the crConfAdmin Status changes state from off or when the switch reboots when Callrecords is configured on 1033 crGeneralFailure This trap is generated when any of the callrecord related functionality fails for any reason One example would be when the Callrecord Module fails to sched ule an interval timer 1034 asxDualScpSyncFailure This trap indicates that automatic CDB synchroniza tion is disabled due to failures 1035 asxDualScpSwitchOver This trap indicates that the backup SCP has taken con trol of the switch 1036 asxDualScpHotSwap This trap indicates that an SCP hotswap insertion or removal has occurred ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring SNMP Table A 14 SNMP Traps Supported on the FORE Switches Continued Trap Number Trap Name Description 1037 asxVPAISDetected This trap indicates that the Alarm Indication Signal AIS is detected on the incoming terminating virtual path This trap is generated once when the virtual path is declared to be in the active AIS state 1038 asx VPAISCleared This trap indicates that the Alarm Indication Signal AIS has been removed from the incoming terminat ing virtual
399. s not supported 7 4 1 2 Allowable Combination of Traffic Parameters The parameters specified in the BBC information element the ATM traffic descriptor informa tion element the Extended QoS parameter information element the End to End transit delay information element and the QoS parameter information element of the SETUP message should be consistent Table A9 2 of UNI 4 0 shows the allowable combinations The following exceptions apply to ForeThought 5 3 x e Inthe Extended QoS parameters information element for forward and backward Cell Loss Ratio CLR ForeThought 5 3 x does not distinguish between the CLP 0 and CLP 0 1 traffic streams 7 18 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Signalling e The PNNI 1 0 and UNI 4 0 specifications allow incomplete traffic contracts for VBR in four instances two for real time VBR and two for non real time VBR Check note 7 and 8 of Table A9 2 of the UNI 4 0 specification ForeThought 5 3 x does not support these four combinations 7 4 2 UNI 3 X FORE Systems supports a subset of traffic contracts which are specified in Table E 10f the UNI 3 1 specification These traffic contracts are enforced on both signalled connections as well on PNNISPVCs The following are the allowable contracts supported by FORE s switch fabrics e CBR PCR 0 PCR 0 1 e CBR PCR 0 1 e VBR PCR 0 1 SCR MBS 0 e VBR PCR 0 1 SCR MBS 0 1 e UBR PCR 0 1 Traffic contracts that do not comp
400. s solely from the twists Unspecified Bit Rate UBR a type of traffic that is not considered time critical e g ARP mes sages pure data allocated whatever bandwidth is available at any given time UBR traffic is given a best effort priority in an ATM network with no guarantee of successful transmis sion Uplink Represents the connectivity from a border node to an upnode Usage Parameter Control UPC mechanism that ensures that traffic on a given connection does not exceed the contracted bandwidth of the connection responsible for policing or enforcement UPC is sometimes confused with congestion management see congestion man agement User Datagram Protocol UDP the TCP IP transaction protocol used for applications such as remote network management and name service access this lets users assign a name such as RVAX 2 S to a physical or numbered address User to Network Interface UNI the physical and electrical demarcation point between the user and the public network service provider ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary 35 Glossary V 35 ITU T standard describing a synchronous physical layer protocol used for communica tions between a network access device and a packet network V 35 is most commonly used in the United States and Europe and is recommended for speeds up to 48 Kbps Variable Bit Rate VBR a type of traffic that when sent over a network is tolerant of delays and
401. s that follow here in Section 3 6 To configure an ELAN on a switch you must log into AMI on a switch running ForeThought 5 3 and use the commands found under configuration lane More information about each of these commands E may be found in Part 1 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual There are three major steps that the system administrator should follow in order to configure and maintain ELANs 1 Configure an LECS configuration database file 2 Start the LAN Emulation Services LECS and LES BUS 3 Startthe LEC s and join an ELAN Steps 1 may be performed using a text editor on E any system However the resulting file can be used only on systems running under Solaris 2 5 2 5 1 or 2 6 or on a FORE switch running ForeThought 4 0 or greater or a TNX switch running ForeThought 5 1 The remainder of this section gives a practical example of configuring and administering an ELAN 3 22 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 6 4 Configuring an LECS Configuration Database File The LECS uses a text configuration file to contain the configuration information needed by LECs that wish to participate in an ELAN The LECS configuration file may be built and edited using a text editor such as vi or emacs ForeThought VLAN Manager a product available E separately from FORE Systems greatly simplifies the administration of ELANs Its graphical user interface controls the con
402. se E ForeThought 5 0 or greater however the DLE peer servers support clients and attached switches using ForeThought 4 0 and 4 1 and third party devices that are ATM Forum LANE 1 0 compliant 3 12 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 4 2 1 Using DLE Figure 3 7 shows how a connection begins to be established through DLE peer servers LEC 1 wants to communicate with LEC 9 which is in the same ELAN but is locally attached to a dif ferent DLE peer server First LEC 1 sends an IP ARP broadcast request to its local DLE BUS Then the BUS broadcasts the packet to both its locally attached LECs and its DLE peer servers Eng Eng LES BUS 2 LES BUS 3 Eng LEC 1 Eng LEC 2 Eng LEC 3 Eng LEC 4 Eng LEC 5 Eng LEC 6 Eng LEC 7 Eng LEC 8 Eng LEC 9 Figure 3 7 IP ARP Broadcast from LEC 1 to LEC 9 Upon receiving the broadcast from the first DLE peer server the peers re distribute the packet to their own locally attached LECs as shown in Figure 3 8 so the packet arrives its actual destination at LEC 9 En LES BUS 1 Eng LEC 1 Eng LEC 2 Eng LEC 3 Eng LEC 4 Eng LEC 5 Eng LEC 6 Eng LEC 7 Eng LEC 8 Eng LEC 9 moO 33 cS DG 9 amp 5 reo m z5 Figure 3 8 Re distributing the Broadcast across DLE Peer
403. se a single anycast address to reach one of the other DLE peer servers for their ELAN if their local server goes down Normal address resolution through ForeThought PNNI ATM Forum PNNI or IISP will locate the closest active LES which is using the anycast address 3 2 3 LAN Emulation Server LES The LES implements the control coordination function for the ELAN The LES provides the service of registering and resolving MAC addresses to ATM addresses A LEC registers its own address with the LES A LEC also queries the LES when the client wishes to resolve a MAC address to an ATM address The LES either responds directly to the client or forwards the query to other clients so they may respond There may be more than one instance of an active LES per ELAN 3 2 4 Broadcast and Unknown Server BUS Unlike traditional shared media LAN architectures such as Ethernet or Token Ring ATM is connection based Therefore it has no built in mechanism for handling connectionless traffic such as broadcasts multicasts and unknown unicasts In an ELAN the BUS is responsible for servicing these traffic types by accepting broadcast multicast and unknown unicast packets from the LECs via dedicated point to point connections and forwarding the packets to all of the members of the ELAN using a single point to multipoint connection Unknown unicast packets are packets that the sending station broadcasts because it does not yet know the ATM address for the packe
404. ss The default figs is class0 E 7 m The forward and backward UPC contracts that you specify must be compatible with the bearerClass parameter for the SPVC e g all parameters are for VBR traffic or CBR traffic If you configure an SPVC to use a specific FI PNNI DTL that you have created the SVC portion of the SPVC always uses that path as long as it is available even if there is another path that has a lesser link cost N When creating an SPVC the qos and bqos gt options must be either both c1ass0 or both a non zero class For example the qos cannot be class0 and the bqos be classi This combination is invalid Having an fqos of classO and a bqos of classO0 is a valid combination and having an fqos of classi and a bqos of class4 is a valid combination but having an fqos of class2 and a bqos of classO is not valid The lt destprefix destport gt option has E been removed You must use the lt destnsap gt option of specifying the destination You can use the conf spvx spvcc pnni destnsap command on the destination switch to get the NSAP address to be used with the conf spvx spvcc pnni new command at the source switch ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 1 37 Configuring PVCs The following is an example of how to create a simple PNNI SPVC 1 Openasession to the destination switch as follows myswitch open 198 29 22 46 private Opening a session for 198 29 22 46 please
405. stations Header protocol control information located at the beginning of a protocol data unit Header Error Control HEC a CRC code located in the last byte of an ATM cell header that is used for checking cell header integrity only High Density Bipolar HDB3 A bipolar coding method that does not allow more than 3 con secutive zeroes High Level Data Link Control HDLC An ITU TSS link layer protocol standard for point to point and multi point communications ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary 15 Glossary High Performance Parallel Interface HIPPI ANSI standard that extends the computer bus over fairly short distances at speeds of 800 and 1600 Mbps High Speed Serial Interface HSSI a serial communications connection that operates at speeds of up to 1 544 Mbps Host In a network the primary or controlling computer in a multiple computer installation HPUX the Hewlett Packard version of UNIX Hub a device that connects several other devices usually in a star topology 1 0 Module FORE s interface cards for the LAX 20 LAN Access Switch designed to connect Ethernet Token Ring and FDDI LANs to ForeRunner ATM networks Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE the world s largest technical profes sional society Based in the U S the IEEE sponsors technical conferences symposia amp local meetings worldwide publishes nearly 25 of the world s technical papers in electrical
406. supp enable disable idlepat idle pattern cas pattern oport lt oport gt ovpi lt ovpi gt ovci ovci For example myswitch configuration ces new 1a3 1 idlesupp enable idlepat 1F oport 1b2 ovpi 0 ovci 100 B 1 3 3 Configuring Mask Patterns To configure mask patterns you could use the following syntax myswitch configuration ces new port timeslots idlesupp enable disable idlemask lt idlemask gt idlepat idle pattern cas pattern oport lt oport gt ots ots oidlesupp enable disable oidlemask lt idlemask gt oidlepat idle pattern cas pattern For example myswitch configuration ces new 1a3 1 idlesupp enable idlemask F0 idlepat 2F oport 1b2 ots 1 oidlesupp enable oidlemask F0 oidlepat 2F B 6 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring Circuit Emulation Services Alternatively you could use the following syntax myswitch configuration ces new port lt timeslots gt idlesupp enable disable idlemask lt idlemask gt idlepat idle pattern cas pattern oport lt oport gt ovpi lt ovpi gt ovci lt ovci gt For example myswitch configuration ces new 1a3 1 idlesupp enable idlemask FF idlepat 7F oport 1b2 ovpi 0 ovci 100 B 1 3 4 Configuring an Integration Period The integration period is provided in us Only an active to idle integration period is sup ported To configure the integration period
407. switch s default domain to gateway and reboot the switch Upon rebooting this switch will come up with an FI PNNI node and a PNNI node The PNNI node is isolated at this point and does not have any links attached to it 3 Choose a switch adjacent to the gateway switch convert it to a gateway switch by changing its default protocol for the default domain to gateway and reboot this switch It will come up with a FI PNNI node and a PNNI node The link between the two gateway switches is attached on either end to the respective PNNI nodes This link is now the first PNNI link in the network This single link constitutes a PNNI area connected by the two gateway switches to the FI PNNI area The FI PNNI area now contains all the links in the network except the one link between the two gateways It is assumed that there is only one link between the two gateway switches If there are multiple links then all of them will become PNNI links after this step 4 Choose another switch that is adjacent to either one of the two switches already converted to gateway and repeat step 3 As more and more switches are converted to be gateways the PNNI area becomes progressively larger and the FI PNNI area becomes smaller 5 Foreach gateway when the last link gets converted from FI PNNI to PNNI i e when the last FI PNNI switch directly connected to this switch becomes PNNI modify the default protocol of the default domain to PNNI and reboot the switch B
408. switch configuration ces new 1a3 1 idlesupp enable idlepat fxsluser01 oport 1b2 ots 1 oidlesupp enable oidlepat em01 Alternatively you could use the following syntax myswitch configuration ces new port lt timeslots gt idlesupp enable disable idlepat idle pattern cas pattern oport lt oport gt ovpi lt ovpi gt ovci ovci For example myswitch configuration ces new 1a3 1 idlesupp enable idlepat em01 oport 1b2 ovpi 0 ovci 100 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual B 5 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services B 1 3 2 2 Configuring an Idle Pattern for Pattern Matching If an idle pattern are configured by default idle channel suppression and idle suppression based on pattern matching is enabled The idle pattern is used on per connection basis A maximum of one pattern can be used for structured basic connections To configure an idle pattern for pattern matching you could use the following syntax myswitch configuration ces new port lt timeslots gt idlesupp enable disable idlepat idle pattern cas pattern oport lt oport gt ots ots oidlesupp enable disable oidlepat idle pattern cas pattern For example myswitch configuration ces new 1a3 1 idlesupp enable idlepat 1F oport 1b2 ots 1 oidlesupp enable oidlepat 2F Alternatively you could use the following syntax myswitch configuration ces new port timeslots idle
409. t Number Number Board 2 CTL 113 2al 57 2c1 73 2a2 58 2c2 74 2a3 59 2c3 75 2a4 60 2c4 76 2a5 61 2c5 77 2a6 62 2c6 78 2a7 63 2c7 79 2a8 64 2c8 80 2b1 65 2d1 81 2b2 66 2d2 82 2b3 67 2d3 83 2b4 68 2d4 84 2b5 69 2d5 85 2b6 70 2d6 86 2b7 71 2d7 87 2b8 72 2d8 88 2e1 89 2e3 91 2e2 N A 2e4 92 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring SNMP Table A 4 shows the numbering conventions that are referred to in the MIBs for ports on board 3 on an ASX 1000 TNX 1100 3 vo Table A 4 ASX 1000 TNX 1100 Board 3 Port Numbering E Port Name Software Port Por Name Software Port Z Number Number Board 3 CTL 170 3al 114 3c 130 3a2 115 302 131 3a3 116 3c3 132 3a4 117 3c4 133 3a5 118 3c5 134 3a6 119 3c6 135 3a7 120 307 136 3a8 121 3c8 137 3b1 122 3d1 138 3b2 123 3d2 139 3b3 124 3d3 140 3b4 125 3d4 141 3b5 126 3d5 142 3b6 127 3d6 143 3b7 128 3d7 144 3b8 129 3d8 145 3e1 146 3e3 N A 3e2 147 3e4 149 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual A 5 Configuring SNMP Table A 5 shows the numbering conventions that are referred to in the MIBs for ports on board 4 on an ASX 1000 TNX 1100 Table A 5 ASX 1000 TNX 1100 Board 4 Port Numbering Pore Name Software Port Port Name Software Port Number Number Board 4 CTL 227 4al 171 4c1 187 4a2 172 4c2 188 4a3 173
410. t swRel swRel monitor monitor state number 4A fratm 1 0 0 1 0 0 enabled enabled appluprunning NMFR 4 DS1A The application key should be specified only if you want to reconfigure the network module to run a different type of application Before changing the application you must administer the network module down as follows T o Ele 2o U5 3 5a zS 9 2 8 z 1 myswitch configuration module fram myswitch configuration module admin 4a down Disabling the network module will destroy all existing connections going through it Disable the network module n y ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual D 17 Configuring FramePlus Modules Now you can change the application When you change the application the switch deletes all existing services and PVCs that use a different application and removes them from the CDB i e if you are changing from Frame Relay to FUNI the switch deletes existing Frame Relay information and vice versa The switch warns you as follows myswitch configuration module fram app 4a XXXXXXXXXX Changing application may cause deletion of service connection on switch and CDB Proceed n y Then you need to administer the network module up as follows myswitch configuration module admin 4a up myswitch configuration module fram show Module Appln Appl Boot Stats Oam Operational Product swRel swRel monitor monitor state number 4A funi 1 0 0 1 0 0 enabled enabled applupr
411. t can occur because the auto configuration of the operating scope and mode depend on whether a path is an elastic path or not A non elastic path has bandwidth reserved for it from the link bandwidth at the time that the path is created when the reserved option in conf vpt new is used An elastic path does not have reserved bandwidth at creation time Instead it uses the residual bandwidth available on the link The invalid configuration can occur when a signalling interface on VPI 0 that has both the scope and mode configured as auto becomes a PNNI interface either by the user explicitly specifying type privateNNI or by specifying type auto In this case if the path is an elastic path then the operating scope becomes link and the operating mode becomes nonAssoc If the path is a non elastic path then the operating scope becomes vp and the operating mode becomes vpAssoc Therefore if a signalling interface exists between two switches on VPI 0 with one half of this path being elastic on one switch and one half being non elastic on the other switch then the interface comes up with incompatible modes on either side if it becomes a PNNI interface This results in no calls being set up on this interface To prevent this invalid configuration be sure that both sides of your PNNI interface are either elastic or non elastic If this invalid configuration occurs simply delete one side of the path and recreate it to match the other side AT
412. t data from a source to a destination Data Link Connection Identifier DLCI connection identifier associated with frame relay pack ets that serves the same functions as and translates directly to the VPI VCI on an ATM cell Data Link Layer Layer 2 of the OSI model responsible for encoding data and passing it to the physical medium The IEEE divides this layer into the LLC Logical Link Control and MAC Media Access Control sublayers Data Set Ready DSR an RS 232 modem interface control signal sent from the modem to the DTE on pin 6 which indicates that the modem is connected to the telephone circuit Usually a prerequisite to the DTE issuing RTS Data Terminal Equipment DTE generally user devices such as terminals and computers that connect to data circuit terminating equipment They either generate or receive the data carried by the network Glossary 10 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary Data Terminal Ready DTR an RS232 modem interface control signal sent from the DTE to the modem on pin 20 which indicates that the DTE is ready for data transmission and which requests that the modem be connected to the telephone circuit Datagram a packet of information used in a connectionless network service that is routed to its destination using an address included in the datagram s header DS LIT 3 DECnet Digital Equipment Corporation s proprietary LAN Defense Advanced Research Projects Agen
413. t is 1 Aging_Time 300 Specifies the period that LE_ARP cache table entries remain valid in seconds The minimum is 10 and the maximum is 300 The default value is 300 seconds Forward_Delay_Time 15 Specifies the timing out of non local ARP cache entries in seconds The minimum is 4 and the maximum is 30 The default value is 15 seconds Expected_LE_ARP_Response_Time 1 Specifies the maximum time a LEC expects an LE_ARP request response will take in seconds The minimum is 1 and the maximum is 30 The default value is 1 second Flush TimeOut 4 Specifies the maximum time a LEC expects an LE FLUSH request response will take in seconds The minimum is 1 and the maximum is 4 The default value is 4 seconds ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual moO 3S cS DG os reo m z5 Configuring an Emulated LAN Table 3 1 LECS Configuration File Parameters Continued Parameter Definition Path Switching Delay 6 Specifies the minimum time between switching BUS and data paths in seconds The minimum is 1 and the maxi mum is 8 The default value is 6 seconds Local Segment ID The segment ID of the emulated LAN for an IEEE 802 5 source routing bridge ELAN Identifier auto Specifies a non zero ELAN identifier The default is auto which signals the LES to generate an ELAN identifier itself Multicast Send VCC Type Best Effort Specifies the mul
414. t s destination MAC address There may be more than one instance of an active BUS per ELAN Using ForeThought 5 3 each BUS must be a colocated BUS also referred to as an intelligent BUS or a LES BUS pair which allows the BUS to use the LES s registration table to direct unicast traffic moO 39S cS DG 9 amp 5 Tae m z5 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 3 3 Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 3 Emulated LAN Operation This section describes the operation of an ELAN and its components from the point of view of a LEC The operation of an ELAN may be divided into three phases 1 Initialization 2 Registration and Address Resolution 3 Data Transfer ELAN components communicate with each other using ATM connections LECs maintain sep arate connections for traffic control functions and data transfer The following connection types are used by the LEC when operating in an ELAN e Configuration Direct Connection a temporary bidirectional point to point VCC set up by the LEC to the LECS e Control Direct Connection a bidirectional point to point VCC set up by the LEC to the LES This connection must be maintained for the duration of the LEC s partic ipation in the ELAN e Control Distribute Connection a unidirectional point to multipoint VCC set up by the LES to the LEC This connection must be maintained for the duration of the LEC s participation in the ELAN e Multicast Send Connection a bidirectional point to po
415. ted LAN Table 3 1 defines the various key parameters that may be entered in the configuration file The acceptable range of values and the default value for each parameter is also given Table 3 1 LECS Configuration File Parameters Parameter Definition LAN Type Ethernet IEEE 802 3 Identifies the type of ELAN either Ethernet IEEE 802 3 or IEEE 802 5 The default is Ethernet TEEE 802 3 Maximum Frame Size 1516 Specifies the length in number of bytes of the largest frame Selections are 1516 1580 4544 9234 and 18190 The default is 1516 for Ethernet and 4544 for Token Ring Control TimeOut 120 Specifies the timing out of request response control frame interactions in seconds The minimum is 10 sec onds and the maximum is 300 seconds The default is 120 seconds Maximum Unknown Frame Count 1 Limits the number of unicast frames sent to the BUS The minimum is 1 frame per 60 seconds and the maximum is 10 frames per second The default is 1 frame per second Maximum Unknown Frame Time 1 Limits the number of unicast frames sent to the BUS in the specified number of seconds The default is 1 second VCC TimeOut Period 1200 Specifies the length of time that an idle data connection remains open before being closed The default value is 1200 seconds Maximum Retry Count 1 Limits the number of LE ARP retransmission requests The minimum is 0 and the maximum is 2 The defaul
416. tent of the LECS configuration file transparently to the user For more information please refer to the ForeView VLAN Manager User s Manual 3 6 1 1 Before You Begin Before building or modifying the LECS configuration file you should first determine the topology of the ELAN or ELANS that you want to administer You must supply the following information when building or editing the LECS configuration file e Provide the name of each ELAN engineering marketing etc e Provide the LAN type Ethernet or Token Ring for each ELAN e Provide the MTU size for each ELAN e Provide the ATM address of the LES for each ELAN If you are using DLE this address must be the anycast address for the DLE peer servers in each ELAN Be sure to choose a distinct anycast address for each ELAN in the network It must be unique within the first 19 bytes e Provide the address of each LEC that may participate in each ELAN e Provide the MPOA control parameters if you wish to run MPOA e If you wish LECs to use a default ELAN the default LES information must also be included moO 39S cz gt De 9 amp 5 reo m z5 e Provide various other configurable parameters CAUTION Do not attempt to edit an existing functional LECS configuration file without first making a backup copy of the file Incorrect modification of the configuration file could result in loss of communication between one or more members of a defined ELAN ATM Switch Network Con
417. ter material This medium offers large bandwidth supporting high data rates with high immunity to electrical interference and a low incidence of errors Coax is subject to distance limitations and is rela tively expensive and difficult to install Cold Start Trap an SNMP trap which is sent after a power cycle see trap Collision Overlapping transmissions that occur when two or more nodes on a LAN attempt to transmit at or about the same time Committed Information Rate CIR CIR is the information transfer rate which a network offer ing Frame Relay Services FRS is committed to transfer under normal conditions The rate is averaged over a minimum increment of time Common Channel Signaling CCS A form signaling in which a group of circuits share a sig naling channel Refer to S57 Glossary 8 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary Common Management Interface Protocol CMIP An ITU TSS standard for the message for mats and procedures used to exchange management information in order to operate adminis ter maintain and provision a network Concatenation The connection of transmission channels similar to a chain Concentrator a communications device that offers the ability to concentrate many lower speed channels into and out of one or more high speed channels DS LIT 3 Configuration The phase in which the LE Client discovers the LE Service Congestion Management traffic management featur
418. tes e g internetwork layer QoS other information derivable from received packet describing the intended destination and its path attributes that MPOA devices may use as lookup keys Mu Law The PCM coding and companding standard used in Japan and North America Multicasting The ability to broadcast messages to one node or a select group of nodes Multi homed a device having both an ATM and another network connection like Ethernet Multimode Fiber Optic Cable MMF fiber optic cable in which the signal or light propagates in multiple modes or paths Since these paths may have varying lengths a transmitted pulse of light may be received at different times and smeared to the point that pulses may interfere with surrounding pulses This may cause the signal to be difficult or impossible to receive This pulse dispersion sometimes limits the distance over which a MMF link can operate Multiplexing a function within a layer that interleaves the information from multiple connec tions into one connection see demultiplexing Glossary 22 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary Multipoint Access user access in which more than one terminal equipment TE is supported by a single network termination Multipoint to Multipoint Connection a collection of associated ATM VC or VP links and their associated endpoint nodes with the following properties 1 All N nodes in the connection called Endpoints serve as a Root Node
419. tes the state of the network to remote network management hosts The SNMP agent on the switch supports these SNMP traps 11 110 3 Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP Part of IP a simplified version of FTP that allows files to be transferred from one computer to another over a network Twisted Pair Insulated wire in which pairs are twisted together Commonly used for tele phone connections and LANs because it is inexpensive Unassigned Cells a generated cell identified by a standardized virtual path identifier VPI and virtual channel identifier VCI value which does not carry information from an applica tion using the ATM Layer service Unavailable Seconds UAS a measurement of signal quality Unavailable seconds start accru ing when ten consecutive severely errored seconds occur UNI 3 0 3 1 the User to Network Interface standard set forth by the ATM Forum that defines how private customer premise equipment interacts with private ATM switches Unicasting The transmit operation of a single PDU by a source interface where the PDU reaches a single destination Universal Test amp Operations Interface for ATM UTOPIA Refers to an electrical interface between the TC and PMD sublayers of the PHY layer Unshielded Twisted Pair UTP a cable that consists of two or more insulated conductors in which each pair of conductors are twisted around each other There is no external protection and noise resistance come
420. that all switches in your network are FORE switches If your net work contains a contiguous backbone use the instructions found in Section C 3 1 If your net work does not contain a contiguous backbone use the instructions found in Section C 3 2 C 3 1 Migration of a Hierarchical FT PNNI Network with a Contiguous Backbone There are two different ways to change a FI PNNI network with a contiguous backbone If you want to convert your network starting with the backbone use the method described in Section C 3 1 1 If you want to convert your network starting with the peer groups use the method described in Section C 3 1 2 You can use either method C 3 1 1 Migration Starting with the Backbone This section gives a detailed example of how to convert a hierarchical FI PNNI network with a contiguous backbone as shown in Figure C 9 to a PNNI network In this figure only the bor der nodes are shown The individual nodes within each peer group are not shown FFPNNI peer group boundary FFPNNI node FT PNNI link ERE rd lt PGB B 1 Figure C 9 Hierarchical FI PNNI Network with 3 Peer Groups and a Contiguous Backbone C 10 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI C 3 1 1 1 Migration Overview The following basic steps are involved in the migration Each of these steps is described in detail in the following sections It is recommen
421. the time that each LES BUS is started If you want to add new peers to the list you can use the conf lane les peeradd command 2 Use the following AMI command to verify that the LES and the BUS have been started and are running configuration lane les show Admin Oper Les ELAN ELAN Index State State Sel Type MTU Name SECURE FwdTLVs FwdARPs ID t up up 0x90 ethernet 1516 engineering disable enable disable 100 LES 0x47 0005 80 fe100 0000 f21c 10bb 0020481c10bb 10 BUS 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21c 10bb 0020481c10bb 10 Co Located c5000580ffe1000000f21c10bb0020323c10bb10 ANYCAST LECS 0x47 0079 00 000000 0000 0000 0000 00a03e000001 00 PEER 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 21c 10bb 0020481c10bb 10 PEER 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 21c 10bb 0020481a42bb 10 PEER 0x47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 21c 10bb 0020482a55a0 70 The OperStatus field shows up meaning that the LES and the BUS are running 3 Configure the DLE peer servers by opening an AMI session on one of the other switches that will run a DLE peer server and enter something similar to the following conf lane les new 10 engineering anycast c5 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 3596 0020481a3596 f0 peers 47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 3552 0020481a3552 10 47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 10bb 0020481a10bb 90 47 0005 80 ffe100 0000 f21a 3218 0020481a3218 44 moO 33 cS De os Ta m z5 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 3 41 Configuring an Emulated LAN 4 Open an AMI session o
422. the BECN cell Bandwidth usually identifies the capacity or amount of data that can be sent through a given circuit may be user specified in a PVC Baud unit of signalling speed equal to the number of discrete conditions or signal events per second If each signal event represents only one bit the baud rate is the same as bps if each signal event represents more than one bit such as a dibit the baud rate is smaller than bps Bayonet Neill Concelman BNC a bayonet locking connector used to terminate coaxial cables BNC is also referred to as Bayonet Network Connector Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution B8ZS a technique used to satisfy the ones density requirements of digital T carrier facilities in the public network while allowing 64 Kbps clear channel data Strings of eight consecutive zeroes are replaced by an eight bit code representing two inten tional bipolar pulse code violations 000V10V1 Glossary 4 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary Bipolar Violation BPV an error event on a line in which the normal pattern of alternating high one and low zero signals is disrupted A bipolar violation is noted when two high sig nals occur without an intervening low signal or vice versa B ISDN Inter Carrier Interface B ICI An ATM Forum defined specification for the interface between public ATM networks to support user services across multiple public carriers DS LIT 3 Bit Error Rate BER A measure
423. the Line AIS error condition signalled by the asxSonetLineAISon trap has been cleared 46 asxDS3PLCPYellowDetected This trap indicates that the specified DS3 port has detected incoming Yellow Alarm 47 asxDS3PLCPYellowCleared This trap indicates that the specified DS3 port has detected clearance of incoming Yellow Alarm 48 asxDS3PLCPLOFDetected This trap indicates that the specified DS3 port has detected incoming LOF Alarm 49 asxDS3PLCPLOFCleared This trap indicates that the specified DS3 port has detected clearance of incoming LOF Alarm 50 asxDS3LOFDetected This trap indicates that Loss Of Frame LOF is detected on the incoming signal 51 asxDS3LOFCleared This trap indicates that Loss Of Frame is cleared on the incoming signal 52 asxDS3AISDetected This trap indicates that AIS Alarm is detected on the incoming signal 53 asxDS3AISCleared This trap indicates that AIS Alarm is cleared on the incoming signal 60 asxDS1PLCPYellowDetected This trap indicates that the specified DS1 port has detected an incoming Yellow Alarm 61 asxDS1PLCPYellowCleared This trap indicates that the specified DS1 port has detected clearance of an incoming Yellow Alarm 62 asxDS1PLCPLOFDetected This trap indicates that the specified DS1 port has detected an incoming LOF Alarm 63 asxDS1PLCPLOFCleared This trap indicates that the specified DS1 port has detected clearance of an incoming LOF Alarm 64 asxDS1 Yellow Detected This trap indicates that Yello
424. the SAR PDU payload length exclusive of pad and contains a CRC check to ensure the SAR PDU integrity The result is a 48 byte PDU that fits into the payload field of an ATM cell Selector SEL A subfield carried in SETUP message part of ATM endpoint address Domain specific Part DSP defined by ISO 10589 not used for ATM network routing used by ATM end systems only ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Glossary 29 Glossary Semipermanent Connection a connection established via a service order or via network man agement Serial Line IP SLIP A protocol used to run IP over serial lines such as telephone circuits or RS 232 cables interconnecting two systems Service Access Point SAP the point at which an entity of a layer provides services to its LM entity or to an entity of the next higher layer Service Data Unit SDU a unit of interface information whose identity is preserved from one end of a layer connection to the other Service Specific Connection Oriented Protocol SSCOP an adaptation layer protocol defined in ITU T Specification Q 2110 Service Specific Convergence Sublayer SSCS The portion of the convergence sublayer that is dependent upon the type of traffic that is being converted Session Layer Layer 5 in the OSI model that is responsible for establishing and managing ses sions between the application programs running in different nodes Severely Errored Seconds SES a second during
425. the connection is in synchronous mode either structured or unstruc tured SRTS means that the connection is in asynchronous unstructured mode Syn chronous Residual Time Stamp SRTS clock recovery is enabled on this connection Cas basic indicates that Channel Associated Signalling CAS will not be used cas indicates that CAS will be used Partial Fill Indicates how many of the available 47 payload bytes in each cell are used before they are deemed full and ready for transmission across the ATM network i e how much of the ATM cell contains data and how much is filler partialfill is used to minimize network transmission latency and is useful especially with time sensitive robbed bit signalling sources Max BufSize The amount of reassembly buffer space allocated for the connection The default is 256 bytes per timeslot CDVT The Cell Delay Variation Tolerance for cells being received by the segmentation and reas sembly SAR engine The range for this parameter is 100 to 24000 in us and the default is 2000 i e 2 us Integ Period The amount of time allocated to re establish the connection before while or after the call is established or in the case of interruption The default is 2500ps ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual B 13 m E D E wn D lt Iz eo 7 unan Buunfiyuo5 Configuring Circuit Emulation Services To display the idle channel suppression information
426. the nodes will occur over the IISP link that has been statically configured between the domains 6 3 2 2 1 Configuring Domains Domains only need to be configured on split switches and gateway switches i e switches that belong to multiple areas Other switches operate properly without domain configuration One FI PNNI domain with domain index 1 is pre configured by default on switches running ForeThought 5 3 x This domain cannot be deleted but the information within the domain can be changed Multiple domains can be configured on a switch For each domain the following parameters can be changed INNd WnN104 IN LV e The domain name which is optional can be configured for easier manageability However the name of the default domain cannot be changed e The domain protocol which sets the routing protocol for the switch can be set to ftpnni pnni or gateway This parameter can also be changed on the default domain The default setting is ftpnni If you want to configure a split switch you must change the domain protocol to pnni If you want to configure a gate way switch you must change the domain protocol to gateway e The domain prefix can be changed This sets the default 13 byte NSAP prefix used by the switch s routing protocol s e The default summarization parameter can also be modified This tells the switch s routing protocol s to use the peer group mask in the case of FI PNNI or the PNNI level in the case of PNNI
427. the switch to discover all of the hosts attached to it and to send its ATM prefix associ ated with the port to those hosts dynamically In return the host prepends that prefix to its ESI and selector fields forming a complete ATM address The host then notifies the switch of its complete ATM address These registration messages are sent and received over AAL5 using VPI 0 VCI 16 Once ILMI registration has been completed then connection setup can occur If a host changes network ports after an ATM address has been registered for its interface all existing connections are closed If the new port is on a different switch a new ATM address with a different network address prefix is registered The host can then begin to establish new connections 2 2 8 Operating without ILMI Support If ILMI is not supported on a particular switch or host in a given network then the ATM addresses must be manually configured If another vendor s switch does not support ILMI it can not supply an ATM prefix to the hosts Therefore the user must assign a unique valid pre fix to the switch Additionally the same prefix should be used for all hosts attached to that switch On the host uniconfig is used to configure the ATM address for a specific interface The switch directly attached to this interface is then informed of this ATM address port combina tion through commands in the ATM Management Interface AMI Once the host and network have both been informe
428. ticast send mode either Best Effort Variable or Constant The default is Best Effort Connection Complete Timer 4 Specifies the time period in which data or READY IND is expected in seconds The minimum is 1 and the maxi mum is 10 The default is 4 seconds ShortCut Protocols IP Specifies the set of protocols on which to perform flow detection Also specifies the set of protocols for which MPOA resolution is supported The default is Currently the only supported value is IP ShortCut Threshold 10 1 Specifies the number of frames per second that a LANE MPOA client LEC MPC forwards to the same destina tion via the default forwarding path before which it should begin using a shortcut The minimum number of frames is 1 frame and the maximum is 65 535 frames The minimum rate of speed at which the frames are for warded is 1 second and the maximum is 60 seconds The default is 10 frames per second Resolution Initial Retry Time 5 Specifies the initial retry time interval after which a LEC MPC may send another MPOA Resolution Request if an MPOA Resolution Reply has not been received for the initial request The minimum is 1 second The maximum is 300 seconds The default is 5 seconds Resolution Maximum Retry Time 40 Specifies the maximum retry time interval after which a LEC MPC assumes an MPOA Resolution Request has failed The minimum is 10 seconds The maximum is 300 seconds
429. tion module fram upgrade module lt remotehost gt lt fullpath to remotefile These parameters are defined as follows Parameter Description module The FramePlus network module on which you want to upgrade the software remotehost The IP address of the remote host on which the upgrade file resides full path to remotefile The full path name of the upgrade file For example myswitch configuration module fram upgrade 1A 124 11 1 13 net mercFCSO1 WARNING Do not remove the netmod while upgrading File download to netmod 1A successful Transfer successful Reset the network module n y F 8g To display the current revision number of the application software use the following com 2 z mand d g EE myswitch configuration module gt show p Module Appln Appl Boot Stats Oam Operational Product swRel swRel monitor monitor state number 4D fratm 1 0 0 1 0 0 enabled enabled appluprunning NMFR 4 DS1A Since this command uses TFIP as the transfer protocol the remote host on which the upgrade file resides must be a tftpboot server If you are unsure of how to configure the bootp server and the tftpboot server properly see Chapter 4 of the ATM Switch Installation and Maintenance Manual ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring FramePlus Modules D 24 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Acronyms The networking terms in the following list are defined in the Glossary of this ma
430. tional For example switch fabric X is configured with the through path B1120 gt C1120 If a cell is received on port C1 with VPI 20 it is not transmitted on port B1 with a new VPI 20 In order for this to happen the through path C1 20 gt B1120 must exist as well Since through paths are unidirectional two through paths are necessary for bidirectional communication B1 B1 20 gt C1 20 C1 20 gt B1 20 C1 od Figure 1 6 Through Paths are Unidirectional ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Q 3 c z Q v lt o o Configuring PVCs 1 2 2 Originating and Terminating Paths As previously noted originating and terminating paths also called virtual path terminators are points at which a virtual path originates and terminates For example if a virtual path exists from switch fabric A to switch fabric B then there must be an originating path on switch fabric A and a terminating path on switch fabric B An originating path is defined by two parameters output VPI and output port Similarly a terminating path is defined by the parameters input VPI and input port Because originating and terminating paths do not define the way cells are switched through an ATM switch fabric virtual channels must exist to switch cells from a terminating path to an originating path See the section about virtual channels for more information Originating and termin
431. tional keys Accept and Re ject whose values are comma separated lists of matching elements may be used The Accept values must be supplied if you are E going to enable ELAN access control These values may be a MAC address engineering Accept 0020480605b2 002048080011 0020481020ef an ATM address and equal length bit mask engineering Accept 47 0005 80 FFE100 0000 0000 0000 002048000000 00 FF FFFF FF FFFFFF 0000 0000 0000 FFFFFF000000 00 or an ATM address containing don t care semi octets denoted by an X marketing Accept 47 0005 80 FFE100 XXXX XXXX XXXX 002048XXXXXX XX 3 30 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring an Emulated LAN The last two forms of ATM address matching elements are functionally the same The latter is shorter but only allows for masks whose semi octets are all ones or all zeros while the former allows for arbitrary masks A prospective client address is captured by an ELAN name if the client s address matches one of the Accept elements but not one of the Reject elements if present Finally an ELAN may be configured to accept any client that wishes to join by including the following statement default Accept XX XXXX XX XXXXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX XX The order in which to apply the Accept and Reject rules is given by a Match Ordering group key statement whose value is a comma separated list of ELAN names For example Match Ordering default engi
432. ual ATM Forum PNNI When a leaked address is to be advertised or summarized a node also determines the scope with which to advertise the address or its summary The scope denotes the highest level in the PNNI routing hierarchy at which an address can be advertised Scoping ensures that reachability information does not loop A reachable address being advertised with a scope of I can only be leaked to areas of level lower larger in numerical value than The scope of reachability information originated in a given area is 0 within that area meaning that it is local The scope of reachability information advertised from for example area A1 at level lj into area A2 at level 5 is I if l is a lower level than I4 but is 1 if l is a higher level than 1 6 3 2 3 3 The Process for Leaking Reachability Information The following process is used by a node to determine if and how a leaked reachable address is to be advertised to its peer group 1 The node finds the longest matching policy prefix for the address 2 If there is no matching policy prefix the leaked address is advertised as is If there are multiple such addresses with different scopes then the one with the widest smallest in numerical value scope is used to determine the scope with which to advertise the address INNd Uin404 IN LV 3 Ifthelongest matching policy prefix is a policy suppress the leaked address is not advertised at all 4 If the longest matching
433. ubs ES 3810s or the VLAN Manager 1 SOOO SI Oye SR VOCI A Edit the LECS CFG file Delete the old LES and BUS Upgrade the switches that are running services Create the DLE peer servers Transfer the updated LECS CFG file Restart the LECS Recreate the LECs Create the last DLE peer Add the last DLE peer to each list of peers Change the last failover ELAN information in the LECS CFG file 11 12 Transfer the final LECS CFG file Restart the LECS ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual moO 33 cS De os Ta m z5 Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 7 1 Edit the LECS CFG File Before you edit the LECS CFG file you may wish E to back it up to a host using the oper flash put command If you are using TFIP as the transfer protocol this is the default the remote host to which the FLASH file will be sent must be running the TFIP server code and must have on an empty file in the t ftpboot directory on the remote host to receive the FLASH file See Chapter 3 in the ATM Management Interface AMD Manual for more information If you are using FIP as the transfer protocol you only need to enter the command shown below to perform the transfer Transfer the LECS CFG file that is currently being used by the LECS to a workstation other than the one to which you backed up the file so you can edit the file myswitch operation flash put lecs cfg 169 144 85 195 tftpboot lecs cfg Transferred 2323
434. ues were assigned to the PVC For example myswitch configuration funi pvc show FUNI FUNI Input Output SvclId VPI VCI Port VPI VCI Port VPI VCI Admin Eppd Name 4A1 00 0 40 4A1 0 40 up 0 pvc a 3 Configure a new PNNISPVC where the port lt vpi gt and vci values are the iport ivpi and ivci values that are displayed in step 2 The dest parameters identify the endpoint of the connection For example myswitch configuration spvx spvcc pnni new 4c1 0 100 47 0005 80 fe100 0000 f 21b 19cd 4al destvpi 0 destvci 40 name spvc a Usually when creating a PNNI SPVC the E destvpi and destvci parameters are optional i e if these values are not supplied the terminating switch uses the same VPI and VCI values as the originating switch However when at least one endpoint of the PNNI SPVC is a port on a FramePlus network module you must specify these parameters This creates a bi directional PNNI SPVC from the source to the destination where the ATM portion of the interworking connection is supported via the SPVC logic D 22 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring FramePlus Modules D 7 Upgrading the FramePlus Network Module Software Because the FramePlus network module has an on board i960 processor you can upgrade the the network module application software using TFIP The method for upgrading the network module software is similar to that for upgrading the switch software myswitch configura
435. ueue for the given priority has exceeded its dedicated length and has begun overflowing into the shared buffer space on the network module 1025 asxOutputQueueCellLoss This trap indicates that the output queue for the given priority has overflowed and cells have been dropped 1026 asxExtendedModeViolation This trap indicates that a series A or B network mod ule was inserted into a switch board running in extended mode ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual QO fe E E amp 3 Co o z v Configuring SNMP Table A 14 SNMP Traps Supported on the FORE Switches Continued Trap Number Trap Name Description 1027 asxNonextended Mode Warning This trap indicates that a series C or greater network module was inserted into a switch board running in non extended mode 1028 q2931AVRejectTrap This trap is generated whenever any UNI3 x with AddressValidation enabled rejects a Setup Request call more than q2931AVRejectIrapThreshold times in any given q2931AVRejectTrapPeriod 1029 crConfMemoryOflow This trap is generated when the allocated call record memory as indicated by crMemoryAllocated is exceeded 1030 crXfrPrimaryXfrFailed This trap is generated when the call record transfer to the primary host as indicated by crXfrPrimaryUrl fails 1031 crXfrSecondaryXfrFailed This trap is generated when the call record transfer to the secondary host a
436. unication link between two sites it is necessary to establish permanent virtual circuits PVCs at each switch along the communications path This chapter discusses the creation of PVCs through the ATM Management Interface AMI a command line user interface to ForeRunner and TNX ATM switches 1 1 General Concepts Each ATM cell contains a virtual path identifier VPI and a virtual channel identifier VCI as part of its five byte ATM header The VPI and VCI are used to route the cell through the ATM network When a switch fabric receives a cell it examines the ATM header to determine the correct output port VPI and VCI for the cell For example an ATM switch fabric can be con figured such that any cell received on port Al with VPI VCI 0132 is switched to port B2 with VPII VCI 0135 The translation from input port VPI and VCI to output port VPI and VClIis achieved via a mapping table in the switch fabric s memory The VCI value of cells does not change as the cell is switched through the ATM network via a virtual path In a single switch environment a cell s VPI and VCI are translated only once but in a multiple switch environment a cell s VPI and VCI are translated many times It is impor tant to remember that a cell s VPI and VCI are of local significance only i e link by link It is also important to note that virtual connections are unidirectional that is they are valid in one direction only The VPI and VCI may change as t
437. unning NMFR 4 DS1A If you attempt to display information before E administering the network module up a message is displayed that no configuration information is available for this network module D 6 2 Creating the Profiles for FUNI First you need to decide which profiles you want to use A default profile is provided for your convenience If a service or connection is created without specifying any profile the default profile in the list is used To display the default profile use the conf profile funi show command If this default does not match your network s needs you can create your own using the new command under each profile e g conf profile funi new The values that you choose for minVei vci and maxVci lt vci gt determine the range of VCIs that you can use for vci under conf funi pvc new See Part 2 of the AMI Configuration Commands Reference Manual for more infor mation about the parameters Once you have determined which profile s to use you can move on to Section D 6 3 D 18 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual D 6 3 Creating FUNI Services Configuring FramePlus Modules Create any FUNI services that you want and apply the FUNI and service profiles For exam ple myswitch configuration funi new port lt timeslots gt funi lt index gt service lt index gt admin up down name lt name gt id lt bnp cc gt myswitch configuration funi new 4al 1 funi 1
438. urths goes in the low priority buffer and so on Before you can change the buffer allocation you must first take the network module out of service by administering it down as follows myswitch configuration module admin 1d down Disabling the network module will destroy all O E E Q E Q existing connections going through it zl S 3 a 77 o 2 2 Disable the network module n y myswitch configuration module fram myswitch configuration module fram set 1d high2quarter The network module comes back up after you make the change so you do not need to use the conf module admin module up command ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual D 3 Configuring FramePlus Modules D 2 2 Setting the Thresholds After the buffer space is configured set the various discard thresholds under conf module fram It is important that you follow the order shown E in this section for configuring the thresholds The calculation of each threshold is dependent on the previous one For this buffer configuration example assume you have set the buffers to use high2quarter meaning that both the high and low priority buffers have 16 384 cells as shown in Figure D 1 16 384 cells 16 384 cells High Priority Buffer Low Priority Buffer Figure D 1 Buffer Sizes Configured Using the setmem Command The number of cells shown in this section for E
439. vAMWb VR ed ees 6 6 ARP cach e ela 2 8 ARP reply e aa eee 2 8 ARP request iit a n a iea 2 8 ARP server 0 ccc cee eens 2 6 configuring a FORE switchas 2 7 ATM ARP ATM address resolution protocol 6 cece eee eee ee 2 6 ATM Forum LAN Emulation Over ATM Version 1 0 0000 4 1 ATM Forum PNNI 2 0005 6 1 Available Bit Rate ABR 1 39 B basic connections active detection 00 B 4 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual idle channel suppression B 3 idle detection using mask patterns 05 B 3 idle detection using pattern matching B 3 Broadcast and Unknown Server BUS eee etre ere ER 3 3 broadcast packets 000 4 5 BL mu ee RE UM 1 40 Burst Tolerance BT 1 40 BUS Lr o ese s i 3 3 C CAS connections active detection B 3 idle channel suppression B 2 idle signalling pattern matching B 5 CBR esr catiestanan ton ca Me ee 1 39 CDVT 3 etr cheater emere 1 40 Cell Delay Variation Tolerance CDV DT ok uh che eee tt 1 40 Cell Loss Priority CLP bit 1 41 CES Circuit Emulation Services B 1 CES connection creating s c cover v PE PRIUS B 8 displaying 0 B 12 Circuit Emulation Services CES B 1 Classical IP ATM network configuring 08 2 1 Classical IP interface 2
440. verted BNNI peer group boundary PNNI node FFPNNI peer group boundary O FFrPNNI node FT PNNI link C 2 Figure C 12 Peer Group C before the Conversion to PNNI C 14 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI C 6 will be the first switch to be converted to a gateway between the existing FI PNNI area and the PNNI area This area should be at a lower level The level of this peer group will be 6 1 Modify the level of the PNNI node currently down in C 6 to 2 change the area ID of its PNNI node to 6 and modify the default protocol of the default domain in C 6 to gateway using the following AMI commands conf atmroute pnni node modify index forelevel 6 forearea 6 conf atmroute domain modify domain ID gateway Reboot switch C 6 Upon the reboot the first PNNI node is created in area 6 At this point this node has no links attached to it 2 Convert C 5 to a gateway switch by changing the level of its PNNI node to 6 changing the area ID of C 5 to 6 and modifying the default protocol of the default domain in C 5 to gateway using the following AMI commands conf atmroute pnni node modify index forelevel 6 forearea 6 conf atmroute domain modify domain ID gateway Reboot switch C 6 Upon the reboot the first PNNI link in area 6 comes up between switches C 6 and C 5 3 Convert C 4 to a gateway switch by cha
441. w Alarm is detected on the incoming signal A 18 ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual Configuring SNMP Table A 14 SNMP Traps Supported on the FORE Switches Continued Trap EUN NODE Trap Name Description 65 asxDS1YellowCleared This trap indicates that Yellow Alarm is cleared on the incoming signal 66 asxDS1AISDetected This trap indicates that AIS Alarm is detected on the incoming signal 67 asxDS1AISCleared This trap indicates that AIS Alarm is cleared on the incoming signal 68 asxDS1LOSDetected This trap indicates that LOS Alarm is detected on the incoming signal 69 asxDS1LOSCleared This trap indicates that LOS Alarm is cleared on the incoming signal 70 asxDS1LOFDetected This trap indicates that LOF Alarm is detected on the incoming signal 71 asxDS1LOFCleared This trap indicates that LOF Alarm is cleared on the incoming signal 74 asxDS3FERFDetected This trap indicates that FERF Alarm is detected on the incoming signal 75 asx DS3FERFCleared This trap indicates that FERF Alarm is cleared on the incoming signal 78 asxE3 Yellow Detected This trap indicates that the Yellow Alarm is being detected on the incoming signal 79 asxE3YellowCleared This trap indicates that Yellow alarm has cleared on the incoming signal 80 asxE300F Detected This trap indicates that Out Of Frame OOF is detected on the incoming signal 81 asxE300F Cleared This trap indicates that Loss Of
442. which more event errors have occurred than the SES threshold normally 10 3 Shaping Descriptor n ordered pairs of GCRA parameters LL used to define the negotiated traffic shape of an APP connection The traffic shape refers to the load balancing of a network where load balancing means configuring data flows to maximize network efficiency Shielded Pair Two insulated wires in a cable wrapped with metallic braid or foil to prevent interference and provide noise free transmission Shielded Twisted Pair STP two or more insulated wires twisted together and then wrapped in a cable with metallic braid or foil to prevent interference and offer noise free transmissions Signaling System No 7 SS7 The SS7 protocol has been specified by ITU T and is a protocol for interexchange signaling Simple and Efficient Adaptation Layer SEAL also called AAL 5 this ATM adaptation layer assumes that higher layer processes will provide error recovery thereby simplifying the SAR portion of the adaptation layer Using this AAL type packs all 48 bytes of an ATM cell infor mation field with data It also assumes that only one message is crossing the UNI at a time That is multiple end users at one location cannot interleave messages on the same VC but must queue them for sequential transmission Simple Gateway Management Protocol SGMP the predecessor to SNMP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP the Internet electronic mail protocol used to
443. while all traffic sent out a Classical IP interface uses Classical IP The Classical IP interfaces are qaaX where X is 0 3 in switch software and are ci in host adapter software Each of the SPANS interfaces should be assigned an IP address on a subnet different than the subnets of any of the Classical IP interfaces It is permissible to place multiple SPANS inter faces on the same subnet and the driver load balances connections across these interfaces It is only necessary to configure the SPANS and Classical IP interfaces if the specific service provided by that interface is required A host sending only Classical IP would not need to con figure the SPANS interfaces Likewise a host sending only FORE IP would not need to config ure the Classical IP interfaces Both the SPANS and Classical IP interfaces may be configured simultaneously but they must be in separate subnets Remember that Classical IP specific con figuration changes can only be done with the Classical IP devices while SPANS specific con figuration changes can only be done with the SPANS devices e o 5 ES amp c 3 5 amp o 5 7 o o D ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 2 3 Configuring Classical IP 2 2 Address Registration and ILMI Before a host can establish connections over a physical interface the host must know the NSAP address for that interface The primary purpose of Interim Local Management Interface ILMI is to discover and reg
444. with an MCR equal to 0 use the roundrobin scheduling discipline ABR connections with an MCR greater than 0 use the guaranteed scheduling discipline However if there are no suitable rate groups in the rate controller the ABR connections with an MCR greater than 0 are rejected Currently ABR UPC contracts are supported only on Series D network modules cdvt us The Cell Delay Variation Tolerance CDVT associated with the peak cell rates in micro seconds If the CDVT is not specified here the default CDVT value associated with the port will be used See conf port show and conf port cdvt for more information noGCRA noGCRA means that GCRA policing is disabled on CBR or VBR depending on what is configured connections using this contract If noGCRA is not entered then GCRA policing is enabled on CBR or VBR depending on what is configured connections using this con tract By default noGCRA is not entered GCRA policing is enabled You must use the noGCRA option when applying a UPC contract to the outbound signalling channel using the outsigupe upc index variable under conf signalling new to prevent the outbound signalling channel from being policed aal5 The connection is using the AAL5 Adaptation Layer noPktDisc This optional parameter can only be used if the connection is AALS i e theaal15 param eter is present This parameter suppresses EPD PPD AALS packet discard on the con nection The default is
445. work modules Section D 5 4 1 describes how to create a Frame Relay SPANS SPVC Section D 5 4 2 describes how to create a Frame Relay PNNI SPVC D 5 4 1 Creating a Frame Relay SPANS SPVC To create a Frame Relay SPANS SPVC perform the following steps 1 Configure the ingress Frame Relay PVC without specifying the oport ovpi and ovci parameters For example myswitch configuration fratm pvc new 4A1 00 100 epdppd 1 name spvc a 2 Display the Frame Relay PVC so you can see what Input Port Input VPI and Input VCI values were assigned to the PVC For example myswitch configuration fratm pvc show Input Output SvcId dlci Port VPI VCI Port VPI VCI Admin Epd Frr Frf8 IngRE Name 4A1 00 100 4A1 0 32 up 1 0 0 disable spvc_a 3 Configure anew SPANS SPVC where the lt port gt lt vpi gt and lt vci gt values are the Input Port Input VPI and Input VCI values that are displayed in step 2 The dest parameters identify the endpoint of the connection For example ie e Q E Q myswitch gt open 198 29 22 46 private m RI o 3 S 77 I 2 2 Opening a session for 198 29 22 46 please wait Connected to 198 29 22 46 asx200bx fishtank gt localhost myswitch configuration spvx spvcc spans new 4al 0 32 198 29 22 46 1a2 0 100 This creates a SPANS SPVC where the ATM portion of the interworking connection is sup ported via the SPVC logic ATM Switch Network Confi
446. xtra bandwidth to other existing VBR ABR and UBR connections but does not exceed their contracted cell rates Additionally the egress network module guarantees the constant bit rate for CES connections whenever they want to reclaim the bandwidth When CES SPVCs or PVCs are created the virtual channels assigned for these connections at the intermediate switches are also assigned CBR service The unused bandwidth in the interme diate connections are also reused by other bit rate services Idle channel suppression works slightly differently for Channel Associated Signalling CAS connections than it does for basic connections B 1 1 CAS Connections The timeslot state is determined according to CAS When all of the timeslots on a given connec tion become idle the connection becomes idle A short period of time the integration period is waited during which the idle patterns are observed before the channel state is changed from active to idle When a connection is idle OAM F5 cells are used to maintain the connection When one or more channels on a given connection become active the connection becomes active When an active connection is detected the change from idle to active is immediate B 1 1 1 Idle Detection using Signalling Bits This method can be used only for structured CAS connections and is a recommended method for voice connections The majority of these applications use the AB bit idle state patterns The CAS patterns supporte
447. y doing this the FI PNNI node on this gateway which no longer has any link will be deactivated ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual C 5 T v z o U z zZ wo Bunanuog Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI C 2 2 Detailed Migration Example This section gives a detailed example of how to change the example non hierarchical FI PNNI network shown in Figure C 4 to a PNNI network O FT PNNI node FT PNNI link S2 S3 S1 S4 O S5 Figure C 4 A Non Hierarchical FI PNNI Network This network has five switches named S1 through S5 The following steps are involved in changing over this network 1 Upgrade all of the switches to ForeThought 5 3 x using the following AMI command oper upgrade lt remotehost gt lt full path to remotefile gt For more information about upgrading your switches see Chapter 4 of the ATM Switch Installation and Maintenance Manual 2 Convert S5 to a gateway switch by modifying the default protocol of the default domain in 5 to gateway using the following AMI command conf atmroute domain modify domain ID gateway Reboot switch 5 Upon the reboot S5 will come up with two nodes one FI PNNI node and one PNNI node By default these nodes are in areas 4 and 5 respectively and levels 4 and 5 respectively At this point the nodes in the network are divided between the two areas with the PNNI node being the only node in area 5
448. y running 8 1 1 2 1 SecurlID Protection on Switches Security Dynamics ACE server and client software prevents a user from logging into AMI locally on a switch until the passcode entered by the user has been validated using an external security server The server uses SecurID tokens to validate the identity of users and allows access only to authorized users on valid clients switches Because SecurID does not protect SNMP ILMI E remote AMI or ForeView access to the switch it is recommended that users either employ IP filtering as a selective mechanism to allow SNMP changes or disable SETs from the network entirely Ayanoasg l The client software is already provided on FORE ATM switches but the server software must be purchased separately from Security Dynamics ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 8 3 Security 8 1 1 2 2 SecurlD Passcode This authentication method provides a high level of security because the SecurID passcode that allows access to the protected switches is comprised of two parts e asecret memorized personal identification number PIN e the current code generated by the user s assigned SecurID token 8 1 1 2 2 1 PIN Number The PIN is known only by the user It can be either alpha numeric or strictly numerical and can be either a fixed or variable length from 4 8 characters depending on how the system administrator configures the server 8 1 1 2 2 2 SecurlD Tokens The second p
449. you read Section C 1 first to avoid potential configuration problems when migrating your network e Section C 1 ASX 1000 TNX 1100 Routing Configuration Issues e Section C 2 Migration of a Non Hierarchical FT PNNI Network e Section C 3 Migration of a Hierarchical FI PNNI Network ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual wo Hulj4aAUuOD a T v z o U z zZ Converting from FT PNNI to PNNI C 1 ASX 1000 TNX 1100 Routing Configuration Issues This section discusses routing in hierarchical networks in which there are ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 switches present in your network Because each one of the four fabrics appears as a single node in routing and because you cannot take a two hop path to go from one switch fab ric to another switch fabric in the same ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 there are certain FI PNNI and PNNI node configurations that should be avoided These special configurations are addressed individually and alternate configurations are suggested C 1 1 ASX 1000s or TNX 1100s in FT PNNI Peer Groups Figure C 1 shows an invalid configuration of an ASX 1000 or TNX 1100 divided between two FI PNNI peer groups called A and B The ASX 1000 s or TNX 1100 s four FI PNNI nodes are A 1 and A 2 in peer group A and B 1 and B 2 in peer group B From peer group A the intra peer group links of peer group B are not visible So the link B 1 to B 2 is not visible in peer group A Similarly non border nodes B 3 and B 4 belonging to peer group
450. ystem PC Macintosh UNIX workstation ATM switch PowerHub 7000 or ES 3810 moO 33 cS De os Ta m z5 3 1 2 Token Ring ELANs The current software release supports emulation of Token Ring IEEE 802 5 ELAN services In the current release Token Ring LECs can not be created on the switch Token Ring LECs can only be created on some hosts ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual 3 1 Configuring an Emulated LAN 3 2 ELAN Components The components of an ELAN include LECs and LAN Emulation services consisting of a LECS a LES and a BUS Although the ATM Forum specification allows the LES and BUS to be located on different devices more intelligent traffic handling is possible when they are located on the same device ForeThought 5 0 x or greater software requires the LES and BUS be co located reside on the same device The LECS may reside in the same physical system as the LES BUS or in a separate physical system For example the LECS could reside in a switch while the LES BUS reside in a work station In ForeThought 5 3 x software the LECS is supported only on ForeRunner and TNX switches and on systems running Solaris The LES BUS are supported only on ForeRunner and TNX switches on PowerHub 7000s on PowerHub 8000s on ASN 9000s and on systems run ning Solaris The functional interconnections of a simple ELAN consisting of two LECs an LECS a LES and a BUS are shown in Figure 3 1 Workstation LAN Emulation Conf

ATM Switch Network Configuration Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents